Sharp MX M623U M753U Operation Manual User To The 984e94ef B139 473f A4f2 4b0ae8d7bfba

User Manual: Sharp MX-M623U to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 879

DownloadSharp MX-M623U MX-M753U Operation-Manual User Manual  To The 984e94ef-b139-473f-a4f2-4b0ae8d7bfba
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
OPERATION GUIDE
Search based on
what you want to do

Search using the
table of contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
COPIER
PRINTER

MAKE A COPY

PRINT A DOCUMENT

SEND A FAX

FACSIMILE
SCANNER / INTERNET FAX
DOCUMENT FILING
SYSTEM SETTINGS

SCAN AN IMAGE /
SEND AN INTERNET FAX

SAVE A JOB AND
REUSE IT LATER

MAINTAIN
THE MACHINE

TROUBLESHOOTING

About Operation Guide

MAKE A COPY

Conserve

2010/

Reduce copy
mistakes

04/04

Add the date or
page numbers

Assemble output
into a pamphlet

Other convenient functions

Make a copy of this
type of original

Make a copy on
this type of paper

Conserve

Copy on both sides of the
paper

Copy on the front and back
of a card

Copy multiple pages on
one side of one sheet of
paper

Reduce copy mistakes

Print one set of copies for
proofing

Check the number of
scanned pages before
making copies

Make a copy of this type of original

More original pages than
can be loaded at once

Mixed-size originals

Bulky original (shadows
appear at edges)

Bound original such as a
book (one page at a time)

Book or pamphlet (make
facing page copies)

Make a copy on this type of paper

Tab Paper

Transparency film

Add the date or page numbers

Add the date
2010/

Add a stamp

04/04

Add the page number
9

10

11

ABCD

EFG

Add text

Assemble output into a pamphlet

Create a stapled pamphlet

Staple output

Create a blank margin for
punching

Punch holes in output

Fold output in half

Other convenient functions
Functions used for specific purposes
 Make a copy of arranged photos
 Create a large poster
 Make a mirror-image copy
 Copy onto the centre of the paper
 Make a negative copy

Convenient functions
 Use two machines simultaneously
 Give priority to a copy job
 Check the status of a reserved job
 Insert covers/inserts in copy output
 Copy a thin original

PRINT A DOCUMENT

Conserve

Print without a
computer

Print on this type
of paper

Add text or an
image

Other convenient functions

Print attractive
output

Assemble output
into a pamphlet

Conserve

Print on both sides of the
paper

Print multiple pages on one
side of the paper

Print without a computer
FTP

Print a file on an FTP

Print a file in a USB
memory device

Print a file in a network
folder

Print a file stored in the
machine

Print attractive output

Print matching the size of
the paper

Adjust the brightness and
contrast

Bring out faint text and
lines

Adjust the line widths when
printing

Assemble output into a pamphlet

Create a stapled pamphlet

Staple output

Create a blank margin for
punching

Punch holes in output

Print specific pages on the
front side of the paper

Print on this type of paper

Transparency film

Tab Paper

Rotate the image 180
degrees

Print specific pages on
different paper

Add text or an image

Add a watermark to print
data

Overlay a fixed form on the
print data

Overlay an image on the
print data

Other convenient functions
Correct the size or orientation of the print data
 Enlarge or reduce the print image
 Print a mirror-image

Security is important
 Print confidentially
 Print an encrypted PDF file

Functions used for specific purposes
 Print an "invoice copy"
 Create a large poster

Convenient functions
 Give priority to a print job
 Use two machines simultaneously
 Store frequently used print settings
 Store a print job
 Print and fold the output

SEND A FAX

Conserve

Send this type of
document

Save trouble

Security is
important

Other convenient functions

Prevent transmission to
the wrong destination

Send a clear
document

Conserve

Send when the rate is
lowest

Check received data before
printing

Send two original pages as
a single page

Relay a transmission
through a branch office

Send this type of document

Bulky original (shadows
appear at edges)

Bound original such as a
book (one page at a time)

More original pages than
can be loaded at once

Mixed-size originals

Original printed on both
sides

ID card or other card

Prevent transmission to the wrong destination

Check the destination once
more before sending

Check the result of
transmission

Check the log of previous
transmissions

Stamp scanned original
pages

Send a clear document

Adjust the exposure

Adjust the image quality

Specify the size before
sending

Send without shadows at
the edges

Save trouble

1

2

3

XXXX-6789
XXXX-9874
XXXX-4567
XXXX-5432
XXXX-9999

Store frequently used
settings

View the transmission log

Bound original such as a
book (one page at a time)

Send to multiple
destinations

XXXX-6789
XXXX-9874
XXXX-4567
XXXX-5432
XXXX-9999

Easily specify an address
(search number)

Security is important

Check the destination once
more before sending

Print protected reception
data

Send a document at the
other machine's request

Send confidentially

Initiate reception of a
document from a sending
machine

Other convenient functions
Convenient management functions
 Forward a received fax to a network address
 Print a list of addresses

Convenient functions
 Send a thin original
 Select a transmission destination from a global address book
 Give priority to a transmission
 Use an extension phone

SCAN AN IMAGE / SEND AN INTERNET FAX

Send a clear
image

Send this type of
document

Save trouble

Scan from my
computer

Other convenient functions

Prevent transmission to
the wrong destination

Send a smaller
file

Send a clear image

Adjust the contrast or
image quality

Adjust the resolution
before sending

Send without shadows at
the edges

Suppress the background of
a transmitted document

Send this type of document

Bulky original (shadows
appear at edges)

Bound original such as a
book (one page at a time)

More original pages than
can be loaded at once

Mixed-size originals

Original printed on both
sides

Original with background

Prevent transmission to the wrong destination

Check the result of
transmission

Stamp scanned original
pages

Check the log of previous
transmissions

Send a smaller file

Send at low resolution

Compress a file before
sending

Reduce an image before
sending

Send an image in black &
white

Send two original pages as
a single page

ID or other card

Save trouble

1

2

3

aaa@aa.aa.co
bbb@bb.bb.c
ccc@cc.cc.co
ddd@dd.dd.c
eee@ee.ee.co

Store frequently used
settings

View the transmission log

Send an Internet fax from a
computer

Send to multiple
destinations

aaa@aa.aa.c
bbb@bb.bb.
ccc@cc.cc.c
ddd@dd.dd.
eee@ee.ee.e

Easily specify an address
(search number)

Bound original such as a
book (one page at a time)

Other convenient functions
Convenient management functions
 Forward a received fax to a network address
 Print a list of transmission destinations

Convenient functions
 Scan a thin original
 Select a transmission destination from a global address book
 Send at a specified time
 Give priority to a transmission
 Send in USB memory mode
 Eliminate blank pages from a transmission

SAVE A JOB AND REUSE IT LATER

Search for a file

Organize my files

Save an important
document

Print a batch of
files

Search for a file

abc

Search for a file using a
keyword

Search by checking the
contents of files

Organize my files

Delete a file

Delete all files

Periodically delete files

Change the folder

MAINTAIN THE MACHINE

Clean the
machine

Replace a toner
cartridge

Replace the toner
collection container

Dispose of punch
waste

Replace the
staple cartridge

Replace the
stamp cartridge

Clean the machine

Clean the document glass and
automatic document feeder

Clean the bypass feed
roller

Clean the original feed
roller

ABOUT OPERATION GUIDE
There are two ways to search for a topic in this guide: you can use an "I want to..." menu, or you can use a regular table
of contents.
The following explanation assumes that Adobe Reader 8.0 is being used (Some buttons do not appear in the default
state.).
Return to top page (

)

Return to previously displayed page (

Search based on what you
want to do

)

Search using the table of
contents

Menu page

Table of
contents page

1

2

3

4

5

Body page

i

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Click a button below to move to the page that you wish to view.
(1) (2) (3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(1)

(5)

Return to top page button

(2)

(6)

Back one page button

Forward one page button
Displays the next page.

(4)

Contents button
Displays the contents of each chapter.
For example, if the current page is a page in the body of
the printer chapter, this button shows the contents of the
printer chapter.

Displays the previous page.
(3)

Adobe Reader Help button
Opens Adobe Reader Help.

If an operation does not proceed as expected, click this
button to start over again.

Return to previously displayed page button
Displays the page that was displayed before the current
page.

• If a button does not appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help to display the button.
• Caution when printing
If all pages are printed, the menu pages of the "I want to..." menu will also be printed. To print only the pages that contain
the explanation of a function, specify a page range.

ii

MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE
Operation manuals in PDF format (this manual)
The manuals in PDF format provide detailed explanations of the procedures for using the machine in each mode. To
view the PDF manuals, download them from the hard drive in the machine. The procedure for downloading the manuals
is explained in "Downloading the Operation Guide" in the Start Guide.

1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
This chapter provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and
machine maintenance.

2. COPIER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.

3. PRINTER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the print function.

4. FACSIMILE
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.

5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and
the Internet fax function.

6. DOCUMENT FILING
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing
function. The document filing function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job,
or the data of a print job, as a file on the machine's hard drive. The file can be called up as
needed.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS
This chapter explains the "System Settings", which are used to configure a variety of parameters
to suit the aims and the needs of your workplace. Current settings can be displayed or printed out
from the "System Settings".

8. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter explains how to remove paper misfeeds and provides answers to frequently asked
questions regarding the operation of the machine in each mode. Refer to this manual when you
have difficulty using the machine.

Printed manuals
Manual name
Start Guide

Contents
This manual contains instructions for using the machine safely, describes preparations that must be
made before using the machine, and lists the specifications of the machine and its peripheral devices.

iii

ABOUT OPERATION MANUAL
This manual explains how to use the MX-M623U/MX-M623N/MX-M753U/MX-M753N digital multifunctional system.

Please note
• For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual, please refer to the Start Guide.
• For information on your operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in a Windows environment are primarily for Windows Vista®. The screens may
vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in a Macintosh environment are based on Mac OS X v10.4 in the case of Mac OS
X. The screens may vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• Wherever "MX-xxxx" appears in this manual, please substitute your model name for "xxxx".
• This manual contains references to the fax function. However, please note that the fax function is not available in some
countries and regions.
• This manual contains explanations of the PC-Fax driver and PPD driver. However, please note that the PC-Fax driver and PPD
driver are not available and do not appear on the software for installation in some countries and regions.
In this case, please install the English version if you want to use these drivers.
• Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please
contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
• This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem
is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
• Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its
options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due
to use of the product.

Warning
• Reproduction, adaptation or translation of the contents of the manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under copyright laws.
• All information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

Illustrations and the operation panel and touch panel shown in this manual
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.
In order to explain how to use the machine and to describe the machine's functions, some illustrations assume that certain
peripheral devices are installed.

The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.

Icons used in the manuals
The icons in the manuals indicate the following types of information:

Warning

This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of human death or injury.

Caution

This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of human injury or property damage.

This alerts you to a situation where there is
a risk of machine damage or failure.
This provides a supplemental
explanation of a function or procedure.
This explains how to cancel or correct
an operation.

This indicates the name of a system setting and provides a brief
explanation of the setting.
When "System Settings:" appears:
A general setting is explained.
When "System Settings (Administrator):" appears:
A setting that can only be configured by an administrator is
explained.

iv

CHAPTER 1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
This chapter provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and machine maintenance.
TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (A3 LARGE
CAPACITY TRAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
• LOADING PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
• CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND
DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SIDE AND BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3
1-3
1-5

LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY . . . . . . 1-42
• IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING THE
BYPASS TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43

1-6
1-7
1-8

ORIGINALS

TOUCH PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
• STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
• SYSTEM BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

PLACING THE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
• PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER . . . . . . . . 1-44
• PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE
DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF . . . . . . . . . 1-15
• ENERGY SAVE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
• [POWER SAVE] KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
USER AUTHENTICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
• AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER. . . . . 1-17
• AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME /
PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

PERIPHERAL DEVICES
PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48

HOME SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE. . . . . . 1-23
ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG . . . . . . . . . 1-24

LOADING PAPER
IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER . . . . . . . . .
• NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS . . . . . .
• THE MEANING OF "R" IN PAPER SIZES . . . .
• USEABLE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-27
1-27
1-27
1-28

TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 . . . . . . . . . .
• LOADING PAPER IN PAPER TRAY 1 TRAY 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE IN PAPER
TRAY 1 - TRAY 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• LOADING PAPER IN PAPER TRAY 3 . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE IN PAPER
TRAY 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE IN PAPER
TRAY 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-30
1-30
1-31
1-32

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER . . . .
• PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT
AND STAPLE JAM REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-50
1-50
1-51
1-52

FINISHER (3 TRAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• REPLACING THE STAPLE CARTRIDGE . . . .

1-56
1-56
1-56
1-57
1-59

INSERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• LOADING PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MANUAL OPERATION OF THE
INSERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-61
1-61
1-62
1-62
1-63

SHARP OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
• APPLICATION COMMUNICATION
MODULE (MX-AMX2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
• EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE
(MX-AMX3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67

1-33
1-35

TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (A4 LARGE
CAPACITY TRAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
• LOADING PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

1-1

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

MAINTENANCE
REGULAR MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
• CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS
AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER . . . 1-69
• CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER . . . 1-71
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES. . . . . . . 1-72
REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE . . . . . . . . 1-75

ENTERING TEXT
FUNCTIONS OF THE MAIN KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
• ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD . . . . . 1-79

SOFTWARE SETUP
BEFORE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . 1-80
SETUP IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . 1-81
• OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION
SCREEN (FOR ALL SOFTWARE) . . . . . . . . . . 1-81
• INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER /
PC-FAX DRIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
• INSTALLING THE PRINTER STATUS
MONITOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101
• INSTALLING THE SCANNER DRIVER . . . . . 1-102
• INSTALLING THE PS DISPLAY FONTS . . . . 1-104
• CHANGING THE PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT . . . . 1-109
• MAC OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
• MAC OS 9.0 - 9.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115
REMOVING THE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-118

1-2

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
This section provides basic information about the machine. Please read this chapter before using the machine.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
EXTERIOR
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) (6)

(7)
(8)

(1)

Saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN16)*
Output device that enables the use of the staple function
and offset function.
☞ FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (page 1-50)
Finisher (MX-FN15)*
Output device that enables use of the staple function,
offset function and pamphlet copy function.
☞ FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (page 1-50)
Finisher (3 trays)* (MX-FN14)
Output device that enables use of the staple function for
up to 100 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" size paper).
☞ FINISHER (3 TRAYS) (page 1-56)

(2)

(3)

Punch module (AR-PN4B)*
Punches holes in copies and other output.
Requires finisher (MX-FN15) or saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FN16).
☞ FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (page 1-50)
Inserter (MX-CF10)*
Paper set in an inserter can be inserted into output as
covers or inserts. The inserter can be used to staple
output and punch holes manually.
☞ INSERTER (page 1-61)

1-3

(4)

Automatic document feeder
This automatically feeds and scans multiple sheet
originals. Both sides of two-sided originals can be
scanned at once.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-44)

(5)

Front cover
Open to replace toner cartridge.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
☞ REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES (page 1-72)

(6)

Operation panel
This is used to select functions and enter the number of
copies.
☞ OPERATION PANEL (page 1-8)

(7)

Centre tray
Finished sheets are deposited here.

(8)

Bypass tray
Special papers (including transparency film) and copy
paper can be fed from the bypass tray.
☞ LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-42)

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

(9)

(10)

(11)

(15)

(9)

(14) (13)

(12)

(13) Tray 1-Tray 2

USB connector (A type)

The trays hold paper. Approximately 800 sheets of
standard A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.))
can be loaded in tray 1, and approximately 1200 sheets
of standard A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m2 (20
lbs.)) can be loaded in tray 2.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)

Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB
memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
(10) Keyboard
This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine.
When not used, it can be stored under the operation
panel.
☞ ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD (page 1-79)

(14) Tray 3
Tray 3 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of
standard (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) paper can be loaded in this
tray. Tabbed paper and transparencies can also be
loaded.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)

(11) Tray 5 (when A4 large capacity tray is installed)
(MX-LC10)*
This holds paper.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (A4 LARGE
CAPACITY TRAY) (page 1-36)

(15) Tray 4
Tray 4 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of
standard (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) paper can be loaded in this
tray.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)

(12) Tray 5 (when A3 large capacity tray is installed)
(MX-LCX3N)*
This holds paper.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (A3 LARGE
CAPACITY TRAY) (page 1-38)

*Peripheral device.

1-4

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

INTERIOR
(16)

(17)

(18)

(19)(20)

(21)

(22)

(25)

(24)

(23)
(21) Right side cover

(16) Duplex unit

Open when a misfeed has occurred in the bypass tray or
large capacity tray.

Open this cover to remove a misfeed from the fusing unit
area.

(22) Upper cover of large capacity tray

(17) Fusing unit

Open when a misfeed has occurred in the large capacity
tray.

Toner images are fused here.

Caution

(23) Left side cover release
Push this knob up to open the left side cover.

The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing misfed
paper.

(24) Left cover of paper drawer
Open this cover to remove paper misfed in tray 3 or tray
4.

(18) Cover of the duplex unit

(25) Photoconductive drum

Open when a misfeed has occurred in duplex unit.

Images are formed on the photoconductive drum.

(19) Toner cartridge*
This holds toner for printing. The toner cartridge must be
replaced when indicated on the operation panel.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES (page
1-72)

Do not touch or damage the photoconductive drum.

(20) Main power switch
Keep this switch turned on when the fax option or
Internet fax option is installed.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)

1-5

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT
GLASS
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)
(1)

(5)

Document feeding area cover

Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned
here.
☞ REGULAR MAINTENANCE (page 1-69)

Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean
the paper feed roller.
(2)

Original guides
(6)

These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.
Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-44)
(3)

Original size detector
This detects the size of an original placed on the
document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT
GLASS (page 1-46)

Document feeder tray
Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be
placed face up.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-44)

(4)

Scanning area

(7)

Document glass
Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot
be fed through the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT
GLASS (page 1-46)

Original exit tray
Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.

1-6

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SIDE AND BACK

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

(5)
(1)

USB connector (A type)

(6)

Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB
memory to the machine.
This connector is not initially available for use. If you wish
to use the connector, contact your service assistance.
This connector is not initially available for use. If you wish
to use the connector, contact your service technician.
(2)

Extension phone socket
When the fax function of the machine is used, an
extension phone can be connected to this socket.

(7)

Telephone line socket
When the fax function of the machine is used, the
telephone line is connected to this socket.

LAN connector

When the fax expansion kit is installed

Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the
machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
(3)

USB connector (B type )
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
A computer can be connected to this connector to use
the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.

(4)

(6)
(7)

Service-only connector

Caution
This connector is for use only by service technicians.
Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the
machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians:
The cable connected to the service connector must be
less than 3 m (118") in length.
(5)

Power plug

1-7

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

OPERATION PANEL
(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM
SETTINGS

(5)

(6)

PRINT
READY
DATA
IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA

HOME

LOGOUT

(7)
(1)

(8)

Touch panel

(5)

Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of
operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected
item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
☞ TOUCH PANEL (page 1-10)
(2)

These are used to enter the number of copies, fax
numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are
also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the
system settings).
(6)
(7)

[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key

)

[HOME] key
Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently
used settings can be registered in the my menu screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
☞ HOME SCREEN (page 1-22)

(8)

IMAGE SEND mode indicators
• LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax
or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of
an image in scan mode.
• DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot
be printed because of a problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has
not been sent.

[JOB STATUS] key
Press this key to display the job status screen. The job
status screen is used to check information on jobs and to
cancel jobs.
For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in
this manual.

(4)

[CLEAR] key (

Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".

Press this key to display the system settings menu
screen. The system settings are used to configure paper
tray settings, store addresses for transmission
operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine
easier to use.
(3)

Numeric keys

PRINT mode indicators
• READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights
steadily while printing is taking place.

1-8

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

(9)

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM
SETTINGS

PRINT
READY
DATA
IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA

HOME

LOGOUT

(10)
(9)

[START] key

(12)

(13)

(13) [STOP] key (

Press this key to copy or scan an original. This key is also
used to send a fax in fax mode.
(10) [LOGOUT] key (

)

)

(14) [POWER SAVE] key (

) / indicator

Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off
mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key (
) blinks when the machine
is in auto power shut-off mode.
☞ [POWER SAVE] KEY (page 1-16)

)

(15) [POWER] key (

When using the copy function, press this key to use a job
program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialling.
(12) [CLEAR ALL] key (

(14) (15) (16)

Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an
original.

Press this key to log out after you have logged in and
used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial
line.
☞ USER AUTHENTICATION (page 1-17)
(11) [#/P] key (

(11)

)

Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
(16) Main power indicator

)

This lights up when the machine's main power switch is
in the "on" position.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)

Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that
have been selected and start operation from the initial
state.

The indicators of the operation panel may differ depending on the country and region.

1-9

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

TOUCH PANEL
This section explains how to use the touch panel.
• To enter text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-77).
• For information on the screens and procedures for using the system settings, see "Common Operation Methods"
(page 7-4) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".

Using the touch panel
Example 1
(1)

COPY

IMAGE SEND

DOCUMENT
FILING

Job status screen.

Print Job
Job Queue

(2)

Scan to

Fax Job

Sets / Progress

Status

1

Copy

020 / 001

Copying

2

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

3

Computer01

Beep
002
/ 000

Waiting

4

0312345678

001 / 000

Tone

Waiting

Spool
Job Queue
Complete

1
1

Detail
Priority

(3)

Stop/Delete

(1) Mode select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and document filing modes.
(2) Settings for each function are easily selected and cancelled by touching the keys on the screen with your finger.
When an item is selected, a beep will sound and the item will be highlighted to confirm the selection.
(3) Keys that are greyed out cannot be selected.
If you touch a key that cannot be selected, a double beep will sound.

Example 3

Example 2
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1)

Cancel

Margin Shift

OK

Special Modes

OK

Special Modes

(2)

OK
Margin Shift

Erase

Dual Page
Copy
1

Right

Left

Down

Side 1

10

Pamphlet Copy

Side 2
(0~20)
mm

10

(0~20)
mm

(1) If the initial state of a key in a screen is highlighted,
the key is selected. To change the selection, touch
one of the other keys to highlight that key.
(2) The
keys can be used to increase or
decrease a value. To make a value change quickly,
keep your finger on the key.
(3) Touch this key to cancel a setting.
(4) Touch the [OK] key to enter and save a setting.

Job
Build

Tandem
Copy

Covers/Inserts

Transparency
Inserts

Multi Shot

Book Copy

Tab Copy

Card Shot

2

(1) Some items in the special modes screen are selected
by simply touching the key of the item.
To cancel a selected item, touch the highlighted key
once again so that it is no longer highlighted.
(2) When settings extend over multiple screens, touch
the
key or the
key to switch through the
screens.

1-10

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Example 4

OK

Function Review

Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output

Margin Shift

Shift:Right
Front:10mm/Back:10mm

Erase

Edge:10mm
Centre:10mm

Covers/Inserts

Front:2-Sided/Back:Insert
Insertion A:10 Page/B:10 Page

1

Exposure

1

Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

When at least one special mode is selected, the
key appears in the base screen.

The
key can be touched to display a list of the
selected special modes.

Example 5

OK

Copy Ratio

100

25%

%

Enter value via the 10-key.

200%
2

Zoom

50%

400%

100

2

Cancel

100%

OK

350%

150%

Auto Image

(25-400)

300%

75%

XY Zoom

Touch a numeric value display key to directly enter a
value with the numeric keys.

Press the numeric keys to enter any numeric value
and then touch the [OK] key.

The touch panel (screen) shown in this manual is a descriptive image. The actual screen is slightly different.
System Settings (Administrator): Keys Touch Sound
This is used to adjust the volume of the beep that sounds when keys are touched. The key touch sound can also be turned
off.

1-11

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

STATUS DISPLAY
When the base screen of a mode appears, the right side of the touch panel shows the machine's status.
The information shown is explained below.
Example: Basic screen of copy mode
Copies in progress from tray 1.
Ready to scan for next copy job.

Job Status

Interrupt

(1)

MFP Status

Job Status
MFP Status

Special Modes
020/015
2-Sided Copy

Copying

Output

020/015

Maintenance
Information
DC

Exposure
Auto

DC

DC

Waiting

File
Quick File

020/015
Waiting

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

020/015
Preview

Waiting

(2)
(1)

Display selection key

(3)

The status display can be switched between "Job Status"
and "MFP Status".
If the job status screen is displayed, the status display
automatically changes to "MFP Status".
(2)

(3)

"MFP Status" display
This shows machine system information.
"Maintenance Information"
This shows machine maintenance information by means
of codes.

"Job Status" display
This shows the first 4 print jobs in the print queue (the job
in progress and jobs waiting to be printed). The type of
job, the set number of copies, the number of copies
completed, and the job status appear.
Jobs cannot be manipulated in this screen. Jobs can only
be manipulated in the job status screen.
For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in
this manual.

1-12

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SYSTEM BAR
The system bar appears at the bottom of the touch panel.
The items that appear in the system bar are explained below.
MFP Status
Special Modes
020/015
2-Sided Copy

Copying

Output

020/015

Exposure
Auto

Waiting

File

020/015

Quick File

Waiting
Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

020/015
Waiting

Preview

Tray1

(1)
(1)

(2)

Job status display

When a base screen other than that of image send mode
appears, the number of the tray being used to feed paper
appears during paper feeding. The colour appearing in
the job status display depends on the job status as
indicated in the table below.
The job status display can be touched to show the job
status screen.

The job in progress or reserved are indicated by icons.
The icons are as follows.
Print job

Copy job

Scan to E-mail
job
Inbound routing
error job

Scan to FTP job

Scan to
Network Folder
job

Scan to
Desktop job

Fax
transmission
job

Fax reception
job

PC-Fax
transmission
job

Internet fax
transmission
job
(Including
Direct SMTP)

(3)

Job status
display

Internet Fax
reception job
(Including
Direct SMTP)

PC-I-Fax
transmission
job

Broadcast job*
Inbound routing
job

Scan to HDD
file print job

Tandem
copy/print job

Metadata send
job

(2)

Machine Configuration

Green

A print, scan or other job is being
executed normally.

Yellow

The machine is warming up or on
standby, or a job is being cancelled.

Red

A paper misfeed or other error
condition has occurred.

Grey

The machine has no jobs.

Icon display
This icon appears when data is being sent or
received.
This icon appears when fax, scan, or
Internet fax data is stored in the machine's
memory. When data to be transmitted is
stored,
appears. When received data is
stored,
appears. When both data to be
transmitted and received data are stored,
appears.
This appears when a service technician has
activated simulation mode.

* This appears in a multi-mode broadcast job.

This appears when a USB memory or other
USB device is connected to the machine.

1-13

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

This appears when the data security kit is
being used.
This appears while the remote operation
function is used.
The icon appears when the machine is
communicating with an external application.
(3)

Brightness adjustment key
Touch this key to adjust the brightness of the touch
panel.
When touched, the following screen appears next to the
key.

Touch the [+] key or the [-] key to adjust the brightness.
When finished, touch the brightness adjustment key
again to close the screen.

1-14

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF
The machine has two power switches. The main power switch is at the top right after the front cover is opened. The
other power switch is the [POWER] key ( ) on the operation panel at the top right.
Main power switch
When the main power switch is switched on, the main
power indicator on the operation panel lights up.

[POWER] key
Main power indicator

"On"
position
"Off" position

[POWER] key

Turning on the power

Turning off the power

(1) Switch the main power switch to the "on"
position.

(1) Press the [POWER] key (
power.

(2) Press the [POWER] key (
power.

(2) Switch the main power switch to the "off"
position.

) to turn on the

) to turn off the

• Before switching off the main power switch, make sure that the DATA indicator for printing and the DATA and LINE
indicators for image send are not lit or blinking on the operation panel.
Switching off the main power switch or removing the power cord from the outlet while any of the indicators are lit or blinking
may damage the hard drive and cause data to be lost.
• Switch off both the [POWER] key (
) and the main power switch and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine
failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax function, always keep the main power switch in the "on" position.

Restarting the machine
In order for some settings to take effect, the machine must be restarted.
If a message in the touch panel prompts you to restart the machine, press the [POWER] key (
and then press the key again to turn the power back on.

) to turn off the power

In some states of the machine, pressing the [POWER] key (
) to restart will not make the settings take effect. In this case,
use the main power switch to switch the power off and then on.

1-15

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

ENERGY SAVE FUNCTIONS
This product has the following two energy save functions that conform to the Energy Star guidelines to help conserve
natural resources and reduce environmental pollution.

Preheat Mode (Low power mode)
Preheat mode automatically lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and thereby reduces power consumption if the
machine remains in the standby state for the interval of time set in "Preheat Mode Setting" in the system settings
(administrator).
This keeps the fusing unit at a lower temperature and reduces power consumption while the machine is on standby.
The machine automatically wakes up and returns to normal operation when a print job is received, a key is pressed on
the operation panel, or an original is placed.

Auto power shut-off mode (Sleep mode)
Auto power shut-off mode automatically shuts off power to the display and the fusing unit if the machine remains in the
standby state for the interval of time set in "Auto Power Shut-Off Timer" in the system settings (administrator). This
mode provides the lowest level of power consumption. Considerably more power is saved than in preheat mode,
however, the wakeup time is longer. This mode can be disabled in the system settings (administrator).
The machine automatically wakes up and resumes normal operation when a print job is received or when the blinking
[POWER SAVE] key ( ) is pressed.

[POWER SAVE] KEY
Press the [POWER SAVE] key ( ) to put the machine in auto power shut-off mode or wake it up from auto power
shut-off mode. The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) has an indicator that indicates whether or not the machine is in auto power
shut-off mode.
When the [POWER SAVE]
key ( ) indicator is off in the
standby state

The machine is ready to be used.
If the [POWER SAVE] key (
) is pressed when the indicator is off, the indicator will blink
and the machine will enter auto power shut-off mode after a brief interval.

When the [POWER SAVE]
key ( ) indicator is blinking

The machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
If the [POWER SAVE] key (
) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will
turn off and the machine will return to the ready state after a brief interval.

[POWER SAVE]
key / indicator

1-16

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

USER AUTHENTICATION
User authentication restricts the use of the machine to users that have been registered. The functions that each user is
allowed to use can be specified, allowing the machine to be customized to meet the needs of your workplace.
When the administrator of the machine has enabled user authentication, each user must log in to use the machine.
There are different types of user authentication, and each type has a different login method.
For more information, see the explanations of the login methods.
☞ AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER (see below)
☞ AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME / PASSWORD (page 1-19)

AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER
The following procedure is used to log in using a user number received from the administrator of the machine.
OK

User Authentication

Admin Login

When controlled by user number

Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits)
with the numeric keys.
Each entered digit will be displayed as " ".

1

1-17

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

OK

User Authentication

Touch the [OK] key.
After the entered user number is authenticated, the user count
screen will appear briefly.

Usage status: used/remaining pages
Black-white : 87,654,321/12,345,678

Admin Login

2

When page limits have been set in "Pages Limit Group List" in
the system settings (administrator), the number of pages
remaining will appear. (The remaining number of pages that the
user can use in each mode (copy, scan, etc.) appears.) The
amount of time that this screen appears can be changed using
"Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
When the user number is an 8-digit number, this step is not necessary. (Login takes place automatically after the user
number is entered.)

When you have finished using the
machine and are ready to log out, press
the [LOGOUT] key ( ).
LOGOUT

3

• However, note that the [LOGOUT] key (
) cannot be used to log out when a fax number is being entered in fax
mode, as the key is used for fax number entry.
• If a preset duration of time elapses after the machine is last used, the Auto Clear function will activate. When Auto
Clear activates, logout takes place automatically. However, when PC Scan mode is used, logout does not take
place when the [LOGOUT] key (
) is pressed and Auto Clear does not operate. Change to a different mode on
the machine and then log out.

If an incorrect user number is entered 3 times in a row...
If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the machine will lock for 5 minutes if
an incorrect user number is entered 3 times in a row.
Verify the user number that you should use with the administrator of the machine.
The administrator can clear the locked state.
This is done from [User Control] and then [Default Settings] in the Web page menu.

1-18

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME / PASSWORD
The following procedure is used to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the
machine or the administrator of the LDAP server.
OK

User Authentication

Login Name
User Name
Password
Auth to:

Login Locally

When controlled by login name and password
(Different items will appear in the screen when LDAP authentication is used.)

User Authentication

Touch the [Login Name] key or the
key.

OK

If the [Login Name] key is touched, a screen for selecting the
user name appears. Go to the next step.
If the
key is touched, an area for entering a "Registration
No." appears [---].
Use the numeric keys to enter your registration number that
has been stored in "User List" in the system settings
(administrator). After entering the registration number, go to
step 3.

Login Name
User Name

1

Password
Auth to:

Login Locally

(A)

(B)

Back

Device Account Mode User Selection
6

12

18

Select the user name.

(C)

User 0001

User 0002

User 0003

User 0004

User 0005

User 0006

User 0007

User 0008

User 0009

User 0010

User 0011

User 0012

1

Admin Login

2

Direct Entry

2

ABC

All

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

User

(D)

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

(A) [Direct Entry] key
Use this key if you have not been stored in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator) and are only using
LDAP authentication.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter your login name.
(B) User selection keys
Touch your user name that has been stored in "User List"
in the system settings (administrator).
(C) [Back] key
Touch this key to return to the login screen.
(D) Index tabs
All users appear on the [All] tab. Users are grouped on the
other tabs according to the search characters entered
when each user was stored.

LDAP authentication can be used when the administrator of the server provides LDAP service on the LAN (local area
network).

1-19

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Touch the [Password] key.

OK

User Authentication

A text entry screen for entering the password will appear.
Enter your password that is stored in "User List" in the system
settings (administrator).

Login Name
User Name

User 0001

Password
Auth to:

If you are logging in to an LDAP server, enter the password that
is stored with your LDAP server login name.
Each entered character will be displayed as " ". When you
have finished entering the password, touch the [OK] key.
When authentication is by LDAP server and you have different
passwords stored in "User List" in the system settings
(administrator) and in the LDAP server, use the password
stored in the LDAP server.

Login Locally

• When an LDAP server has been stored, [Auth to:] can be changed.
• If you are logging in using a user selection key...
The LDAP server was stored when your user information was stored, and thus the LDAP server will appear as the
authentication server when you select your login name. Go to step 4.

3

• When logging in using the [Direct Entry] key...
Touch the [Auth to:] key.
User Authentication

OK

Login Name
User Name

Direct Entry

Password
Auth to:

Login Locally

Select the LDAP server and touch the [OK] key.
OK

Authenticate to:
Login Locally
Server 1
Server 2
Server 3
Server 4
Server 5
Server 6
Server 7

1-20

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

User Authentication

OK

After the entered login name and password are authenticated,
the user count screen will appear briefly.

Login Name
User Name

Touch the [OK] key.

User 0001
Usage status: used/remaining pages
Black-white : 87,654,321/12,345,678

Password
Auth to:

Login Locally

4
(Different items will appear in the screen when LDAP
authentication is used.)

When page limits have been set in "Pages Limit Group List" in
the system settings (administrator), the number of pages
remaining will appear. (The remaining number of pages that the
user can use in each mode (copy, scan, etc.) appears.) The
amount of time that this screen appears can be changed using
"Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).

When you have finished using the
machine and are ready to log out, press
the [LOGOUT] key ( ).
LOGOUT

5

• However, note that the [LOGOUT] key (
) cannot be used to log out when a fax number is being entered in fax
mode, as the key is used for fax number entry.
• If a preset duration of time elapses after the machine is last used, the Auto Clear function will activate. When Auto
Clear activates, logout takes place automatically. However, when PC Scan mode is used, logout does not take
place when the [LOGOUT] key (
) is pressed and Auto Clear does not operate. Change to a different mode on
the machine and then log out.

If an incorrect login name or password is entered 3 times in a row...
If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the machine will lock for 5 minutes if
an incorrect login name or password is entered 3 times in a row.
Verify the login name and password that you should use with the administrator of the machine.
• The administrator can clear the locked state.
This is done from [User Control] and then [Default Settings] in the Web page menu.
• When LDAP authentication is used, the [E-mail Address] key may appear, depending on the authentication method. If the
[E-mail Address] key appears in step 3, touch the key.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter your e-mail address.
OK

User Authentication

Login Name
User Name

User 0002

E-mail Address
Password
Auth to:

Server 2

System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store names of users of the machine. Detailed information such as the login name, user number, and password are
also stored. Ask the administrator of the machine for the information that you need to use the machine.

1-21

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

HOME SCREEN
When the [HOME] key is pressed on the operation panel, the home screen appears in the touch panel. Mode selection
keys appear in the home screen. These keys can be touched to open the base screen of each mode. The [My Menu]
key can be touched to display shortcuts to functions stored in "My Menu".
1st screen

2nd screen

(2)

(1)

(3)

(1)
COPY

COPY

App 01

IMAGE SEND

App 02

DOCUMENT
FILING

App 03

IMAGE SEND

DOCUMENT
FILING

My Menu

App 04

Total Count

Address Control

Document Filing
Control

Paper Tray Settings

My Menu

04/04/2010 11:40

(4)

(1)

(5)

(5)

Mode select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send,
document filing, and Sharp OSA modes. Key names and
images can be changed. (1st screen only)

(2)

(3)

(6)

Title
Shortcut key
A registered function appears as a shortcut key.
The key can be touched to select the registered function.

(7)

[My Menu] key
Touch to go to your my menu screen. Key names and
images can be changed.

(4)

(7)

This shows the title of the my menu screen.

Background Image
Background image of the home screen. The background
image can be changed.

(6)

User name
This shows the name of the logged in user.
The user name appears when user authentication is
enabled on the machine.

Application Keys
It is possible to display a combined total of eight Sharp
OSA application shortcuts and my menu shortcuts.

Shortcuts to functions can be registered as keys in the my menu screen. When a shortcut key is touched, the screen for
that function appears. Register frequently used functions in the my menu screen to quickly and conveniently access
those functions. When user authentication is used, the my menu screen of "Favourite Operation Group" can be
displayed.
Use the Web page to configure the following settings:
• Changing the name of the home screen key, changing the image, storing an application key
• Storing keys that appear in the my menu screen.

• System Settings (Administrator): My Menu Settings
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - [My Menu Settings] in the Web page menu.
• System Settings (Administrator): My Menu List
When user authentication is enabled, a my menu screen can be set for each "Favourite Operation Group List".
Registration is performed in "My Menu List" in [User Control] in the Web page menu.

1-22

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE
The remote operation function allows you to operate the machine from your computer.
When this function is added, the same screen as the operation panel screen appears on your computer. This allows you
to operate the machine from your computer in the same way as if you were standing in front of the machine.

The machine
Your computer
Operation panel
Operate the
machine using your
computer screen.
Network

The remote operation function can only be used on one computer at a time.

How to use the remote operation function
Before using this function, set "Operational Authority" to "Allowed" in "Remote Software Operation" of "Remote
Operation Settings" in the system settings (administrator).
☞ 7. SYSTEM SETTINGS "Remote Operation Settings" (page 7-68)
To use the remote operation function, the machine must be connected to a network and a VNC application must be
installed on your computer (recommended VNC software: RealVNC).
The procedure for using this function is as follows:

Example: RealVNC

Connect from the computer to the
machine.
(1) Start the VNC viewer

1

(2) Enter the IP address of the machine in the
"Server" entry box.
(3)

(2)

(3) Click the [OK] button.

Follow the prompts on the operation panel of the machine to permit the
connection.

2
When the machine is connected to the remote software,
appears on the system bar of the machine's touch panel.
If you wish to disconnect, exit the remote software or touch
.

Use the operation panel in the same way as you would on the machine. Note that a key cannot be held down to continuously
change a value being entered. For detailed procedures, see the chapters for each of the functions in this manual.
System Settings (Administrator): Remote Operation Settings
Set the operation authority for the remote operation function.

1-23

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG
The machine records the jobs that are performed in the job log.
The main information that is recorded in the job log is described below.
• To make it easy to total the usage counts of differently configured machines, the items recorded in the job log are fixed,
regardless of what peripheral devices are installed or the objective of the recording.
• In some cases, job information may not be correctly recorded, such as when a power failure occurs during a job.

No.
1

Item name
Main items

Description

Job ID

The job ID is recorded.
Job IDs appear in the log as consecutive numbers up to a maximum
of 999999, after which the count resets to 1.

2

Job Mode

The job mode, such as copy or print.

3

Computer Name

The name of the computer that sent a print job.*

4

User Name

The user name when the user authentication function is used.

5

Login Name

The login name when the user authentication function is used.

6

Starting Date & Time

The date and time the job was started.

7

Completing Date &
Time

The date and time the job was completed.

8

Black & White Total
Count

For a print job, the total count is recorded.
For a send job, the number of transmitted black & white pages is
recorded. When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total
number of pages is recorded.
For a scan to HDD job, the number of stored black & white pages is
recorded.

9

Full Colour Total Count

For a send job, the total number of transmitted full colour pages is
recorded. When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total
number of pages is recorded.
For a scan to HDD job, the number of stored full colour pages is
recorded.

10

Count according to size

Counts by original/paper size in colour mode and black & white mode.

11

Number of sheets
according to size

Indicates the sheet count by paper type.

12

Invalid Paper
Count(Black & White)

Indicates the black & white invalid sheet count.

13

Number of Reserved
Sets

Number of specified sets or reserved destinations.

14

Number of Completed
Sets

Number of completed sets or number of destinations to which
transmission was successfully completed.

15

Number of Reserved
Pages

Number of reserved original pages of a copy, print, scan job, or other
job.

16

Number of Completed
Pages

Number of completed pages of a set.

17

Result

The result of a job.

18

Error Cause

When an error occurs during a job, the cause of the error.

1-24

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

No.
19

Item name
Output

The output mode of a printed job.

20

Staple

The status of stapling.

21

Staple Count

The staple count.

22

Punch Count

The punch count.

23

Fold

Recorded in a job that uses the fold function.

24

Fold Count

Number of folded pages.

25

Printer Tone

The tone used for a print job.

Direct Address

Address of an image send job.

Sender Name

Sender name of an image send job.

28

Sender Address

Sender address of an image send job.

29

Transmission Type

Transmission type of an image send job.

30

Administrative Serial
Number

Administrative serial number of an image send job.

31

Broadcast number

Broadcast number of an image send job.

32

Entry Order

Reservation order for broadcast transmission of an image send job.
For a serial polling job, this is used to correlate communication with
printing.

33

File Type

File format of an image send job.

34

Compression
Mode/Compression
Ratio

Compression mode and compression ratio of the file of an image
send job.

35

Communication Time

Indicates the communication time of image send jobs.

36

Fax No.

Indicates the stored sender's number.

Document Filing

Status of document filing.

Storing Mode

Document filing storing mode.

39

File Name 2

File name of a file stored by document filing or retention print.*

40

Data Size [KB]

File size.

Colour Setting

Colour mode selected by user.

42

Special Modes

Special modes selected when the job was executed.

43

File Name 2

Records the file names of print jobs.*

26
27

37
38

41

Print Job Related Item

Description

Image Send Related
Item

Document Filing
Related Item

Common Functionality

1-25

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

No.
44

Item name
Original Size

Size of scanned original.
For a document filing print job, the paper size of the file.

45

Original Type

Original type (text, printed photo, etc.) set in the exposure settings
screen.

46

Paper Size

For a print job, the paper size.
For a send job, the transmitted paper size.
For a Scan to HDD job, the paper size of the stored file.

47

Paper Type

The paper type used for printing.

48

Paper Property:
Disable Duplex

Indicates that duplex was disabled in "Paper Type".

49

Paper Property: Fixed
Paper Side

Indicates that fixed side was specified in "Paper Type".

50

Paper Property:
Disable Staple

Indicates that stapling was disabled in "Paper Type".

51

Paper Property:
Disable Punch

Indicates that punching was disabled in "Paper Type".

52

Duplex Setup

Indicates the duplex setting.

53

Resolution

Indicates the scanning resolution.

Model Name

Indicates the model name of the machine.

55

Unit Serial Number

Indicates the serial number of the machine.

56

Name

Indicates the name of the machine that is set in the Web pages.

57

Machine Location

Indicates the installation location of the machine that is set in the Web
pages.

54

Detailed Items

Description

Machine Item

*In some environments this is not recorded.

1-26

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

LOADING PAPER
IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER
This section provides information that you should know before loading paper in the paper trays.
Be sure to read this section before loading paper.

NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS
The names of the trays are as follows.

Bypass tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 5 (when a A4 large
capacity tray is installed)
Tray 4

THE MEANING OF "R" IN PAPER SIZES
Some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the vertical or the horizontal orientation. To differentiate between
vertical and horizontal orientations, paper sizes in the horizontal orientation will be followed by an "R" (for example,
A4R, 8-1/2" x 11"R).
Sizes that can be placed only in the horizontal orientation (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", A3, B4) do not include
the "R" in their size indication.

A4R
(8-½" x 11"R)

A4
(8-½" x 11")

A3
(11" x 17")

Horizontal orientation
"R" is appended.

Vertical orientation
"R" is not appended.

Can be placed only in the
horizontal orientation
"R" is not appended.

1-27

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

USEABLE PAPER
Various types of paper are sold. This section explains what plain paper and what special media can be used with the
machine. For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be loaded in each tray of the machine, see
the specifications in the Start Guide and "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".

Plain paper, special media
Plain paper that can be used
• SHARP standard plain paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)). For paper specifications, see the specifications in the Start Guide.
• Pain paper other than SHARP standard paper (60 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 (16 lbs. to 28 lbs.))
Recycled paper, coloured paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Contact
your dealer or nearest authorised service representative for advice on using these types of paper.

Types of paper that can be used in each tray
The following types of paper can be loaded in each tray.

Tray 4

Bypass
tray

Tray 5
(A4 large
capacity
tray)

Tray 5
(A3 large
capacity
tray)

Inserter

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Recycle Paper

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Letter head

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Pre-punched

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Colour

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

Heavy paper*1

–

Permitted

Permitted

Permitted

–

–

Permitted

Labels

–

Permitted

–

Permitted

–

–

–

Transparency film

–

Permitted

–

Permitted

–

–

Permitted*2

Tab paper

–

Permitted

–

Permitted

–

–

Permitted

Tray 1/
Tray 2

Tray 3

Plain paper

Permitted

Pre-printed

*1 Paper weights of up to 209 g/m2 (110 lbs.) can be used. Paper weights of up to 256 g/m2 (140 lbs.) can be used with the inserter.
*2 Depending on the type of transparency film used, a double feed may occur. In this case, feed one sheet into the tray at a time.

1-28

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Print side face up or face down
Paper is loaded with the print side face up or face down depending on the paper type and tray.

Trays 1 to 4
Load the paper with the print side face up.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", load the paper with the print side face down*.

Bypass tray and tray 5
Load the paper with the print side face up.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", load the paper with the print side face down*.
* If "Disabling of Duplex" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), load the paper with the print side face up.

Paper that cannot be used
• Special media for inkjet printers
(fine paper, glossy paper, glossy film, etc.)
• Carbon paper or thermal paper
• Pasted paper
• Paper with clips
• Paper with fold marks
• Torn paper
• Oil-feed transparency film
• Thin paper less than 56 g/m2 (15 lbs.)
• Paper that is 210 g/m2 (80 lbs.) or heavier

• Irregularly shaped paper
• Stapled paper
• Damp paper
• Curled paper
• Paper on which either the print side or the reverse side
has been printed on by another printer or multifunction
device.
• Paper with a wave-like pattern due to moisture
absorption
• Envelopes

Non-recommended paper
• Iron-on transfer paper
• Japanese paper
• Perforated paper

• Various types of plain paper and special media are sold. Some types cannot be used with the machine. Contact your
dealer or nearest authorised service representative for advice on using these types of paper.
• The image quality and toner fusibility of paper may change due to ambient conditions, operating conditions, and paper
characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of SHARP standard paper. Contact your dealer or nearest
authorised service representative for advice on using these types of paper.
• The use of non-recommended or prohibited paper may result in skewed feeding, misfeeds, poor toner fusing (the toner
does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed off), or machine failure.
• The use of non-recommended paper may result in misfeeds or poor image quality. Before using non-recommended paper,
check if printing can be performed properly.

1-29

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4
LOADING PAPER IN PAPER TRAY 1 - TRAY 2
A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper can be loaded in tray 1 and tray 2. These are parallel large-capacity trays that allow a total
of approximately 2000 sheets of SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2 (20lbs. )) to be loaded. If you wish to change the
paper size of tray 1 or tray 2, see "CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE IN PAPER TRAY 1 - TRAY 2" on the next page.

Pull out paper tray 1-tray 2.
Gently pull the tray out until it stops.

1

Indicator line

2

Load paper in the left and right trays.
Lift the paper guide and load paper in tray 1.*1
Approximately 800 sheets of SHARP standard paper
(80 g/m2 (20lbs.)) can be loaded.
Be sure to return the paper guide to its original position after
loading the paper.
Lift the paper guide and load paper in tray 2.*1
Approximately 1200 sheets of SHARP standard paper
(80 g/m2 (20lbs.)) can be loaded.

Indicator line

*1 The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line.

Gently push tray 1-tray 2 into the
machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.

3

Set the paper type.

4

If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the paper type was
changed, be sure to change the appropriate settings as explained in "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in the System
Settings.

1-30

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

5

Loading paper in paper tray 1/tray 2 is now complete.

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE IN PAPER TRAY 1 TRAY 2
To change the paper size of tray 1 - tray 2, follow the steps below.
This section only explains how to change the paper size. For the procedures for opening/closing the tray and loading
paper, see "LOADING PAPER IN PAPER TRAY 1 - TRAY 2" (page 1-30).

Remove the paper size guide.
Tray 1

1

Tray 2

With the base of the tray pressed all the way down, hold down
the hook at the bottom on the paper size guide and pull the
paper size guide up slightly.

Paper guide
Hook

• Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
• Before changing the paper size of tray 1, raise the paper guide.

(A)

(B)

LT
A4

A4
LT

2

Adjust the paper size guide to the paper
size to be used.
Paper sizes are inscribed at the slot (A) on the bottom of the
tray and at the hole (B) at the top of the paper size guide. ("LT"
indicates 8-1/2" x 11" size.)
Align the bottom of the paper size guide with the slot, and align
the hole at the top with the locking tab.

• When attaching the paper size guide, make sure that the top and bottom of the guide are aligned to the same paper
size.
• If the top and bottom of the paper size guide are not aligned to the same paper size, skewed feeding and misfeeds
will result.

Push in the paper guide so that it locks
into place.

3

Push the paper size guide in until the hook at the bottom locks
into place. (You will hear a "click" when the hook locks.) Move
the paper size guide slightly to verify that it has locked into
place.

1-31

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to adjust the far
paper guide to the paper size to be used.
Be sure to adjust the far paper guide to the same size as the
near paper guide.

4

• When removing and attaching the far paper size guide, take care not to hit the front cover of the machine.
• Adjust both the front and back guides. If only one guide is adjusted, skewed feeding and misfeeds may result.

Set the paper type and paper size.

5

For the procedure for configuring these settings, see "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in the System Settings.
An incorrect paper type or paper size setting may cause automatic selection of the wrong type or size of paper, and result in
a misfeed or otherwise prevent printing.

LOADING PAPER IN PAPER TRAY 3
Approximately 500 sheets of standard paper (80g/m2 (20lbs.)) from A3 to A5R (11" x 17" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R size) can be
loaded in tray 3. Special papers such as tabbed paper and transparency film can also be loaded. For information on
what special papers can be used, see "Types of paper that can be used in each tray" on page 1-28. To load tabbed
paper or transparency film, see "Loading tabbed paper" (page 1-34) or "Loading transparency film" (page 1-35).

Pull out paper tray 3.
Gently pull the tray out until it stops.

1

Load paper into the tray.

2

The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line (no
more than 500 sheets of SHARP standard paper
(80g/m2 (20lbs.)).
To change the paper size, see "CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE
IN PAPER TRAY 3" on the next page.

1-32

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Gently push tray 3 into the machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.

3

Set the paper type.

4

5

If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the paper type was
changed, be sure to change the appropriate settings as explained in "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in the System
Settings.

Loading paper in paper tray 3 is now complete.

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE IN PAPER TRAY 3
1

Pull out paper tray 3.
If paper remains in the tray, remove it.

Adjust the guide plates A and B by
squeezing their lock levers and sliding
them to the paper size to be loaded.

2

3
4

The guide plates A and B are slidable. Adjust them to the paper
size to be loaded while squeezing their lock levers.

Load paper into the tray.

Gently push tray 3 into the machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.

Set the paper type of the paper that was loaded in tray 3.

5

Be sure to change the appropriate settings as explained in "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in the System Settings.
If you changed the paper size, be sure to change the paper size setting. An incorrect paper size setting will cause the wrong
paper to be automatically selected and may prevent printing or cause misfeeds.

1-33

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

6

Changing the paper size in paper tray 3 is now complete.

Loading tabbed paper
When using tabbed paper, follow the steps below to attach the special guide to the divider plate at the bottom edge of
the tabbed paper. (Tabbed paper cannot be used in tray 4.)

Take out the tabbed paper guide.

1

The guide is stored inside the left side of the machine as
shown.
Be sure to replace the guide when you have finished using it.

Pull out the tray and attach the guide.
Slide the divider plate to the position of the bottom edge of the
tabbed paper and attach the guide so that it covers the divider
plate.

2

1-34

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Place the tabbed paper in the tray.
Place the tabbed paper with the print side face up.
[Example]
Make sure that the positions of the tabs correspond with the
originals as shown below.

3

Original

Tabbed paper
DEF

ABC

GHI

Front side
JKL

1st page

4

2nd page

3rd page

4th page

1st page
2nd page
3rd page

4th page

Gently push the tray in and set the paper type to tabbed paper.
☞ 7. SYSTEM SETTINGS "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13)

Loading transparency film
Be sure to load transparency film oriented vertically. (Transparency film cannot be used in tray 4.)

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE IN PAPER TRAY 4
Plain paper from A3 to B5 (11" x 17" to 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R size) can be loaded in tray 4. For paper that can be used, see
"Types of paper that can be used in each tray" on page 1-28.
The procedures for loading paper in tray 4 and changing the paper size are the same as for tray 3 (see page 1-32).
When referring to the explanations of tray 3, keep in mind that special papers such as tabbed paper and transparency film
cannot be used in tray 4. Use tray 3 for special paper.

1-35

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (A4 LARGE
CAPACITY TRAY)
LOADING PAPER
The large capacity tray can hold up to 3500 sheets of A4 or B5, 8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)).
The paper size of tray 5 can only be changed by a SHARP service technician. If you need to change the paper size,
consult your dealer or nearest Authorised Service Representative.

Pull out the paper tray.
Gently pull the tray out until it stops.

1

Fan the paper.
Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned,
multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.

2

Indicator
line

3

Place the paper in the centre of the
paper table.
Load the paper with the print side face up. The stack must not
be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 3500 sheets).

1-36

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Gently push the paper tray into the
machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.

4
If you loaded a different type of paper than was loaded previously, be sure to change the paper type setting in "Paper
Tray Settings" in the system settings.

Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
System Settings: Paper Tray Settings (page 7-13)
Change these settings if you have loaded a different type of paper in the tray.

Specifications
Name

Large capacity tray (MX-LC10)

Paper size

A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

Paper weight

60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs. )

Paper capacity (plain)

3500 sheets (80 /m2 (20 lbs.))

Dimensions

371 mm (W) x 574 mm (D) x 520 mm (H)
(14-39/64" (W) x 22-19/32" (D) x 20-15/32" (H))

Power supply

Supplied from the main unit

Weight

Approximately 29 kg (64 lbs.)

Overall dimensions when attached to
machine

1099 mm (W) x 683 mm (D)
(43-17/64" (W) x 26-57/64" (D))

1-37

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (A3 LARGE
CAPACITY TRAY)
LOADING PAPER
Up to 3000 sheets of B5 to A3 (8-1/2" x 11" to 11" x 17") size paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) can be loaded in the large
capacity tray (MX-LCX3N).
For detailed information on the paper that can be loaded, see the specifications in the Safety Guide and "Paper Tray
Settings" (page 7-13) in the System Settings.

Press the operation button.
The operation button indicator will blink and the tray's paper
table will descend to the paper loading position. Wait until the
operation button indicator turns off.

1
Do not remove the tray before the indicator turns off. Attempting to pull the tray out when the indicator is blinking or
solidly lit may damage the tray.

Pull out the paper tray.
Gently pull the tray out until it stops.

2

Fan the paper.

3

Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned,
multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.

1-38

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Indicator line

Place the paper in the centre of the
paper table.
Load the paper with the print side face up.
When a certain amount of paper is placed on the paper table,
the paper table will automatically descend slightly and then
stop. Continue loading paper in this way.
The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line.
A maximum of 3000 sheets of paper can be loaded in the tray.

Caution

4

When placing paper, do not insert your fingers into the openings in the paper table.

Do not insert spare paper or other objects into openings inside the tray.

Gently push the paper tray into the
machine.

5

Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine. After the tray
is pushed in, the paper table will rise. While the paper tray
rises, the operation button indicator will blink. After the paper
tray finishes rising, the indicator will light solidly.

If you loaded a different type of paper than was loaded previously, change the paper type setting as explained in
"Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in the System Settings.

Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.

1-39

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE
To change the paper size of the large capacity tray (MX-LCX3N), follow the procedure below.
This procedure only explains how to change the paper size. For the procedures for opening/closing the tray and loading
paper, see "LOADING PAPER" (page 1-38).

Loosen the paper guide screw.

1

Slide the plate of the paper guide.

Plate

Slide the plate until the red line appears at the centre of the size
window of the plate.

2

Adjust the paper guide to the paper size
that will be used.
Slide the paper guide forward or backward until the size mark
of the paper to be used ( or ) appears in the size window of
the plate.

3

(1)

Secure the paper guide.
(1) Slide the plate of the paper guide.

4

Slide the plate until the paper size to be used appears in
the size window of the plate.

B4/B5
(2)

(2) Tighten the paper guide screw.

Repeat steps 1 through 4 to adjust the
far paper guide to the paper size to be
used.

5

Be sure to adjust the far guide to the same paper size as the
near guide.

Adjusting only one paper guide may result in skewed feeding or misfeeds.

1-40

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Change the right paper guide to the
paper size to be used.
(1) While holding up the paper guide lock, slide
the paper guide to the paper size to be
used.

6

(2) Release the paper guide lock.
(3) Move the paper guide slightly to the right
and left so that it locks into place.
You will hear a "click" when the paper guide locks.

Set the paper size and paper type.

7

Be sure to change the paper size and paper type settings as explained in "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in the System
Settings.
If the paper size setting is not configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate correctly and printing may take
place on the wrong size or type of paper or a misfeed may occur.

Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.

Large capacity tray (MX-LCX3N) specifications
Model

MX-LCX3N

Paper sizes

12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, A3W, A3,
B4, A4, A4R, B5

Paper weight

16 lbs. Bond to 110 lbs. Index (60 g/m2 to 205 g/m2)

Paper capacity

3000 sheets (21 lbs. Bond (80 g/m2)

Paper types

SHARP-recommended plain paper, recycled paper, coloured paper, heavy paper

Power supply

Supplied from the machine

Dimensions

27-11/64" (W) x 22-49/64" (D) x 20-35/64" (H)
(690 mm (W) x 578 mm (D) x 522 mm (H))

Weight

Approx. 110.3 lbs. (50 kg)

Overall dimensions when attached to
macnine

61-5/8" (W) x 30-11/32" (D)
(1565 mm (W) x 771 mm (D))

1-41

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY
The bypass tray can be used to print on plain paper, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media. Up to 100 sheets
of paper can be loaded (up to 40 sheets of heavy paper) for continuous printing similar to the other trays.

Open the bypass tray.

When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R , be sure
to pull out the bypass tray extension. Pull the bypass tray
extension all the way out. If the bypass tray extension is not
pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded paper will not be
correctly displayed.

1

Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray.

Set the bypass tray guides to the width
of the paper.

2

Insert the paper along the bypass tray
guides all the way into the bypass tray
until it stops.
Load the paper with the print side face up.

3
• Do not force the paper in.
• If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper, move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the
width of the paper. If the bypass guides are set too wide, the paper may skew or be creased.

1-42

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING THE BYPASS TRAY
• When using plain paper other than SHARP standard paper or special media other than SHARP-recommended
transparency film, or when printing on the reverse side of previously used paper, the paper must be loaded one sheet
at a time. Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds.
• Before loading paper, straighten any curling in the paper.
• When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and
reload as a single stack. If paper is added without removing the remaining paper, a misfeed may result.

Inserting paper
Place paper that is A5 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2") or smaller in the horizontal
orientation.

Inserting tab paper
To print on tab paper, load tab paper in the bypass tray with the print side face up.

Face up

• Use only tab paper that is made of paper. Tab paper made of a material other than paper (film, etc.) cannot be used.
• To print on the tabs of tab paper...
In copy mode, use "Tab Copy" in the special modes. In print mode, use the tab print function.

Inserting transparency film
• Use SHARP-recommended transparency film. When inserting
transparency film in the bypass tray, the rounded corner
should be facing the front left of the machine.
• When loading multiple sheets of transparency film in the
bypass tray, be sure to fan the sheets several times before
loading.
• When printing on transparency film, be sure to remove each
sheet as it exits the machine. Allowing sheets to stack in the
output tray may result in curling.

1-43

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

ORIGINALS
This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder and on the document glass.

PLACING THE ORIGINAL
PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER
This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder.
Allowed original sizes
Minimum original size
Standard sizes
(Minimum size that can be automatically detected)
A5: 148 mm (height) x 210 mm (width)
5-1/2" (height) x 8-1/2" (width)
Non-standard sizes
(Minimum size that can be specified manually)
131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width)
5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)

Maximum original size
Standard sizes
(Maximum size that can be automatically detected)
A3: 297 mm (height) x 420 mm (width)
11" (height) x 17" (width)
A3W size paper (12" x 18") cannot be used.
Non-standard sizes
(Maximum size that can be specified manually)
Copy mode: 297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width)
11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width)
Image send mode: 297 mm (height) x 1000 mm (width)
11" (height) x 39-3/8" (width)

When the original is a non-standard size, see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using.
☞ 2. COPIER "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE" (page 2-28)
☞ 4. FACSIMILE "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 4-47)
☞ 5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 5-53)
Allowed original weights
MX-M623U/MX-M753U/MX-M623N/
MX-M753N

1-sided copying: 35 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 (9 lbs. to 34 lbs.)
2-sided copying: 50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 (15 lbs. to 34 lbs.)

To scan originals from 35 g/m2 to 49 g/m2 (9 lbs. to 14 lbs.), use "Slow Scan Mode" in the special modes. Scanning
without using "Slow Scan Mode" may result in original misfeeds.
When "Slow Scan Mode" is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.

1-44

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Make sure an original does not remain
on the document glass.
Open the automatic document feeder, make sure that an
original is not on the document glass, and then gently close the
automatic document feeder.

1

Adjust the original guides to the size of
the originals.

2

3

Indicator
line

1

Place the original.
Make sure the edges of the originals are even.
Insert the originals face up all the way into the document feeder
tray.
Insert a number of originals that does not exceed the indicator
line on the document feeder tray.
Up to 150 sheets can be inserted.
Be sure to remove originals that have been finished scanning
from the original exit tray.

• Originals of different sizes can be placed together in the automatic document feeder. In this case, select "Mixed Size
Original" in the special modes of the mode you are using.
• Before inserting originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.
• If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or pasteup glue, wait until the originals are dry before making
copies. Otherwise the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.
• Do not use the following originals. Incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds, and smudges may result.
Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should
not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be damaged, crumpled, folded,
loosely pasted together, or have cut-out holes. Originals with multiple punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole
punched paper may not feed correctly.
• When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that
the punched edge is at a position away from the feed slot of the
document feeder tray.
Feed slot

1-45

Hole
positions

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT GLASS
This section explains how to place the original on the document glass.
Allowed original sizes
Maximum original size
Standard sizes
A3: 297 mm (height) x 420 mm (width)
11" (height) x 17" (width)
Non-standard sizes
297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width)
11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width)

When the original is a non-standard size, see the
appropriate explanation below for the mode you are
using.
☞ 2. COPIER "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE"
(page 2-28)
☞ 4. FACSIMILE "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 4-47)
☞ 5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX "IMAGE
SETTINGS" (page 5-53)

Open the automatic document feeder.

1

Place the original.
Place the original face down in the far left corner of the
document glass.
Original size
detector

Document glass scale
mark

A5
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
B5
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

2

Document glass scale
mark

B5R
A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)
B4 (8-1/2" x 14")
A3 (11" x 17")

The original should always be placed in the far left corner,
regardless of its size.
Align the top left corner of the original with the tip of the
mark.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector and prevent
correct detection of the original size.
If you are placing a small non-standard size original on the document glass, it is convenient to place a blank sheet of
A4 or B5 (8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2") paper on top of the original to facilitate detection of the original size.

1-46

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Close the automatic document feeder.
After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.

3

Placing a thick book
When scanning a thick book or other thick original, follow the steps below to press the book down.

(1) Push up the far side of the automatic
document feeder.
The hinges supporting the automatic document feeder
will release and the rear side of the automatic document
feeder will rise.

(2)
(1)

(2) Slowly close the automatic document
feeder.
Do not press a book or other bulky document down too
hard on the glass with the automatic document feeder.
If shadows around the edges of the document are a
problem, use the erase function.

☞ 2. COPIER "ERASING PERIPHERAL
SHADOWS (Erase)" (page 2-47)

Caution
• Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder may damage it.
• Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.
The automatic document feeder cannot be closed correctly in this state. To return the automatic document feeder to its
normal state, open it completely and then close it.

1-47

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

PERIPHERAL DEVICES
This section describes the peripheral devices that can be used with the machine and explains how to use the finisher and
saddle stitch finisher, as well as Sharp OSA (application communication module and external account module).

PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality.
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard
equipment.
(As of April, 2010)
Product name

Product number

Description

A4 large capacity tray

MX-LC10

Additional tray. A maximum of 3500 sheets of paper can be
loaded in the tray.

A3 large capacity tray

MX-LCX3N

Additional tray. Supports a wide range of sizes including A3 and
can hold up to 3500 sheets.

Finisher

MX-FN15

Output device that enables the use of the staple function and
offset function.

Punch module

AR-PN4A
AR-PN4B
AR-PN4C
AR-PN4D

Saddle stitch finisher

MX-FN16

Output device that enables use of the staple function, offset
function and pamphlet copy function.

Finisher (3 trays)

MX-FN14

Output device that enables the use of the staple function and
offset function. Can staple up to 100 sheets.

Punch module for finisher (3 trays)

MX-PN10A
MX-PN10B
MX-PN10C
MX-PN10D

Punches holes in copies and other output. Requires finisher
(MX-FN15) or saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN16).

Punches holes in copies and other output. Requires a finisher (3
trays). Requires finisher (MX-FN14).

Inserter

MX-CF10

Paper set in an inserter can be inserted into output as covers or
inserts. The inserter can be used to staple output and punch
holes manually. Requires the finisher (MX-FN14), finisher
(MX-FN15) or saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN16).

Barcode font kit*

AR-PF1

Adds barcode fonts to the machine.

Printer expansion kit

MX-PB13

Adds a PCL6 or PCL5e printer function. MX-M623N/MX-M753N
is included as standard equipment.

PS3 expansion kit*

MX-PKX1

Enables the machine to be used as a Postscript compatible
printer.

XPS expansion kit*

MX-PUX1

The machine can be used as an XPS compatible printer. For
details, consult your dealer.
To install this kit, a 1 GB expansion memory board (MX-SMX3)
is required.

Network scanner expansion kit

MX-NSX1

Adds a network scanner function.
MX-M623N/MX-M753N is included as standard equipment.

1-48

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Product name

Product number

Description

Expansion memory board

MX-SMX3

This expands the memory that can be used on the machine.

Internet fax expansion kit

MX-FWX1

Enables Internet Fax.

Facsimile expansion kit

MX-FXX2

Adds a fax function.

Application integration module

MX-AMX1

The application integration module can be combined with the
network scanner function to append a metadata file to a scanned
image file.

Application communication module

MX-AMX2

Allows the machine to link with external application software over
a network.

External account module

MX-AMX3

This is required to use an external account application on the
machine.

Enhanced compression kit

MX-EBX3

A scanned document can be saved in Compact PDF format.
Compact PDF results in a smaller size than regular PDF.

Keyboard

MX-KBX2

This is a keyboard that is integrated with the machine. When not
in use, it can be stored under the operation panel.
MX-M623N/MX-M753N is included as standard equipment.

Sharpdesk 1 licence kit

MX-USX1

Sharpdesk 5 licence kit

MX-USX5

Sharpdesk 10 licence kit

MX-US10

Sharpdesk 50 licence kit

MX-US50

Sharpdesk 100 licence kit

MX-USA0

Keyboard

MX-KBX2
MX-KBX2SE
MX-KBX2SB
MX-KBX2SF

Stamp unit

AR-SU1

This software enables integrated management of documents
and computer files.

This is a keyboard that is integrated with the machine.
When not in use, it can be stored under the operation panel.

This stamps each original page after it is scanned in image send
mode.

* Requires printer expansion kit (MX-PB13).
Some options may not be available in some countries and regions.

1-49

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
The finisher and the saddle stitch finisher include the offset function, which offsets each set of copies from the preceding
set for easy separation. Each set of sorted copies can also be stapled. The saddle stitch finisher can automatically
staple a set of copies at the centre line and fold the pages to create a pamphlet.
A punch module unit can be installed to add punch holes to copies, and an inserter can be installed to insert blank pages
at specified pages.
In the following explanations, the finisher and saddle stitch finisher are referred to simply as "finisher".

PART NAMES
(1)

Finisher
(MX-FN15)

(2)

(3)

Saddle stitch
finisher (MX-FN16)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Finisher (MX-FN15)
(1)

(7)

Tray

Saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FN16)

(5)

(2)

Stapler compiler
Paper to be stapled is stacked temporarily.

(3)

(6)

Top cover

Punch module (Option)

Lower cover
Open to clear misfed paper or replace the staple
cartridge in the pamphlet unit. (MX-FN16 only)

Open for misfeed removal.
(4)

Front cover
Open to replace the staple case in the staple unit or clear
jammed staples.

Offset pages and stapled pages are delivered here.

(7)

Saddle stitch tray
Saddle stitched output is delivered here.
(MX-FN16 only)

Adds punch holes to printed pages.

* The illustrations on the following pages (to page 1-55) show the MX-FN16; however, the operation of the MX-FN15 is
the same as the MX-FN16.
• Do not press on the finisher.
• Use caution when near the offset tray during printing as the tray moves up and down.

1-50

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SPECIFICATIONS
Name

Finisher (MX-FN15)

Saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN16)

Number of trays

2

3

Paper output

Face down output

Paper capacity

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:
Non-stapling:
2000 sheets of paper or total aggregate
thickness is within 250mm (9-53/64"):
A4, B5, A5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R or
16K (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.))
1000 sheets of paper or total aggregate
thickness is within 140mm (5-1/2"):
Sizes other than the above
Stapling:
100 sets or 750 pages of A4, B5, 8-1/2" x 11"
or 16K paper.
100 sets or 500 pages of other sizes of paper

Upper paper tray/Lower paper tray:
Non-stapling:
2000 sheets of paper or total aggregate
thickness is within 250mm (9-53/64"):
A4, B5, A5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R or
16K (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.))
1000 sheets of paper or total aggregate
thickness is within 140mm (5-1/2"): Sizes other
than the above
Stapling:
100 sets or 750 pages or total aggregate
thickness is within 110mm (4-5/16") of A4, B5,
8-1/2" x 11" or 16K paper.
100 sets or 500 pages or total aggregate
thickness is within 74mm (2-29/32") of other
sizes of paper
Saddle stitch tray:
Stapled print capacity is (11 - 15) sheets x 10
sets, (6 - 10) sheets x 20 sets, (1 - 5) sheets x
25 sets.

Paper size

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8K,16K

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8K,16K
Saddle stitch tray:
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R

Paper weight

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:
56 to 256 g/m2 (15 to 68* lbs.)

Upper paper tray/Lower paper tray/
Saddle stitch tray:
56 to 256 g/m2 (15 to 68* lbs. )

Paper full detection

Both upper and lower tray

Upper, lower and saddle stitch tray

Paper sizes for which
offset is possible

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8K,16K

Allowed paper sizes for
stapling

Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R

Stapling positions

1 place at back, 1 place at back (diagonal), one place at front (diagonal), 2 places

Paper conveying

Centre reference

Power supply

Supplied from machine

Upper paper tray/Lower paper tray:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R
Lower tray:
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R

(Continued on next page)

1-51

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Dimensions

When tray is folded up: 700 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x 1150 mm(H)
(27-9/16" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) x 45-9/32" (H))
When tray is extended: 813 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x 1150 mm(H)
(32" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) x 45-9/32" (H))
Not including stopper (40 mm (1-37/64")) when attached to machine

Weight

Approx. 54 kg (Approx. 119 lbs.)

Overall dimensions when
attached to machine

1904 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) (Separation from machine 400 mm)
(75-15/16" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) (Separation from machine 15-3/4"))

Approx. 75 kg (Approx. 165 lbs.)

* For index paper, equivalent to 140-lbs.
Name

Punch module (AR-PN4B)

Hole punching

3 holes

Allowed paper sizes for
punching

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R

Page weight

56 to 256 g/m2 (15 to 68* lbs.)

Power supply

Supplied from finisher / saddle stitch finisher

Dimensions

95 mm (W) x 560 mm (D) x 170 mm (H) (3-3/4" (W) x 22-1/16" (D) x 6-45/64" (H))

Weight

Approx. 3.5 kg (Approx. 7.8 lbs.)

* For index paper, equivalent to 140-lbs.
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.
• The following papers cannot be stapled and punched:
Special papers such as transparency film and label sheets
• If mixed paper sizes are selected for stapling jobs, stapling will be automatically cancelled.

Supplies
The finisher and saddle stitch finisher require the following staple cartridge:
Staple cartridge for finisher and
saddle stitch finisher (approx. 5,000
per cartridge X 3 cartridges)
SF-SC11

Staple cartridge for saddle stitch
finisher (approx. 2000 per cartridge X
3 cartridges)
AR-SC3

STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT AND STAPLE
JAM REMOVAL
When a finisher is installed, a message will appear when the staple cartridge runs out of staples or a staple jam occurs.
Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge or remove jammed staples.

1-52

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Replacing the cartridge in the finisher
Open the front cover of the finisher.

1

Lower the blue lever in the stapler and
slide out the staple cartridge.

2

Pull the empty staple case straight up
and out of the cartridge.

3

4

Insert a new staple case into the
cartridge. Push the staple case all the
way in until it clicks into place.
Do not remove the seal holding the staples until the staple case
is set in the cartridge.

Pull the seal that holds the staples
straight out.

5

Insert the cartridge all the way in until it
clicks into place.

6

Insert the cartridge all the way in until it clicks into place.

1-53

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Close the front cover of the finisher.

7

Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to verify that stapling is performed properly.

Replacing the cartridge in the saddle stitch finisher
Only when the saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN16) is installed.

Open the lower cover of the saddle
stitch finisher.
When an optional inserter is installed, open the front cover of
the inserter before opening the lower cover of the finisher.

1

Slide out the saddle stitch unit carefully
toward the front.

2

(2)

3

(1)

(1) Grasp the grip of the saddle staple
holder and pull it out.
(2) While still grasping the grip, rotate
the saddle staple holder 90° in the
direction of the arrow (rotate to the
right).
Remove the empty staple case and set a
new one.

4

Replace both staple cases with new ones. Remove the cover
from the staple cartridge and then install the cartridge.

1-54

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Return the saddle stitch holder and the
saddle stitch unit to their respective
original positions.

5

6

Make sure that the finisher is firmly attached to the machine and that A3, A4R, or
B4 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, or 8-1/2" x 14") size paper is loaded.
If one of the above paper sizes is not set, test stapling cannot be performed.

Close the lower cover of the finisher.
Test stapling is automatically performed on a blank sheet.
This operation is carried out to avoid blank stapling.

7

If test stapling fails to take place, repeat steps 1 to 7.

Disposal of hole punch scrap (when the punch module is installed)
Open the front cover of the finisher.

1

Holding the black handle, slide out the
case containing the paper bits, and
dispose of them properly.

2

3
4

Return the waste case to its original position.

Close the front cover of the finifher.

1-55

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

FINISHER (3 TRAYS)
The finisher (3 trays) is equipped with the offset function, which offsets each set of output from the previous set, and the
staple sort function, which staples each set of output.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.

PART NAMES

(1)

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5)

(4)

Stapler compiler

(2)

(5)

Paper guide cover

Left front cover
Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge, remove
jammed staples, or remove misfed paper.

Open this cover to remove paper jams in the stapler
compiler.
(3)

Right front cover
Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.

This temporarily stacks paper to be stapled.

Output trays (upper tray, middle tray*, lower tray)

* Stapled and offset copies cannot be delivered to the middle
tray.

Stapled and offset output is delivered to these trays.
The trays are slidable. For large-size output (A3, B4,
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2",
8-1/2" x 13-2/5" and 8K sizes), extend the tray.

• Do not place heavy objects on the finisher (3 trays) or press down on the finisher (3 trays).
• Use caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the output tray may move up and down.
• A finisher (3 trays) cannot be installed simultaneously with a saddle stitch finisher or a finisher.

SUPPLIES
The finisher (3 trays) require the following staple cartridge:
Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples x 3 cartridges)
MX-SC10

1-56

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SPECIFICATIONS
Name

Finisher (3 trays) (MX-FN14)

Paper size

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2",
8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R , 8K, 16K, 16KR

Paper weight

Plain paper (56 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (15 lbs. to 68 lbs.)) Heavy paper (106 g/m2 to
256 g/m2 (28 lbs. bond to 140 lbs. index))

Modes

Non-staple, Staple

Paper sizes for which offset is possible
(Offset is not possible when using
middle paper tray.)

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-/2" x 11"R, 8K, 16K

Amount of offset

30 mm

Paper capacity*1

Upper paper tray

Non-stapling:
1500 sheets or total aggregate thickness
is within 195 mm (7-11/16" ) (A4, B5,
A5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2R", 16K)
750 sheets or total aggregate thickness
is within 97 mm (3-53/64") (A3, B4, A4R,
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2",
8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13",
8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K)

Middle paper
tray*2

Non-stapling:
250 sheets (A4, B5, 8-1/2" x 11", 16K)
125 sheets (A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x
13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K)

Lower paper tray

Non-stapling:
1500 sheets or total aggregate thickness
is within 195 mm (7-11/16") (A4, B5,
A5R, 8-1/2" x 11", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2R", 16K)
Note, 2500 sheets or total aggregate
thickness within 325 mm (12-51/64") for
non-sorted A4, B5, 8-1/2" x 11".
750 sheets or total aggregate thickness
is within 97 mm (3-53/64") (A3, B4, A4R,
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2",
8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13",
8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K)

Power supply

Universal power supply

Dimensions

865 mm (W) x 765 mm (D) x 1080 mm (H)
(34-3/64" (W) x 30-7/64" (D) x 42-33/64" (H))

Weight

Approx. 82 kg (181 lbs.)

Power consumption

163 Wh

1-57

Stapling:
100 sets (A4, B5, 8-1/2" x 11", 16K)
50 sets or 750 pages or total aggregate
thickness is within 97 mm (3-53/64")
(A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K)

–

Stapling:
100 sets or 1500 pages or total
aggregate thickness is within 195 mm
(7-11/16") (A4, B5, 8-1/2" x 11", 16K)
50 sets or 750 pages or total aggregate
thickness is within 97 mm (3-53/64") (A3,
B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K)

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Stapler
Allowed paper sizes for stapling

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x
13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K, 16K (There are four staple positions: 1 Staple at
Front, 1 Staple at Back, 2 Staples, and 1 Staple at Back (diagonal).)

Maximum number of sheets for
stapling*3

100 sheets (A4, B5, 8-1/2" x 11", 16K)
50 sheets (A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K)

Punch module for finisher (3 trays)
Model

MX-PN10B

Hole punching

3 holes or 2 holes

Allowed paper sizes for punching

3 holes: A3, A4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"
2 holes: A4R, 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13",
8-1/2" x 11"R

Allowed paper weight for punching

56 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 (15 lbs. to 32 lbs.)

Power supply

Supplied from finisher

Dimensions

95 mm (W) x 715 mm (D) x 392 mm (H) (3-3/4" (W) x 28-9/64" (D) x 15-7/16" (H))

Weight

Approx. 3.9 kg (Approx. 8.6 lbs. )

*1 Output capacity varies according to environmental conditions of the installation location, type of paper used, and the
condition of the machine.
*2 Offset and staple functions cannot be used.
*3 The number of sheets that can be stapled assumes a standard paper weight of 80 g/m2 (301 lbs.) with covers
consisting of two sheets of between 106 g/m2 to 209 g/m2. (28 lbs. to 110 lbs.)

1-58

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

REPLACING THE STAPLE CARTRIDGE
When using the finisher (3 trays), a message will appear on the operation panel when the staple cartridge runs out of
staples.
Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge.

Open the front cover on the left of the
finisher.

1

(1) Lift the green stapler lever.

2

(2) Slide out the staple cartridge.

(2)

3

(3)

(1)

Press the sides from both directions (1)
and open the cover in the direction of
the arrow (2). Pull the empty staple case
straight up and out of the cartridge (3).

(1)

4

Insert a new staple case into the
cartridge. Push the staple case all the
way in until it clicks into place.
Do not remove the seal that holds the staples before setting it in
the staple cartridge.

1-59

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Pull the seal that holds the staples
straight out.

5

Return the cover to its original position.

6

Put the staple cartridge back into the
stapler.
Push the staple cartridge in until the tabs engage and then
push the lever down until it clicks into place.

7

Close the front cover of the finisher.

8

1-60

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

INSERTER
The inserter enables blank sheets or printed sheets to be added to copy and print output as covers or inserts without
printing. The inserter also allows feeding of heavy paper that cannot be fed from the other trays.
Printed output can also be fed one set at a time from the inserter for stapling or punching without performing stapling or
staple sorting finishing (see "MANUAL OPERATION OF THE INSERTER" (page 1-63)).
When feeding from the inserter for pamphlet copying (page 2-49), cover or insert copying (page 2-60), or transparency
insert copying (page 2-71), see "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in the System Settings for setting configuration
procedures.

PART NAMES
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(6)

(5)

(1)

(4)

Paper tray

(2)

Paper guide
When loading paper, adjust this guide to the width of the
paper.

(3)

(5)

Paper guide lever
Release the paper guide lock to remove misfed paper.

Top cover
Open for misfeed removal.

Inserter operation panel
Stapling and punching can be performed directly from the
inserter operation panel without using the machine
operation panel.

Place blank or printed paper here to be inserted.

(6)

Front cover
Open this cover to remove misfed paper from the finisher
or saddle stitch finisher.

To install the inserter...
An optional finisher or saddle stitch finisher must be installed (page 1-50).

1-61

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SPECIFICATIONS
Name

Inserter (MX-CF10)

Paper weight

60 to 256 g/m2 (16 lbs. to 68* lbs.) *For index paper, equivalent to 140-lbs.

Paper types

Plain paper, special paper (transparency film,coloured paper, paper with punch holes, tabbed
paper, etc.)
(Consult your retailer for more information on special papers that can be used.)

Paper size

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR

Paper capacity

Max. 100 (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.))

Paper conveying

Centre reference

Power supply

Supplied from machine

Dimensions

When paper tray is folded up:

Weight

Approx. 25 kg (Approx. 55 lbs.)

285 (600*) mm (W) x 583 mm (D) x 1113 mm (H)
(11-15/64" (23-5/8"*) (W) 22-61/64" (D) 43-13/16" (H))
Not including stopper (40 mm (1-37/64")) when attached to machine
* Including paper tray

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

LOADING PAPER
When loading paper in the inserter, load the paper face up. If the paper has a top edge and bottom edge, load in the
same top-bottom orientation as the original. Adjust the paper guide on the paper tray to the width of the paper.
When using tabbed paper, place the paper as follows:
Load the paper back side
up.
The top side is inserted
first.
Back side

The relation of copies and tabbed sheets is shown below.

Copy

Load tabbed paper
Back
side

Back
side

Inserted first.

1st sheet

1st sheet

Back
side

2nd sheet

3rd sheet

4th sheet

5th sheet

4th sheet
5th sheet
Back
side

Copy result

Tabbed paper 4th sheet (back side)

Tabbed paper 1st sheet (back side)

1-62

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

MANUAL OPERATION OF THE INSERTER
The inserter can be used for stapling or punching without performing a copy operation. These functions are selected at
the operation panel of the inserter.

(1)
(1)

(2)

(3)
(3)

[PUNCH] key
When a punch module is installed on the finisher or
saddle stitch finisher, punch holes can be added to blank
paper or printed paper. The indicator lights when this
function is selected.

(2)

[START] key/indicator
After selecting punch or staple settings with key (1) or
key (2), place the paper to be punched or stapled on the
inserter tray and press this key.

[STAPLE] key/indicator
When this function is selected, each set of output is
stapled and delivered to the finisher or saddle stitch
finisher tray. (Note that the sets are not offset.) Press this
key until the icon light of the desired staple position lights
up. ("
" pamphlet stapling can only be selected when a
saddle stitch finisher is installed)
• Do not use tabbed paper when operating the inserter manually.
• The punching and stapling functions cannot be used when the finisher or saddle stitch finisher has failed, or when the
functions are prohibited* in the administrator settings (7. SYSTEM SETTINGS "Enable/Disable Settings" (page 7-45)).
* Disabling of stapler/Disabling of punch/Disabling of finisher/Disabling of inserter

1-63

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Alarm display
If the [START] key indicator on the inserter operation panel is blinking and the [PUNCH] key or [STAPLE] key indicator
is also blinking or solidly lit, operation will not start when the [START] key is pressed. Resolve the problem as indicated
below, depending how the indicators are lit or blinking.
[PUNCH]
indicator

[START]
indicator

[STAPLE] indicator

Cause

Any one of the indicators is solidly lit.

-

-

-

-

Blinks red
Solidly
Blinks red
lit

A paper size that cannot be fed Use paper that is a suitable size
has been loaded.
for punching, stapling, or saddle
stitching (page 1-62).
The paper type of the inserter is Heavy paper cannot be used.
set to heavy paper.
The finisher or saddle stitch
finisher tray is full.

Blinking

-

-

-

-

-

Any one of the
indicators is blinking.

-

-

-

-

-

Blinks red

Solution

Remove the paper from the
tray.

The hole punch scrap container Discard the hole punch scrap
in the punch module on the
(page 1-55).
finisher or saddle stitch finisher
is full.
The finisher or saddle stitch
finisher tray is full.

Remove the paper from the
tray.

The finisher or saddle stitch
finisher is out of staples.

Replace the staple cartridge
(page 1-52).

The saddle stitch tray on the
saddle stitch finisher is full.

Remove the paper from the
saddle stitch tray.

The saddle stitch finisher is out
of saddle stitch staples.

Replace the saddle stitch staple
cartridge (page 1-54).

Blinks red

Blinking Blinks red

1-64

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Using the inserter
For paper sizes that can be stapled or punched, see the finisher and saddle stitch finisher specifications on page 1-51.
Some paper types cannot be stapled or punched (see "NOTES" on page 1-54). Do not use these paper types.

Paper guide

Load paper in the inserter.
Load the paper face up. When performing pamphlet stapling,
place the paper so that the opened pages are face up as
shown.
Adjust the paper guide to the size of the paper.

1

Press the desired mode key.

2

Press key (2) on page 1-63 for stapling or pamphlet stapling. Press key (1) on page 1-63 for punching. The selected mode
lights up.
Pamphlet stapling can only be used when the saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN16) is installed.
When using pamphlet stapling, stapling and punching cannot be used in combination.

Press the [START] key.

3

Make sure that the [START] key light is illuminated green and
then press the [START] key.

1-65

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SHARP OSA
Sharp OSA (Open Systems Architecture) is an architecture that enables external applications to be directly connected to
a digital multifunction machine over a network.
When a digital multifunction machine that supports Sharp OSA is used, the operation panel controls and functions of the
machine such as scan send can be linked to an external application.
There are two types of external applications: "standard application" and "external account application". An "external
account application" is used for centralized account management of a multifunction machine on a network. A "standard
application" refers to all other applications.

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)
The application communication module is required to use a "standard application" on the machine.
When a previously registered standard application is selected in the Web pages of the machine, the machine retrieves
the operation screen from the registered URL. Control of the operation screen is performed by the standard application,
and Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, and HTTPS transmission can be executed.

Standard application setup
To enable a general application in the Web pages of the machine, click [Application Settings] in the administrator menu
frame, and then [External Applications Settings] and [Standard Applications]. Configure settings for the standard
application in the screen that appears.

Selecting a standard application
The procedure for selecting a general application that has been enabled in the Web pages of the machine is explained
below.

COPY

IMAGE SEND

DOCUMENT
FILING

Ready to scan for copy.

0
Special Modes

Touch the [Sharp OSA] key in the mode
select keys.
If no standard applications have been stored in the Web pages,
the key cannot be touched.

2-Sided Copy

1

Output
Exposure
Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

1-66

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Select the standard application.

Select External Application

2

App 00

App 01

App 02

App 03

App 04

App 05

App 06

App 07

If two or more standard applications have been stored in the
Web pages, the screen to select the standard application will
appear. Touch the standard application that you wish to use.
If only one standard application has been stored in the Web
pages, connection to the standard application will begin.

The machine connects to the standard application.

3

The message "Connecting to the external application." appears while the machine communicates with the standard
application.

The mode select key cannot be used during scanning.

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3)
The external account module is required to use a "external account application" on the machine.
An external account application can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When external
authentication mode is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started. When a job
ends, a job notification screen is sent to the application to enable counts to be kept for each authenticated user.
When "external count mode" is used, the login screen is not displayed when the machine is started. Only a job result
notification is sent to the application. User authentication by the external account application cannot be used, however,
the external account application can be used in combination with the internal account function.

External account application setup
To enable an external account application in the Web pages of the machine, click [Application Settings] in the
administrator menu frame, and then [External Applications Settings] and [External Accounting Application Settings].
Configure settings for the external account application in the screen that appears. The setting change will take effect
after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF" (page 1-15).

Operation in external account mode
The two modes for using an external account application operate as explained below.

External authentication mode
When the [Enable Authentication by External Server] checkbox is selected in "External Account Setting" of "Sharp OSA
Settings" in the system settings (administrator), the machine enters external authentication mode. When the machine is
powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account application and displays the
login screen. The login screen also appears when the [Call] key is touched to run a job in the job status complete screen.
(The login screen does not appear if the user has already logged in by the normal method.)
The [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the job status screen. To return to the
previous state, press the mode select key.
• The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode.
However, "User Registration", "User Count Display", "User Count Reset", "User Information Print", and "The Number of
User Name Displayed Setting" can be used.
• The mode select key cannot be used while the login screen appears.

1-67

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

If login fails
If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating
correctly. In this event, it is recommended that you quit external account mode from the Web pages of the machine. For
more information, see [Help] in the Web pages.
If it is necessary to forcibly terminate external account mode using the operation panel of the machine, follow the steps
below.
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and change "External Account Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The
setting change will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING THE POWER ON
AND OFF" (page 1-15).

External count mode
When only the [External Account Control] setting is enabled in "External Account Setting" of "Sharp OSA Settings" in the
system settings (administrator), the machine enters external count mode.
Unlike external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of the
external account application is not displayed. Only the job result is sent to the external account application. External
count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode can also be used
when the user control function is disabled.)

1-68

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

MAINTENANCE
This section explains how to clean the machine and replace the toner cartridges and stamp cartridge.

REGULAR MAINTENANCE
To ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine.

Warning
Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical
components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.
• Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents to clean the machine. These may degrade or discolour the
housing.
• Use a soft cloth to gently wipe off dirt from the area on the operation panel with a
mirror-like finish (shown at right). If you use a stiff cloth or rub hard, the surface
may be damaged.

The area with a mirror-like finish is
the area that is
.

CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC
DOCUMENT FEEDER
If the document glass or document backplate sheet becomes dirty, the dirt will appear in the scanned image. Always
keep these parts clean.
Wipe the parts with a clean, soft cloth.
If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After wiping with the moistened cloth,
wipe the parts dry with a clean dry cloth.

Document glass

Document backplate sheet

Scanning area
If black or white lines appear in images scanned using the
automatic document feeder, clean the scanning area (the
thin long glass next to the document glass).
To clean this area, use the glass cleaner that is stored in
the automatic document feeder. After using the glass
cleaner, be sure to return it to its storage position.

Examples of lines in the image

Black lines

1-69

White lines

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Open the automatic document feeder
and remove the glass cleaner.

1

2

Clean the document scanning area on
the document glass with the glass
cleaner.
One scanning area is on the document glass and the other is
inside the automatic document feeder.

Clean the document scanning area in
the automatic document feeder with the
glass cleaner.
(1) Open the scanning area cover on the
automatic document feeder.
Push in the release switch to release the cover.

(2) Clean the scanning area in the automatic
document feeder.

3
(3) Close the cover.

Replace the glass cleaner.

4

1-70

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER
If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding or heavy paper through the bypass tray, wipe the surface of the feed
roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.

1-71

(

Contents

)

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES
Be sure to replace the toner cartridge when the message "Change the toner cartridge." appears.
In copy mode
Ready to scan for copy.
(Toner supply is low.)

Ready to scan for copy.
(Change the toner cartridge.)

If you continue to use the machine without replacing
the cartridge, the following message will appear
when the toner runs out.
When the message appears in the message display,
replace the toner cartridge.

Change the toner cartridge.

OK

1-72

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Open the front cover.

1

Remove the toner cartridge gently.

2

Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown in the
illustration, and pull it out of the machine.

Remove the new toner cartridge from
the box and shake it five or six times
horizontally.

5-6

3

Shake the toner cartridge horizontally.
Do not rotate it as shown at left.

It is important to thoroughly shake the supply cartridge for 10 seconds as shown in the diagram in order to ensure
proper operation of toner supply system.

1-73

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Insert the new toner cartridge.
Align the toner cartridge with the insert hole and push it in as
shown.
Do not rotate the cartridge.

4

Push the cartridge in until it locks
securely in place.

5

Close the front cover.

6

Caution
• Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.
• If a toner cartridge is stored on end, the toner may harden and become unusable. Always store toner cartridges on their
side with the top side up.
• If a toner cartridge other than a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge is used, the machine may not attain full quality
and performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine. Be sure to use a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge.
• Keep the used toner cartridge in a plastic bag (do not discard it). Your service technician will collect the used toner
cartridge.
• To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, continually touch the [COPY] key during printing or when the machine
is idle. The percentage of toner remaining will appear in the display while the key is touched. When the percentage falls to
"25-0%", obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for replacement.
• Depending on your conditions of use, the colour may become faint or the image blurred.

1-74

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE
If a stamp unit (AR-SU1) is installed on the automatic document feeder and the stamp has become faint, replace the
stamp cartridge (AR-SV1).

Supplies
Stamp cartridge (2 in package) AR-SV1

Open the automatic document feeder.

1

Remove the document backplate sheet
from the automatic document feeder.
Remove the sheet slowly. Place the removed sheet with the
side that was attached face up on the document glass.

2

Grasp the tab on the stamp unit and pull
the unit out.

3
Tab

Remove the stamp cartridge (A).

4

(A)

1-75

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Install a new stamp cartridge.

5

Push the stamp unit back in.
Push the stamp unit in until it clicks into place.

6

Close the automatic document feeder to
attach the document backplate sheet.

7

8

When the automatic document feeder is closed, the document
backplate sheet on the document glass attaches to the
automatic document feeder.

Make sure that the document backplate
sheet is firmly attached to the automatic
document feeder and then close the
automatic document feeder.
If the document backplate sheet is not firmly attached, remove
the sheet and then close the automatic document feeder again
to firmly attach the sheet.

1-76

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

ENTERING TEXT
This section explains the text entry screen.

FUNCTIONS OF THE MAIN KEYS
Key
Caps

Caps

Shift

Enter

Description
This changes the text entry screen from the lower case screen to the upper case screen. The upper case
screen will continue to appear until the [Caps] key is touched again so that it is no longer highlighted. The
[Caps] key is convenient when you wish to enter all capital letters. (This key will vary depending on your
country or region.)
This key temporarily changes the keys in the text entry screen to upper case when lower case letters
appear, or to lower case when upper case letters appear.
Touch a letter key after touching the [Shift] key to enter that letter. After the letter is entered, the [Shift] key
will no longer be highlighted and the original text entry screen will appear.
The [Shift] key is convenient when you only need to enter one upper case letter or one lower case letter, or
when you need to enter one of the symbols assigned to the numeric keys.
To cancel selection of the [Shift] key, touch the [Shift] key again. The [Shift] key will no longer be highlighted.
(This key will vary depending on your country or region.)
Touch this key to enter a line break when entering the body text of an e-mail message. (This key will vary
depending on your country or region.)
Touch this key to delete the characters to the left of the cursor one character at a time.

Other Language

Touch this key to temporarily change the key layout of character entry mode to a different language. Select
the key layout that you wish to use.

Space

Touch this key to enter a space between letters.

AltGr

This temporarily changes the entry screen to the accented letter and symbol entry screen. Touch a letter
key after touching the [AltGr] key to enter that letter. After the letter is entered, the [AltGr] key will no longer
be highlighted and the original text entry screen will appear.
To cancel selection of the [AltGr] key, touch the [AltGr] key again. The [AltGr] key will no longer be
highlighted.
These keys move the cursor left and right.
These keys move the cursor to the line above or below the current line during entry of the body text of an
e-mail message.

Characters

Symbols

Pre-Set Select

Touch this key to select character entry mode.
Touch this key to select symbol entry mode. Symbol mode is used to enter symbols and accented letters.
Use this to retrieve a previously stored subject for e-mail or other pre-set text.

1-77

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Key

Description
Shows explanations of each key.

Help

.com

.net

.org

.biz

.info

http:

Cancel

OK

Search

Use this to enter a previously stored text string such as ".com".
Text strings are stored in the system settings.
☞ 7. SYSTEM SETTINGS "Soft Keyboard Template Setting" (page 7-68)
Touch this key to return to the previous setting screen without entering text.
Touch this key to enter the text that currently appears and return to the previous setting screen.
Search results will appear based on the entered characters.

• Some keys described above may not appear in certain key layouts or in the keyboards of certain countries or regions.
• " " in the text entry screen indicates how many characters can be entered. A number of characters greater than "
cannot be entered.

"

• On some keyboards that show the English alphabet, the [AltGr] screen continues to appear until the [AltGr] key is touched
to remove the highlighting.
• The ABC/abc key is only displayed in limited countries and regions. The
keyboard between the language of your region and English.

ABC/abc

key is a shortcut key to switch the

• The key layouts that can be selected vary depending on the language selected in "MFP Display Language Setting" in the
system settings (administrator).
• The following symbols cannot be used when entering a file name or folder name.
\ ? / " ; : , < > ! * | & #
Some computer environments may not allow the use of spaces and the symbols indicated below. For example, hyperlinks
will not operate correctly or nonsense characters may appear.
$ % ' ( ) + - . = @ [ ] ^ ` { } _~

1-78

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD
Entering text from an external keyboard
An external keyboard can only be used as a alternative for the text entry screen that appears in the machine's touch
panel. The layout of the keys in the text entry screen in the touch panel differs slightly from the layout of the keys on the
external keyboard.
Use a SHARP-recommended external keyboard.
For the recommended keyboards, please contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.

Entering text from a keyboard (MX-KBX2)
A keyboard can only be used as a alternative for the text entry screen that appears in the machine's touch panel. The
layout of the keys in the text entry screen in the touch panel differs slightly from the layout of the keys on the keyboard.
For details on using the keys, press the F1 key to view an explanation of each key.
To use the keyboard, pull it out from under the operation panel. When not in use, store the keyboard under the operation
panel.
Always hold the keyboard by the handle when storing it. You may pinch your fingers if you hold the keyboard elsewhere.

• MX-KBX2 may not be available in some countries and regions.
• Do not place heavy objects on the keyboard or press down on the keyboard.

1-79

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SOFTWARE SETUP
BEFORE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
For an introduction to the software that enables the use of the printer and scanner functions, details regarding the type of
CD-ROM that contains the software, and installation instructions, see "BEFORE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE" in the
Start Guide.
To use the printer and scanner function, the printer function and network scanner function must be available.

1-80

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SETUP IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT
This section explains how to install the software and configure settings so that the printer and scanner function of the
machine can be used with a Windows computer.
The section from this page to page 1-85 is also included in the Start Guide. (This section details basic setup
procedures.)
The instructions from page 1-86 to page 1-108 are not included in the Start Guide. Refer to the guide as necessary.

OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" into your computer's CD-ROM drive.

1

2

• If you are installing the printer driver or printer status monitor, insert the "Software CD-ROM" that shows "Disc 1" on the
front of the CD-ROM.
• If you are installing the PC-Fax driver or scanner driver, insert the "Software CD-ROM" that shows "Disc 2" on the front of
the CD-ROM.

Click the [Start] button (
[CD-ROM] icon ( ).

), click [Computer], and then double-click the

• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button, click [My Computer], and then double-click the [CD-ROM] icon.
• In Windows 2000, double-click [My Computer] and then double-click the [CD-ROM] icon.

Double-click the [Setup] icon (

3

).

• In Windows 7, if a message screen appears asking you for confirmation, click [Yes].
• In Windows Vista/Server 2008, if a message screen appears asking you for confirmation, click [Allow].

The "SOFTWARE LICENCE" window will appear. Make sure that you understand
the contents of the licence agreement and then click the [Yes] button.

4
You can show the "SOFTWARE LICENCE" in a different language by selecting the desired language from the
language menu. To install the software in the selected language, continue the installation with that language selected.

5

Read the message in the "Welcome" window and then click the [Next] button.

1-81

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

The software selection screen appears.
The software selection screen appears.
Before installing the software, be sure to click the [Display
Readme] button and view the detailed information on the
software.

6
* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.

For the steps that follow, see the appropriate page below for the software that you are installing.
INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER / PC-FAX DRIVER
• WHEN THE MACHINE IS CONNECTED TO A NETWORK*
- Standard installation: page 1-83
- Installation by specifying the machine's address: page 1-86
- Printing using the IPP function and the SSL function: page 1-89
• WHEN THE MACHINE WILL BE CONNECTED WITH A USB CABLE: page 1-91
• USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER: page 1-96
INSTALLING THE PRINTER STATUS MONITOR: page 1-101
INSTALLING THE SCANNER DRIVER: page 1-102
* If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, see "Installation by specifying the machine's address" (page 1-86).

INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER / PC-FAX DRIVER
To install the printer driver or the PC-Fax driver, follow the appropriate procedure in this section depending on whether
the machine is connected to a network or connected by USB cable.
☞ WHEN THE MACHINE WILL BE CONNECTED WITH A USB CABLE (page 1-91)

WHEN THE MACHINE IS CONNECTED TO A NETWORK
This section explains how to install the printer driver and the PC-Fax driver when the machine is connected to a
Windows network (TCP/IP network).
Supported operating systems: Windows 2000*/XP*/Server 2003*/Vista*/Server 2008/7*
* Administrator's rights are required to install the software.
• The PS3 expansion kit is required to use the PS printer driver or the PPD driver.
• To print to the machine over the Internet using the IPP function when the machine is installed in a remote location, or to
print using the SSL (encrypted communication) function, see "Printing using the IPP function and the SSL function" (page
1-89) and install the printer driver or the PC-Fax driver.
• If the machine is connected to an IPv6-only network
The software cannot be installed by detecting the machine's address from the installer. After installing the software as
explained in "Installation by specifying the machine's address" (page 1-86), change the port as explained in "Changing to a
Standard TCP/IP Port" (page 1-107).
• The installation procedure in this section is for both the printer driver and the PC-Fax driver, although the explanations are
centred on the printer driver.

1-82

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
 Standard installation
When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-81), perform the steps below.

Click the [Printer Driver] button.
To install the PC-Fax driver, click the [PC-Fax Driver] button on
the "Disc 2" CD-ROM.

1

* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.

Click the [Standard installation] button.

2

When [Custom installation] is selected, you can change any of the items below. When [Standard installation] is
selected, the installation will take place as indicated below.
• Machine connection method: LPR Direct Print (Auto Search)
• Set as default printer: Yes (excluding the PC-Fax driver)
• Printer driver name: Cannot be changed
• PCL printer display fonts: Installed
If you selected [Custom installation], select [LPR Direct Print (Auto Search)] and click the [Next] button.
If you selected other than [LPR Direct Print (Auto Search)], see the following pages:
• LPR Direct Print (Specify Address): page 1-86
• IPP: page 1-89 • Shared printer: page 1-96
• Connected to this computer: page 1-91

1-83

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Printers connected to the network are
detected. Select the machine and click
the [Next] button.

3
• If the machine is not found, make sure that the machine is powered on and that the machine is connected to the
network, and then click the [Re-search] button.
• You can also click the [Specify condition] button and search for the machine by entering the machine's name (host
name) or IP address.
☞ Start Guide "Checking the IP address of the machine"

4

A confirmation window appears. Check the contents and then click the [Next]
button.
When the printer driver selection
window appears, select the printer driver
to be installed and click the [Next]
button.

5

Click the checkbox of the printer driver to be installed so that a
checkmark (
) appears.

• When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.
• The PS3 expansion kit is required to use the PS printer driver or the PPD driver.

1-84

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

When you are asked whether or not you want the printer to be your default
printer, make a selection and click the [Next] button.
If you are installing multiple drivers, select the printer driver to be used as the default printer.
If you do not wish to set one of the printer drivers as the default printer, select [No].

6

If you clicked the [Custom installation] button in step 2, the following windows will appear.
• Printer name window
If you wish to change the printer name, enter the desired name and click the [Next] button.
• Window confirming installation of the display fonts
To install the display fonts for the PCL printer driver, select [Yes] and click the [Next] button.
• When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.
• If you are not installing the PCL printer driver (you are installing the PS printer driver or the PPD driver), select
[No] and click the [Next] button.

Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Next] button.
Installation begins.

7

• If you are using Windows Vista/Server 2008/7
If a security warning window appears, be sure to click [Install this driver software anyway].
• If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears, be sure to click the [Continue
Anyway] or [Yes] button.

8

When the installation completed screen appears, click the [OK] button.

Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.

9

After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.

This completes the installation.
• After installation, see "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON THE
MACHINE" (page 1-98) to configure the printer driver settings.
• If you installed the PS printer driver or the PPD driver, the PS display fonts can be installed from the "PRINTER
UTILITIES" CD-ROM that accompanies the PS3 expansion kit. See "INSTALLING THE PS DISPLAY FONTS" (page
1-104).
• If you are using the machine as a shared printer, see "USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER" (page 1-96)
to install the printer driver on each of the client computers.

1-85

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
 Installation by specifying the machine's address
When the machine cannot be found because it is not powered on or otherwise, installation is possible by entering the
name (host name) or IP address of the machine.
If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, after you have installed the software as explained below, change the
port as explained in "Changing to a Standard TCP/IP Port" (page 1-107).
When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-81), perform the steps below.

Click the [Printer Driver] button.
To install the PC-Fax driver, click the [PC-Fax Driver] button on
the "Disc 2" CD-ROM.

1

* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.

Click the [Custom installation] button.

2

When you are asked how the printer is
connected, select [LPR Direct Print
(Specify Address)] and click the [Next]
button.

3

1-86

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Enter the name (host name) or IP
address of the machine and click the
[Next] button.
☞ Start Guide "Checking the IP address of the machine"

4

If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, enter any numbers or characters.

5

When the model selection window appears, select the model name of your
machine and click the [Next] button.
When the printer driver selection
window appears, select the printer driver
to be installed and click the [Next]
button.

6

Click the checkbox of the printer driver to be installed so that a
checkmark (
) appears.

• When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.
• The PS3 expansion kit is required to use the PS printer driver or the PPD driver.

7

8

9

Select whether or not you wish the printer to be your default printer and click the
[Next] button.
If you are installing multiple drivers, select the printer driver to be used as the default printer.
If you do not wish to set one of the printer drivers as the default printer, select [No].

When the printer name window appears, click the [Next] button.
If you wish to change the printer name, enter the desired name and click the [Next] button.

When you are asked if you wish to install the display fonts, select an answer and
click the [Next] button.
• When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.
• If you are not installing the PCL printer driver (you are installing the PS printer driver or the PPD driver), select [No] and
click the [Next] button.

1-87

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Next] button.
Installation begins.

10

• If you are using Windows Vista/Server 2008/7
If a security warning window appears, be sure to click [Install this driver software anyway].
• If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears, be sure to click the [Continue
Anyway] or [Yes] button.

11

When the installation completed screen appears, click the [OK] button.

Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.

12

After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.

This completes the installation.
• After installation, see "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON THE
MACHINE" (page 1-98) to configure the printer driver settings.
• If you installed the PS printer driver or the PPD driver, the PS display fonts can be installed from the "PRINTER
UTILITIES" CD-ROM that accompanies the PS3 expansion kit. See "INSTALLING THE PS DISPLAY FONTS" (page
1-104).
• If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, enter any numbers or characters.

1-88

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
 Printing using the IPP function and the SSL function
The IPP function can be used to print to the machine over a network using HTTP protocol.
When the machine is in a remote location, this function can be used in place of the fax function to print a higher quality
image than a fax. The IPP function can also be used in combination with the SSL (encrypted communication) function to
encrypt the print data. This enables secure printing with no concern that the data will be leaked to others.
To use the SSL function, configure the "SSL Settings" in the system settings (administrator) of the machine. To configure the
settings, see "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".

When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-81), perform the steps below.

Click the [Printer Driver] button.
To install the PC-Fax driver, click the [PC-Fax Driver] button on
the "Disc 2" CD-ROM.

1

* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.

Click the [Custom installation] button.

2

When you are asked how the printer is
connected, select [IPP] and click the
[Next] button.

3

1-89

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

If a proxy server is used, specify the
proxy server and click the [Next] button.
To specify a proxy server, select [Print via the proxy server] and
then enter the [Address] and [Port number].

4

Enter the machine's URL and click the
[Next] button.

5

Enter the URL in the following format:
Normal format:
http://:631*1/ipp
*1 Normally "631" should be entered for the port number. If the
IPP port number has been changed on the machine, enter
the new port number.
When SSL is used:
https://< the machine's domain name or IP address>:/ipp
*2 Normally the port number and the colon ":" immediately
preceding the port number can be omitted. If the IPP port
number for SSL has been changed on the machine, enter
the new port number.
If your computer and the machine are connected to the same local area network, you can click the [Search] button to
search for the machine. The machine's URL will appear. Select the URL and click the [OK] button. You will return to
the above screen and the machine's URL will be automatically entered.

6

Perform steps 5 through 12 on page 1-87 to continue the installation.

This completes the installation.
• After installation, see "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON THE
MACHINE" (page 1-98) to configure the printer driver settings.
• If you installed the PS printer driver or the PPD driver, the PS display fonts can be installed from the "PRINTER
UTILITIES" CD-ROM that accompanies the PS3 expansion kit. See "INSTALLING THE PS DISPLAY FONTS" (page
1-104).

1-90

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

WHEN THE MACHINE WILL BE CONNECTED WITH A USB CABLE
Supported operating systems: Windows 2000*/XP*/Server 2003*/Vista*/Server 2008*/7*
* Administrator's rights are required to install the software.
• Make sure that a USB cable is not connected to your computer and the machine.
If a cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If this happens, click the [Cancel] button to close the window
and disconnect the cable.
• The PS3 expansion kit is required to use the PS printer driver or the PPD driver.
• To use the port created when the printer driver is installed for fax data transfer, install the printer driver first and then install
the PC-Fax driver.

When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-81), perform the steps below.

Click the [Printer Driver] button.

1

Click the [Custom installation] button.

2

When you are asked how the printer is
connected, select [Connected to this
computer] and click the [Next] button.

3

1-91

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

4

When you are asked if you wish to install the display fonts, select an answer and
click the [Next] button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Next] button.
When the installation completed screen appears, click the [OK] button.

5

• If you are using Windows Vista/Server 2008/7
If a security warning window appears, be sure to click [Install this driver software anyway].
• If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears, be sure to click the [Continue
Anyway] or [Yes] button.

Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.
When a message appears prompting you to connect the machine to your computer, click the [OK] button.

6
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.

Connect the machine to your computer
with a USB cable.
(1) Make sure that the machine is powered on.

7

(2) Connect the cable to the USB connector (B
type) on the machine.
The USB interface on the machine complies with the USB
2.0 (Hi-Speed) standard. Please purchase a shielded
USB cable.

(3) Connect the other end of the cable to the
USB connector (A type) on your computer.
The machine is found and a Plug and Play window appears.

Installation of the PCL6 printer driver begins.
When the "Found New Hardware Wizard" appears, select [Install the software automatically (Recommended)], click the
[Next] button, and follow the on-screen instructions.

8

• If you are using Windows Vista/Server 2008/7
If a security warning window appears, be sure to click [Install this driver software anyway].
• If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears, be sure to click the [Continue
Anyway] or [Yes] button.

This completes the installation.
• After installing the printer driver, see "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON
THE MACHINE" (page 1-98) to configure the printer driver settings.
• If you are using the machine as a shared printer, see "USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER" (page 1-96)
to install the printer driver on each of the client computers.

1-92

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

When installing the PCL5e printer driver, PS printer driver, PPD driver, or PC-Fax driver
Installation is possible even after the USB cable has been connected. When the software selection screen appears in
step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-81), perform the steps
below.

Click the [Printer Driver] button.
To install the PC-Fax driver, click the [PC-Fax Driver] button on
the "Disc 2" CD-ROM.

1

* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.

Click the [Custom installation] button.

2

When you are asked how the printer is
connected, select [Connected to this
computer] and click the [Next] button.

3

4

When the port selection window appears, select the port that the PCL6 printer
driver is using (USB001, etc.) and click the [Next] button.

1-93

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

When the printer driver selection
window appears, remove the [PCL6]
checkmark and select the printer driver
to be installed, and then click the [Next]
button.
Click the checkbox of the printer driver to be installed so that a
checkmark (
) appears.

5

• When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.
• The PS3 expansion kit is required to use the PS printer driver or the PPD driver.

6

7
8

Select whether or not you wish the printer to be your default printer and click the
[Next] button.
If you are installing multiple drivers, select the printer driver to be used as the default printer.
If you do not wish to set one of the printer drivers as the default printer, select [No].

When the printer name window appears, click the [Next] button.
If you wish to change the printer name, enter the desired name and click the [Next] button.

When you are asked if you wish to install the display fonts, select [No] and click
the [Next] button.
When the PC-Fax driver is being installed, this screen does not appear. Go to the next step.

Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Next] button.
Installation begins.

9

• If you are using Windows Vista/Server 2008/7
If a security warning window appears, be sure to click [Install this driver software anyway].
• If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears, be sure to click the [Continue
Anyway] or [Yes] button.

10

When the installation completed screen appears, click the [OK] button.

Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.

11

After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.

This completes the installation.

1-94

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

• After installation, see "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON THE
MACHINE" (page 1-98) to configure the printer driver settings.
• Make sure that the port of the installed driver is the same as the port used by the PCL6 printer driver.
The port used by the printer driver of the machine is indicated by a checkmark on the [Ports] tab of the printer driver
properties window.

☞ CHANGING THE PORT (page 1-105)

• If you installed the PS printer driver or the PPD driver, the PS display fonts can be installed from the "PRINTER
UTILITIES" CD-ROM that accompanies the PS3 expansion kit. See "INSTALLING THE PS DISPLAY FONTS" (page
1-104).

1-95

(

Contents

)

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER
If you are going to use the machine as a shared printer on a Windows network with the printer driver or the PC-Fax
driver installed on a print server, follow the steps below to install the printer driver or the PC-Fax driver on the client
computers.
• Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer name of the machine on the network.
• For the procedure for configuring settings on the print server, see the operation manual or the Help file of the operating
system. The "print server" explained here is a computer that is connected directly to the machine, and "clients" are other
computers connected to the same network as the print server.
• Install the same printer driver on client computers as the printer driver that is installed on the print server.

When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-81), perform the steps below.

Click the [Printer Driver] button.
To install the PC-Fax driver, click the [PC-Fax Driver] button on
the "Disc 2" CD-ROM.

1
* The above screen appears when using the "Disc 1"
CD-ROM.

2

Click the [Custom installation] button.

Select [Shared Printer] and click the
[Next] button.

3

1-96

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Select the printer name (configured as a
shared printer).
(1) Select the printer name (configured as a
shared printer on a print server) from the
list.
If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, you can
also click the [Add Network Port] button displayed below
the list and select the printer to be shared by browsing the
network in the window that appears.

4
(1)

(2)

(2) Click the [Next] button.

If the shared printer does not appear in the list, check the settings on the print server.

Perform steps 5 through 12 on page 1-87 to continue the installation.

5

In the printer driver selection screen, be sure to select the same type of printer as the printer driver installed on the print
server.

This completes the installation.
If you installed the PS printer driver or the PPD driver, the PS display fonts can be installed from the "PRINTER
UTILITIES" CD-ROM that accompanies the PS3 expansion kit. See "INSTALLING THE PS DISPLAY FONTS" (page
1-104).

1-97

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE OPTIONS INSTALLED ON
THE MACHINE
After installing the printer driver, you must configure the printer driver settings appropriately for the options that have
been installed and the size and type of paper loaded in the machine. Follow the steps below to configure the printer
driver.
If the PPD driver is installed, see "When the PPD driver is installed" (page 1-100).

 When the PCL printer driver or PS printer driver is installed

Click the [Start] button (

1

), click [Control Panel], and then click [Printer].

• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes].
• In Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, select [Settings], and then click [Printers].
If [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [start] menu in Windows XP, click the [start] button, click [Control Panel],
click [Printers and Other Hardware], and then click [Printers and Faxes].

Open the printer properties window.

2

(1) Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine.
(2) Select [Properties].

3

Click the [Configuration] tab.

Click the [Auto Configuration] button.
The settings are automatically configured based on the
detected machine status.

4

If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, you must configure the options manually as explained in "If
automatic configuration fails" (page 1-99).

1-98

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Configure the image of the machine.
An image of the machine is formed in the printer driver
configuration window based on the options that are installed.

(1) Select the options that are installed on the
machine.

5

(2) Click the [OK] button.

(1)

(2)

To cancel the image settings, click the [Cancel] button.

6

Click the [OK] button in the printer properties window.

If automatic configuration fails
• You can check the options that are installed and the tray settings by printing out the "All Custom Setting List" in the system
settings of the machine. (However, note that "Input Tray Options" must be set to the number of trays on the machine.)
Follow these steps to print out the "All Custom Setting List": Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, touch the [List Print
(User)] key, and then touch the [Print] key of "All Custom Setting List".
• Click the [Set Tray Status] button, the [Paper Type Name] button, and the [Set Tandem Print]* button to check the settings
of each.
Set Tray Status:
The "Tray Settings" in "Paper Tray Settings" in system settings of the machine are reflected in the
settings shown here. Specify the size and type of paper loaded in each tray.
Paper Type Name: The "Paper Type Registration" settings in "Paper Tray Settings" in the system settings of the machine
are reflected in the settings shown here. If a user type name (1 to 7) was changed, enter the changed
name.
Set Tandem Print*: Enter the setting (the IP address of the slave machine) in "Tandem Connection Setting" in the system
settings (administrator) of the machine.
* "Set Tandem Print" can only be configured when the printer driver is installed using a "Standard installation" or a "Custom
installation" with "LPR Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)" selected.

1-99

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
 When the PPD driver is installed

Click the [Start] button (

1

), click [Control Panel], and then click [Printer].

• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes].
• In Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, select [Settings], and then click [Printers].
If [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [start] menu in Windows XP, click the [start] button, click [Control Panel],
click [Printers and Other Hardware], and then click [Printers and Faxes].

Open the printer properties window.

2

(1) Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine.
(2) Select [Properties].

Configure the printer driver for the options installed on the machine.
(1) Click the [Device Settings] tab.
(2) Configure each item based on the machine configuration.
The items and the procedures for configuring the items vary depending on the operating system version.

3

(3) Click the [OK] button.
You can check the options that are installed on the machine by printing out the "All Custom Setting List" in the system
settings. (However, note that "Input Tray Options" must be set to the number of trays on the machine.) Follow these
steps to print out the "All Custom Setting List": Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, touch the [List Print (User)] key,
and then touch the [Print] key of "All Custom Setting List".

1-100

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

INSTALLING THE PRINTER STATUS MONITOR
Printer Status Monitor is a printer utility that allows general users to check the current status of the machine on their
computer screen, such as whether or not the machine is ready to print. The Printer Status Monitor shows error
information such as paper misfeeds, printer configuration information (whether or not a finisher is installed, etc.) as an
image, the paper sizes that can be used, and the amount of paper remaining.
The Printer Status Monitor cannot be used in the following situations:
• When the machine is connected by a USB cable.
• When printing to the machine using the IPP function.

Supported operating systems: Windows 2000*/XP*/Server 2003*/Vista*/Server 2008*/7*
* Administrator's rights are required to install the software.
When the software selection screen appears in step 6 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR
ALL SOFTWARE)" (page 1-81), perform the steps below.

Click the [Printer Status Monitor] button.

1

2

Follow the on-screen instructions.

When the installation completed screen appears, click the [Finish] button.

3

To have the Printer Status Monitor start automatically when your computer is started, select the [Add this program to your
Startup folder] checkbox
and click the [Finish] button.

Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.

4

After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.

This completes the installation.
For the procedures for using the Printer Status Monitor, see the Help file. Follow these steps to view the Help file:
Click the Windows [start] button, select [All Programs] ([Programs] in Windows 2000), select [SHARP Printer Status
Monitor] and then select [Help].

1-101

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

INSTALLING THE SCANNER DRIVER
The scanner driver (TWAIN driver) can only be used when the machine is connected to a network. When the scanner
driver is installed, PC scan mode of the image send function can be used.
Supported operating systems: Windows 2000*/XP*/Server 2003*/Vista*/Server 2008*/7*
* Administrator's rights are required to install the software.
After performing step 1 through step 5 of "OPENING THE SOFTWARE SELECTION SCREEN (FOR ALL
SOFTWARE)" (page 1-81), continue the steps below.

Click the [Scanner Driver (TWAIN)]
button.

1

2
3

Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Next] button.

When the finish setup window appears, click the [OK] button.

Click the [Close] button in the window of step 1.

4

After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. If this message appears, click
the [Yes] button to restart your computer.

This completes the installation. Next, configure the IP address of the machine in the scanner driver.
When the scanner driver is installed, the "Select Device" utility is also installed.
The IP address of the machine is configured in the scanner driver using "Select Device".

5

Click the [start] button, select [All Programs] ([Programs] in Windows 2000),
select [SHARP MFP TWAIN K], and then select [Select Device].

1-102

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Click the [Search] button.
If you know the IP address, you can click the [Input] key and
enter the IP address without searching.

6

Select the IP address of the machine
from the "Address" menu and click the
[OK] button.
• Be sure to ask your system administrator (network
administrator) for the IP address of the machine.
• The name (host name) or IP address of the machine can be
directly entered in "Address".
• If the port number used by the scanner function of the
machine has been changed, enter a colon ":" following the IP
address and then enter the port number. (Normally the port
number does not need to be entered.)

7

Click the [OK] button.

8

This completes the configuration of the scanner driver.

1-103

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

INSTALLING THE PS DISPLAY FONTS
Fonts that can be used by the PS printer driver are contained on the "PRINTER UTILITIES" CD-ROM that accompanies
the PS3 expansion kit. Install these fonts as needed for the PS printer driver.

1

2

Insert the "PRINTER UTILITIES" CD-ROM that accompanies the PS3 expansion
kit into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
Click the [Start] button (
[CD-ROM] icon ( ).

), click [Computer], and then double-click the

• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button, click [My Computer], and then double-click the [CD-ROM] icon.
• In Windows 2000, double-click [My Computer], and then double-click the [CD-ROM] icon.

Double-click the [Setup] icon (

).

3
In Windows Vista/Server 2008/7, if a message screen appears asking you for confirmation, click [Allow].

The "SOFTWARE LICENCE" window will appear. Make sure that you understand
the contents of the licence agreement and then click the [Yes] button.

4
You can show the "SOFTWARE LICENCE" in a different language by selecting the desired language from the
language menu. To install the software in the selected language, continue the installation with that language selected.

5

Read the message in the "Welcome" window and then click the [Next] button.

Click the [PS Display Font] button.

6

7
8

Follow the on-screen instructions.

Click the [Close] button in the screen of step 6.

1-104

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

CHANGING THE PORT
When using the machine in a Windows environment, follow the steps below to change the port when you have changed
the IP address of the machine or have installed the PC-Fax driver when the machine is connected with a USB cable. If
the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, follow the steps 1 to 3 below and see "Changing to a Standard TCP/IP
Port" (page 1-107) for the remaining steps of the procedure to change the port.

Click the [Start] button (

1

), click [Control Panel], and then click [Printer].

• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes].
• In Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, select [Settings], and then click [Printers].
If [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [start] menu in Windows XP, click the [start] button, click [Control Panel],
click [Printers and Other Hardware], and then click [Printers and Faxes].

Open the printer properties window.

2

(1) Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine.
(2) Select [Properties].

Adding or changing a port.
(1) Click the [Ports] tab.
(2) Click the [Add Port] button.

3
(2)

(1)

To change to a previously created port such as USB port, select the desired port (USB001, etc.) from the list and click
the [Apply] button. This changes the port.

1-105

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Select [SC2 TCP/IP Port] and then click
the [New Port] button.

4
• The "SC2 TCP/IP Port" is added when the printer driver is installed using a "Standard installation", or a "Custom
installation" with "LPR Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)" selected.
• If the printer driver is installed using a "Custom installation" with "IPP" selected, the [SC-Print2005 Port] is added. If
you need to change the printer port when the machine is connected to an intranet or a wide area network (WAN)
using the IPP function, select [SC-Print2005 Port], click the [New Port] button, and follow the on-screen instructions
to create the port again.

Create the new port.
(1) Enter the machine's IP address.

☞ Start Guide "Checking the IP address of the machine"
(2) Make sure that [LPR] is selected.
(3) Make sure that [lp] is entered.
(4) Click the [OK] button.

5

(1) (2)

6
7

(3)

(4)

Click the [Close] button in the screen of step 4.

Make sure the created printer port is selected in the printer properties window
and then click the [Apply] button.

1-106

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
 Changing to a Standard TCP/IP Port
If the machine is being used on an IPv6 network, change the port to a port created using the operating system's
"Standard TCP/IP Port".

1

Follow steps 1 to 3 of "CHANGING THE PORT" (page 1-105).

Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] and then
click the [New Port] button.

2

3

Click the [Next] button.

Enter the machine's IPv6 address in
[Printer Name or IP Address] and click
the [Next] button.

4

Select [Custom] and click the [Settings]
button.

5

1-107

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Configure the port settings.
(1) Select [LPR].
(2) Enter [lp].
(3) Click the [OK] button.

6

(2)

7

(3)

(1)

Click the [Next] button in the screen of step 5.

8

Click the [Finish] button.

9

Click the [Close] button in the screen of step 2.

When using a port created with "Standard TCP/IP Port"
In the screen that appears after you click the [Configure Port] button in the screen of step 3, make sure the [SNMP
Status Enabled] checkbox is not selected ( ). If the [SNMP Status Enabled] checkbox is selected ( ), it may not be
possible to print correctly.

1-108

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT
This chapter explains how to install the PPD file to enable printing from a Macintosh and how to configure the printer
driver settings.
☞ MAC OS X: this page
(v10.2.8, v10.3.9, v10.4.11, v10.5 - 10.5.8. v10.6)
☞ MAC OS 9.0 - 9.2.2: page 1-115
• The PS3 expansion kit is required to use the machine as a printer in a Macintosh environment. In addition, the machine
must be connected to a network. A USB connection cannot be used.
• The scanner driver and PC-Fax driver cannot be used in a Macintosh environment.

MAC OS X
• The explanations of screens and procedures are primarily for Mac OS X v10.4. The screens may vary in other versions of
the operating system.
• The CD-ROM does not include software for Mac OS X10.2.8 and X10.3.9. Contact your dealer or nearest authorised
service representative if you want software for X10.2.8 and X10.3.9.

1
2
3
4

Insert the "Software CD-ROM" into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" that shows "Disc 1" on the front of the CD-ROM.

Double-click the [CD-ROM] icon (

Double-click the [MacOSX] folder.
Before installing the software, be sure to read "ReadMe First". "ReadMe First" is in the [English] folder in the [Readme] folder.

Double-click the folder corresponding to the versions of the operating system.

Double-click the [MX-PKX] icon (

5

) on the desktop.

).

If the "Authenticate" window appears in Mac OS X v10.2.8, enter the password and click the [OK] button.

1-109

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Click the [Continue] button.

6

The Licence Agreement window will appear. Make sure that you understand the
contents of the licence agreement and then click the [Continue] button.

7

A message will appear asking you if you agree to the terms of the licence. Click the [Agree] button.

If the licence appears in the different language, change the language in the language menu.

Select the hard drive where the PPD file
will be installed and click the [Continue]
button.

8

• Be sure to select the hard drive on which your operating
system is installed.
• In Mac OS X v10.6, the screen below appears when you
click the [Change Install Location] button.

Click the [Install] button.
Installation begins.

9

If the "Authenticate" window appears, enter the password and click the [OK] button.

10

When the message "The software was successfully installed" appears in the
installation window, click the [Close] button.

This completes the installation of the software. Next, configure the printer driver settings.

1-110

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Select [Utilities] from the [Go] menu.
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.5 or v10.6, click
[System Preferences] in the Apple menu ( ) and select
[Print & Fax] ( ). When the screen for adding a printer
appears, click the
button and go to step 14.
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8, select [Applications] from
the [Go] menu.

11

Double-click the [Printer Setup Utility] icon ( ).
If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8, double-click the [Utilities] folder and then double-click the [Print Centre] icon.

12
If this is the first time you are installing a printer driver on your computer, a confirmation message will appear. Click the
[Add] button.

Click [Add].

13

Configure the printer driver.

14

• The procedure for configuring the printer driver varies depending on the operating system version. The procedure for
versions 10.4.11, 10.5 - 10.5.5 and v10.6, and the procedure for other versions are explained separately below.
• The machine can print using the IPP function. If you wish to use the IPP function, see "Printing using the IPP function"
(page 1-114) to configure the printer driver settings.

1-111

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

v10.4.11, v10.5 - 10.5.8, v10.6

(1) Click the [Default Browser] icon.
(1)
(2)

If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6, click
the [Default] icon.

(2) Click the machine's model name.
• Using with AppleTalk:
The machine's model name usually appears as
[SCxxxxxx]*.
• Using with Bonjour:
The machine's model name usually appears as
[RDVxxxxxx]*.
* "xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters that varies
depending on your model.

(3)
(4)

(3) Make sure that the PPD file of your model is
selected.
The PPD file of the machine is automatically selected.

(4) Click the [Add] button.
• Using with AppleTalk:
The PPD file of the machine is automatically selected
and the peripheral devices installed on the machine are
detected and automatically configured.
• Using with Bonjour:
The "Installable Options" screen appears. Select the
machine configuration and click the [Continue] button.

v10.2.8, v10.3.9

(1) Select [AppleTalk].
(1)
(2)

If multiple AppleTalk zones are displayed, select the zone
that includes the printer from the menu.

(2) Click the machine's model name.
The machine's model name usually appears as
[SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters that
varies depending on your model.)

(3)
(4)

(3) Select the PPD file of the machine.
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.3.9, select [Auto Select].
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8, select [Sharp] and
click the PPD file of your model.

(4) Click the [Add] button.
If you are using Mac OS X v10.3.9, the PPD file of the
machine is automatically selected and the peripheral
devices installed on the machine are detected and
automatically configured.
The PPD file is installed in the following folders on the startup disk.
[Library] - [Printers] - [PPDs] - [Contents] - [Resources] - [en.lproj]

1-112

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Display printer information.
(2)

(1) Click the machine's name.

(1)

If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6, click
the [Options & Supplies] button, click the [Driver] tab and
go to step 16.

15

(2) Click [Show Info].
If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8, select [Show Info]
from the [Printers] menu.

Select the machine configuration.
If you selected [Auto Select] in (3) of step 14, the machine configuration is detected and automatically configured. Check the
configured settings to make sure they are correct.

(1) Select [Installable Options].
If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6, it does not appear.

(2) Select the options that are installed on the machine.

16

(3) Click the [Apply Changes] button.
If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6, click the [OK] button.

(4) Click to close the window.
You can check the options that are installed on the machine by printing out the "All Custom Setting List" in the system
settings. (However, note that "Input Tray Options" must be set to the number of trays on the machine.) The "All
Custom Settings List" can be printed from [List Print (User)] in the system settings.

This completes the configuration of the printer driver.

1-113

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
 Printing using the IPP function
The machine can print using the IPP function. When the machine is in a remote location, this function can be used in
place of the fax function to print a higher than a fax. If you wish to use the IPP function, follow these steps to select the
PPD file when configuring the printer driver (step 14 on page 1-111).
v10.4.11, v10.5 - 10.5.8, v10.6

(1) Click the [IP Printer] icon.
If you are using Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6, click
the [IP] icon.

(1)
(2)

(2) Select [Internet Printing Protocol] in
"Protocol". Enter the address of the
machine (IP address or domain name) and
the queue name.
Enter "ipp" in "Queue".

(3)

(3) Select [Sharp] in "Print Using" and click the
PPD file of your model.
If you are using Mac OS X v 10.5 to 10.5.8 or v10.6,
select [Select a driver to use] (or [Select Printer Software])
from "Print Using" and click the PPD file for your model.

(4)

(4) Click the [Add] button.
The "Installable Options" screen will appear. Make sure
that the settings are correct and click the [Continue]
button.
☞ Start Guide "Checking the IP address of the machine"

v10.2.8, v10.3.9

(1)

(2)

(1) Select [IP Printing].
(2) Select [Internet Printing Protocol] in
"Printer Type". Enter the address of the
machine (IP address or domain name) and
the "Queue Name".
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8, enter the address of
the machine (IP address or domain name) in "Printer's
Address".
• Enter "ipp" in "Queue Name".

(3)

(4)

(3) Select [Sharp] in "Printer Model" and click
the PPD file of your model.
(4) Click the [Add] button.

☞ Start Guide "Checking the IP address of the machine"

1-114

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

MAC OS 9.0 - 9.2.2
• If you are using Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2, make sure that "LaserWriter 8" has been installed and that the "LaserWriter 8"
checkbox is selected
in "Extensions Manager" in "Control Panels". If not, install it from the system CD-ROM supplied
with your Macintosh computer.
• The CD-ROM does not include software for Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2.
Contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative if you want software for Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2.

1

2
3

Download the software and save the extracted files in any folder.

Double-click the [MacOS] folder.
Before installing the software, be sure to read "ReadMe First". "ReadMe First" is in the [English] folder in the [Readme] folder.

Double-click the [Installer] icon (

).

Click the [Install] button.

4

5

The Licence Agreement window will appear. Make sure that you understand the
contents of the licence agreement and then click the [Yes] button.
Read the message in the window that appears and click the [Continue] button.

6

Installation of the PPD file begins.
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer will appear. Click the [OK] button and restart your
computer.

This completes the installation of the software. Next, configure the printer driver settings.

7

Select [Chooser] from the Apple Menu.

1-115

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

(1)

Create a printer.

(2)

(1) Click the [LaserWriter 8] icon.
If multiple AppleTalk zones are displayed, select the zone
that includes the printer.

8

(2) Click the machine's model name.
The machine's model name usually appears as
[SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters that
varies depending on your model.)

(3)

(3) Click the [Create] button.

Select the PPD file.
(1) Click the PPD file for your model.
(1)

(2) Click the [Select] button.

(2)

9
• If the above dialog box does not appear and you return to the "Chooser" dialog box, follow these steps to select the
PPD file manually.
(1) Make sure that the machine is selected in the "Select a PostScript Printer" list, and then click the [Setup] button
followed by the [Select PPD] button.
(2) Select the PPD file for your model and click the [Open] button.
(3) Click the [OK] button.
• The PPD file is installed in the [Printer Descriptions] folder in the [Extensions] folder.

10

Make sure that the machine is selected in the "Select a PostScript Printer" list
and then click the [Setup] button.
Click the [Configure] button.

11
To automatically configure the settings based on the installed machine options that are detected, click the [Auto
Setup] button.

1-116

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

Select the machine configuration.
(1) Select the options that are installed on the machine.
(2) Select [Options 2] from the menu to change the screen and continue selecting the options
that have been installed on the machine.

12

(3) Click the [OK] button.
You can check the options that are installed on the machine by printing out the "All Custom Setting List" in the system
settings. (However, note that "Input Tray Options" must be set to the number of trays on the machine.) Follow these
steps to print out the "All Custom Setting List": Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, touch the [List Print (User)] key,
and then touch the [Print] key of "All Custom Setting List".

13
14

Click the [OK] button in the window of step 12 to close the window.

Click the close box (

) to close the "Chooser".

This completes the configuration of the printer driver.
Installing the screen fonts
The screen fonts for Mac OS 9.0 - 9.2.2 are contained in the [Font] folder of the "PRINTER UTILITIES" CD-ROM that
accompanies the PS3 expansion kit. Copy the fonts that you wish to install to the [System Folder] of the startup disk.
If you experience problems that may be due to the installed screen fonts, immediately delete the installed fonts from the
system.

1-117

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

REMOVING THE SOFTWARE
To remove the printer driver or software installed using the installer, follow the steps below.

Windows

1

Click the [start] button and then click [Control Panel].
In Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and click [Control Panel].

Click [Uninstall a program].

2
3
4

• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add or Remove Programs].
• In Windows 2000, double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.

Select the program or driver that you wish to delete.
For more information, see the manual for the operating system or Help.

Restart your computer.

Mac OS X

1

Delete the printer that uses the machine's PPD file from the printer list.
To show the printer list, see step 11 and 12 of "MAC OS X" (page 1-109).

Delete the PPD file.

2

The PPD file has been copied to the following folder on the startup disk.
[Library] - [Printers] - [PPDs] - [Contents] - [Resources] - [en.lproj]
Delete the PPD file of the machine from this folder.

Delete the installation information.

3

The installation information file has been copied to the following folder on the startup disk.
[Library] - [Receipts]
Delete the [MX-PKX.pkg] file from this folder.

Mac OS 9.0 - 9.2.2
After deleting the icon of the printer that uses the machine's PPD file from the desktop, follow the steps below.

1

Download the software and save the extracted files in any folder.

1-118

Contents

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

2

Double-click the [MacOS] folder.

3

Double-click the [Installer] icon (

4

).

Select [Remove] in the Install menu and click the [Remove] button.

1-119

Contents

CHAPTER 2
COPIER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
• OUTPUT MODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
COPIER

MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS
TRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
COPYING SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
ORIGINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
• CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

SPECIAL MODES
SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

PAPER TRAYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase) . . . . . 2-47

BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING
COPIES

COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A
BOUND DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy). . . . . . . . 2-49

MAKING COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER TO MAKE COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
• MAKING A COPY USING THE
DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
(Pamphlet Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF
ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE
NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER TO MAKE 2-SIDED COPIES . . . . . . 2-16
• AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING USING
THE DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR
COVERS (Covers/Inserts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover
Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES
(Insert Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS
(Page Layout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
• AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE
EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE . . . . . . . . 2-22
• SELECTING THE ORIGINAL TYPE AND
MANUALLY ADJUSTING THE
EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM . . . . . . . . .
• AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (Auto
Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MANUALLY SELECTING THE RATIO
(Preset ratios/Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH
AND WIDTH SEPARATELY (XY Zoom) . . . . .

2-60
2-61
2-64
2-68

ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency
Inserts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

2-24

COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO
ONE SHEET (Multi Shot). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

2-24

COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy) . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2-25

COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER
(Tab Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
• RELATION BETWEEN THE ORIGINALS
AND THE TAB PAPER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79

2-27

ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
• SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE . . . . . . . . 2-28
• STORING FREQUENTLY USED
ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

2-1

COPIER

COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82

CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN (Interrupt
copy). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127

PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON
COPIES (Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
• GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING
STAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
• ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date) . . . . . 2-89
• STAMPING COPIES (Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
• PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
• PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text) . . . . . . . . 2-97
• CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT
(Layout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
• ADDING A WATERMARK TO A
COPY (Watermark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
[Image Edit] KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY
(Photo Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CREATING A LARGE POSTER
(Multi-Page Enlargement). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) . . .
• COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE
PAPER (Centring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A
COPY (B/W Reverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHECKING A PREVIEW IMAGE OF A COPY
(Preview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
• PREVIEW SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CANCELLING A JOB THAT IS WAITING
IN THE QUEUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GIVING PRIORITY TO A JOB IN THE
QUEUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING INFORMATION ON A COPY
JOB WAITING IN THE QUEUE . . . . . . . . . . .

2-105

2-132
2-133
2-135
2-136
2-137

STORING COPY OPERATIONS (Job
Programs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
• STORING (EDITING/DELETING) A JOB
PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139

2-106
2-108
2-111

APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141
2-112
2-114

ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN
IMAGE (Sharpness). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING
(Proof Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING
(Original Count) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan
Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125

2-2

COPIER

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
COPIER
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a copier.

BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE
Touch the [COPY] key in the touch panel to open the base screen of copy mode.
The base screen shows messages and keys necessary for copying, and settings that have been selected.
(7)
(1)

COPY

IMAGE SEND

(8)
DOCUMENT
FILING

Ready to scan for copy.

0

(2)

Special Modes

(10)

2-Sided Copy

(11)

Output

(12)

Exposure

(3)
(4)
(5)

Auto

(9)

File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Quick File

(13)

Preview

(14)

(6)
(1)

(5)

Mode Select keys

(2)

Output display
(6)

When one or more output functions such as sort, group,
staple sort, or saddle stitch have been selected, this
shows the icons of the selected functions.
☞ OUTPUT (page 2-32)
(3)

[Paper Select] key
Touch this key to change the paper (tray) that is used.
The tray, paper size, and paper type will appear. Trays 1
to 5 can also be touched in the paper size display to open
the same screen.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)

[Exposure] key
This shows the current copy exposure and original type
settings. Touch this key to change the exposure or
original type setting.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 2-22)

(4)

[Original] key
Touch this key to enter the original size manually.
When an original is placed, the detected original size is
displayed. If the original size is set manually, the set size
appears.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-28)

Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
If you wish to switch to copy mode, touch the [COPY]
key.

(7)

Original feed display
This appears when an original is inserted in the
automatic document feeder.

[Copy Ratio] key
This shows the current copy ratio. Touch this key to
adjust the copy ratio.
☞ REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM (page 2-24)

2-3

Contents

COPIER

(8)

Paper select display

(13) Customized keys

This shows the size of paper loaded in each tray.
For the bypass tray, the paper type appears above the
paper size.
The selected tray is highlighted.
The approximate amount of paper in each tray is
indicated by
. Trays 1 to 5 can be touched to open
the same screen as when the [Paper Select] key is
touched.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
(9)

The keys that appear here can be changed to show
settings or functions that you prefer. The following keys
appear by factory default:
☞ Customizing displayed keys (page 2-5)
[File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch one of these keys to use the File function or Quick
File function of document filing mode. These are the
same [File] and [Quick File] keys that appear when the
[Special Modes] key is touched. For information on the
document filing function, see "6. DOCUMENT FILING".

Number of copies display

(14) [Preview] key

This shows the number of copies set.

Touch to view a preview image of a copy in the touch
panel before printing the copy.
☞ CHECKING A PREVIEW IMAGE OF A COPY
(Preview) (page 2-129)

(10) [Special Modes] key
Touch this key to select special modes such as Margin
Shift, Edge Erase, and Dual Page Copy.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
(11) [2-Sided Copy] key
Touch this key to select the 2-sided copying function.
☞ AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 2-16)
(12) [Output] key
Touch this to select an output function such as sort,
group, offset, staple sort, saddle stitch, punch, or fold.
☞ OUTPUT (page 2-32)

The screen explained in this section appears when a saddle stitch finisher, and large capacity tray are installed. The image
will vary depending on the equipment installed.

Tray during paper feeding
Do not pull out a tray while paper is being fed from the tray. This will cause a paper misfeed.

Identifying the tray that is being used to feed paper
(1) While paper is feeding, the job status display of the system bar on the touch panel screen will show the number of
the tray that is being used to feed paper.
(2) The tray being used to feed paper also appears in green in the paper size display in the base screen on the touch
panel.
Base screen
(1)

Job status display on the system bar
Shows the number of the tray being used to feed paper.

Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure

(2)

Auto

Paper size display

File

Shows the tray being used to feed paper in green.
Quick File
Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

Preview

Tray2

2-4

Contents

COPIER

Customizing displayed keys
Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. By assigning frequently used functions to these
keys, you can access the functions with a single touch. To change the function that is assigned to a key, use "Customize
Key Setting" in the Web pages.
When "Erase", "Margin Shift", and "Mirror Image" are assigned to the customized keys
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

Erase
Margin Shift

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

Mirror Image

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

Preview

A4

These 3 keys can be changed
as desired.

System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.

Checking what special modes are selected
The
The

key appears in the base screen when one or more special modes are selected.
key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
OK

Function Review

Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output

Margin Shift

Shift:Right
Front:10mm/Back:10mm

Erase

Edge:10mm
Centre:10mm

Covers/Inserts

Front:2-Sided/Back:Insert
Insertion A:10 Page/B:10 Page

Exposure

1
1

Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

2-5

Contents

COPIER

COPYING SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for copying. Select settings in the order shown below to ensure that the copy
operation takes place smoothly.
For detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter.

Place the original.

1

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic
document feeder, or on the document glass.
1

* Depending on the copy functions used, there are also cases
where functions are selected before the original is placed.

Basic copy settings
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Select the basic copy settings.
The main settings are as follows:
• Exposure and original type ☞CHANGING THE
EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 2-22)
• Copy ratio ☞REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
(page 2-24)
• Original size ☞ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-28)
• Paper Settings ☞PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)

Preview

2-sided copy settings
2-Sided Copy

OK

Select settings as needed for 2-sided copying and 2-sided
scanning of the original.
☞ AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 2-16)

2-6

Contents

COPIER

Output settings
OK

Output
Offset
Tray
Offset

Sort
Saddle
Stitch

Staple
Sort

Punch

Fold

Group

Select copy output settings.
The main settings are as follows:
• Sort mode ☞Sort mode (page 2-34)
• Group mode ☞Group mode (page 2-34)
• Offset mode ☞Offset function (page 2-34)
• Staple sort mode
☞Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page 2-35)
• Pamphlet staple function
☞Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page 2-35)
• Punch function ☞Punch function (page 2-38)
• Fold function ☞Paper folding function (page 2-37)

Special mode settings

Margin Shift

Pamphlet Copy

Select special modes such as "Margin Shift" and "Erase".
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)

OK

Special Modes

Erase

Job
Build

Dual Page
Copy
Tandem
Copy

Covers/Inserts

Transparency
Inserts

Multi Shot

Book Copy

Tab Copy

Card Shot

1
2

Number of copies (sets) setting
Set the number of copies (number of sets).

7
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Plain
8½ 11

Start copying.
Start scanning the original(s) and making copies.
Press the [START] key.

2-7

Contents

COPIER

• When one or more special modes are selected, the
key appears in the base screen. Touch the
key to display a
list of the selected special modes. This lets you check what special modes are selected and the settings of each mode.
☞ Checking what special modes are selected (page 2-5)
• To store a copy job using the document filing function, select copy settings and then touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key.
To cancel all settings, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
When the [CLEAR ALL] key (
) is pressed, all settings selected to that point are cleared and you will return to the base
screen.
To stop scanning of the original and copying, press the [STOP] key (
).
When the [STOP] key (
) is pressed, a message will appear asking you if you want to cancel the job. Touch the [Yes] key
in the message screen.

2-8

Contents

COPIER

ORIGINALS
CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE
When [Auto] appears in the [Original] key, the size of the placed original is automatically detected. The machine automatically
detects the original size when an original is placed and displays the size in the [Original] key in the base screen.

Example of base screen
The original size is displayed.
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

(A)

Preview

(A) "Auto" appears when the automatic original detection function is
operating.
(B) The original size is displayed. An icon shows the orientation of
the original.

(B)

Standard sizes
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size
Detector Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The factory default setting is "Inch-1".

List of original size detector settings
Standard sizes (detected original sizes)
Selections

Document feeder tray
(automatic document feeder)

Document glass

AB-1

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"

AB-2

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm
(8-1/2" x 13")

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")

AB-3

A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")

AB-4

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R,
216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")

AB-5

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R,
216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")

Inch-1

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3

Inch-2

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3

Inch-3

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A3, A4

• When the automatic original detection function is operating and the original is a non-standard size (an inch size or special
size), the closest standard size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the
correct original size.
☞SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE (page 2-28)
• When placing a non-standard size original on the document glass, you can make it easier for the size to be detected by
placing a blank sheet of A4 (8-1/2" x 11), B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"), or other standard size of paper on top of the original.

2-9

Contents

COPIER

Standard original placement orientations
Place originals in the document feeder tray or on the document glass so that the top and bottom of the original are
oriented as shown in the illustration. If the original is not oriented correctly and a function such as stapling is selected,
the staple positions may not be correct. For more information on placing the original, see "ORIGINALS" (page 1-44) in
"1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
[Example 1]
Document feeder tray

Document glass
Place the originals
with the corners
aligned here.

abc

cba

[Example 2]
Document glass
Place the originals
with the corners
aligned here.

cba

abc

Document feeder tray

Automatic copy image rotation (Rotation Copy)
If the orientation of the original and paper are different, the original image will be automatically rotated 90 degrees to
match the paper. (When an image is rotated, a message is displayed.)
[Example]
Orientation of
placed original

Orientation
of paper

The original seen
from behind

The image is rotated
90 degrees

The paper seen
from behind

This function operates in both auto paper selection mode and auto image mode. Rotation can be disabled using
"Rotation Copy Setting" in the System Settings (Administrator).

2-10

Contents

COPIER

PAPER TRAYS
The machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original
(automatic paper tray selection).
If the correct paper size is not selected or you wish to change the paper size, you can select the paper tray manually.

Touch the [Paper Select] key.

Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

1

Preview

You can also touch the paper size display (A) to open the paper tray settings.

(A)
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

(1)

(2)

Preview

Select the tray that you want to use.
(1) Touch the key of the desired tray.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen and the selected tray
will be highlighted.

2

If the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper,
that tray will be automatically selected and the copy job will continue.
To return to automatic paper tray selection after selecting a tray manually, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (

).

System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Paper Tray)
Use this setting to change the tray that is selected by default.

2-11

Contents

COPIER

BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING
COPIES
This section explains the basic procedures for making copies, including selection of the copy ratio and other copy
settings.

MAKING COPIES
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
MAKE COPIES
This section explains how to make copies (1-sided copies of 1-sided originals) using the automatic document feeder.

1

Indicator
line

Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly.

1

Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

Check the paper to be used.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)

File
Quick File

2

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.

2-12

Contents

COPIER

Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.

7
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy

3

Plain
8½ 11

• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct number.

Press the [START] key.

4

To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

2-13

Contents

COPIER

MAKING A COPY USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS
To make a copy of a book or other thick original that cannot be scanned with the automatic document feeder, open the
automatic document feeder and place the original on the document glass. This section explains how to make a copy
(1-sided copy of a 1-sided original) using the document glass.

Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.

Original size
detector

Document glass scale

Document glass scale

mark

mark

A5
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2")

1

B5
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

B5R
A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)
B4 (8-1/2" x 14")
A3 (11" x 17")

• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
• After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.

Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

Check the paper to be used.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)

File
Quick File

2

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.

2-14

Contents

COPIER

Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.

7
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy

3

Plain
8½ 11

• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct number.

Press the [START] key.

4

5

Normally copying will start.
Depending on the copy settings (2-sided copying, etc.), copying may not begin until all originals have been scanned. In this
case, go to the next step.

Remove the original and place the next original, and then press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

6

Read-End

To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

2-15

Contents

COPIER

AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
MAKE 2-SIDED COPIES
Originals

Originals

Copies

Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided
originals

Copies

Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided
originals

Originals

Copies

1-sided copying of 2-sided originals

Copying onto both sides of a sheet saves paper.

1

Indicator
line

Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly.

1

Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

Special Modes

Touch the [2-Sided Copy] key.

2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure

2

Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

2-16

Contents

COPIER

(1)

Select the 2-sided copy mode.

(2)

(1) Touch the key of the desired mode.

OK

2-Sided Copy

: Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals
: Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals
: 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals

3

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Binding
Change

To make 2-sided copies of a 1-sided portrait original placed horizontally, or to invert the reverse side with respect to
the front side when copying a 2-sided original, touch the [Binding Change] key.
☞ Using the [Binding Change] key (page 2-18)

Check the paper to be used.

Special Modes

Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)

2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

File
Quick File

4

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.

Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.

7
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy

5

Plain
8½ 11

• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be made with the copy number display showing "0".
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct number.

Press the [START] key.

6

To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

2-17

Contents

COPIER

Using the [Binding Change] key
Originals

Binding Change is used

A

The reverse side
is upside down.

Binding Change is not used

A

The reverse side
is not upside
down.

A
1

2

Select this when
the pages will be
bound into a
tablet.

A

A

Select this when
the pages will be
bound into a
booklet.

3

2-18

Contents

COPIER

AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING USING THE
DOCUMENT GLASS
Originals

Copies

Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided
originals

Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.

Original size
detector

Document glass scale

Document glass scale

mark

mark

A5
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2")

1

B5
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

B5R
A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)
B4 (8-1/2" x 14")
A3 (11" x 17")

• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
• After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.

Special Modes

Touch the [2-Sided Copy] key.

2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure

2

Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

2-19

Contents

COPIER

(1)

Select the 2-sided copy mode.

(2)

(1) Touch the [1-Sided to 2-Sided] key.

OK

2-Sided Copy

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

3
Binding
Change

The [2-Sided to 2-Sided] key and [2-Sided to 1-Sided] key cannot be used when copying from the document glass.

Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

Check the paper to be used.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)

File
Quick File

4

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.

7

Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.

Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Plain

5

8½ 11

• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct number.

6
7

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.

Remove the original and place the next original, and then press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.

2-20

Contents

COPIER

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

Read-End

8
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (2-Sided Copy)
The default 2-sided copy mode can be changed.

2-21

Contents

COPIER

CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE
The exposure and original image type can be selected to obtain a clear copy.

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL TYPE
Automatic exposure adjustment operates by default to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as
appropriate for the original being copied. ("Auto" is displayed.)
Automatic adjustment takes place to enable optimum copying.
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

SELECTING THE ORIGINAL TYPE AND MANUALLY
ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE
If you wish to select the original type or manually adjust the exposure, touch the [Exposure] key in the base screen of
copy mode and follow the steps below.

Select the original image type.

OK

Exposure

Touch the appropriate original image type key for the original.

Auto

Manual

1

3

Original Image Type

5

Text

Text/
Prtd.Photo

Text/Photo

Printed
Photo

Photo

Map

Scan
Resolution

1

● Original image type select keys
Mode

Description

Text

Use this mode for regular text documents.

Text/Prtd. Photo

This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and
printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.

Text/Photo

This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and
photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.

Printed photo

This mode is best for copying printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.

Photo

Use this mode to copy photos.

Map

This mode is best for copying the light colour shading and fine text found on most maps.

2-22

Contents

COPIER

OK

Exposure

Touch the
Touch the

Auto

Manual

1

3

Adjust the exposure level.
key to make the copy darker.
key to make the copy lighter.

Original Image Type

5

Text

Text/
Prtd.Photo

Text/Photo

Printed
Photo

Photo

Map

2

Scan
Resolution

Guidelines for the exposure level when [Text] is selected:
1 to 2: Dark originals such as a newspaper
3:
Normal density originals
4 to 5: Originals written in pencil or light coloured text

OK

Exposure

Touch the [OK] key.

Auto

Manual

Original Image Type

3
1

3

5

Text

Text/
Prtd.Photo

Text/Photo

Printed
Photo

Photo

Map

Scan
Resolution

• If [Auto] is selected but the darkness or lightness of the image does not seem quite right...
If the image seems too light or too dark when [Auto] is selected, the exposure level can be adjusted using "Copy Exposure
Adjustment" in the system settings (administrator).
• To change the resolution...
When making a full-size copy, you can press the [Scan Resolution] key to select the scanning resolution.
• System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Exposure Type)
This is used to change the default original image type.
• System Settings (Administrator): Copy Exposure Adjustment
The exposure level used for automatic exposure adjustment can be adjusted.
• System Settings (Administrator): 600dpiX600dpi Scanning Mode for Document Feeder/Quick Scan from
Document Glass
The default resolution setting can be changed.

2-23

Contents

COPIER

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (Auto Image)
This section explains the automatic ratio selection function (Auto Image), which automatically selects the ratio to match
the paper size.
When the paper tray is manually changed, the [Auto Image] key appears in the base screen of copy mode. Touch the
[Auto Image] key to have the reduction or enlargement ratio automatically selected based on the original size and the
selected paper size.
First place the original and select the paper tray, and then touch the [Auto Image] key.
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Auto Image

Preview

The selected ratio will appear in the ratio display.

• If the message "Rotate original from
message.

to

" is displayed, change the orientation of the original as indicated in the

• For a non-standard size original, the size must be entered in order to use Auto Image.
• To cancel automatic ratio selection...
Touch the [Auto Image] key so that it is no longer highlighted.
• To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Copy Ratio)
This is used to change the default copy ratio.

2-24

Contents

COPIER

MANUALLY SELECTING THE RATIO (Preset
ratios/Zoom)
Touch the [Copy Ratio] key in the base screen of copy mode to select one of five (or four) preset enlargement ratios or
five (or four) preset reduction ratios (maximum 400%, minimum 25%).
In addition, the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.

Set the ratio.
Touch a preset ratio key and/or the zoom keys to set the ratio.
There are two setting screens. Use the
keys to switch
between the screens.

● 1st screen
OK

Copy Ratio

B4
A3

B5
A4

70%

100

B5
B4

A5
A4

81%

Zoom

A4
A3

B5
B4

%

86%

115%

B5
B4

A4
A3

122%

A5
A4

B5
B4

141%

B5
A4

B4
A3

1
2

• Enlargement keys:
115%, 122% and 141% (for the AB system).
121% and 129% (for the inch system).
• Reduction keys:
70%, 81% and 86% (for the AB system).
64% and 77% (for the inch system).

100%

Auto Image

XY Zoom

● 2nd screen
• Enlargement keys (2 to 4 ratios)
200%, 400%, any ratio (max. of two)
• Reduction keys (2 to 4 ratios)
25%, 50%, any ratio (max. of two)
• [100%] key

(A)

1

OK

Copy Ratio

25%

100

50%

Zoom

%

200%
400%

2
2

300%

75%
100%

350%

99%

Auto Image

XY Zoom

• (A) keys
The keys marked (A) can be set to show any ratio using "Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios" in the system settings
(administrator).
• To quickly select a ratio, touch a reduction or enlargement key to select a ratio close to the desired ratio and then
use the zoom keys for fine adjustment.
• The zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
Touch the
key to increase the ratio, or the
key to decrease the ratio. (If you continue to touch the
key, the ratio will change automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will change rapidly.)

/

• As an alternative to touching the
keys, you can also directly touch the numeric value display key and
change the value with the numeric keys.
• If the message "Image is larger than the copy paper." appears when an enlargement ratio is selected, the image
may not fit on the paper.

2-25

Contents

COPIER

2

Touch the [OK] key.

OK

Copy Ratio

B4
A3

B5
A4

70%

B5
B4

A5
A4

81%

A4
A3

B5
B4

75
Zoom

86%

%

115%

B5
B4

A4
A3

122%

A5
A4

B5
B4

141%

B5
A4

B4
A3

After touching the [OK] key, make sure that a paper size
suitable for the ratio is selected.
1
2

100%

Auto Image

XY Zoom

When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both 25% to 200%.
To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.
System Settings (Administrator): Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios
Two enlargement preset ratios (101% to 400%) and two reduction preset ratios (25% to 99%) can be added. An added
preset ratio can also be changed.

2-26

Contents

COPIER

ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH
SEPARATELY (XY Zoom)
The XY Zoom feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed separately.
Both the horizontal and vertical ratios can be set from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
Touch the [Copy Ratio] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.
When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratio
Copy

Original

1

Touch the [XY Zoom] key.

OK

Copy Ratio

B4
A3

B5
A4

70%

100

B5
B4

A5
A4

81%

Zoom

A4
A3

B5
B4

%

86%

115%

B5
B4

A4
A3

122%

A5
A4

B5
B4

141%

B5
A4

B4
A3

1
2

100%

Auto Image

XY Zoom

(2)

(1), (3)

(4)
OK

Copy Ratio
XY Zoom

Set the horizontal and vertical ratios.
(1) Touch the [X] key.
The [X] key will be highlighted and the horizontal ratio can
be set.

Cancel

50%

X

50

%

Y

70

%

Zoom

64%

129%
200%

(2) Touch one of the preset ratio keys (A) and the
zoom keys (B) to set the X (horizontal) ratio.
(A) A touched preset ratio key will not be highlighted.
(B) The zoom keys can be touched to set the ratio from
25% to 400% in increments of 1%.

400%

77%
100%

2

(A)

(B)

(A)

(3) Touch the [Y] key and set the Y (vertical)
ratio in the same way as the [X] key.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
After touching the [OK] key, make sure that a paper size
suitable for the ratio is selected.

• To quickly select a ratio, touch a preset ratio key (A) to select a ratio close to the desired ratio and then use the
zoom keys (B) for fine adjustment.
• As an alternative to touching the
keys, you can also directly touch the numeric value display key and
change the value with the numeric keys.

When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both 25% to 200%.
To cancel an XY zoom setting...
To cancel an XY Zoom setting, touch the [XY Zoom] key or the [Cancel] key.

2-27

Contents

COPIER

ORIGINAL SIZES
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE
When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size.
Touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.

Specifying an inch original size
(1)

(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.

(2)

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Original

OK
Auto

Manual

Manual

A5

B5R

B4

AB

A5R

A4

A3

Inch

B5

A4R

216x340

216x343
Custom Size

Size Input

Specifying an AB original size
(2)

(1)

(1) Touch the [AB

(3)

Inch] key.

(2) Touch the appropriate original size key.
Original

OK

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Auto
Manual

Manual

5½x8½

8½x11R

11x17

AB

5½x8½R

8½x13

8½x13

Inch

8½x11

8½x14

Custom Size

Size Input

Specifying a non-standard original size

Original

OK
Auto

Touch the [Size Input] key.

A4

Manual

1

A5

B5R

B4

AB

A5R

A4

A3

Inch

B5

A4R

216x340

216x343

Size Input

Custom Size

2-28

Contents

COPIER

(1), (2)

(3)
OK

Original
Cancel

Size Input

X

17

(1~17)
inch

Y

11

(1~11 5/8)
inch

OK

Enter the original size.
(1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
original.
Touch the X (width) numeric value display key to open a
number entry screen. Enter the width of the original with
the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
entry screen. When the document glass is used, a
number from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17") can be
entered.
When the automatic document feeder is used, a number
from 140 mm to 432 mm (5-1/2" to 17") can be entered.
If the horizontal dimension of the original is less than 140
mm (5-1/2"), use the document glass.

(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the
original.

2

Touch the Y (height) numeric value display key to open a
number entry screen. Enter the height of the original with
the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
entry screen. When the document glass is used, a
number from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8") can be
entered.
When the automatic document feeder is used, a number
from 131 mm to 297 mm (5-1/8" to 11-5/8") can be
entered.
If the vertical dimension of the original is less than 131
mm (5-1/8"), use the document glass.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen.
Make sure that the entered dimensions appear in the
[Original] key.

STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES
You can save special original sizes that you frequently use. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and
delete special original sizes.

Storing original sizes (editing/clearing)
Up to 12 special original sizes can be stored.
Touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.

Touch the [Custom Size] key.
OK

Original
Auto

A4

Manual

1

A5

B5R

B4

AB

A5R

A4

A3

Inch

B5

A4R

216x340

216x343

Size Input

Custom Size

2-29

Contents

COPIER

Original

OK

Custom Size

OK

Store the original size.
(1) Touch the [Store/Delete] tab.
(2) Touch a key for storing a custom original
size.

X254 Y210

Touch a key that does not show a size (

Store/Delete

Recall

(2)

2

).

(1)

If you wish to edit or clear a previously stored key...
Touch the key that you want to edit or clear. The following screen will appear.

A custom size has already been stored
in this location.

Cancel

Delete

Modify

• To edit the key, touch the [Amend] key and go to the next step.
• To clear the key, touch the [Delete] key. Make sure that the original size has been cleared and touch the [OK] key.

(1), (2)

3

(3)

Original

OK
Cancel

Size Input

X

420

(25~432)
mm

Y

297

(25~297)
mm

OK

Enter the original size.
(1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
original.
Touch the X (width) numeric value display key to open a
number entry screen. Enter the width of the original with
the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
entry screen. A dimension from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to
17") can be entered.

(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the
original.
Touch the X (width) numeric value display key to open a
number entry screen. Enter the width of the original with
the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
entry screen. A dimension from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to
17") can be entered.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You can also touch the

keys to change the number.

The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off.
To cancel the operation...
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key (

).

2-30

Contents

COPIER

Retrieving a stored original size
To retrieve a stored original size, touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and perform the steps below.

Touch the [Custom Size] key.
OK

Original
Auto

A4

Manual

1

A5

B5R

B4

AB

A5R

A4

A3

Inch

B5

A4R

216x340

216x343
Custom Size

Size Input

(2) (1)

2

(3)

Original

OK

Custom Size

OK

Retrieve the desired stored original size.
(1) Touch the [Recall] tab.
(2) Touch the key of the original size that you
wish to retrieve.

X254 Y210

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Store/Delete

Recall

To cancel the operation...
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key (

).

2-31

Contents

COPIER

OUTPUT
To select output functions and the output tray, touch the [Output] key in the base screen of copy mode. Output functions
that can be selected are sort, group, offset, staple sort, saddle stitch, and punch. All explanations of the settings below
assume that a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
(6)

(7)
OK

Output

(1)
(2)

Offset
Tray

(9)

Centre
Tray

Offset

(3)

Sort

(4)

Staple
Sort

(5)

Group

Saddle
Stitch

Punch

(10)

Fold

(11)

(8)
(1)

(8)

[Offset Tray] key

This is used to staple and fold each set of copies at the
centreline.
☞ Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page
2-35)
When this key is touched, the saddle stitch setting screen
appears. (Only when "Automatic Saddle Stitch" is
enabled in the system settings (administrator).)

Output is delivered to the offset tray. The [Offset Tray]
key is automatically selected when the [Staple Sort] key
is selected.
(2)

[Offset] key
This is used to offset each set of output from the previous
set.
The offset function operates when the checkbox is
selected
and does not operate when the checkbox is
not selected
. (The offset checkmark is automatically
cleared when the staple sort function is selected.)
☞ Offset function (page 2-34)

(3)

(4)

(9)

(10) [Punch] key
This is used to punch holes in the output.
☞ Punch function (page 2-38)
(11) [Fold] key

[Staple Sort] key
This is used to sort output into sets, staple each set, and
deliver the sets to the tray. (Note that the sets will not be
offset in the output tray.) When this function is selected,
three keys will appear for selecting the staple position.
☞ Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page
2-35)

(5)

[Centre Tray] key
Output is delivered to the centre tray.

[Sort] key
This is used to sort (collate) output into sets.
☞ Sort mode (page 2-34)

[Saddle Stitch] key

This folds printed output in half. You can choose whether
the output is folded inward or outward.
☞ Paper folding function (page 2-37)

[Group] key
This is used to group copies by page.
☞ Group mode (page 2-34)

(6)

Output display
An icon will appear to indicate the output mode.

(7)

[OK] key
Touch this key to close the output screen and return to
the base screen.

2-32

Contents

COPIER

The keys that appear will vary depending on what peripheral devices are installed.
In addition, it may not be possible to select some keys depending what peripheral devices are installed. If your screen is
different from the screen of previous page, see the screens that follow.
Example
The screen when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is not installed.

I

IOutput
Offset
Tray

B

II

~

Offset

.-

@l.c

I

[ cD1'

I

I

~

-

-

OK

II

.

Sort

Group

2-33

(

Contents

)

COPIER

OUTPUT MODES
This section explains the output modes.

Sort mode

Group mode

This is used to sort (collate) output into sets.
Example: Sorting the output into 5 sets

This function groups copies by page.
Example: Groups of 5 copies of each page

Originals

Output

Originals

Output

Set the number of copies (5).

Set the number of copies (5).

Touch the [Output] key.

Output

Touch the [Output] key.

Output

Group
Sort

Touch the [Sort] key.

Touch the [Group] key.

Press the [START] key.

Press the [START] key.

The group function is automatically selected when an
original is placed on the document glass.

• The sort function is automatically selected when
originals are placed in the automatic document feeder.
• When the Quick File Folder for document filing is
full, copying of a large number of originals using the
sort function will be impeded. Delete unneeded files
from the Quick File Folder.

Offset function
This function offsets each set of copies from the previous set in the output tray, making it easy to separate sets of copies.
Offset function "ON"

Offset function "OFF"

• The offset function can be used when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed.
• The offset function cannot be selected when the staple sort function is selected.

2-34

Contents

COPIER

Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function
The staple sort function sorts output into sets, staples each set, and delivers the sets to the tray.
The saddle stitch function staples each set in 2 places at the centreline and folds the stapled set.
The relations between the stapling positions, paper orientation, permitted paper sizes for stapling, and number of sheets
that can be stapled are shown below.
For original placement orientations, see "Original placement orientation (for the staple sort and punch functions)" (page 2-38).

4
Staple sort

Stapling positions

Saddle stitch

Vertically-oriented paper

1 staple at top left
corner*1

1 staple at bottom left
corner*1

2 staples at left edge

5

Applicable paper sizes
A4, B5, 8-1/2" x 11", 16K
Number of sheets that can
be stapled:
Saddle stitch finisher and
finisher
Max. 50 sheets*2
Finisher (3 trays)
Max. 100 sheets*2

2-35

Horizontally-oriented paper
• Saddle stitch finisher
Applicable paper sizes
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
8K, 16KR
Number of sheets that can be stapled
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
8K:
Max. 50 sheets*2
• Finisher
Applicable paper sizes
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
8K, 16KR
Number of sheets that can be stapled
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
8K:
Max. 50 sheets*2
• Finisher (3 trays)
Applicable paper sizes
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K, 16KR
Number of sheets that can be stapled
A3, B4, A4R, 11"x17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K
Max. 100 sheets*2

Contents

COPIER

Stapling positions
Saddle stitch (only with
saddle stitch finisher)

Vertically-oriented paper
Saddle stitch cannot be used
when the paper is oriented
vertically

Horizontally-oriented paper
Applicable paper sizes
A3, B4, A4R, 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8K
Number of sheets that can be stapled:
Max. 30 sheets*2

*1 Finisher or saddle stitch finisher
When the top left corner or the bottom left corner of the paper is stapled in one place, the staple is placed diagonally, except in the
following cases (Diagonal stapling):
• When the top left corner of the paper is stapled in one place when using the following paper sizes: A4R, 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x
13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13" and 8-1/2" x 11"R.
Finisher (3 trays)
When the paper is stapled in one place, the staple is placed diagonally regardless of the paper size or paper orientation.
*2 Two sheets (one sheet when pamphlet stapling is performed) of paper up to 256 g/m2 (68 lbs.) can be stapled as covers. When this
is done, the number of sheets that can be used is two less (one less for saddle stitch) than the stated maximum.

• The number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts that are inserted.
• When Mixed Size Original in the special modes is used with the "Same Width" setting, the maximum number of sheets that
can be stapled is 25 for a saddle stitch finisher or 30 for a finisher regardless of the paper size.
• The saddle stitch function can only be used when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.

2-36

Contents

COPIER

Paper folding function
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the fold function can be used to fold printed output in half.
Paper sizes that can be folded using the paper folding function are A4R, B4, A3, 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17",
and 8K. For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be folded, see the specifications in the Safety
Guide.

Fold outside

Fold inside

Touch the [Fold] key to open the fold settings screen. To fold inward (printed side inside), touch the [Fold Inside] key. To
fold outward (printed side outside), touch the [Fold Outside] key.
Output

OK

Fold

Cancel

OK

Select fold direction for 1-sided copy.
Select fold direction of Side 1 for 2-sided copy.
Fold copies inside.

Fold Inside

Fold Outside

• Special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used.
• When the paper folding function is selected, the staple or hole punch function cannot be used.
• When two-sided printing is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), the paper folding function cannot be
used.

2-37

Contents

COPIER

Punch function
If an optional punch module is installed, holes can be punched in output.
Paper size that can be punched is B5R to A3 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2" to 11" x 17"). However, A3W (12" x 18") sized paper and
special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used.
[Examples]

[Original 1]

[Punch positions]

[Original 2]

[Punch positions]

The hole punch function cannot be used with the saddle stitch or paper folding function together.

Original placement orientation (for the staple sort and punch functions)
When using the staple sort function or the punch function, the original must be placed as shown below to enable stapling
or punching in the desired position on the paper.
Staple sort
Document feeder tray

Punch
Document glass

Document feeder tray

Document glass

One staple (top)

cba

abc

Two staples

abc
abc

cba

cba

One staple (bottom)

cba
abc

cba
abc

2-38

Contents

COPIER

MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY
In addition to plain paper, the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film, tab paper, and other special
media.
For detailed information on paper that can be loaded in the bypass tray, see "IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER"
(page 1-27) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE". For precautions when loading paper in the bypass tray, see
"LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-42) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

Place the original.
1

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
When placing the originals on the document glass...
After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.

1

1

Place paper in the bypass tray.
Insert the paper with print side face up.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed",
load the paper with the print side face up*.
* If "Disabling of Duplex" is enabled in the system settings
(administrator), load the paper in the normal way (face up in
trays 1 to 5; face down in the bypass tray).

2

When loading A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13"
or 8-1/2" x 11"R paper, be sure to pull out the bypass tray
extension. Pull the bypass tray extension all the way out. If the
bypass tray extension is not pulled all the way out, the size of
the loaded paper will not be correctly displayed.

Special Modes

Touch the [Paper Select] key.

2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

File

3

Quick File
Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

2-39

Contents

COPIER

Check the paper type setting for the
bypass tray. If you need to change the
setting, touch the paper type key.
If you do not need to change the paper size and type that
appear under "Bypass Tray", go to step 7.

4

Paper Select
Cancel

Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting
Select the paper type.

1

5

Plain

Pre-Printed

Recycled

Letter Head

Pre-Punched

Colour

Thin Paper

Labels

Heavy Paper

Transparency

Tab Paper

Envelope

Select the type of paper used in the
bypass tray.
Select the paper type that you will use.

2

Heavy Paper : 106 - 209 g/m2 (28 lbs.bond, -110 lbs.index)

Set the paper size.
(1) Select the paper size.
[Auto-Inch] key
When the paper placed in the bypass tray is an inch size
(8-1/2" x 11", etc.), the paper size will be detected
automatically and an appropriate size set.
[Auto-AB] key
When the paper inserted in the bypass tray is an AB size
(A4, etc.), the paper size will be detected automatically
and an appropriate size set.
[Custom Size] key
Touch this key if you wish to enter numeric values for the
size of the loaded paper.
☞ Enter the paper size of the bypass tray (page 2-41)
[Manual] key
This key can be touched to display the [16K], [16KR], and
[8K] keys. Touch one of these keys if you loaded the
corresponding size of paper.

6

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
If tab paper is selected, check the size. Touch the [Auto-Inch] key or the [Auto-AB] key. When you have finished
checking/changing the setting, touch the [OK] key.

2-40

Contents

COPIER

Select the bypass tray.

(2)

(1)

(1) Touch the paper size key of the bypass tray.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

7

Press the [START] key.

8

Scanning begins.
• If the originals were placed in the document feeder tray, the originals are copied.
• If you placed the originals on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When using sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
press the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

Enter the paper size of the bypass tray
When the [Custom Size] key is touched, the paper size entry screen appears.
Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting

OK

Size Input

OK

X420 Y297

X

420

(148~432)
mm

Y

297

(100~297)
mm

Touch the X (width) numeric value display key to open a
number entry screen. Enter the width of the paper with
the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
entry screen.
Touch the Y (height) numeric value display key to open a
number entry screen. Enter the height of the paper with
the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key in the number
entry screen.

AB

X420 Y297
Inch

X420 Y297

• You can also touch the

key to change the number.

• Stored custom paper sizes appear in the keys on the left side of the screen. Custom paper sizes are stored in the system
settings. For details, see "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS". If the key for the size that you
wish to enter appears, touch that key.

2-41

Contents

COPIER

SPECIAL MODES
This chapter explains Margin Shift, Erase, Dual Page Copy, and other special modes.

SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is pressed in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. Touch the
keys to move between the screens. After selecting special
mode settings, touch the [OK] key in the special modes menu screen to complete the settings and return to the base
screen of copy mode.

Special modes menu (1st screen)

2-Sided Copy

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

Margin Shift

Output
Exposure
Auto

(7)

Quick File
Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

(1)

[Margin Shift] key

(2)

[Erase] key

Covers/Inserts

(10)

(8)

☞ ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift) (page 2-45)
☞ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase) (page

(9)

[Dual Page Copy] key

(11)

Tandem
Copy

1
2

Multi Shot

(12)
Tab Copy

Card Shot

[Transparency Inserts] key

☞ ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON

[Multi Shot] key

☞ COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO ONE
SHEET (Multi Shot) (page 2-73)

☞ COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND

(10) [Book Copy] key

☞ COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy) (page 2-75)

[Pamphlet Copy] key

☞ MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT

(11) [Tab Copy] key

☞ COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (Tab
Copy) (page 2-79)

[Job Build] key

☞ COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS AT

(12) [Card Shot] key

☞ COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE

ONCE (Job Build) (page 2-54)
(6)

(6)

TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency Inserts)
(page 2-71)

(Pamphlet Copy) (page 2-51)
(5)

Inserts

Dual Page
Copy

Preview

DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy) (page 2-49)
(4)

Job
Build

(3)

(8)Transparency (9)

Book Copy

2-47)
(3)

Erase

Pamphlet Copy

File

Copy Ratio

OK

Special Modes

Special Modes

SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot) (page 2-82)

[Tandem Copy] key

☞ USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE
NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy) (page 2-57)

(7)

[Covers/Inserts] key

☞ USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR COVERS
(Covers/Inserts) (page 2-60)

2-42

Contents

COPIER

Special modes menu (2nd screen)
OK

Special Modes

(1)

(2)
Stamp

(4)

(5)
File

(7)

(1)

(3)
Image Edit

Original
Count

Sharpness

(6)
Quick File

Proof Copy

(8) Mixed Size (9)
Original

Slow Scan
Mode

(6)

[Stamp] key

☞ PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON COPIES

[Proof Copy] key

☞ CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING (Proof

(Stamp) (page 2-85)
(2)

[Image Edit] key

(3)

[Sharpness] key

Copy) (page 2-117)
(7)

☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-105)
☞ ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE

(8)

[File] key

☞ CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED

[Mixed Size Original] key

☞ COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original) (page 2-122)

This saves a job in a folder of the document filing
function.
(5)

[Original Count] key

ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING (Original
Count) (page 2-120)

(Sharpness) (page 2-116)
(4)

2
2

(9)

[Quick File] key

[Slow Scan Mode] key

☞ COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)

This saves a job in the Quick File folder of the document
filing function.

(page 2-125)

• Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. In this case, a message indicating that the combination is not possible will be displayed.
• The displayed menu will vary depending on the country and regions.

2-43

Contents

COPIER

[OK] key and [Cancel] key
In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:

Margin Shift

Right

(A)
(B)
(C)

OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Left

Down

Side 1

10

OK

Side 2
(0~20)
mm

10

(0~20)
mm

(A) Enter the selected special mode settings and return to the base screen of copy mode.
(B) Enter the selected special mode settings and return to the special modes menu screen. Touch this key when you
wish to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special modes menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special modes menu
screen.

2-44

Contents

COPIER

ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift)
This function is used to shift the copy image right, left or down to adjust the margin.
This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder.
Shifting the image to the right so the copies can be bound at the left edge with a string
Not using margin shift

Using margin shift

1

1

1

1

The punch holes cut off
part of the image

The image is moved to
allow space for the string
holes so the image is not
cut off.

Margin shift positions
Top edge
Left
edge

1

Right
edge

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

2

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Margin Shift] key.

☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)
(1)

(2)

(3)

Cancel

Margin Shift

3

Right

(1) Touch the margin shift position.

OK

Special Modes

Left

Down

Side 1

10

Select one of the three positions.

OK

(2) Set the amount of the margin shift with
.

Side 2
(0~20)
mm

Set the margin shift.

10

0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.

(0~20)
mm

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

2-45

Contents

COPIER

Press the [START] key.

4

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

Rotation copy cannot be used in combination with margin shift.
To cancel the margin shift setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Margin Shift Setting
The default margin shift setting can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1"). The factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2").

2-46

Contents

COPIER

ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that occur when copying thick originals or
books.
When a thick book is copied
Not using the erase
function

Using the erase
function

Shadows appear here
Shadows appear on the
copy.

Shadows do not appear on
the copy.

Erase modes
Edge Erase

1

Centre Erase

Edge + Centre Erase

Side Erase

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

2

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Erase] key.

☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-47

Contents

COPIER

(1)

(2)

(1) Touch the desired erase mode.

OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Erase

Edge
Erase

Select the erase settings.

(3)

Centre
Erase

Edge+Centre
Erase

Edge

10

Select one of the four positions.
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.

OK

Centre
(0~20)
mm

10

Erase
Side Erase

(0~20)
mm

Erase position
for Side 2

Up

Side Erase

OK

Cancel

Left

Right
Same Side as
Side 1

Down

Different Side
from Side 1

Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase
and make sure that a checkmark appears.
When performing 1-sided to 2-sided copying or 2-sided to
2-sided copying, set the erase edge on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the erase edge settings, touch
the [OK] key.

3

(2) Set the erasure width with

.

0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1") can be entered.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [START] key.

4

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio.
For example, if the erase width setting is 20 mm (1") and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 10 mm (1/2").
To cancel the erase setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment
The default erase width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1"). The factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2").

2-48

Contents

COPIER

COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A
BOUND DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy)
The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two document pages that are placed side by side on the
document glass. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document.
Copying the facing pages of a book or bound document

5

6
5

Book or bound document

6

The facing pages are copied
onto 2 separate pages.

Place the original on the document glass.
Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark

.

Size mark

Centreline of
A3 original

1

Centreline of
11" x 17" original
The page on this
side is copied first.
Centreline of original
A3
(11" x 17")

Special Modes
2-Sided Copy

Select A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper.
Select the paper as explained in "PAPER TRAYS" (page 2-11).

Output
Exposure
Auto

File

2

Quick File
Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A3
Plain

A3

Preview

2-49

Contents

COPIER

(2)

3

Pamphlet Copy

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

OK

Special Modes

Margin Shift

Select Dual Page Copy.

(3)

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
Dual Page
Copy

Erase

Tandem
Copy

Job
Build

Covers/Inserts

Transparency
Inserts

Multi Shot

Book Copy

Tab Copy

Card Shot

(2) Touch the [Dual Page Copy] key so that it is
highlighted.

1
2

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [START] key.

4

Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

• When using dual page copy, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function.
However, note that [Centre Erase] and [Edge + Centre Erase] cannot be used.
To cancel dual page copy...
Touch the [Dual Page Copy] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

2-50

Contents

COPIER

MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
(Pamphlet Copy)
This function copies 2 original pages onto the front side and 2 original pages onto the reverse side of each sheet of
paper so that the copies can be folded at the centreline to form a pamphlet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
Pamphlet copy using 8 original pages
In pamphlet form

Originals

5

4

3

4

2nd page

3rd page

4th page

5

6

7

5th page

6th page

7th page

2

3

2

1st page

7

5

7

8th page

Binding side
Left binding

5

7

7

4

2

3

5

2

3

5

5

4

Right binding

7

7

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

1
If the originals are 2-sided, place them in the document feeder tray.

Select the special modes.

2

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Pamphlet Copy] key.

☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-51

Contents

COPIER

OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Pamphlet Copy

3

Original
1-Sided
2-Sided

Left
Binding

OK

Right
Binding
Cover
Setting

Select pamphlet copy settings.
(1) If the original is 1-sided, touch the [1-Sided]
key. If the original is 2-sided, touch the
[2-Sided] key.
(2) Select the binding edge ([Left Binding] or
[Right Binding]).
(3) To insert a cover, touch the [Cover Setting]
key.

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(3)

Pamphlet Copy
Cancel

Cover Setting

Select cover settings.
(1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
the [Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No]
key.

Print on Cover(2-Sided)

Paper Tray

Yes
Bypass
Tray

OK

If you do not want to add a cover, go to step 5.

No

(2) Select paper settings for the cover.

(A)

(A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the paper tray for the cover in the
tray selection screen and touch the [OK] key.

A3
Plain

(B)

4

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
• When the cover paper is fed from the inserter, the cover cannot be copied on.
• Two-sided copying is not possible on label sheets, transparency film, and tabbed paper. When copying on a cover,
do not select a tray that has one of these types of paper.
To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.

2-52

Contents

COPIER

Special Modes
Cancel

Pamphlet Copy

OK

Touch the [OK] key.

OK

You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

5
Original
1-Sided

2-Sided

Left
Binding

Right
Binding
Cover
Setting

Press the [START] key.

6

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

• To make pamphlet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function.
• Pamphlet copy cannot be used when transparency film or other media that cannot be turned over is used. (However, when
the inserter is used to insert the paper as covers or inserts, pamphlet copying is possible.)
• When the pamphlet copy function is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected
that prevent 2-sided copying, the pamphlet copy function cannot be used.
• Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the
machine. Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically produced at the
end if the number of original pages is not a multiple of four.
• When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the saddle stitch function can be used.
When pamphlet copy is used in combination with the saddle stitch function and the number of originals is greater than the
number of sheets that can be stapled, a message will appear showing the [Cancel] key, the [Continue] key, and the
[Divide] key.
To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key. To make pamphlet copies without stapling, touch the [Continue] key. To divide
the pages into sets that can be stapled, touch the [Divide] key.
If you selected cover insertion settings, it will not be possible to select "Divide". You can either continue pamphlet copying
without stapling, or cancel the job.
To cancel pamphlet copy...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Automatic Saddle Stitch
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, this setting can be enabled to have saddle stitch take place automatically when the
pamphlet copy function is selected.

2-53

Contents

COPIER

COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF
ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job Build)
When copying a very large number of originals, this function allows you to divide the originals into sets and feed each
set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time.
Use this function when you wish to copy all of the originals as a single job but the number of originals exceeds the
maximum number that can be inserted.
This function is convenient when you wish to sort copies of a large number of originals into multiple sets. Because all
originals are copied as a single job, you are saved the trouble of sorting the copies that would be required if the originals
were divided into separate copy jobs.
When scanning originals in sets, divide the sheets so that no set has more than the number of paper that can be loaded,
and then scan from the set with the first page. The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.
Sorting the copies of a large number of originals into 2 sets
Originals are
scanned in
separate sets

Originals

1
1
1

1
101

Indicator
line

Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

1

1

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.

(2)

(3)
OK

Special Modes

Margin Shift

2

Pamphlet Copy

Select Job Build.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
Dual Page
Copy

Erase

Tandem
Copy

Job
Build

Covers/Inserts

Transparency
Inserts

Multi Shot

Book Copy

Tab Copy

Card Shot

1
2

(2) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [START] key to scan the first set of originals.
Scanning begins.

3
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

2-54

Contents

COPIER

Insert the next set of originals and press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.

4

The copy settings (Exposure, Paper Select, and Copy Ratio only) can be changed for each set of originals. If you need
to change the copy setting, follow the steps in "Changing the copy settings for each set of originals".
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

). All scanned data will be cleared.

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original and press [Start].
to change copy settings,
press [Change].

5

Change

To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (

Read-End

).

If the Quick File Folder of document filing mode is full, copying in job build mode will be impeded. Delete unneeded files from
the Quick File Folder.
To cancel job build mode....
Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.

2-55

Contents

COPIER

Changing the copy settings for each set of originals
The copy settings (Exposure, Paper Select, and Copy Ratio only) can be changed for each set of originals.
Perform the step below before pressing the [Start] key to scan the originals in step 4 above.

Touch the [Change] key.
Place next original and press [Start].
to change copy settings,
press [Change].

1

Change

Read-End

Read-End

Exposure

2

Scanning of the originals will begin using the changed copy
settings.
To cancel the copy setting changes and begin copying without
scanning the new originals, touch the [Read-End] key.

Auto

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Change the desired copy settings in the
screen that appears and press the [Start]
key.

Preview

• The original size cannot be changed manually with the [Original] key. If the automatic original detection function is
operating, the original size will be detected for each set of originals placed.
• When the bypass tray is selected, it is not possible to change the paper type.
• If "XY Zoom" was set for the ratio when the previous original was scanned, it will not be possible to change the ratio.
• When "Job Build" is used in combination with the functions below, the [Change] key will not appear in the screen of step 1
above.
Pamphlet copy, tandem copy, covers/inserts, transparency inserts, multi-shot, book copy, tab copy, staple sort, saddle
stitch

2-56

Contents

COPIER

USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE
NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy)
Two machines connected to the same network can be used to run a large copy job in parallel.
Each machine prints half of the copies, reducing the time required to complete the job.
Master machine and slave machine
In the following explanation, the master machine is the machine that is used to scan the originals. The slave machine is
another machine specified in the master machine that only helps print the copies; it is not used to scan the originals.
Master machine
2 sets of
copies

4 sets of copies are
made
2 sets of
copies

Slave machine
Network environment
Before using tandem copy
• To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network. Even if more machines are connected to the
network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job.
• To use the tandem copy function, "Tandem Connection Setting" must be configured in the system settings
(administrator).
• When configuring the system settings in the master machine, the IP address of the slave machine is required. For the
port number, it is best to use the initial setting (50001). Unless you experience difficulty with this setting, do not
change the port number. The tandem settings should be configured by your network administrator. If the master
machine and slave machine will switch roles, configure the IP address of the master machine in the slave machine.
The same port number can be used for both machines.

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

(2)

(3)
OK

Special Modes

Select tandem copy.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
Margin Shift

2

Pamphlet Copy

Erase

Job
Build

Dual Page
Copy
Tandem
Copy

Covers/Inserts

Transparency
Inserts

Multi Shot

Book Copy

Tab Copy

Card Shot

1
2

(2) Touch the [Tandem Copy] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

2-57

Contents

COPIER

Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set. When the [START] key is
pressed, the copies will automatically be divided between the
master and slave machines.
If an odd number of copies is set, the master machine will print
the extra set.

3

If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct number.

Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key.
The following screen appears when the [START] key is pressed.

Starting tandem operation.
Please wait.

After the message appears, tandem copying begins.

4

If tandem copying is not possible, the following screen appears.

Tandem output is not allowed.
Output all sets using master machine?
(Cancel will delete the job.)

OK

Cancel

To have the master machine make all copies, touch the [OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key.
• To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

• To cancel tandem copying...
Touch the [STOP] keys (
) on both the master machine and the slave machine.

2-58

Contents

COPIER

In this situation...
A punch module is installed on the master machine but not on the slave machine.
•Copying without punching: tandem copy is possible.
•Copying with punching: tandem copy is not possible.
In this way, if tandem copying is executed using a function that the slave machine does not have, a message will appear. To
have the master machine make all copies, touch the [OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key.
If a machine runs out of paper
If either the master machine or the slave machine run out of paper, the machine that ran out of paper will hold the job while
the machine that still has paper continues the job. When paper is added to the machine that ran out, the job resumes.
When user authentication is enabled
User authentication is enabled in the master machine: tandem copying is possible.
User authentication is enabled in the slave machine but not in the master machine: tandem copying is not possible.
If tandem copying is performed without setting the number of copies
A message will appear and the master machine and slave machine will each make one set of copies (total of two sets).
To cancel tandem copy...
Touch the [Tandem Copy] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Tandem Connection Setting
This must be configured to use the tandem function. This can also be used to disable the tandem function.

2-59

Contents

COPIER

USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR
COVERS (Covers/Inserts)
A different type of paper can be inserted in positions corresponding to front and back covers of a copy job when the
automatic document feeder is used. A different type of paper can also be automatically added as an insert at specified
pages.
Example of adding covers

Example of adding inserts

Originals

Originals
Back
cover

Front cover
Inserts

Example of adding covers/inserts
Originals
Back
cover

About the explanations of covers and
inserts
There are various ways of using covers and inserts. To
keep the explanations simple, covers and inserts are
explained separately. For specific examples, see
"Examples of covers and inserts" (page 2-141).

Front
cover
Inserts

Preparations for using covers and inserts
• Load the cover/insert paper in the tray before using the cover/insert function.
• Before selecting the cover/insert function, place the originals in the document feeder tray, select 1-sided or 2-sided
copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings. When these settings have been
completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts.
• The originals must be scanned using the automatic document feeder. The document glass cannot be used.
• For covers, only one sheet can be inserted for the front cover and only one sheet can be inserted for the back cover.
For inserts, up to 100 sheets can be inserted. Note that two insert sheets cannot be inserted between the same two
pages.
• When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insert cannot be inserted between the front and reverse
sides of an original.
• Covers/inserts cannot be inserted in transparency film and other media that cannot be turned over before output.
(However, when the inserter is used without performing cover or insert copying, insertion is possible.)

2-60

Contents

COPIER

INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover Settings)
A different type of paper can be inserted at the positions corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job.
This is useful for arranging documents in an attractive format and for using a different type of paper as a cover on an
estimate sheet or similar document.
Covers can be used in combination with inserts.
Copying on a front cover and inserting together with a back cover
AAA

AAA
1

2

3

4

5

Front cover

1

Originals

2
3
4

Back cover

5

Front cover paper

Back cover paper

Copies

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

1

Indicator
line

1
The document glass cannot be used.

Select the special modes.

2

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key.

☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

OK

Special Modes

Cover Setting

3

Touch the [Front Cover] key.

OK

Cancel

Covers/Inserts

Inserts Setting

Front
Cover

Insertion
Type A

Back
Cover

Insertion
Type B

Insertion
Settings

Tray Settings

Page Layout

2-61

Contents

COPIER

(3)

(2) (1)

(4)

Covers/Inserts
Cancel

Front Cover Setting
Paper Tray

Bypass
Tray

OK

Print on Front Cover
Yes

No

1-Sided

2-Sided

Select cover settings.
(1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
the [Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No]
key.
If the [No] key is touched, only cover insertion will be
performed.
In this case, go to step (3).

(A)

A4
Plain

(B)

(2) To copy on one side of the cover, touch the
[1-Sided] key. To copy on both sides of the
cover, touch the [2-Sided] key.
(3) Select paper settings for the cover.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the paper tray for the cover in the
tray selection screen and touch the [OK] key.

4

(4) Touch the [OK] key.
• If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied on, tab
paper can be inserted.
• When the cover paper is fed from the inserter, the cover cannot be copied on.
To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.

OK

Special Modes

Cover Setting

5

OK

Cancel

Covers/Inserts

Inserts Setting

Front
Cover

Insertion
Type A

Back
Cover

Insertion
Type B

Insertion
Settings

Tray Settings

If you wish to insert a back cover, touch
the [Back Cover] key.
The screen of step 4 appears. The procedures are the same as
for the front cover. Follow the procedures in step 4.
When following the procedures, substitute "Back Cover" for
"Front Cover".

Page Layout

2-62

Contents

COPIER

6

You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
You can touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the [Insertion Type
B] key to select insert settings.
☞ INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES (Insert
Settings) (page 2-64)
To check your settings, touch the [Page Layout] key.
☞ CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)
(page 2-68)

OK

Cancel

Covers/Inserts
Cover Setting

Touch the [OK] key.

OK

Special Modes

Inserts Setting

Front
Cover

Insertion
Type A

Back
Cover

Insertion
Type B

Insertion
Settings

Tray Settings

Page Layout

Press the [START] key.
Copying of the originals in the document feeder tray begins.

7
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

• This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.
• The document glass cannot be used.
• Cover settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).
To cancel cover sheet insertion...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-63

Contents

COPIER

INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES
(Insert Settings)
You can have different paper automatically inserted as inserts at specified pages of copies. Two types of paper can be
used as inserts, and the insertion positions can be specified separately for each.
Covers can be used in combination with inserts.
Example: Insert A after page 3 and insert B after page 5.

Originals
1
2

Insert A

3

1

2

3

4

5

4

6

5

Insert B

6

Copies

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

1

Indicator
line

1
The document glass cannot be used.

Select the special modes.

2

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key.

☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

OK

Special Modes

Cover Setting

3

Touch the [Insertion Type A] key.

OK

Cancel

Covers/Inserts

Inserts Setting

Front
Cover

Insertion
Type A

Back
Cover

Insertion
Type B

Insertion
Settings

Tray Settings

Page Layout

2-64

Contents

COPIER

(3)

(1) (2) (4)

Select insert settings.
(1) Select insert paper settings.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the insert is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the inserts, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the desired paper tray in the tray
selection screen and touch the [OK] key.

(A)
(B)

(2) If the insert will be copied on, touch the
[Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No] key.

4

If the [No] key is touched, only insert sheet insertion will
be performed.
In this case, go to step (5).

(3) To copy on one side of the insert, touch the
[1-Sided] key. To copy on both sides, touch
the [2-Sided] key.
(4) If you wish to perform tab copying, touch
the [Tab Copy] key.
When tab paper is used for inserts, the tab paper can be
copied on. To select tab copying, see "2. COPYING
CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (Tab Copy)" (page 2-79).

(5) Touch the [OK] key.
• If both sides of the insert will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not
copied on, tab paper can be inserted.
• When the insert paper is fed from the inserter, the insert cannot be copied on.
• If tab copy is selected in the insert settings, two-sided copying on the inserts is not possible.

OK

Special Modes

Cover Setting

5

Front
Cover

OK

Cancel

Covers/Inserts

Inserts Setting
Insertion
Type A
Insertion
Settings

Back
Cover

Insertion
Type B

Tray Settings

If you wish to insert a different type of
insert sheet, touch the [Insertion Type B]
key.
The screen of step 4 appears. Settings are selected in the
same way as for insert type A. Follow the procedures in step 4.
When following the procedures, substitute "Insert Type B" for
"Insert Type A".

Page Layout

2-65

Contents

COPIER

OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Covers/Inserts

OK

Inserts Setting

Cover Setting

6

Touch the [Insertion Settings] key.

Front
Cover

Insertion
Type A

Back
Cover

Insertion
Type B

Insertion
Settings

Tray Settings

(1)

Page Layout

(2)

(5)

Covers/Inserts
OK

Insertion Settings

Insertion Page
Insertion
Type A
Tray 1
A4
Plain

(A)

Insertion
Type B
Bypass
Tray
A4
Plain

(B)

10

Specify the pages where inserts A and B
will be inserted.
(1) Touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the
[Insertion Type B] key.
Specify the page where the highlighted insert will be
inserted.
(A) This shows the tray selected for insert type A and the
paper size and type.
(B) This shows the tray selected for insert type B and the
paper size and type.
When the [Insertion Type A] key is highlighted, the insert
sheet insertion settings are applied to [Insertion Type A].
When the [Insertion Type B] key is highlighted, the insert
settings are applied to [Insertion Type B].

Insertion
Total:4

Enter

(3)

(C)

(2) Enter the page number where the insert
sheet will be inserted with the numeric
keys.
For more information, see "Inserts (copying of 1-sided
originals)" (page 2-146) and "Inserts (copying of 2-sided
originals)" (page 2-146).
The [CLEAR] key (
) can be pressed to return the
setting of the selected item to the default value. If you
make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then
enter the correct number.

7

(3) Touch the [Enter] key.
(C) This shows the total number of inserts. Up to 100
insert sheets can be inserted. To insert multiple
inserts, touch the [Enter] key after entering each
insertion page number (insertion position) with the
numeric keys.

(4) To insert another insert sheet, repeat steps
(1) to (3).
(5) Touch the [OK] key.
If both sides of the insert will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied
on, tab paper can be inserted.

2-66

Contents

COPIER

Cancel

Covers/Inserts
Cover Setting

8

Touch the [OK] key.

OK

Special Modes

You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
To select cover settings, touch the [Front Cover] key or the
[Back Cover] key.
☞ INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover Settings) (page
2-61)
To check your settings, touch the [Page Layout] key.
☞ CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)
(page 2-68)

OK

Inserts Setting

Front
Cover

Insertion
Type A

Back
Cover

Insertion
Type B

Insertion
Settings

Tray Settings

Page Layout

Press the [START] key.
Copying of the originals in the document feeder tray begins.

9
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

• Use the same size of paper for the inserts as for the copies.
• Up to 100 insert sheets can be added. Note that two insert sheets cannot be inserted between the same two pages.
• When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insert cannot be added between the front and reverse sides of
an original page.
• This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.
• Cover/insert settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).
To cancel cover sheet insertion...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-67

Contents

COPIER

CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)
Cover settings and insert settings can be combined.
This section explains how to check completed cover and insert insertion page settings, and change or delete insertion
pages.
Changing insert A from page 4 to page 5

1

1

2

2

3

3
4

4th page, insert A

4

5

5

6

5th page, insert A

6

7th page, insert B

7

7

8

7th page, insert B

8

9th page, insert B

9

9

10

9th page, insert B

10

11

11

12th page, insert A

12

12

12th page, insert A

Select the special modes.

1

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key.

☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Covers/Inserts
Cover Setting

2

Touch the [Page Layout] key.

OK

Inserts Setting

Front
Cover

Insertion
Type A

Back
Cover

Insertion
Type B

Insertion
Settings

Tray Settings

Page Layout

2-68

Contents

COPIER

Touch the key of the page that you wish
to delete or change.

Example: Touch insert A at page 4
Covers/Inserts
OK

Page Layout

1
Insertion
Type A
4/-

Insertion
Type B
7/-

Insertion
Type B
9/-

Insertion
Type A
12/-

1

If you do not need to change the setting, touch the [OK] key
and go to step 6.
• Each key shows a print image icon and the insertion page.
• If there are multiple screens, touch the
keys to move
through the screens.
To edit a cover, touch the [Front Cover] key or the [Back Cover]
key and go to step 4.
Touch the key of the insertion page that you want to edit or
clear. The following screen will appear.

Amend the insertion?

Cancel

3

Delete

Amend

• To delete the page, touch the [Delete] key. After deleting the
key, touch the [OK] key and go to step 6.
• To edit the page, touch the [Amend] key.
To edit an insert, touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the
[Insertion Type B] key and go to step 5.
• To cancel, touch the [Cancel] key.
Icons
: Copy on front side only
: Copy on reverse side only
: 2-sided copy
: Do not copy
For inserts, the insertion page also appears.
* represents a page number.
*/-: Copy only on front side at page *
*/*: 2-sided copy at page */*
<*: Insert without copying at page *

Change the front/back cover settings.

Covers/Inserts
Front Cover Setting

Paper Tray

Cancel

OK

Print on Front Cover
Yes

No

1-Sided

2-Sided

Bypass
Tray

4

The settings are changed in the same way as they are initially
configured. See step 4 of "INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES
(Cover Settings)" (page 2-61) to change the cover settings.
After changing the settings, touch the [OK] key and return to
step 3.

A4
Plain

To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.

2-69

Contents

COPIER

Change the settings for insert type A/B.

Covers/Inserts
OK

Insertion Amend

Insertion Page

5

Insertion
Type A

Insertion
Type B

5
Insertion
Total:4

Bypass
Tray
A4
Plain

Tray 1
A4
Plain

Enter

Special Modes
Cancel

Covers/Inserts
Cover Setting

6

The settings are changed in the same way as they are initially
configured. See step 7 of "INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN
COPIES (Insert Settings)" (page 2-64) to change the insert
settings.
After changing the settings, touch the [OK] key and return to
step 3.

OK

Touch the [OK] key.

OK

You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Inserts Setting

Front
Cover

Insertion
Type A

Back
Cover

Insertion
Type B

Insertion
Settings

Tray Settings

Page Layout

2-70

Contents

COPIER

ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM
(Transparency Inserts)
When copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity. The transparency inserts
function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the
sheets easy to handle.
It is also possible to copy on the inserts.

B
C
A
Inserts

Example: When loading transparency film in the bypass
tray

2

• Transparency film can only be loaded in the bypass tray or
tray 3.
• When placing transparency film in the bypass tray, ensure
that the side to be printed on is face up.
When loading transparency film, ensure that the rounded
corner of the sheet is facing the front left of the machine.
• When loading the transparency film into tray 3, configure the
bypass tray settings as explained in "MAKING COPIES
USING THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 2-39).
• When loading transparency film into tray 3, configure the
bypass tray settings as explained in "LOADING PAPER IN
PAPER TRAY 3" (page 1-32).

Oriented
vertically

1

Place the transparency film in the
bypass tray or tray 3.

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Transparency Inserts] key.

☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-71

Contents

COPIER

(1)
Special Modes

4

(1) Select whether or not the insert paper will
be copied on ([Yes] or [No]).

OK

Transparency Inserts

Paper Tray

Select insert settings.

(2)

Cancel

OK

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Print on Insert Sheets
Yes

No

You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Explanation of (A)
When transparency inserts is selected, paper suitable for
the inserts is automatically selected. The automatically
selected paper tray, paper size, and paper type are
indicated here.

Tray1
A4
Plain

(A)

Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.

5
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

• The number of copies cannot be selected in this mode.
• When performing 2-sided copying, only "2-sided to 1-sided" mode can be used.
To cancel the transparency inserts setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

2-72

Contents

COPIER

COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO
ONE SHEET (Multi Shot)
Multiple original pages can be copied onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two original
pages onto one sheet, or 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet. This function saves paper and is convenient
when you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.
2in1 copying

A

1

4in1 copying

B

AB

A B

CD

AB
CD

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

2

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Multi Shot] key.

☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-73

Contents

COPIER

(1)

(3) (2)

(4)
OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Multi Shot

Layout
2in1

OK

Select the number of originals to be
copied onto one sheet of paper, the
layout, and the border.
(1) Touch the [2in1] key or the [4in1] key.
If needed, the images will be rotated.

4in1
Border

(2) Select the layout.
Select the order in which the originals will be arranged on
the copy.
Number
of pages

Layout

2in1

3
4in1

The arrows in the above diagram indicate how the images
are arranged.

(3) Select the border.
Solid lines, broken lines, or no lines can be selected.

(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [START] key.

4

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

When using the multi shot function, the appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set based on the original size, paper size,
and the number of originals to be copied onto one sheet. The minimum possible reduction ratio is 25%. The original size,
paper size, and selected number of original pages may require that the ratio be less than 25%. As copying will take place at
25% in this case, part of the original images may be cut off.
To cancel a multi shot setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-74

Contents

COPIER

COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy)
This function is used to make a copy of the two facing pages of an open book or other bound document.
Copies made with this function can be folded at the centre to create a booklet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
How to place the original
Originals

A
1

Back cover

Cover

Inside of
cover

C

B
2

1st page

2nd page

D

3

4

3rd page

4th page

Inside of
back cover

Place the original

A

C
3

3

1

1

B
2

D
4

The copies are in the same
layout as the original.

Select the special modes.

1

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Book Copy] key.

☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-75

Contents

COPIER

(1)

Select book copy settings.

(2)

Special Modes

OK

Book Copy

Cancel

OK

(1) Select the binding position ([Left Binding]
or [Right Binding]).
(2) To insert a cover, touch the [Cover Setting]
key.

2

If a cover will not be added, go to step 4.
Left
Binding

Right
Binding
Cover
Setting

Cover settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).

(2)

(1)

(3)

Book Copy
Cancel

Cover Setting

Paper Tray

Print on Cover (2-sided)
Yes

Bypass
Tray

OK

(A)

No

Select cover settings.
(1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
the [Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No]
key.
(2) Select paper settings for the cover.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
In the example screen, 11" x 17" (A3) size plain paper is
loaded in the bypass tray.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the desired paper tray in the tray
selection screen and touch the [OK] key.

A3
Plain

(B)

3

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
• If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.
• When the cover paper is fed from the inserter, the cover cannot be copied on.
To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.

2-76

Contents

COPIER

Special Modes
Book Copy

Cancel

OK

Touch the [OK] key.

OK

You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

4
Left
Binding

Right
Binding
Cover
Setting

Place the original face down on the
document glass.
Place the opened front cover and back cover face down.

5

Press the [START] key to scan the first original.

6

Scanning begins.
Scan the remaining original pages in the following order:
Opened inside of front cover and 1st page
Opened 2nd and 3rd page
·
·
·
Opened last page and inside of back cover
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

Place the next pair of opened pages and press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all original pages have been scanned.

7
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

2-77

Contents

COPIER

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

8

Copying will begin.

Read-End

To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

• Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically added at the end if the total
number of original pages is not a multiple of four.
• If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the book copy function can be used in combination with the saddle stitch or paper
folding function.
• When book copy is selected, 2-sided copying is automatically selected. When settings are selected that prevent 2-sided
copying, the book copy function cannot be used.
To cancel book copy...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.

2-78

Contents

COPIER

COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER
(Tab Copy)
Captions can be copied onto the tabs of tab paper. Prepare appropriate originals for the tab captions.
These instructions explain the procedure for copying captions when tab paper is loaded into the bypass tray.
ABC

ABC

ABC

DEF

DEF

GHI

GHI

Prepare originals that
match the tab positions.

The image is shifted
by the width of the tab

RELATION BETWEEN THE ORIGINALS AND THE TAB
PAPER
Tab copying with a left binding
Originals

Placing the originals

Loading tab paper

• Document feeder tray

Originals

1

1

Insert the originals so that the side with no
tab text enters first.
• Document glass

Front
side

Final image

1

Load the tab paper so that the tab on the
first sheet is away from you.

Place so that the side with the tab text is
on the left.

2-79

Contents

COPIER

Tab copying with a right binding
Originals

Placing the originals

Loading tab paper

• Document feeder tray

Originals

1

1

Front
side

Insert the originals so that the side with no
tab text enters first.
• Document glass

1

Final image

Load the tab paper so that the tab on the
first sheet is toward you.
Place so that the side with the tab text is
on the left.

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

2

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Tab Copy] key.

☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)
(1)

(2)
OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Tab Copy

OK

Set the tab width.
(1) Set the image shift width (tab width) with
the
keys.
0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 5/8") can be entered.

3

Original

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Copy
Image Shift

10

You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

(0~20)
mm

2-80

Contents

COPIER

Load the tab paper.
Front side

4

• When using the bypass tray, place the paper with the print
side up.
Place the paper so that the sides with the tabs enter the
machine last.
After loading the tab paper, configure the bypass tray
settings as explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE
BYPASS TRAY" (page 2-39).
• If tab paper is loaded in tray 3, see "LOADING PAPER IN
PAPER TRAY 3" (page 1-32). After loading tab paper in the
tray, see "PAPER TRAYS" (page 2-11) to select the tray.

The width of the tab paper can be as wide as A4 width (210 mm) plus 20 mm (or 8-1/2" x 11" paper (8-1/2") plus 5/8").

Press the [START] key.

5

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

To cancel tab copy...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Tab Copy Setting
The default image shift width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 5/8"). The factory default setting is "10 mm (1/2")".

2-81

Contents

COPIER

COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot)
When copying a card, this function allows you to copy the front and reverse sides together onto a single sheet of paper.
This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper.
Copies
Originals
Front

Back

Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x
11") size portrait copy

Special Modes

Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x
11") size landscape copy

Select the paper to be used for card
shot.

2-Sided Copy

Select the paper as explained in "PAPER TRAYS" (page 2-11).
Output
Exposure

1

Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

Place the original face down on the
document glass.

2

Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Card Shot] key.

☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-42)

2-82

Contents

COPIER

(1)

(2)
OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Card Shot

X

86

(25~210)
mm

Y

54

(25~210)
mm

Select card shot settings.
(1) Enter the original size.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the
keys.
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the
keys.
(A) To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper
based on the entered original size, touch the [Fit to
Page] key.
(B) The [Size Reset] key can be pressed to return the
horizontal and vertical dimensions to the values set in
"Card Shot Settings" in the system settings
(administrator).

OK

Fit to
Page

(A)

Size Reset

(B)

4

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode. Make
sure that the entered dimensions appear in the [Original]
key.

Press the [START] key to scan the front side of the card.

5

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

Turn the card over and press the [START] key to scan the reverse side of the
card.

6
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

7

Copying will begin.

Read-End

To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

2-83

Contents

COPIER

• The original must be placed on the document glass.
• Copying is only possible on standard size paper.
• XY Zoom cannot be used when using this function.
• The image cannot be rotated when using this function.
To cancel card shot...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
System Settings (Administrator): Card Shot Settings
This is used to set the values to which the size returns when the [Size Reset] key is pressed. 25 mm to 210 mm (1" to 8-1/2")
can be entered for both the horizontal and vertical dimensions.
The factory default settings are 86 mm (3-3/8") for X (the width) and 54 mm (2-1/8") for Y (the height).

2-84

Contents

COPIER

PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON
COPIES (Stamp)
Use this function to print the date, a stamp, the page number, and text on copies. In addition, specific text can be added
to a copy as a watermark (Watermark).
Six printing positions are available: top left, top centre, top right, bottom left, bottom centre, and bottom right.
The printing positions are separated into areas that are used for the date, page number and text (A below), and areas
that are used for a stamp (B below).The watermark is printed at the centre of the paper.
Top centre
Top left

A

Bottom left

Top right

Watermark
print position

Bottom centre

B

Stamp

Print area

Maximum number
of positions

Date

A

1 position only

Stamp

B

6 positions

Page
Numbering

A

1 position only

Text

A

6 positions

Watermark

Centre of
paper

–

Bottom right

• If the selected stamp content of one position overlaps the stamp content of another position, priority will be given in the
following order: watermark, right side, left side, centre. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.
• Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.
• Text will be printed at the preset exposure regardless of the exposure setting.
• Depending on the size of the paper, some printed content may be cut off or shifted out of position.

When used in combination with other special modes
When Stamp is used in combination with the following special modes, the special modes are reflected in the stamp
content.
Special Modes

Printing

Margin Shift

Together with the image, the stamp content is shifted the amount of the margin width.

Tab Copy
Centring

Unlike a copy image that moves, the image will be printed in the position set in the stamp.

Dual Page Copy
Card Shot

The stamp is printed on each copy sheet.

Multi Shot

The print content is printed on each original page.

Pamphlet Copy
Book Copy

The stamp is printed on each page of the resulting pamphlet or book.

Covers/Inserts

Use the stamp settings to select whether or not the item is printed on inserted covers and
inserts.

2-85

Contents

COPIER

GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP
To select stamp settings, follow the steps below.

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Stamp] key.

☞ Special modes menu (2nd screen) (page 2-43)
Select the print position.

OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Stamp

OK

1
2
Date

Stamp

Page
Numbering

Text

Watermark

Layout

Select from 6 positions: top left, top centre, top right, bottom
left, bottom centre, bottom right.
You can also skip this step and go directly to the next step. In
this case, the stamp items will be printed in the following
positions:
Date: Top right
Stamp: Top left
Page number: Bottom centre
Text: Top left
The position of a watermark cannot be selected. Proceed to the
next step.
Print positions
The keys that show the print positions will appear as follows
depending on the state of the settings.

Not selected, stamp setting has not
been selected.

3

Selected during selection of the stamp
setting.
Not available, stamp setting has already
been allocated.
The above key is the top left key. The appearance of each key
varies depending on the position of the key.
• "Date" and "Page Numbering" cannot be selected in multiple positions. If the [Date] key or [Page Numbering] key is
touched when "Date" or "Page Numbering" has already been selected for a position, a message will appear asking
you if you wish to move that item to the selected position. To move the item, touch the [Yes] key. Otherwise, press
the [No] key.
• If you attempt to set "Date", "Text", or "Page Numbering" in a position where one of these items is already set, a
message will appear. To change the previously selected item to the new item, touch the [Yes] key. To keep the
previous item, touch the [No] key.

2-86

Contents

COPIER

Select Stamp.

OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Stamp

OK

1
2

4

Date

Stamp

Page
Numbering

Text

Layout

Watermark

When you have finished selecting stamp
settings, touch the
key.

OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Stamp

For detailed information on each of the stamp items, see the
following sections:
Date:
ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date)
(page 2-89)
Stamp:
STAMPING COPIES (Stamp) (page 2-91)
Page numbering: PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering) (page 2-93)
Text:
PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text) (page
2-97)
Watermark:
ADDING A WATERMARK TO A
COPY (Watermark) (page 2-103)

OK

1
2

5

Date

Stamp

Page
Numbering

Text

Layout

Watermark

Select settings for the original and
covers/inserts.

(3)
OK

Special Modes
Stamp

Cancel

OK
2

2-Sided Original Type

Original Orientation

2

(1) Touch the [Original Orientation] key and
specify the orientation of the placed
original.
If 2-sided originals have been placed, touch the
key and specify the binding position (booklet binding or
tablet binding) of the originals.

Print on Covers/Inserts when Copying on Covers/Inserts

Layout

6

(2)

(2) Select stamp settings for covers/inserts.
If you do not want to print the stamp items on
covers/inserts, touch the checkbox to remove the
checkmark
.

(1)

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
To edit a stamp position or delete a stamp item, touch the
[Layout] key.
☞CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT (Layout) (page
2-101)
• When copying on covers/inserts is not selected, printing will not take place even if a checkmark appears.
• This setting cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).

2-87

Contents

COPIER

Press the [START] key.

7

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

To cancel Stamp...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-88

Contents

COPIER

ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date)
The date can be printed on copies. The position of the date, format, and page (first page only or all pages) can be
selected.
Example: Printing APRIL 4, 2010 in the top right corner of the paper.

04/APR/2010

1

Touch the [Date] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-86).

Set the date format.

Stamp
Cancel

Date

OK

First Page

YYYY/MM/DD
04/APR/2010
MM/DD/YYYY

2

Date Change
All Pages

DD/MM/YYYY

(1) Touch the key that shows the desired date
format.
(2) If you selected [YYYY/MM/DD],
[MM/DD/YYYY], or [DD/MM/YYYY], touch the
[/], [.], [-], or [ ] key to select the separator.

MM DD, YYYY

(1)

(2)

Stamp
Cancel

Date

OK

First Page

YYYY/MM/DD

Check the displayed date. If you need to
change the date, touch the [Date
Change] key.
Set the date that you wish to use and touch the [OK] key.

04/APR/2010
MM/DD/YYYY
Date Change
DD/MM/YYYY

Stamp

All Pages

OK

Date Change
MM DD, YYYY

3

Year

Month

Day

2010

04

04

As an alternative to touching the
keys, you can also
directly touch the numeric value display key and change the
value with the numeric keys.
• If you select a date that does not exist (such as Feb. 30), the [OK] key will be greyed out to prevent entry.
• Changing the date here will not change the date that is set in the machine using "Clock" in the system settings.

2-89

Contents

COPIER

Stamp
Cancel

Date

First Page

YYYY/MM/DD

4

OK

04/APR/2010
MM/DD/YYYY
Date Change
DD/MM/YYYY

All Pages

Select the pages that the date will be
printed on and touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-86) to complete
the copy procedure.

MM DD, YYYY

To cancel the date print setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.

2-90

Contents

COPIER

STAMPING COPIES (Stamp)
Text such as "CONFIDENTIAL" can be printed in white on a dark background as a "stamp" on copies.
The position, size, density, and pages (first page only or all pages) can be selected for a stamp.
Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" in the top left corner of a copy

CONFIDENTIAL

The following 12 selections are available for the stamp text.
CONFIDENTIAL

PRIORITY

PRELIMINARY

FINAL

FOR YOUR INFO.

DO NOT COPY

IMPORTANT

COPY

URGENT

DRAFT

TOP SECRET

PLEASE REPLY

Three levels can be selected for the density of the stamp background.
Two stamp sizes can be selected.

1

Touch the [Stamp] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-86).

Stamp
Cancel

Stamp

2

CONFIDENTIAL

PRIORITY

FOR YOUR INFO.

DO NOT COPY

URGENT

DRAFT

PRELIMINARY

FINAL

IMPORTANT

COPY

Larger

TOP SECRET

PLEASE REPLY

Smaller

OK

Touch the key of the stamp that you
wish to use.

First Page
Exposure
1

2

3

Size

All Pages

2-91

Contents

COPIER

Stamp
Cancel

Stamp

CONFIDENTIAL

PRIORITY

FOR YOUR INFO.

DO NOT COPY

URGENT

DRAFT

PRELIMINARY

FINAL

IMPORTANT

COPY

Larger

TOP SECRET

PLEASE REPLY

Smaller

OK

First Page
Exposure
1

2

3
All Pages

Size

Touch the [Exposure] key and set the
density.
If you wish to darken, touch the
key. If you wish to
lighten, touch the
key.
When you have finished selecting the settings, touch the [OK]
key.
Stamp

3

Exposure

OK

Exposure
1

Stamp

CONFIDENTIAL

PRIORITY

FOR YOUR INFO.

DO NOT COPY

URGENT

DRAFT

PRELIMINARY

FINAL

4

OK

Cancel

Stamp

Touch the [Larger Smaller] key to
select the size of the stamp.

First Page
3

2

All Pages

Size

IMPORTANT

COPY

Larger

TOP SECRET

PLEASE REPLY

Smaller

Stamp
OK

Cancel

Stamp

5

3

Exposure
1

CONFIDENTIAL

2

PRIORITY

First Page
Exposure

FOR YOUR INFO.

DO NOT COPY

URGENT

DRAFT

PRELIMINARY

FINAL

IMPORTANT

COPY

Larger

TOP SECRET

PLEASE REPLY

Smaller

1

2

3

Size

All Pages

Select the pages that the date will be
printed on and touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-86) to complete
the copy procedure.

The stamp text cannot be edited.
To cancel a stamp setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.

2-92

Contents

COPIER

PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering)
Page numbers can be printed on copies.
The position, format, and page number can be selected for page numbering.
Printing the page number at the bottom centre of the paper.

1
2
3

1

Touch the [Page Numbering] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-86).

Select a format for the page number.

Stamp
Cancel

Page Numbering

Page Numbering Format

Total Page

(1),(2),(3)..

Auto

-1-,-2-,-3-..

P.1,P.2,P.3..

Manual

<1>,<2>,<3>..

1/5,2/5,3/5..

1,2,3..

OK

1

Page

Page Number

If the [1/5, 2/5, 3/5] key is selected,
"Page number / total pages" will be printed. "Auto" is initially
selected for the total pages, which means that the number of
scanned original pages is automatically set as the total pages.
If you need to set the total pages manually, such as when a
large number of originals are divided into sets for scanning,
touch the [Manual] key to display the total pages entry screen.
Stamp
Cancel

Page Numbering

Page Numbering Format

OK

Total Page

1,2,3..

(1),(2),(3)..

Auto

-1-,-2-,-3-..

P.1,P.2,P.3..

Manual

<1>,<2>,<3>..

1/5,2/5,3/5..

1

Page

Page Number

2
Enter the total pages (1 to 999) with the numeric keys and
touch the [OK] key.
The [CLEAR] key (
) can be pressed to return the setting of
the selected item to the default value. If you make a mistake,
press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct
number.
• When 2-sided copying is performed, the total pages is the total number of sides of the paper. If the final page is
blank, it is not counted. However, if a back cover will be added and the [Count Back Cover] checkbox is selected
, the final page is counted. (See step 7.)
• When used in combination with "Dual Page Copy", "Multi Shot", or "Card Shot", the number of sides of the paper
copied on is the total pages.
• When used in combination with "Pamphlet Copy" or "Book Copy", the total number of pages in the resulting
pamphlet or booklet is the total pages.

2-93

Contents

COPIER

Stamp
Cancel

Page Numbering

Page Numbering Format

3

OK

If you do not need to configure page number settings, go to
step 8.

Total Page

1,2,3..

(1),(2),(3)..

Auto

-1-,-2-,-3-..

P.1,P.2,P.3..

Manual

<1>,<2>,<3>..

1/5,2/5,3/5..

1

Page

To configure page number settings,
touch the [Page Number] key.

Page Number

Select page number settings.

Stamp
OK

Page Number

Auto

Manual

First Number

(2) Set the first number, the last number, and
the "Printing Starts from Page" number.

Last Number

1

Auto

(1) Touch the [Manual] key.

Covers/Inserts
Counting

Touch each key and enter a number with the numeric
keys (1 to 999).
The [CLEAR] key (
) can be pressed to return the
setting of the selected item to the default value. If you
make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then
enter the correct number.

Printing Starts from Page

1
(1)

4

(2)

• A "Last Number" smaller than the "First Number" cannot be set.
• The "Last Number" is initially set to "Auto", which means that page numbers are automatically printed through the
last page based on the "First Number" and "Printing Start from Page" settings.
• If the "Last Number" is set to a number smaller than the "Total Pages", page numbers are not printed on pages after
the page set as the "Last Number".
• "Printing Starts from Page" is used to set the page number from which you want to begin printing page numbers.
For example, if "3" is set and 1-sided copying is being performed, page numbers will be printed beginning from the
3rd copy sheet (the 3rd original page). If 2-sided copying is being performed, page numbers will be printed
beginning from the front side of the 2nd copy sheet (the 3rd original page).

Stamp
OK

Page Number

Auto

5

Manual

First Number

1

Last Number
Auto

Covers/Inserts
Counting

If covers/inserts will be inserted, touch
the [Covers/Inserts Counting] key if you
want to include the covers/inserts in the
page number count and want page
numbers printed on the covers/inserts.

Printing Starts from Page

1

2-94

Contents

COPIER

(1)

(2)

Stamp
OK

Covers/Inserts Counting

Touch each item that you want counted
in the page numbers so that a
checkmark appears
, and then touch
the [OK] key.
Items with a checkmark
will be reflected in the print image
on the right side of the screen.
(A): Front cover image
(B): Insert image
(C): Back cover image

Count Front Cover

Count Inserts

Count Back Cover

6
(A)

(B)

(C)

• When the checkboxes are selected
, each inserted sheet of paper (front cover, insert, or back cover) will be
counted as one page in the case of 1-sided copying, or two pages in the case of 2-sided copying. However, when
the body sheets are 1-sided copies and the inserted sheets are 2-sided copies, each body sheet is counted as one
page and each inserted sheet is counted as two pages.
• Page numbers are printed on covers/inserts if the covers/inserts are counted and if they are copied on.

Touch the [OK] key.

Stamp
OK

Page Number

Auto

7

Manual

First Number

1

Last Number
Covers/Inserts
Counting

Auto

Printing Starts from Page

1

Touch the [OK] key.

Stamp
Cancel

Page Numbering

Page Numbering Format

8

OK

Total Page

1,2,3..

(1),(2),(3)..

Auto

-1-,-2-,-3-..

P.1,P.2,P.3..

Manual

<1>,<2>,<3>..

1/5,2/5,3/5..

1

Page

After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-86) to complete
the copy procedure.

Page Number

2-95

Contents

COPIER

• When Page Numbering is selected, copying in group mode is not possible. The mode automatically changes to sort mode.
• When the page number printing position is set to the right side or left side and pamphlet copy or book copy is used, the
print position is changed so that the page numbers always appear on the outer side of each opened page (the left and right
sides of the opened pages). If a stamp is set in the area where page numbering is set, the position of the stamp changes in
the same way as the page number.
If another stamp item is set in this changing position, the page numbers will alternate sides with this stamp item.
A stamp item that is in a position not affected by the changing page number position will be printed in its original set
position.
Example: When four pages are copied using pamphlet copy and the page number format is "1, 2, 3...", the result is as
follows:
In this example, the page number is set at the bottom of the page and the date is set at the top, and thus the
date does not move.
Print settings
04/APR/2010

Date

Stamp
No.

Side 1
04/APR/2010

CONFIDENTIAL

Text

4

Side 2
04/APR/2010

CONFIDENTIAL

AAA AAA

1

04/APR/2010

CONFIDENTIAL

2

CONFIDENTIAL

AAA AAA

3

To cancel the page numbering setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.

2-96

Contents

COPIER

PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text)
Entered text can be printed on copies. Up to 30 frequently used text strings can be stored.
Example: Printing "April 2010 Planning Meeting" in the top left corner of the paper

April 2010 Planning Meeting

1

Touch the [Text] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-86).

Touch the [Recall] key.

Stamp
Cancel

Text

OK

First Page

2
Pre-Set
Recall

All Pages

Store/Delete

Direct Entry

(1)

Specify the text to be printed.

(2)

(1) Touch the text string that you wish to
select.

Stamp
Cancel

Text
5

3

The [Direct Entry] key can be touched to display the text entry
screen. When all characters have been entered, touch the [OK]
key.
To store or delete a text string, touch the [Store/Delete] key.
☞ Storing, editing, and deleting text strings (page 2-99)

OK

You can touch the [5
10] key to switch the number of
keys displayed in the screen between 5 and 10. When
5-key display is selected, the entire text string appears in
each key.

10

Recall
No.01 AAA AAA

No.02 BBB BBB

No.03 CCC CCC

No.04 DDD DDD

No.05

No.06

No.07

No.08

No.09

No.10

1
3

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

2-97

Contents

COPIER

Stamp
OK

Cancel

Text

First Page

AAA AAA

4
Pre-Set
Recall

Store/Delete

All Pages

Select the pages to be printed on and
touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-86) to complete
the copy procedure.

Direct Entry

Text settings can also be configured in the Web pages. Click [Application Settings], [Copy settings] and then [Text Settings
(Stamp)] in the Web page menu.
To cancel a text setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.

2-98

Contents

COPIER

Storing, editing, and deleting text strings

1

Touch the [Text] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-86).

Touch the [Store/Delete] key.

Stamp
Cancel

Text

OK

First Page

2
Pre-Set
Recall

All Pages
Direct Entry

Store/Delete

Store a text string, or edit/delete a stored
text string.

Stamp
Back

Text
10

5

Store/Delete

• To store a text string, touch a key with no text stored.
A text entry screen will appear. A maximum of 50 characters
can be entered. When you have finished entering the text,
touch the [OK] key. The text entry screen will close.
• To edit or delete a text string, follow the instructions below.

1

No.01 AAA AAA

No.02 BBB BBB

No.03 CCC CCC

No.04 DDD DDD

No.05

No.06

No.07

No.08

No.09

No.10

3

To edit or delete a text string...

3

• When the key with the text string is touched, the following screen appears.
When the [Amend] key is touched, a text entry screen appears. The stored text string appears in the text entry
screen. Edit the text. When you have finished entering the text, touch the [OK] key. The text entry screen will close.
• When the [Delete] key is touched, the stored text is deleted.
A text has been already stored to this
location. Change the text?

Cancel

Delete

Amend

• Text settings can also be configured in the Web pages. Click [Application Settings], [Copy settings] and then [Text
Settings (Stamp)] in the Web page menu.

2-99

Contents

COPIER

Touch the [Back] key.

Stamp

[ ._1

Back

Text

5

[

10

Store/Delete

4

["11;;:

,----~Q
l

1

1

1[F====J1
.lG!J
====J
F
= = = dl

No.01 AAA AAA

1
[
=

No.03 CCC CCC
No.05

No.02 BBB BBB

===d

3

'
[
=

No.04

No.06
I No.08
[No.07
====,JI [No.10
No.09
I[
r
[
=

You will return to the screen of step 2.
To copy using a stored text string, continue from step 2 of
"PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text)" (page 2-97).

I
I
I

2-100

(

Contents

)

COPIER

CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT (Layout)
After stamp items have been selected, you can check the print layout, change the print position, and delete stamp items.

Touch the [Layout] key.

OK

Special Modes

OK

Cancel

Special Modes

1
2
Date

Stamp

Page
Numbering

Text

1
Layout

Watermark

The [Layout] key can only be touched when stamp items have been selected.

If the layout is correct, touch the [OK]
key.

Stamp
OK

Layout

Touch the key of the stamp item that you want to delete or
whose position you want to change.

AAA AAA
DO NOT COPY

CONFIDENTIAL

2
1,2,3..

A maximum of 14 characters appear in each key.

To change the position of the item,
touch the [Move] key. To delete the item,
touch the [Delete] key.

Do you want to move or delete the
selected item?

3

Cancel

Delete

Move

• If the [Move] key is touched, a screen for selecting the
destination position appears.
• If the [Delete] key is touched, the item is deleted. (Go to step
6.)

2-101

Contents

COPIER

Stamp
OK

Move
Select the location to move the selected item.

Touch the key of the desired destination
position.
The touched position key is highlighted and the print position
changes.
The keys that show the print positions will appear as follows
depending on the state of the settings.

Not selected, stamp setting has not
been selected.

4

Selected during selection of the stamp
setting.
Not available, stamp setting has already
been allocated.
The above key is the top left key. The appearance of each key
varies depending on the position of the key.
If you wish to swap the position of the selected stamp item with the position of another stamp item, temporarily move
either one of the items to an unoccupied position and then switch the print positions.

Touch the [OK] key.

Stamp
OK

Move
Select the location to move the selected item.

5

If you attempt to move the stamp item to a position that is
already occupied by another stamp item, a message will
appear asking you if you wish to overwrite the other stamp
item. To overwrite the other stamp item, touch the [Yes] key. To
cancel the move, touch the [No] key.

An item has been already selected to
this location. Overwrite the item?

No

Touch the [OK] key.

Stamp
OK

Layout

6

Yes

AAA AAA
CONFIDENTIAL

DO NOT COPY

1,2,3..

2-102

Contents

COPIER

ADDING A WATERMARK TO A COPY (Watermark)
When making a copy, specific text can be added to the copy as a watermark. The density, angle, and pages (first page
only or all pages) can be selected for a watermark. The watermark is printed at the centre of the paper.

CO

NF

ID

EN

TI

AL

Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" on the paper

The following 12 selections are available for the stamp text.
CONFIDENTIAL

PRIORITY

PRELIMINARY

FINAL

FOR YOUR INFO.

DO NOT COPY

IMPORTANT

COPY

URGENT

DRAFT

TOP SECRET

PLEASE REPLY

Three levels can be selected for the density of the watermark.
The angle of a watermark can be selected in the range +90 degrees to -90 degrees in increments of 45 degrees.

1

Touch the [Watermark] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-86).

Stamp
Cancel

Watermark

2

CONFIDENTIAL

PRIORITY

FOR YOUR INFO.

DO NOT COPY

URGENT

DRAFT

Angle

PRELIMINARY

FINAL

(+90 ~ -90)

IMPORTANT

COPY

TOP SECRET

PLEASE REPLY

Exposure
1

2

OK

Touch the key of the watermark that you
wish to use.

First Page

3

All Pages

45

2-103

Contents

COPIER

Stamp
Cancel

Watermark

CONFIDENTIAL

PRIORITY

FOR YOUR INFO.

DO NOT COPY

Exposure
1

2

OK

First Page

3

URGENT

DRAFT

Angle

PRELIMINARY

FINAL

(+90 ~ -90)

IMPORTANT

COPY

TOP SECRET

PLEASE REPLY

All Pages

Touch the [Exposure] key and set the
density.
If you wish to darken, touch the
key. If you wish to
lighten, touch the
key.
When you have finished selecting the settings, touch the [OK]
key.

45
Stamp

3

Exposure

OK

Exposure
1

Stamp
Cancel

Watermark

CONFIDENTIAL

PRIORITY

Exposure
1

2

DO NOT COPY

URGENT

DRAFT

Angle

PRELIMINARY

FINAL

(+90 ~ -90)

IMPORTANT

COPY

TOP SECRET

PLEASE REPLY

First Page

3

FOR YOUR INFO.

4

OK

5

Touch the
keys to set the angle of
the watermark.
An angle from +90 degrees to -90 degrees in increments of 45
degrees can be selected.

45

Cancel

Watermark

PRIORITY

3

All Pages

Stamp

CONFIDENTIAL

2

Exposure
1

2

OK

First Page

3

FOR YOUR INFO.

DO NOT COPY

URGENT

DRAFT

Angle

PRELIMINARY

FINAL

(+90 ~ -90)

IMPORTANT

COPY

TOP SECRET

PLEASE REPLY

All Pages

Select the pages that the watermark will
be printed on and touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-86) to complete
the copy procedure.

45

The watermark text cannot be edited.
To cancel a watermark setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.

2-104

Contents

COPIER

[Image Edit] KEY
When the [Image Edit] key is touched in the 2nd special modes menu screen, the image edit menu screen opens.

Image edit menu screen
OK

Special Modes

Stamp

Image Edit

Sharpness

File

Quick File

Proof Copy

Original
Count

Mixed Size
Original

OK

(4)

Slow Scan
Mode

[Photo Repeat] key

☞ REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY (Photo Repeat)

(4)

[Multi-Page Enlargement] key

☞ CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Multi-Page

Photo Repeat

Centring

(2)

Multi-Page
Enlargement

(5)

(3)

Mirror
Image

B/W
Reverse

[Centring] key

☞ COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER
(Centring) (page 2-112)

(5)

Enlargement) (page 2-108)
(3)

Image Edit

2

(page 2-106)
(2)

OK

(1)

2

(1)

Special Modes

[B/W Reverse] key

☞ REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W
Reverse) (page 2-114)

[Mirror Image] key

☞ REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) (page
2-111)

2-105

Contents

COPIER

REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY (Photo Repeat)
Photo Repeat is used to create repeated images of a photo-size original (130 mm x 90 mm size, 100 mm x 150 mm
size, 70 mm x 100 mm size, 65 mm x 70 mm size or 57 mm x 100 mm size (3" x 5" size, 5" x 7" size, 2-1/2" x 4" size,
2-1/2" x 2-1/2" size or 2-1/8" x 3-5/8" size)) on a single sheet of copy paper as shown below. Up to 24 images (when the
image is 65 mm x 70 mm size (2-1/2" x 2-1/2" size)) can be repeated on a single sheet of paper.
• Original sizes up to 130 mm x 90 mm (3" x 5")

• Original sizes up to 100 mm x 150 mm (5" x 7")

Copying on A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
size paper
4 copies are made.

Copying on A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
size paper
2 copies are made.

Copying on A3
(11" x 17") size paper
8 copies are made.

Copying on A3
(11" x 17") size
paper
4 copies are made.

• Original sizes up to 70 mm x 100 mm (2-1/2" x 4")

• Original sizes up to 65 mm x 70 mm
(2-1/2" x 2-1/2")

Copying on A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
size paper
8 copies are made.

Copying on A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
size paper
12 copies are made.

Copying on A3
(11" x 17") size paper
16 copies are made.

Copying on A3
(11" x 17") size paper
24 copies are made.

• Original sizes up to 57 mm x 100 mm
(2-1/8" x 3-5/8")
Copying on A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
size paper (Ratio 95%)
10 copies are made.

Place the original face down on the
document glass.

1

• When placing a 130 mm x 90 mm, 100 mm x 150 mm,
70 mm x 100 mm, 65 mm x 70 mm or 57 mm x 100 mm
(3" x 5", 5" x 7", 2-1/2" x 4", 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" or 2-1/8" x 3-5/8")
photo size original, place the original with the long side
aligned against the left side of the document glass.
• When placing a business card size original, place the original
with the long side aligned against the far side of the
document glass.

2-106

Contents

COPIER

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
(4) Touch the [Photo Repeat] key.

☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-105)
(1)

(1) Touch the key showing the original type
and paper size combination that you want
to use.

OK

Image Edit
Cancel

Photo Repeat

Original Size

Select Photo Repeat settings.

(2)

OK

Repeat Type
1

Touch the
keys to switch through the screens and
touch the desired repeat type key (A4 or A3 (8-1/2" x 11"
or 11" x 17")).

5
A4/8½x11

3

130x 90mm

4

A3/11x17
8

3x 5"

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
When making repeat copies of a business card size original (up to 57 mm x 100 mm (2-1/8" x 3-5/8")), only A4 (8-1/2"
x 11") can be selected for the paper size.

Press the [START] key.

4

Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

• The original must be placed on the document glass.
• Only A4 (8-1/2" x 11") or A3 (11" x 17") size paper can be used.
• The copy ratio is 100% when this function is used. (The ratio cannot be changed.) However, for a business card size
original (up to 57 mm x 100 mm (2-1/8" x 3-5/8")), the images are reduced to 95%.
To cancel the photo repeat setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-107

Contents

COPIER

CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Multi-Page
Enlargement)
This function is used to enlarge an image of an original and print it as a composite image using multiple sheets of paper.

Original
(A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size)
Copy (enlarged image on 8
sheets of A3 (11" x 17") paper)

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

1

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
(4) Touch the [Multi-Page Enlargement] key.

☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-105)

2-108

Contents

COPIER

Set the enlargement size and the original
size.

(B)
Ready to scan for copy. Copies will be
delivered in 2 parts.

(1) Select the size system that you wish to use
for multi-page enlargement.

OK

Image Edit
Multi-Page Enlargement

Border Print

Enlargement Size
(A Size)

Original Size

Cancel

OK

Touch the
keys to display the screen that shows
the desired group of sizes.
• 1st screen: A system
• 2nd screen: B system
• 3rd screen: Inch system

Original Orientation
1

A2

A5

A1

A4

A0

A3

3

A0x2

(2)

(3)

Enlargement size

A system

2

(2) Select the enlargement size.

B system Inch system

A2
A1
A0
A0 x 2*
B3
B2
B1
B0
22" x 17"
22" x 34"
34" x 44"
44" x 68"

(A)

(3) Select the size of the original to be used.

(1)

A suitable original placement orientation (A) and the
number of sheets of paper required for the enlarged
image (B) are displayed based on the selected original
size and enlargement size.
Check the placement orientation and number of sheets.
The combinations of original sizes and enlargement sizes
shown in the table at left are possible for multi-page
enlargement.

Original size

A3, A4, A5
A3, A4, A5
A3, A4
A3
B4, B5
B4, B5
B4, B5
B4
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"
11" x 17"

* The size that is twice A0 size.
• An A size original cannot be enlarged to a B size, and a B size original cannot be enlarged to an A size.
• To print a borderline around the copy image, touch the [Border Print] key so that it is highlighted.

3

Place the original face down on the
document glass in the orientation
indicated in the screen.

2-109

Contents

COPIER

4

Touch the [OK] key.

OK

Image Edit
Multi-Page Enlargement

Border Print

Enlargement Size
(A Size)

Original Size

A2

A5

A1

A4

A0

A3

Cancel

You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the [OK] key
to return to the base screen of copy mode.

OK

Original Orientation
1
3

A0x2

Press the [START] key.

5

Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

• The original must be placed on the document glass.
• Overlap of sections of image
- There will be a margin around the edges of each copy.
- Areas for overlapping the copies will be created at the leading and trailing edges of each copy.
• If an original size is selected first, a message will appear indicating the enlargement sizes that can be selected. If an
enlargement size is selected first, a message will appear indicating the original sizes that can be selected.
• If a combination of settings is selected for which multi-page enlargement is not possible, invalid selection beeps will sound.
• The paper size, number of sheets required for the enlarged image, and the ratio are automatically selected based on the
selected original size and enlargement size.
(The paper size and ratio cannot be selected manually.)
• If no paper trays have the size of paper that was automatically selected, "Load XXX paper" will appear. Change the paper
in one of the trays or the bypass tray to the indicated size of paper.
• To cancel the multi-page enlargement setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
Although the multi-page enlargement setting is cancelle, the ratio selected automatically is kept valid.
• To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.

2-110

Contents

COPIER

REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image)
This feature is used to make a copy that is a mirror image of the original.

Original

1

Mirror image copy

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.

☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-105)
(1)

3

Select Mirror Image.

(2)

Special Modes

OK

Image Edit

OK

(1) Touch the [Mirror Image] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Photo Repeat

A3
Full Bleed

Multi-Page
Enlargement

Mirror
Image

Centring

B/W
Reverse

You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [START] key.

4

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you have
selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the
[Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

To cancel a mirror image setting...
Touch the [Mirror Image] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

2-111

Contents

COPIER

COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER (Centring)
This is used to centre the copied image on the paper.
This lets you place the image in the centre of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the
image is reduced.
Not using the centring function

1

Using the centring function

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.

☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-105)
(1)

3

Select Centring.

(2)

Special Modes

OK

Image Edit

OK

(1) Touch the [Centring] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Photo Repeat

A3
Full Bleed

Multi-Page
Enlargement

Mirror
Image

Centring

B/W
Reverse

You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [START] key.

4

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

2-112

Contents

COPIER

• The image can be reduced when using the centring function, but not enlarged.
• When the original size or the paper size is displayed as a special size, this function cannot be used.
To cancel centring...
Touch the [Centring] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

2-113

(

Contents

)

COPIER

REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W Reverse)
This is used to reverse black and white in a copy to create a negative image.
Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce
toner consumption.

Originals

1

B/W Reverse copy

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.

☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-105)
(1)

3

Select B/W Reverse.

(2)

Special Modes

OK

Image Edit

OK

(1) Touch the [B/W Reverse] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Photo Repeat

A3
Full Bleed

Multi-Page
Enlargement

Mirror
Image

Centring

B/W
Reverse

You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [START] key.

4

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

2-114

Contents

COPIER

When this function is selected, the "Original Image Type" setting for exposure adjustment automatically changes to "Text".
To cancel B/W reverse...
Touch the [B/W Reverse] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

2-115

(

Contents

)

COPIER

ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN
IMAGE (Sharpness)
This is used to sharpen an image or make it softer.

Soft

Sharp

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.

2

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Sharpness] key.

(1)

(2)
OK

Special Modes
Cancel

Sharpness

OK

Adjust the image.
(1) Touch the [Soft] key or the [Sharp] key so
that it is highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

3
Soft

You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.

Sharp

Press the [START] key.

4

Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you have selected
sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

When this function is selected, the exposure adjustment setting automatically changes to manual adjustment.
Automatic exposure adjustment cannot be selected.
To cancel the sharpness setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

2-116

Contents

COPIER

CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING
(Proof Copy)
This feature prints only one set of copies, regardless of how many sets have been specified. After the first set is checked
for errors, the remaining sets can be printed. Previously it was necessary to re-scan the original each time changes to
settings were required. However, this feature makes it possible to change settings for the scanned original without
scanning it again, allowing you perform copying more efficiently.
"Proof Copy" is
selected and 5 sets of
copies are executed

1 set of copies is
printed for you to
check

The remaining 4
sets are printed
If OK

A
A
AA
A
A
AA

A
A
AA

A
A
AA
Adjust the
settings

A
A
AA
A
A
AA
A
A
AA
A
A
AA

A
A
AA

A
A
AA
A
A
AA

If OK
The remaining 4 sets
are printed

After adjustments are
made, 1 set is printed
for you to check

1
2

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select copy settings in the base screen.

(3)

(2)

Special Modes

Stamp

3

Image Edit

File

Quick File

Original
Count

Mixed Size
Original

(4)
OK

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2
2

(2) Touch the
screens.

Sharpness

Proof Copy

Slow Scan
Mode

Select Proof Copy.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
keys to switch through the

(3) Touch the [Proof Copy] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.

2-117

Contents

COPIER

7
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy

4

Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
If you will copy multiple originals using the document glass,
switch to sort mode after this step.
☞ Sort mode (page 2-34)

Plain
8½ 11

Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) and then enter the correct number.

Press the [START] key.

5

One set of copies is printed.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple originals, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all
pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key. One set of copies will be printed.
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

Press [End] to continue.
To make a proof copy again, press
[Start].

6

Change

End

Check the printed set of copies. If the
copies are acceptable, touch the [End]
key. If you need to change the settings,
touch the [Change] key.
When the [End] key is touched, the remaining sets are printed.
If you touched the [Change] key, go to the next step.

To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

2-118

Contents

COPIER

(1)

(2)
OK

Proof Copy

Change the settings.
(1) Touch the key of the setting that you want
to change.
The setting screen of the touched key opens. Change the
settings and touch the [OK] key.

Paper Select

2-Sided Copy

Output

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Special Modes

7
• To change the number of sets printed, set the desired number of copies (sets) with the numeric keys. After changing
the number of sets, touch the [End] key in the touch panel (not the [START] key) to print the sets.
• Special modes that can be adjusted are Margin Shift, Pamphlet Copy, Tandem Copy, Covers/Inserts, Transparency
Inserts, Multi-Shot, and Stamp.
• For Pamphlet Copy, Covers/Inserts, and Multi Shot, only changes to the settings of the functions can be made; the
functions cannot be newly added or deleted.
• When transparency film is used, the settings can be changed, new settings can be added, and the function can be
cancelled. However, this is not possible when pamphlet copying is enabled.

Press the [START] key.

8

One set of copies is printed again using the adjusted settings. Check the results. If further adjustments are needed, repeat
steps 6 through 8. (Repeating Proof Copy does not decrease the remaining number of sets to be printed.)

Touch the [End] key.
Press [End] to continue.
To make a proof copy again, press
[Start].

9

Change

You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the
remaining sets will be printed.
End

To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

If Proof Copy is executed while the machine is printing another job, the other job is interrupted and the proof copies are
printed. The previous job will resume after the proof copies are printed.
However, if proof copy is executed during output of a job for which both two-sided printing and stapling are enabled, the proof
copy will be output after the job in progress is finished.
If the [End] key is touched to execute printing of the remaining sets while the machine is printing another job, the remaining
sets will be printed after all previously reserved jobs are completed.

2-119

Contents

COPIER

CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING
(Original Count)
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before copying is executed. By allowing you to check
the number of original sheets that were scanned, this helps reduce the occurrence of copy mistakes.

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.

1

Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

1

Indicator
line

(3)

(2)

Special Modes

Stamp

2

Image Edit

File

Quick File

Original
Count

Mixed Size
Original

(4)
OK

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2
2

(2) Touch the
screens.

Sharpness

Proof Copy

Slow Scan
Mode

Select Original Count.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
keys to switch through the

(3) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [START] key.

3

To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

2-120

Contents

COPIER

After scanning is finished, check the
number of sheets that were scanned and
touch the [OK] key.

130 pages of original
have been scanned.
Copy the scanned data?

Cancel

4

OK

Copying will begin.
• When job build mode is used, the number of scanned sheets
appears when the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The number that is displayed is the number of scanned
original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
For example, when two-sided copying is performed using
one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one
original sheet was scanned, not "2" to indicate the front-side
page and the reverse side page.

If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of original sheets...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

To cancel the original count mode setting...
Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.

2-121

Contents

COPIER

COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original)
Even when B4 (8-1/2" x 14") originals are mixed in with A3 (11" x 17") originals, all originals can be copied at once. When
scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original and uses paper appropriate for that size.
When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection, the ratio is adjusted individually for each original according
to the selected paper size, enabling output on a uniform paper size.
Copies

Originals

B4

B4

A3

A3
When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection
(Auto ratio selection and A3 (11" x 17") are selected)

Copies

Originals

B4

A3
A3

A3

An B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size original will be
enlarged to A3 (11" x 17") size.
There are two settings for mixed size originals.

Same Width

Use this setting for originals that are different sizes but have sides that are the same length. The originals
are inserted in the document feeder tray with the sides that are the same length aligned together on the left.
• A3 and A4
• B4 and B5
• A4R and A5
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 11" • 8-1/2" x 14" and 8-1/2" x 11"R
• 8-1/2" x 14" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
• 8-1/2" x 13" and 8-1/2" x 11"R
• 8-1/2" x 13" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
• 8-1/2" x 11"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

Different Width

Use this setting when the originals are different sizes and do not have sides that are the same length. This
setting can only be used for the following combinations of sizes:
• A3 and B4
• A3 and B5
• B4 and A4
• A4 and B5
• B4 and A4R
• B4 and A5
• B5 and A4R
• B5 and A5
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14"
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13"
• 11" x 17" and 5-1/2 x 8-1/2"

2-122

Contents

COPIER

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
● When "Same Width" is used
Place the originals with the sides that are the same length
aligned on the left.

A3 (11" x 17")

A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
Place with the sides that are the same
length aligned on the left.

1

● When "Different Width" is used
Place the originals
aligned to the far left
corner.
B4
(8-1/2" x 14")

Place the originals with the corners aligned in the far left corner
of the document feeder tray.

B4
(8-1/2" x 14")

A3 (11" x 17")

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key.

☞ Special modes menu (2nd screen) (page 2-43)
(1)

(2)
OK

Special Modes
Mixed Size Original

3

Same Width

Cancel

Place the same width
originals.

OK

Select Mixed Size Original settings.
(1) Touch the [Same Width] key or the
[Different Width] key as appropriate for the
originals.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Different
Width

2-123

Contents

COPIER

Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.

4
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

• When [Different Width] is selected, the staple function cannot be used.
• The mixed size original function cannot be used to copy originals that are the same size but are placed in different
orientations (A4 and A4R (8-1/2" x 11" and 8-1/2" x 11"R), etc.).
To cancel the mixed size original setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.

2-124

Contents

COPIER

COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan
Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.

A

A

B
C
D

B

C

D

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

1

Indicator
line

1

If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.

(3)

(2)

Special Modes

2

Stamp

Image Edit

Sharpness

File

Quick File

Proof Copy

Original
Count

Mixed Size
Original

Slow Scan
Mode

(4)

Select Slow Scan Mode.

OK

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2
2

(2) Touch the
screens.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 2-42)
keys to switch through the

(3) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.

Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.

3
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

2-125

Contents

COPIER

The "2-Sided to 2-Sided" and "2-Sided to 1-Sided" modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used.
To cancel the slow scan mode setting...
Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
This is used to have scanning always take place in slow scan mode.

2-126

(

Contents

)

COPIER

CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
This section explains convenient copy functions such as interrupting a copy run, changing the order of reserved copy
jobs, and storing copy settings in a program.

INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN
(Interrupt copy)
When you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, use interrupt copy.
Interrupt copy temporarily stops the job in progress and lets you perform the interrupt copy job first.

Copies in progress from tray 4.
Ready to scan for next copy job.

7

Interrupt

Special Modes

Touch the [Interrupt] key.
The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being
scanned.

2-Sided Copy
Output

1

Exposure
Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

Preview

1

Place the original.

2

3

1

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.

Select copy settings and press the [START] key.
The interrupt copy job begins.

When the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted job resumes.

4

To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (
).

2-127

Contents

COPIER

• If user authentication is enabled, the login screen will appear when the [Interrupt] key is pressed. Enter your user name
and password to log in. The number of copies made will be added to the count of the user that logged in.
• Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.
• Interrupt copy cannot be used in combination with the following special modes:
Job Build, Tandem Copy, Book Copy, Card Shot, Multi-Page Enlargement, Original Count
• If the document glass is used for an interrupt copy job, 2-sided copying, sort copying, and staple sort copying cannot be
selected. If any of these functions are necessary, use the automatic document feeder.

2-128

(

Contents

)

COPIER

CHECKING A PREVIEW IMAGE OF A COPY
(Preview)
You can touch the [Preview] key so that it is highlighted in the base screen and then scan the original to check a preview
image of the copy in the touch panel before printing the copy.

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Touch the [Preview] key so that it is
highlighted.

Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

File

2

Quick File
Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

Select copy settings and press the [START] key.

3

After the original is scanned, a preview image of the copy appears in the touch panel. The copy is not printed until the [Start
Copy] key is touched in the preview screen.

Reset

Preview

Display Output
Function Rev.

Check the preview image and then touch
the [Start Copy] key.
Copy printing begins.
For details on the preview screen, see "PREVIEW SCREEN"
(page 2-131).

Display Rotation

4

Start Copy

0001 /0010

If you need to change the copy settings, touch the [Reset] key.
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

2-129

Contents

COPIER

To cancel the operation...
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key (

).

System Settings (Administrator): Default Preview
You can set the default state of the [Preview] key to always selected (highlighted). Enable this setting if you wish to check a
preview image each time you make a copy.

2-130

(

Contents

)

COPIER

PREVIEW SCREEN
The preview screen is explained below.
Reset

Preview

(3)

Display Output

(4)

Function Rev.

(5)
(6)

(1)
Display Rotation

Start Copy

0001 /0010

(7)
(8)

(2)
(1)

(4)

Preview image

(2)

Change page keys
When there are multiple pages of images, use these keys
to change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.

(3)

Touch to change the copy settings after checking the
preview image. After changing the settings, touch the
[Preview Again] key to update the preview image with the
new settings.
Preview/Reset

Cancel

2-Sided Copy

(5)

Special Modes

[Function Rev.] key
Touch to check special mode items, 2-sided copying, and
output settings.

(6)

Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice", "4
Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in the
file, not just the displayed page.

(7)

[Reset] key

[Display Output] key
Touch to show the selected modes and settings as icons.
Functions that are displayed are as follows:
• 2-sided copying
• Pamphlet copy
• Book copy
• Staple (including saddle stitch) function
• Punch function
• Stamp menu
• Covers/Inserts
• Transparency inserts
This key can only be touched when the entire preview
image is displayed in the preview screen.

A preview image of the scanned original is displayed.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to
scroll.)

"Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.

(8)

[Start Copy] key
Touch to start printing the copy.

Preview Again

Output

• A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
• The preview image reflects certain copy settings and special mode settings. Settings that are reflected in the preview
image are as follows:
Copy settings: ratio, paper size
Special modes: margin shift, edge erase, dual page copy, pamphlet copy, covers/inserts, transparency film, 2 in 1/4 in 1,
book copy, card shot, image edit menu, Sharpness
• Fine lines (such as borderlines printed by the 2in1/4in1 function) may not appear correctly at some zoom ratios.

2-131

Contents

COPIER

JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Example: Pressing the key in copy mode
Print Job
Job Queue

JOB STATUS

Scan to

Fax Job

Internet Fax

Sets / Progress

Status

1

Copy

020 / 001

Copying

2

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

3

Computer01

002 / 000

Waiting

4

0312345678

001 / 000

Waiting

Spool
Job Queue
1

Complete

1

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

The job status display (A) is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the
job status screen. The first four jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and reserved jobs) can be checked in the job
status display (B).
Ready to scan for copy.

0

Job Status
MFP Status

Special Modes
020/001
2-Sided Copy

Copying

Output

002/000

Exposure
Waiting

Auto

File
Quick File

002/000
Waiting

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

001/000
Preview

Waiting

Tray1

(A)

(B)

2-132

Contents

COPIER

JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of the job queue screen that shows copy and print jobs waiting to be printed and the job
currently in progress, the completed job screen that shows jobs that have been completed, and the spool screen that
shows print jobs that have been spooled and encrypted PDF jobs that are waiting for a password to be entered. This
section explains the job queue screen and the completed jobs screen, which are related to copy mode. The job status
screen switches between the job queue screen and the completed jobs screen each time the job status screen selector
key is touched.
(1)

Print Job
Job Queue

(2)

Scan to

Fax Job

Internet Fax

Sets / Progress

Status

1

Copy

020 / 001

Copying

2

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

3

Computer01

002 / 000

Waiting

4

0312345678

001 / 000

Waiting

Print Job

1

Complete

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

(1)

(3)

1

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

Mode select tabs
Use these tabs to select the mode that is shown in the
job status screen.
The status of copy jobs can be checked by touching the
[Print Job] tab.

(2)

(3)

Sets

Internet Fax
Status

1

Computer02

11:00 04/01 001/001 OK

2

Computer03

10:33 04/01 010/010 OK

3

Computer04

10:31 04/01 013/013 OK

4

file-01

10:30 04/01 010/010 OK

5

Copy

10:13 04/01 001/001 OK

6

Copy

10:03 04/01 001/001 OK

7

Computer05

10:01 04/01 003/003 OK

8

Copy

10:00 04/01 010/010 OK

Spool
Job Queue
1

Complete

2

(7)
Detail

(8)

Call

(9)

Job list (completed jobs screen)
This shows up to 99 completed jobs. The result (status)
of each completed job is shown. Copy jobs that used the
document filing function are indicated as keys.

(8)

Job list (job queue screen)
Jobs waiting to be printed appear in the job queue as
keys. The jobs are printed in order from the top of the
queue. Each job key shows information on the job and
the current status of the job.

Fax Job

Set Time

Spool
Job Queue

Scan to

Jobs Completed

[Detail] key (completed jobs screen)
When a job is shown as a key in the job list, the [Detail]
key can be touched to show detailed information on the
job.

(9)

[Call] key
Touch this key to retrieve and use a copy job stored
using the document filing function.

Job status screen selector key
Touch this key to switch through the job queue screen,
the completed jobs screen, and the spool screen.

(4)

[Detail] key (job queue screen)
Touch this key to display detailed information on a job.

(5)

[Priority] key
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.

(6)

[Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.

2-133

Contents

COPIER

Job key display
Each job key shows the position of the job in the job queue and the current status of the job.

2
(1)
(1)

Copy
(2)

002/000
(3)

(4)

Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job
queue.

(6)

When the job currently being printed is finished, the job
moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2)

Mode icon
The

(3)

icon appears when the job is a copy job.

Shows the job status.
Message

Status

"Copying"

Copying is in progress.

"Waiting"

The job is waiting to be executed.

"Toner
Empty"

The toner cartridge is out of toner.
Replace the toner cartridge with a
new cartridge.

"Paper
Empty"

The paper used for the job has run
out. Add paper or change to a
different paper tray.

"Limit"

The copy page limit has been
exceeded. Check with the
administrator of the machine.

"Error"

An error occurred while the job was
being executed. Clear the error
condition.

Number of copies (sets) entered
This shows the number of copies (sets) specified.

(5)

(6)

Status

Job name
"Copy" appears for a copy job.
When user authentication is enabled, the name of the
user that performed the job appears.

(4)

(5)

Waiting

Number of completed copies
This shows the number of copies (sets) completed. "000"
appears while the job is waiting in the job queue.

2-134

Contents

COPIER

CANCELLING A JOB THAT IS WAITING IN THE QUEUE
A copy job that is waiting to be printed can be cancelled.

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

1

Print Job

Cancel the job.

(2)

(1)
Scan to

Fax Job

(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.

Internet Fax

Job Queue

Sets / Progress

Status

1

Computer01

020 / 001

Printing

2

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

3

Computer02

002 / 000

Waiting

4

0312345678

001 / 000

Waiting

Spool
Job Queue
1

Complete

(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].

1

Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Detail

(3) Touch the key of the copy job that you wish
to cancel.

Priority
Stop/Delete

(4) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
(3)

2

(4)

(5) A message appears to confirm the
cancellation. Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the job?
Copy

No

Yes

The selected job key is deleted and printing is cancelled.
If the job in progress is a copy job, you can also press the [STOP] key (
To cancel, touch the [Yes] key.

) to display the above screen.

If you do not want to cancel the selected print job...
Touch the [No] key in step (5).

2-135

Contents

COPIER

GIVING PRIORITY TO A JOB IN THE QUEUE
If a copy job is begun when there are already multiple jobs in the queue, the copy job will appear at the end of the queue.
However, if you have an urgent copy job, you can give priority to the job and have it executed first.

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

1

Print Job

2

Give the desired job priority.

(2)

(1)
Scan to

Fax Job

(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.

Internet Fax

Job Queue

Sets / Progress

Status

1

Computer01

020 / 001

Printing

2

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

3

Computer02

002 / 000

Waiting

4

0312345678

001 / 000

Waiting

Spool
Job Queue
1

Complete

(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].

1

Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Detail

(3) Touch the key of the copy job to which you
want to give priority.

Priority
Stop/Delete

(4) Touch the [Priority] key.
(3)

(4)

The job being printed stops and the job selected in (3) is
printed.

2-136

Contents

COPIER

CHECKING INFORMATION ON A COPY JOB WAITING
IN THE QUEUE
Detailed information can be displayed on a copy job waiting in the queue.

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

1

Print Job
Job Queue

Checking job details

(2)

(1)
Scan to

Fax Job

(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.

Internet Fax

Sets / Progress

Status

1

Copy

020 / 001

Copying

2

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

3

Computer01

002 / 000

Waiting

4

0312345678

001 / 000

Waiting

(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].

Spool
Job Queue
1

Complete

1

Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Detail

(3) Touch the key of the job that you wish to
check.

Priority
Stop/Delete

(4) Touch the [Detail] key.
(3)

(4)

The job check screen of the job selected in (3) appears.
OK

Detail
Copy

2

002 / 000

2-Sided
Copy:

Colour / B/W: B/W
Exposure:

Paper:

1
A4
Plain

Copy Ratio:

Waiting

3

5

Paper Select

Output:
Special
Modes:

X100% Y100%

[Paper Select] key
If a copy job is stopped because the paper ran out, the [Paper Select] key can be pressed to change to a
different paper tray.
When the [Paper Select] key is pressed, the paper tray selection screen appears.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
Touch the key of the tray that has the size of paper that you wish to use and then touch the [OK] key. The
stopped copy job will resume.

2-137

Contents

COPIER

STORING COPY OPERATIONS (Job Programs)
A job program is a group of copy settings stored together. When copy settings are stored in a job program, the settings
can be retrieved and used for a copy job by means of a simple operation.
For example, suppose A3 (11" x 17") size CAD drawings are copied once a month for archive purposes using the
following settings:
(1) The A3 (11" x 17") size CAD drawings are
reduced to A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size.
(2) The drawings have fine lines that do not
show clearly, and thus a dark exposure
setting (level 4) is used.
(3) To reduce paper use by half, 2-sided
copying is used.
(4) Margin shift is used so that holes can be
punched for filing.

A3 (11" x 17") size CAD drawings
Copies

When a job program is not stored

When a job program is stored

Set A3 (11" x 17") to A4 (8-1/2" x 11") reduction
Press the [#/P] key (

).

Change the exposure setting
Exit

Job Programs
Press program number.

Select 2-sided copying

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1
4

Select margin shift

Recall

Store/Delete

Select punch hole settings

Touch the stored program key.

Press the [START] key.

Press the [START] key.

Considerable time is required to copy the drawings each
month because the above settings must be selected.
In addition, mistakes are occasionally made when selecting
the settings, so some copies must be redone.

The settings are stored in a job program, so they can be
selected by the touch of a key. This is simple and takes no time.
In addition, the settings are all stored so there are no chances
for mistakes, and thus no need to redo copies due to setting
mistakes.

• Up to 48 job programs can be stored. The job programs are retained even if an interruption occurs in the power supply.
• Job programs can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Job program] and then [Copy] in the Web page menu to store a
job program.

2-138

Contents

COPIER

STORING (EDITING/DELETING) A JOB PROGRAM
The procedures for storing copy settings in a job program and deleting a job program are explained below.

Press the [#/P] key (

).

1
LOGOUT

Touch the [Store/Delete] tab.

Exit

Job Programs
Press program number.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1
4

2

Recall

Store/Delete

Touch a numeric key.

Exit

Job Programs

Numeric keys in which job programs are already stored are
highlighted.
• To store a job program, touch a numeric key that is not
highlighted.
• To edit or delete a job program, touch the key in which the
job program is stored (highlighted key).

Press program number.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1
4

Recall

3

Store/Delete

Editing or deleting a job program...
When a highlighted numeric key is touched, the following screen appears.
The [Store] key can be touched to delete the stored settings and store new settings. Go to the next step.
When the [Delete] key is touched, the stored settings are deleted. After the deletion is finished, touch the [Exit] key to
return to the base screen.

A job program has been already stored
in this location.

Cancel

Delete

Store

When "Disabling Deletion of Job Programs" is enabled in the system settings, a stored job program cannot be edited
or deleted.

2-139

Contents

COPIER

To store, make selections and press
[OK], to delete, press [Cancel].

Cancel

OK

Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure
Auto

Program Name

4
Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

Select the copy settings that you wish to
store in the job program and touch the
[OK] key.
To assign a name to the program, touch the [Program Name]
key. A text entry screen will appear.
Up to 10 characters can be entered for the name.
When you have finished, touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen with the stored information
reflected in the screen.

Preview

The number of copies cannot be stored.

2-140

Contents

COPIER

APPENDIX
Examples of covers and inserts
The relations between the originals and finished copies when covers or inserts are inserted are shown on the following
pages.
Covers
• 1-sided copying of 1-sided originals
• 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals
• 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals
• 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals
Inserts
• 1-sided copying of 1-sided originals
• 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals

• 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals
• 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals

Symbols used for covers and inserts

Symbol

Meaning

Icon
appearing
in display

Type

Type

The following symbols are used to make the explanations easier to understand.
The numbers that appear indicate what original a copy corresponds to, and will vary depending on the settings.
Symbol

Front cover when not
copied on.

5

6

1

1

Back cover when both
sides are copied on.

6

5

2-141

4

Back cover when not
copied on.

Insert when both sides are
copied on.

1-sided original or output
page of regular 1-sided
copying.

2

Inserts

3

Back cover when a 2-sided
original is copied on one
side of the back cover.
(One page is not copied.)

Insert when a 2-sided
original is copied on one
side of the insert. (One
page is not copied.)

3

Front cover when both
sides are copied on.

Back cover when a 1-sided
original is copied on one
side of the back cover.

Insert when one side is
copied on.

3

Other symbols

6

Back cover

6

2

Front cover

Front cover when a 2-sided
original is copied on one
side of the cover. (One
page is not copied.)

1

1

Insert when not copied on.

Front cover when one side
is copied on.

1

Icon
appearing
in display

Meaning

2-sided original or output
page of regular 2-sided
copying.
1-sided original or output
page of regular 1-sided
copying.

Output page of 2-sided
copying when only 1 side is
copied on due to lack of
originals.

Contents

COPIER

Covers (1-sided copying of 1-sided originals)
1-sided copies are made of the following 1-sided originals.
1st page
1

2nd page
2

3rd page

4th page

3

5th page

4

6th page

5

6

Cover copying condition
Resulting copies

1-sided
copying

No copying

2-sided
copying

No copying

No copying

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

3

4

5

6

1-sided
copying

1

2

3

4

5

2-sided
copying

1

2

3

4

5

No copying

1-sided
copying

1-sided
copying

1

2

3

4

5

1-sided
copying

2-sided
copying

1

2

3

4

5

2-sided
copying

1-sided
copying

1

3

4

5

2-sided
copying

2-sided
copying

1

3

4

5

2-142

6

6

6

6

6

2

2

1

6

No copying

6

No copying

2

Back cover

2

Front cover

Contents

COPIER

Covers (2-sided copying of 1-sided originals)
2-sided copies are made of the following 1-sided originals.
1st page
1

2nd page
2

3rd page

4th page

3

5th page

4

6th page

5

6

Cover copying condition

2-sided
copying

1

3

2

5

6

2-sided
copying

5

6

2

3

6

1

6

1-sided
copying

5

6

2-sided
copying

4

5

6

2

4

1

5

2-sided
copying

6

1-sided
copying

4

4

2

3

5

4

1

3

6

5

1-sided
copying

5

5

6

1-sided
copying

2

2-sided
copying

1

No copying

3

3

1-sided
copying

1

No copying

1

4

4

No copying

2

2

2-sided
copying

1

2

No copying

3

3

1-sided
copying

1

3

No copying

4

No copying

4

Back cover

2

Resulting copies
Front cover

2-143

Contents

COPIER

Covers (1-sided copying of 2-sided originals)
1-sided copies are made of the following 2-sided originals.

3

3rd page
5

6

2nd page

4

1

2

1st page

Cover copying condition
Resulting copies

1-sided
copying

No copying

2-sided
copying

No copying

No copying

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

3

4

5

6

1-sided
copying

1

2

3

4

5

2-sided
copying

1

2

3

4

5

No copying

1-sided
copying

1-sided
copying

1

2

3

4

5

1-sided
copying

2-sided
copying

1

2

3

4

5

2-sided
copying

1-sided
copying

1

3

4

5

2-sided
copying

2-sided
copying

1

3

4

5

2-144

6

6

6

6

6

2

2

1

6

No copying

6

No copying

2

Back cover

2

Front cover

Contents

COPIER

Covers (2-sided copying of 2-sided originals)
2-sided copies are made of the following 2-sided originals.

3

3rd page
5

6

2nd page

4

1

2

1st page

Cover copying condition

1-sided
copying

1

3

4

1-sided
copying

2-sided
copying

1

3

4

2-sided
copying

1-sided
copying

1

2

3

4

2-sided
copying

2-sided
copying

1

3

5

6

5

6

5

6

6

4

6

4

3

4

2

3

6

1-sided
copying

5

6

2-sided
copying

1

No copying

3

5

6

1-sided
copying

1

No copying

1

5

6

No copying

3

4

2-sided
copying

1

2

No copying

3

4

1-sided
copying

1

4

No copying

2

No copying

2

Back cover

2

Resulting copies
Front cover

2-145

Contents

COPIER

Inserts (copying of 1-sided originals)
1-sided and 2-sided copying of the following 1-sided originals. The example of adding an insert at the 3rd sheet is
shown. (when "Insertion Page" is set to "3" in the insertion settings of the insert settings in the special modes)

2

4th page

3

Insert
copying
condition

5th page

4

6th page

5

6

Resulting copies
(2-sided copying)

2

2-sided
copying

1

2

5

3

4

5

6

3

5

6

6

1

4

1

1

4

1

4

5

3

4

5

1-sided
copying

3

6

3

5

6

2

3

2

1

No copying

2

Resulting copies (1-sided copying)

6

1

3rd page

4

2nd page

2

1st page

Inserts (copying of 2-sided originals)
1-sided and 2-sided copying of the following 2-sided originals. The example of adding an insert at the 3rd sheet is
shown. (when "Insertion Page" is set to "3" in the insertion settings of the insert settings in the special modes)

1

2

4

5

6

3

5

6

1

4

1

1

2-146

3

3

5

3

5

5

6

2-sided
copying

3

6

6

2

5

6

1

4

2

1-sided
copying

3

2

2

2

1

No copying

4

Resulting copies
(2-sided copying)

Resulting copies (1-sided copying)

4

Insert
copying
condition

5

6

3

3rd page

4

1

2nd page

2

1st page

Contents

CHAPTER 3
PRINTER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the printer function.
To use the printer function, the printer function must be available.
PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . 3-3

CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS

PRINTING FROM WINDOWS

CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CREATING A PAMPHLET
(Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• INCREASING THE MARGIN (Margin Shift) . . .
• CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Poster
Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• SELECTING THE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED . . . . 3-7
VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
SAVING FREQUENTLY USED PRINT
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
• SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF
PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
• USING SAVED SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180
DEGREES (Rotate 180 degrees) . . . . . . . . . . .
• ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT
IMAGE (Zoom/XY-Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ADJUSTING LINE WIDTHS WHEN
PRINTING (Line Width Settings) . . . . . . . . . . .
• REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) . . . .

CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER
DEFAULT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SELECTING PAPER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SELECTING THE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-31
3-31
3-33
3-34
3-35
3-35
3-36
3-37
3-38

IMAGE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
• ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS AND
CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (Image
Adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
• PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN
BLACK (Text To Black/Vector To Black) . . . . . 3-40

3-16
3-16
3-17
3-19

PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED . . . 3-20

FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND
IMAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED
PAGES (Watermark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT
DATA (Image Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CREATING OVERLAYS FOR PRINT
DATA (Overlays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS
SELECTING A PRINT MODE SETTING . . . . . . . . 3-22
TWO-SIDED PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER . . . 3-26
PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE
PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

3-1

3-41
3-41
3-42
3-43

PRINTER

PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL
PURPOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING SPECIFIED PAGES ON
DIFFERENT PAPER (Different Paper). . . . . . .
• ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency
Inserts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING A CARBON COPY (Carbon
Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB
PAPER (Tab Paper Print/Tab Paper
Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC
PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE
(Chapter Inserts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALF
(Fold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS

3-44

JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
• SPOOL SCREEN/JOB QUEUE
SCREEN/COMPLETED JOB SCREEN . . . . . . 3-67

3-44

PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE. . . . . . . . . 3-69
3-46
3-47

GIVING A PRINT JOB
PRIORITY/CANCELLING A PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . 3-70
• GIVING A PRINT JOB PRIORITY . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
• CANCELLING A PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71

3-48

CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND
PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT . . . . . . . . . 3-72

3-51

APPENDIX

3-52

PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATION LIST . . . . . . 3-73

CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . 3-53
• USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A
LARGE PRINT JOB (Tandem Print). . . . . . . . . 3-53
• SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES
(Retention/Document Filing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER
DRIVER
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE. . . .
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP
SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB
MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A
NETWORK FOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-57

DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER . . . .
• SUBMIT PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FTP PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• E-MAIL PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-64
3-64
3-64
3-65

3-58
3-59
3-61

3-2

PRINTER

PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE
To use the machine's print function, the expansion kit must be installed in the machine in accordance with your
environment. Printing will be possible from your computer after you have installed the printer driver.
See the table below to determine which printer driver to use in your environment.
Environment

Printer driver type

Remarks

The printer expansion kit*2
is required.

Windows

PCL6, PCL5e*1
The machine supports the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 and PCL5e printer
control languages. It is recommended that you use the PCL6 printer
driver. If you have a problem printing from older software using the PCL6
printer driver, use the PCL5e printer driver.

Macintosh

PS
This printer driver supports the PostScript 3 page description language
developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated, and enables the machine to
be used as a PostScript 3 compatible printer.
(A PPD file is available if it is desired to use the Windows standard PS
printer driver.)

The printer expansion kit*2
and PS3 expansion kit are
required.

*1 The PCL5e printer driver cannot be available in some countries.
*2 The printer expansion kit is the standard equipment for N models.
This manual assumes that the printer expansion kit has been installed. Print functions that require the PS3 expansion kit also
require installation of the printer expansion kit.

Installing the printer driver in a Windows environment
To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Windows environment, see "SETUP IN A WINDOWS
ENVIRONMENT" (page 1-81) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
The explanations in this manual of printing in a Windows environment generally use the screens of the PCL6 printer driver.
The printer driver screens may differ slightly depending on the printer driver that you are using.

Installing the printer driver in a Macintosh environment
In a Macintosh environment, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed to use the machine as a network printer.
To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Macintosh environment, see "SETUP IN A MACINTOSH
ENVIRONMENT" (page 1-109) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

3-3

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE
The following example explains how to print a document from "WordPad", which is a standard accessory program in
Windows.

Select [Print] from the [File] menu of
WordPad.
If you are using Windows 7, click the

button.

1

The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.

Open the printer driver properties
window.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
• If the printer drivers appear as icons, click the icon
of the printer driver to be used.
• If the printer drivers appear as a list, select the
name of the printer driver to be used from the list.

(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
If you are using Windows 2000, the [Preferences]
button does not appear. Click a tab on the "Print"
dialog box to adjust the settings on that tab.

2

(1)

(2)

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.

3-4

Contents

PRINTER

(1)

Select print settings.

(2)

(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select the paper size.
To select settings on other tabs, click the desired tab
and then select the settings.

(3) Click the [OK] button.

3

(3)

• Make sure the paper size is the same as the paper size set in the software application.
• Up to eight custom paper sizes can be stored. Storing a custom paper size makes it easy to specify that size each
time you need to use it.
To store a paper size, select [Custom Paper] or one of [User1] to [User7] from the pull-down menu and click the
[Custom] button.

Click the [Print] button.
Printing begins.

4

3-5

Contents

PRINTER

SELECTING THE PAPER
This section explains how to configure the "Paper Selection" setting on the [Paper] tab of
the printer driver properties window.
Before printing, check the paper sizes, paper types, and paper remaining in the machine's
trays. To view the most recent tray information, click the [Tray Status] button.

• When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Source"
The tray that has the size and type of paper selected in "Paper Size" and "Paper Type" on the [Paper] tab is
automatically selected.
• When other than [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Source"
The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting.
When [Bypass Tray] is selected
The "Paper Type" must also be selected. Check the bypass tray and make sure that the desired type of paper is
loaded, and then select the appropriate "Paper Type" setting.
• Special media can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper and other media in the bypass
tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-42) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• When "Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray" (disabled by factory default) or "Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray" (enabled by factory default) is enabled in the system settings (administrator), printing will not take place if the
paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings
of the bypass tray.

• When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Type"
A tray with plain paper or recycled paper of the size specified in "Paper Size" is automatically selected. (The factory
default setting is plain paper only.)
• When other than [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Type"
A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" is used for printing.
System Settings (Administrator): Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Selection", specify whether or not the paper in the bypass tray will be excluded from
the paper that can be selected. This setting is disabled by factory default, and thus paper in the bypass tray is included in the
paper that can be automatically selected. If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it is recommended that
this setting be enabled.

3-6

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED
When the user authentication function is enabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), your user information
(login name, password, etc.) must be entered in the printer driver properties window before you can print. The
information that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the
administrator of the machine before printing.

Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.

1

(1)

(2)

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.

3-7

Contents

PRINTER

(1)

Enter your login name and password.

(2)

(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.
(2) Enter your user information.
• When authentication is by login name/password
Select the [Login Name] and [Password]
checkboxes so that checkmarks
appear, and
enter your login name and password. Enter 1 to 32
characters for the password.
• When authentication is by user number
Click the [User Number] checkbox
and enter a
user number (5 to 8 digits).
When [User Authentication] has been checked
on [Printing Policy] on the [Configuration] tab,
you cannot enter the user information here.
Enter the user information on the dialog box
whenever you print.

2

(3) Enter the user name and job name as
necessary.
(4)

• User Name
Click the [User Name] checkbox
and enter your
user name (maximum of 32 characters). Your
entered user name will appear at the top of the
operation panel. If you do not enter a user name,
your computer login name will appear.
• Job Name
Click the [Job Name] checkbox
and enter a job
name (maximum of 30 characters). The entered job
name will appear at the top of the operation panel
as a file name. If you do not enter a job name, the
file name set in the software application will appear.

(3)

(4) Click the [OK] button.
To have a confirmation window appear before printing starts, select the [Auto Job Control Review] checkbox so that a
checkmark
appears.

Start printing.

3

• Even when user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), normally printing is possible without
entering user information. The number of pages printed is added to the "Other User" count. In this case, other print
functions may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.
• The machine's user authentication function cannot be used when the PPD file* is installed and the Windows standard PS
printer driver is used. For this reason, printing will not be possible if printing by invalid users is prohibited in the system
settings (administrator).
* The PPD file enables the machine to print using the standard PS printer driver of the operating system.

3-8

Contents

PRINTER

System Settings (Administrator): Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
This is used to prohibit printing of print jobs by users whose user information is not stored in the machine. When this function
is enabled, printing is not allowed when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.

3-9

(

Contents

)

PRINTER

VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP
When selecting settings in the printer driver, you can display Help to view explanations of the settings.

Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.

1

(1)

(2)

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.

Click the [Help] button.
The Help window will open to let you view explanations of
the settings on the tab.
To view Help for settings in a dialog box, click the
underlined text at the top of the Help window.

2

Pop-up help
Help can be displayed for a setting by clicking the setting and pressing the [F1] key.
* To view Help for a setting in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, click the
button in the upper right-hand corner of the
printer driver properties window and then click the setting.
You can also view the same Help by right-clicking the setting and clicking the [Help] box that appears.

Information icon
Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver properties window.
When a restriction exists on a selected setting, an information icon (
) will appear next to the setting. Click the icon to
view an explanation of the restriction.

3-10

Contents

PRINTER

SAVING FREQUENTLY USED PRINT
SETTINGS
Settings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as user settings. Saving frequently used
settings or complex settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you need to
use them.

SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING
Settings can be saved from any tab of the printer driver properties window. Settings configured on each tab are listed at
the time of saving, allowing you to check the settings as you save them.

Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.

1

(1)

(2)

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.

Save the print settings.
(1) Configure print settings on each tab.
(2) Click the [Save] button.

2
(1)

(2)

3-11

Contents

PRINTER

(1)

Check and save the settings.

(2)

(1) Check the displayed settings.
(2) Enter a name for the settings (maximum
of 20 characters).
(3) Click the [OK] button.

3

(3)

Click the [OK] button.

4

Start printing.

5

• Up to 30 sets of user settings can be saved.
• The following items cannot be saved in user settings.
- A watermark that you created
- Paper insertion settings
- Overlay file
- [Tab Paper Print] settings on the [Special Modes] tab (PCL6 only)
- The login name, password, user name, and job name entered in the [Job Handling] tab

3-12

Contents

PRINTER

USING SAVED SETTINGS
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.

1

(1)

(2)

The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.

Select the print settings.
(1) Select the user settings that you wish to
use.
(2) Click the [OK] button.

2

(1)

(2)

Start printing.

3
Deleting saved settings
Select the user settings that you want to delete in (1) of step 2 above, and click the [Delete] button.

3-13

Contents

PRINTER

CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER
DEFAULT SETTINGS
The default settings of the printer driver can be changed using the procedure below. The settings selected using this
procedure are saved and become the default settings when printing from a software application. (Settings selected in
the printer driver properties window when printing from an application remain in effect only while the application is in
use.)

Click the [Start] button (

1

) and select [Control Panel] and then [Printer].

• In Windows 7, click the [start] button and then click [Devices and Printers].
• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes].
• In Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then select [Printers].
In Windows XP, if [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [start] menu, select [Control Panel], select [Printers and
Other Hardware], and then select [Printers and Faxes].

Open the printer properties window.

(1)

(2)

(1) Click the icon of the printer driver of the
machine.
In Windows 7, right-click the icon of the printer driver
of the machine. Go to step (3).

(2) Click the [Organize] menu.
In Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, click the [File]
menu.

2

(3) Select [Properties].
In Windows 7, click the [Printer properties] menu.

(3)

Click the [Printing Preferences] button
on the [General] tab.
In Windows 7, click the [Preferences] button on the
[General] tab.

3

3-14

Contents

PRINTER

"'"
I

4

Pope<

Jdvanced SpeaaI Mode. Job Kardng Watermarlu

-II

Use.- Se!!ngs lUruled

Q

.....
...... "'"

Co....

1

2·Sided(tlook)

~
-.

-

~ NoOffoel

e p~StyIe

-"'"

-I

INane

N·l.tI f'notnlI

....

-I

. Pu"lCl"

2·Soded(TabIet)

:-

For explanations of the settings, see printer driver Help.

...

"""""''''"

@1-Sided

IH"

I

Dol....

lle'i

"..,

TtledP~

[jJil[Jll

II

So..

Configure the settings and click the
[OK] button.

-I

,--50

o

"

POll~

'""~ Rotate 180~

-

lo~:::::t:::~:J~~

3-15

(

Contents

)

PRINTER

PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE
The following example explains how to print a document from the standard accessory program "TextEdit" in Mac OS X
("SimpleText" in Mac OS 9).
To use the machine as a printer for the Macintosh, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed in the machine and the machine
must be connected to a network. To install the PPD file and configure printer driver settings, see "SETUP IN A
MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT" (page 1-109) in "BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

SELECTING PAPER SETTINGS
Select paper settings in the printer driver before selecting the print command.

Select [Page Setup] from the [File]
menu of TextEdit.
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of
SimpleText.

1

Select paper settings.

(1)

(1) Make sure that the correct printer is
selected.
(2) Select paper settings.
The paper size, paper orientation, and enlarge/reduce
can be selected.

(3) Click the [OK] button.

2
(2)

(3)

The machine name that appears in the "Format for" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of
characters that varies depending on your machine model.)

3-16

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTING
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of
TextEdit.
In Mac OS 9, select [Print] from the [File] menu of
SimpleText.

1

The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.

Make sure that the correct printer is
selected.

2
The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on the machine model.)

Select print settings.
• In Mac OS X, click
next to [Copies & Pages] and
select the settings that you wish to configure from the
pull-down menu. The corresponding setting screen will
appear. If the settings do not appear in Mac OS X v10.5
to 10.5.8 and 10.6 to 10.6.1, click " " next to the printer
name.
• In Mac OS 9, click
next to [General] and select the
settings that you wish to configure from the pull-down
menu. The corresponding setting screen will appear.

3

3-17

Contents

PRINTER

Primer
Presets

:1
:1 - - - -

: Standard

! Copi ~ s & Pag ..

4

Copi..
Pages

Printing begins.

~Co ll at~d

1

(!l AII
O From

Click the [Print] button.

:1

: SCxnxxx

1

to

1

~I ~ I

3-18

(

Contents

)

PRINTER

SELECTING THE PAPER
This section explains the [Paper Feed] settings ("Paper Source" setting in [General] in Mac OS 9) in the print settings
window.
• When [Auto Select] is selected
A tray with plain paper or recycled paper (the factory default setting is plain paper only) of the size specified in "Paper
Size" in the page settings window is automatically selected.
• When a paper tray is selected
The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting in the page settings window.
For the bypass tray, a paper type can also be specified. Make sure that the paper type setting for the bypass tray is
correct and that the set type of paper is actually loaded in the bypass tray, and then select the appropriate bypass tray
(paper type).
• Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper and other
media in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-42) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
• When "Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray" (disabled by factory default) or "Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray" (enabled by factory default) is enabled in the system settings (administrator), printing will not take place if the
paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings
of the bypass tray.

• When a paper type is selected
A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" in the page settings window is used for
printing.
System Settings (Administrator): Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
When [Auto Select] is used for printing, this setting determines whether or not the paper in the bypass tray will be excluded
from the paper that can be selected. This setting is disabled by factory default, and thus paper in the bypass tray is included
in the paper that can be automatically selected. If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it is recommended
that this setting be enabled.

3-19

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED
When the user authentication function is enabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), you must enter your
user information (login name, password, etc.) in order to print. The information that must be entered varies depending on
the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing.

Select [Print] from the application's
[File] menu.

1

The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.

Display the job handling screen.

(1)

(1) Make sure that the machine's printer
name is selected.
(2) Select [Job Handling].
• In Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 and 10.6 to 10.6.1,
select [Job Handling] and then click the
[Authentication] tab in the screen that appears.
• In Mac OS 9, select [User Authentication].

2
(2)

The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on the machine model.)

3-20

Contents

PRINTER

Start printing.
(1) Enter your user information.
• When authentication is by login name/password
Enter your login name in "Login Name" and your
password in "Password" (1 to 32 characters).
• When authentication is by user number
Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits) in "User
Number".

(2) Enter the user name and job name as
necessary.

3
(1)

(2)

(3)

• User Name
Enter your user name (maximum of 32 characters).
Your entered user name will appear at the top of the
operation panel. If you do not enter a user name,
your computer login name will appear.
• Job Name
Enter a job name (maximum of 30 characters). The
entered job name will appear at the top of the
operation panel as a file name. If you do not enter a
job name, the file name set in the software
application will appear.

(3) Click the [Print] button.
In Mac OS X, you can click the
(lock) button after entering your login name and password, or user number, to
simplify operation the next time you wish to print based on the same user authentication.

Even when user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), normally printing is possible without
entering user information. The number of pages printed is added to the "Other User" count. In this case, other print functions
may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.
System Settings (Administrator): Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
This is used to prohibit printing of print jobs by users whose user information is not stored in the machine. When this function
is enabled, printing is not allowed when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.

3-21

Contents

PRINTER

FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS
This section explains frequently used functions.
• SELECTING A PRINT MODE SETTING
• TWO-SIDED PRINTING (page 3-24)
• FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER (page
3-26)

• PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE (page
3-27)
• STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN
OUTPUT (page 3-29)

The explanations assume that the paper size and other basic settings have already been selected. For the basic
procedure for printing and the steps for opening the printer driver properties window, see the following section:
☞ Windows: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-4)
☞ Macintosh: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-16)
In Windows, view printer driver Help for details on printer driver settings for each printing function.

SELECTING A PRINT MODE SETTING
This section explains the procedure for selecting a print mode setting. The "Print Mode Settings" consist of the following
two items:
Normal:
Fine:

This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table.
Select this when you want to print a photo with greater clarity or print graphics with gradations, etc.

Windows
(This function is not available when using the PCL5e printer driver.)
(1)

(2)

(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Select the "Print Mode".

3-22

Contents

PRINTER

Macintosh
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(1)

(2) (3)

(2) Select [Advanced].
(3) Select the "Print Mode".

__________~F.:.=":,~.~s:.,:,JI~Ad
~.:.";';.~d------------_"'
: i_____

o Toner Save
C) No Offse t
Prin!

MOdt'I:~N·,·,·m·"""""""""""""""·:~I!~ I

Doc.

'1

3-23

(

Contents

)

PRINTER

TWO-SIDED PRINTING
The machine can print on both sides of the paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly
convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. Two-sided printing also helps conserve paper.
Paper
orientation

Print results
Windows

Macintosh

Windows

Macintosh

2-Sided(Book)

Long-edged binding
(Flip on long edge)

2-Sided(Tablet)

Short-edged binding
(Flip on short edge)

Windows

Macintosh

Windows

Macintosh

2-Sided(Book)

Short-edged binding
(Flip on short edge)

2-Sided(Tablet)

Long-edged binding
(Flip on long edge)

Vertical

Horizontal

The pages are printed so that they can be bound at
the side.

The pages are printed so that they can be bound at
the top.

Windows
(1)

(2)

(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select [2-Sided(Book)] or [2-Sided(Tablet)].

3-24

Contents

PRINTER

Macintosh
(1)

(2)

(1) Select [Layout].
(2) Select [Long-edged binding] or
[Short-edged binding].
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the settings in
[Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select [Output/Document Style] and
then select [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short
edge].

3-25

Contents

PRINTER

FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER
This function is used to automatically enlarge or reduce the printed image to match the size of the paper loaded in the
machine.
This is convenient for such purposes as enlarging an A4 or letter document to A3 or ledger size to make it easier to view,
and to print when the same size of paper as the document image is not loaded in the machine.

A4 or letter

A3 or ledger

The following example explains how to print an A4 size document on ledger size paper.

Windows
(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) Click the [Paper] tab.

(4)

(2) Select the size of the print image (for
example: A4).
(3) Select [Fit To Paper Size].
(4) Select the actual paper size to be used for
printing (for example: A3).

Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS X v10.4.11 and v10.5 to 10.5.8 and 10.6 to 10.6.1.)
(2)

(1)

(1) Select [Paper Handling].
(2) Check the size of the print image (for
example: A4).
To change the print image size, use the "Paper Size"
menu that appears when [Page Setup] is selected.

(3) Select [Scale to fit paper size].
(4) Select the actual paper size to be used for
printing (for example: A3).

(3)

(4)

3-26

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE
This function can be used to reduce the print image and print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
This is convenient when you want to print multiple images such as photos on a single sheet of paper, and when you
want to conserve paper. This function can also be used in combination with two-sided printing for maximum
conservation of paper.
For example, when [2-Up] (2 pages per sheet) and [4-Up] (4 pages per sheet) are selected, the following print results will
be obtained, depending on the order selected.
Print results
N-Up
(Pages per
sheet)

Left To Right

Right To Left

Top To Bottom
(When the print orientation
is landscape)

2-Up
(2 pages per
sheet)

N-Up
(Pages per
sheet)

Right, and Down

Down, and Right

Left, and Down

Down, and Left

4-Up
(4 pages per
sheet)

• The page orders for 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up are the same as for 4-Up.
• In a Windows environment, the page order can be viewed in the print image in the printer driver properties window.
In a Macintosh environment, the page orders are displayed as selections.
• In a Macintosh environment, the number of pages that can be printed on a single sheet is 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16.

3-27

Contents

PRINTER

Windows
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.

(1)

(2) Select the number of pages per sheet.
(3) If you wish to print borderlines, click the
[Border] checkbox so that a checkmark
appears.
(4) Select the order of the pages.

(2) (3)

(4)

Macintosh
(1)

(1) Select [Layout].

(2)

(2) Select the number of pages per sheet.
(3) Select the order of the pages.
(4) If you wish to print borderlines, select the
desired type of borderline.

(4)

(3)

3-28

Contents

PRINTER

STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN
OUTPUT
Staple function
The staple function can be used to staple output.
This function saves considerable time when preparing handouts for a meeting or other stapled materials. The staple
function can also be used in combination with two-sided printing to create materials with a more sophisticated appearance.
Stapling positions and the number of staples can be selected to obtain the following stapling results.
Staples

Left

Right

Top

1 Staple*

2 Staples

* The staple orientation ("

" or " ") varies depending on the size and orientation of the paper.

Punch function
The punch function can be selected to punch holes in printed output. Punch hole positions can be set by selecting the
binding edge.
Left

Right

Top

•
•
•
•

To use the staple function, a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is required.
To use the punch function, a punch module must be installed on the finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
The number of holes that can be punched and the spacing between the holes varies depending on the installed punch module.
For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled, see "PERIPHERAL DEVICES" in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts that are inserted.
• The staple function cannot be used in combination with the offset function, which offsets the position of each output job
from the previous job.
• When the finisher is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), the staple function and punch function
cannot be used.
• When the staple function or the punch function is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), stapling or
punching is not possible.
• For information on the saddle stitch function, see "CREATING A PAMPHLET (Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple)" (page 3-31).

3-29

Contents

PRINTER

Windows
(1)

(3)

(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.

(2)

(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the staple function or the punch
function.
• For the staple function, select the number of staples in
the "Staple" menu.
• For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so
that a checkmark
appears.

Macintosh
(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the staple function or the punch
function.
• For the staple function, select the number of staples in
the "Staple" menu.
• For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so
that a checkmark
appears.

• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the settings in
[Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select the settings in
[Output/Document Style].

3-30

Contents

PRINTER

CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS
This section explains convenient functions for specific printing objectives.
• FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND IMAGES
(page 3-41)
• PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES
(page 3-44)
• CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS (page 3-53)

• CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS
• FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE (page 3-35)
• IMAGE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION (page 3-39)

The explanations assume that the paper size and other basic settings have already been selected. For the basic
procedure for printing and the steps for opening the printer driver properties window, see the following section:
☞ Windows: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-4)
☞ Macintosh: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-16)
In Windows, view printer driver Help for details on printer driver settings for each printing function.

CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS
CREATING A PAMPHLET (Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple)
The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of
each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and
bound to create a pamphlet. This is convenient when
you wish to compile printed output into a pamphlet.
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed and saddle
stitch printing and the staple function are selected, the
output is automatically folded and stapled at the centre.
This allows you to conveniently use the output as a
handout or pamphlet without the need for any further
work.

Windows
(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select [Pamphlet Style]
The pamphlet printing method can be selected from the
pull-down menu.

(3) Select the "Binding Edge".
[2 Staples] can be selected for "Staple" when a saddle
stitch finisher is installed.

3-31

Contents

PRINTER

Macintosh
(1)

(2)

(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
[2 Staples] can be selected in the "Staple" menu when a
saddle stitch finisher is installed.

(3) Select [Tiled Pamphlet] or [2-Up Pamphlet].
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select from the "2-Side
Printing" and "Binding Edge" menus in [Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select the settings in
[Output/Document Style].

(3)

3-32

Contents

PRINTER

INCREASING THE MARGIN (Margin Shift)
This function is used to shift the print image to increase
the margin at the left, right, or top of the paper. This is
convenient when you wish to staple or punch the output
but the binding area overlaps the text. When a finisher or
saddle stitch finisher is installed, the staple function or
the punch function can be used with this function.

Windows
(1)

(2)

(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the "Margin Shift".
Select from the "Margin Shift" menu. If you wish to
configure another numeric setting, select the setting from
the pull-down menu and click the [Settings] button. Click
the
button or directly enter the number.

(3)

Macintosh
(1)

(2)

(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the "Margin Shift".
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select from the "Binding
Edge" and "Margin Shift" menus in [Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select [Advanced] and then select the
binding edge and margin shift from the margin shift
menu.

(3)

3-33

Contents

PRINTER

CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Poster Printing)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
One page of print data can be enlarged and printed
using multiple sheets of paper (4 sheets (2 x 2), 9 sheets
(3 x 3) or 16 sheets (4 x 4)). The sheets can then be
attached together to create a large poster. To enable
precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during
attachment, borderlines can be printed and overlapping
edges can be created (overlap function).

Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.)

(1) Click the [Paper] tab.

(1)

(2) Select the [Poster Printing] checkbox
and click the [Poster Settings] button.
(3) Select poster settings.
Select the number of sheets of paper to be used from the
pull-down menu. If you wish to print borderlines and/or
use the overlap function, select the corresponding
checkboxes
.

(2)

(3)

3-34

Contents

PRINTER

FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE
ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES
(Rotate 180 degrees)
This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can
be printed correctly on paper that can only be loaded in
one orientation (such as paper with punch holes). (In
Mac OS X, a portrait image cannot be rotated 180
degrees.)

ABCD

ABCD

Windows
(1)

(1) Select the setting on the [Main] tab.

(2)

(2) Select the [Rotate 180 degrees] checkbox
.

Macintosh
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and click the
button.
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and select [PostScript Options]. Then select the [Flip
Horizontal] and [Flip Vertical] checkbox
.

(2) Click the [OK] button.

(1)

(2)

3-35

Contents

PRINTER

ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE
(Zoom/XY-Zoom)
This function is used to enlarge or reduce the image to a
selected percentage. This allows you to enlarge a small
image or add margins to the paper by slightly reducing
an image.
When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can set
the width and length percentages separately to change
the proportions of the image. (XY-Zoom)

Windows
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.

(1)

(2) Select [Zoom] and click the [Settings]
button.
The actual paper size to be used for printing can be
selected from the pull-down menu.

(3) Select the zoom ratio.
Directly enter a number (%) or click the
button to
change the ratio in increments of 1%. You can also select
[Upper Left] or [Center] for the base point on the paper.

(2)
(3)

Macintosh
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and enter the ratio (%).
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and enter the ratio (%).

(2) Click the [OK] button.

(1)

(2)

3-36

Contents

PRINTER

ADJUSTING LINE WIDTHS WHEN PRINTING
(Line Width Settings)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
When lines in special applications such as CAD cannot
be printed correctly, this setting can be used to adjust
line widths, such as making overall line widths wider.
(This setting is only effective for vector data; raster data
such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted.) When the
data includes lines of varying widths, you can also print
all lines at the minimum width.

Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.)

(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.

(1)

(2) Adjust the line width.
Select a number from the pull-down menu.

• The units of line-width adjustment can be set to
"Fixed Width" or "Ratio". Click the [Compatibility]
button and select the units from the "Line Width
Unit" menu.
• To print all lines in the data at the minimum line
width, click the [Compatibility] button and select the
[Minimum Line Width] checkbox ( ).

(2)

3-37

Contents

PRINTER

REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image)
The image can be reversed to create a mirror image.
This function can be used to conveniently print a design
for a woodblock print or other printing medium.

B

B

Windows
(This function can be used when the PS printer driver is used.)
(1)

(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.

(2)

(2) Select a mirror image setting.
If you wish to reverse the image horizontally, select
[Horizontal]. If you wish to reverse the image vertically,
select [Vertical].

Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS 9.)
(1)

(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and select [PostScript Options].

(2)

(2) Select "Visual Effects".
To reverse the image horizontally, select [Flip Horizontal].
To reverse the image vertically, select [Flip Vertical].

(3) Click the [OK] button.

(3)

3-38

Contents

PRINTER

IMAGE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION
ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF
THE IMAGE (Image Adjustment)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
The brightness and contrast can be adjusted in the print settings when printing a photo or other image. These settings
can be used for simple corrections when you do not have image editing software installed on your computer.

Windows
(This function is not available when using the PCL5e printer driver.)

(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.

(1)

(2) Click the [Image Adjustment] button.
(3) Adjust the image settings.
To adjust a setting, drag the slide bar
or
button.

or click the

(2)

(3)

3-39

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK
(Text To Black/Vector To Black)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
When printing a colour image, colour text and lines that
are faint can be printed in black. (Raster data such as
bitmap images cannot be adjusted.) This allows you to
bring out colour text and lines that are faint and difficult
to see.

ABCD

ABCD

• [Text To Black] can be selected to print all text other
than white text in black.
• [Vector To Black] can be selected to print all vector
graphics other than white lines and areas in black.

Windows
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.

(1)

(2) Select the [Text To Black] checkbox
and/or the [Vector To Black] checkbox

(2)

3-40

Contents

.

PRINTER

FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND
IMAGES
ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES
(Watermark)

CO

NF
ID

EN

TI
A

L

Faint shadow-like text can be added to the background
of the printed image as a watermark. The size, density,
and angle of the watermark text can be adjusted. The
text can be selected from a pre-stored list, or entered to
create an original watermark.

Windows
(1)

(2)

(1) Click the [Watermarks] tab.
(2) Select the watermark settings.
Select a stored water mark from the pull-down menu. You
can click the [Edit] button to edit the font and select other
detailed settings.

If you wish to create a new watermark...
Enter the text of the watermark in the "Text" box and
click the [Add] button.

Macintosh
(2)

(1)

(1) Select [Watermarks].
(2) Click the [Watermark] checkbox and
configure watermark settings.
Detailed watermark settings can be configured such as
selection of the text and editing of the font. Adjust the size
and angle of the text by dragging the slide bar
.

In Mac OS 9, select [Watermark] and configure the
settings.

3-41

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA
(Image Stamp)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
A bitmap or JPEG image stored on your computer can
be printed over the print data. The size, position, and
angle of the image can be adjusted. This feature can be
used to "stamp" the print data with a frequently used
image or an icon of your own creation.
MEMO

MEMO

Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.)
(1)

(2)

(1) Click the [Watermarks] tab.
(2) Select the image stamp setting.
If an image stamp has already been stored, it can be
selected from the pull-down menu.
If you have not stored an image stamp, click the [Image
File], select the file you wish to use for the image stamp,
and click the [Add] button.

3-42

Contents

PRINTER

CREATING OVERLAYS FOR PRINT DATA (Overlays)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
The print data can be printed in a previously created
overlay. By creating table rulings or a decorative frame
in an application different from that of the text file and
registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print
result can be easily obtained without the need for
complex manipulations.

XXXX
XXX
XXXX
XXX
XXXX

XXXX
1
10
0
10

100
150
120
250

XXX
XXXX
XXX
XXXX

1
10
0
10

100
150
120
250

Overlay file

Windows
Create an overlay file.
(1)

(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.

(2)

Configure the printer driver settings from the software
application that you wish to use to create the overlay file.

(2) Click the [Edit] button.
(3) Create an overlay file.
Click the [Create Overlay] button and specify the name
and folder to be used for the overlay file that you wish to
create. The file will be created when the settings are
completed and printing is started.

(3)

• When printing is started, a confirmation message
will appear. The overlay file will not be created until
the [Yes] button is clicked.
• To register a previously existing overlay file, click
the [Load Overlay] button.

Printing with an overlay file
(1)

(2)

(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
Configure the printer driver settings from the application
from which you wish to print using the overlay file.

(2) Select the overlay file.
A previously created or stored overlay file can be selected
from the pull-down menu.

3-43

Contents

PRINTER

PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL
PURPOSES
PRINTING SPECIFIED PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER
(Different Paper)
• Using this function in a Windows environment
The front and back cover and specified pages of a
document can be printed on paper that is different
from the other pages. Use this function when you wish
to print the front and back cover on heavy paper, or
insert coloured paper or a different paper type at
specified pages. You can also insert paper as an
insert without printing on it.

1
2
3

4

5

• Using this function in a Macintosh environment
The front cover and last page can be printed using
paper that is different from the other pages. This
function can be used, for example, when you want to
print only the front cover and last page on thick paper.

Windows
(1)

(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.

(2)

(2) Select [Different Paper] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select paper insertion settings.
Select the insertion position, paper source, and printing
method from the corresponding menus. Click the [Add]
button to show the selected settings in "Information".
When you have completed the settings, click the [Save]
button in "User Settings" to save the settings.

• When [Bypass Tray] is selected in "Paper Source",
be sure to select the "Paper Type" and load that
type of paper in the bypass tray.
• About paper insertion settings
When [Other Page] is selected for "Insert Position",
the insert position can be specified by directly
entering a page number. However, inserts cannot
be successively inserted at the same page. When
"Printing Method" is set to [2-Sided], the specified
page and the next page after it will be printed on the
front and reverse side of the paper, and thus an
insert setting at a page printed on the reverse side
will not be effective.

(3)

3-44

Contents

PRINTER

Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS 9, Mac OS X v10.4.11 and v10.5 to 10.5.8 and 10.6 to 10.6.1.)

(1)

(2) (3)

(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Different Paper].
(3) Select cover insertion settings.
Select the print setting, paper tray, and paper type for the
cover page and last page.

In Mac OS 9, select [Different Paper] and then select
the settings for the cover page and last page.

3-45

Contents

PRINTER

ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency Inserts)
When printing on transparency film, this function helps
prevent the sheets of transparency film from sticking
together by inserting a sheet of paper between each
sheet of film. It is also possible to print the same content
on each inserted sheet of paper as is printed on the
corresponding sheet of transparency film.

A B C

Windows
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.

(1)

(2) Select [Transparency Inserts] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select transparency insert settings.
To print the same content on the insert as is printed on
the sheet of transparency film, select the [Printed]
checkbox
. Select the paper source and type if
needed.

Set [Transparency] for the "Paper Type" of the bypass
tray.

(2)

(3)

Macintosh
(1)

(2) (3)

(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Transparency Inserts].
(3) Select transparency insert settings.
To print the same content on the insert as is printed on the
sheet of transparency film, select [Print] in "Transparency
Inserts". Select the paper source and type if needed.

• Set [Transparency] for the "Paper Type" of the
bypass tray.
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the [Transparency
Inserts] checkbox
in [Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select [Transparency Inserts] and
select from the "Transparency Inserts" menu. Select
the paper source and type if needed.

3-46

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTING A CARBON COPY (Carbon Copy)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
This function is used to print an additional copy of the
print image on paper that is the same size but from a
different paper tray.
For example, if carbon copy print is selected when
standard paper is loaded in tray 1 and coloured paper is
loaded in tray 2, a print result similar to a carbon copy
slip can be obtained with a single selection of the print
command. As another example, if standard paper is
loaded in tray 1 and recycled paper is loaded in tray 2,
Carbon Copy can simultaneously print one copy for
presentation and one copy as a duplicate.

A

AAA

Windows
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.

(1)

(2) Select [Carbon Copy] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the carbon copy settings.
Select the tray for the "Top Copy" and then select the tray
for the carbon copy (or copies) in "Carbon Copy".

When the bypass tray is selected, be sure to select
the "Paper Type".

(2)

(3)

3-47

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER
(Tab Paper Print/Tab Paper Settings)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
This function is used to print text on the tabs of tab paper.

DEF
GHI

Printed on the tab paper
ABC

3-48

Original image
ABC

Tab Paper Settings
Text to be printed on tab papers can be created in a
software application, and then [Tab Paper Settings] on
the [Advanced] tab of the printer driver properties
window can be used to specify how far the text needs to
be shifted for tab printing.

ABC

Tab Paper Print (PCL6 only)
You can print on each sheet of tab paper that you insert
in the desired page position.
Text to be printed on tabs can be entered in [Tab Paper
Print] on the [Special Modes] tab of the printer driver
properties window, and detailed settings can be
configured such as the size of the tabs, the starting
position, the distance between tabs, and the page
numbers where tab sheets will be inserted.

Contents

PRINTER

Windows
Tab Paper Print (PCL6 only)
Open the data that you wish to print on the tab paper and then select the settings.

(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(1)

(2)

(2) Select [Tab Paper Print] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the tab position settings.
For commercially available tab paper, you can use the
existing settings in "User Settings" such as [A4-5tab-D].
For other types of tab paper, the position of the first tab,
the distance between tabs, and the horizontal and vertical
dimensions of the tab can be directly entered or changed
using the
button. In addition, the size of the tab paper
can be selected in "Paper Size".

(4) Select the page settings.
Specify the pages where you wish to insert tab paper and
enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs. You can
also select the font and adjust the layout.

(3)
• Set [Tab Paper] for the "Paper Type" of the bypass
tray.
• The tab paper settings can be stored and a stored
file opened in "User Settings".

(4)

3-49

Contents

PRINTER

Tab Paper Settings
When you have finished preparing the data to be printed on the tabs in the software application, select the following
settings:
(4)

(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.

(1)

(2) Click the [Tab Paper Settings] button.
(3) Select the tab paper settings.
To shift the image, directly enter a number or click the
button.

(4) Select the paper source and type.
Click the [Paper] tab, and select [Bypass Tray] for "Paper
Source" and [Tab Paper] for "Paper Type".

Set [Tab Paper] for the "Paper Type" of the bypass
tray.

(2)

(3)

3-50

Contents

PRINTER

TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED
ON THE FRONT SIDE (Chapter Inserts)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
You can have specific pages printed on the front side of
the paper.
When a page (such as the first page of a chapter) is
specified as a front side page, the page will be printed on
the front side of the paper even if would normally be
printed on the reverse side (the reverse side will be left
blank and the page will be printed on the front side of the
next sheet of paper).

Example:
When pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings.

Back is blank

Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.)

(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.

(1)

(2) Select [Chapter Inserts] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the chapter settings.
Enter the page numbers that are to begin chapters in
"Page Settings". Click the [Add] button and your settings
will appear in "Information". When you have finished
selecting settings, click the [Save] button in "User
Settings" to save the settings.

(2)

(3)

3-51

Contents

PRINTER

FOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALF (Fold)
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the fold
function can be used to fold printed output in half. You
can select whether the paper is folded with the printed
side on the inside or the outside.
When printing data that is in a pamphlet layout, the
"Mult-Sheet Fold - Staple" function can be used to
conveniently fold and staple the printed output to create
a pamphlet. The "Mult-Sheet Fold - Staple" function is
available in the PCL6 printer driver.

Half Fold - Inside Half Fold - Outside Mult-Sheet Fold - Staple
(PCL6 only)

When two-sided printing is disabled in the machine's
system settings (administrator), the paper folding
function cannot be used.

Windows
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.

(1)

(2) Select "Fold".
Select the desired folding method from the pull-down
menu.

(2)

Macintosh
(3)

(1)

(2)

(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Paper Folding Settings].
(3) Select the paper folding settings.
In Mac OS 9, select [Paper Folding Settings] and then
select the settings.

3-52

Contents

PRINTER

CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS
USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT
JOB (Tandem Print)
Two machines are required to use this function.
Tandem Print allows you to divide a large print job
between two machines connected to your network.
The machines simultaneously print each half of the job,
making it possible to shorten the printing time when
printing a large number of sets.

Example: Printing 4 sets of copies

To use Tandem Print, the IP address of the slave
machine configured in "Tandem Connection Setting" in
the machine's system settings (administrator) must be
configured in the printer driver. In a Windows
environment, this can be accomplished automatically by
clicking the [Auto Configuration] button on the
[Configuration] tab of the printer driver. In a Macintosh
environment, this can be accomplished automatically by
clicking the [Tandem Settings] button.

2 sets of
copies

2 sets of
copies

Windows
(2)

(1)

(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Select the [Tandem Print] checkbox

.

Tandem Print function can only be used when the
printer driver is installed using a "Standard
installation", or a "Custom installation" with "LPR
Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)" selected.

Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS X.)
(2)

(1)

(1) Select [Tandem Print].
(2) Select the [Tandem Print] checkbox

.

To use the tandem print function, the protocol to be
used must be selected in accordance with the
message that appears in the left screen when adding
the printer driver with the "Printer Setup Utility" ("Print
Centre" in Mac OS X v10.2.8).

3-53

Contents

PRINTER

SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES
(Retention/Document Filing)
This function is used to store a print job as a file on the
machine's hard drive, allowing the job to be printed from
the operation panel when needed. The location for
storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from
being mixed together with files of other users.
When printing from a computer, a password (5 to 8
digits) can be set to maintain the secrecy of information
in a stored file.
When a password is set, the password must be entered
to print a stored file from the machine.

HDD

Hold Only
This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's hard drive without printing it.
Hold After Print
This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's hard drive after it is printed.
Sample Print
When a print job is sent to the machine, only the first set of copies is printed. After checking the contents of the first set
of copies, you can print the remaining sets from the operation panel of the machine. This prevents the occurrence of
excessive misprints.
To print files stored on the machine's hard drive, see "PRINTING A STORED FILE" (page 6-31) in "6. DOCUMENT
FILING".

3-54

Contents

PRINTER

Windows
(1)

(2)

(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.
(2) Select the retention setting.
Click the [Retention] checkbox
. Select the retention
method in "Retention Settings". To enter a password (5 to
8 digit number), click the [Password] checkbox
.

(3) Select document filing settings.
Select the folder for storing the file in "Document Filing
Settings". If you selected [Custom Folder], click the
[Stored to] button to select the folder.

• When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings"
will be set to [Hold After Print] only.
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered
in "Retention Settings" is cleared and cannot be used.
• To store a file in a custom folder, the custom folder
must first be created using "Document Filing Control"
in the system settings (administrator). If a password
has been established for a custom folder, enter the
"Folder Password" in the folder selection screen.

(3)

• When [Retention] has been checked on [Printing
Policy] on the [Configuration] tab, the [Retention]
checkbox is always checked and you cannot change
the checkbox.
• In an IPV6 environment, files can only be stored in
the main folder.

3-55

Contents

PRINTER

Macintosh
(2)

(1)

(1) Select [Job Handling].
(2) Select the retention setting.
Click the [Retention] checkbox
. Select the retention
method in "Retention Settings". To simplify operation the
next time the same password is set, click the
(lock)
button after entering the password (5 to 8 digit number).

(3) Select document filing settings.
Select the folder for storing the file in "Document Filing
Settings". If you selected [Custom Folder], click the
[Stored to] button to select the folder.

• When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings"
will be set to [Hold After Print] only.
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered
in "Retention Settings" is cleared and cannot be
used.

(3)

• To store a file in a custom folder, the custom folder
must first be created using "Document Filing
Control" in the system settings (administrator). If a
password has been established for a custom folder,
enter the "Folder Password" in the folder selection
screen.
• In Mac OS X v10.5 to 10.5.8 and 10.6 to 10.6.1, if
you wish to store document filing settings in a
custom folder, click the [Custom Folder] tab.
• In Mac OS 9, select [Job Handling] and then select
the retention setting. (The document filing function
cannot be used.)

Automatically print all stored data
When user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), all retained (stored) print jobs of a user who
logs in can be printed automatically after log in.
After all jobs are printed, the files are deleted.
To use the print all function, the following steps are necessary:
• "Automatically print stored jobs after login" must be enabled in the system settings (administrator) of the machine.
• At the time of retention print, in addition to user authentication information, the user name stored in the machine
must be entered in "User Name" of the job ID in the printer driver.
☞ Windows: PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED (page 3-7)
☞ Macintosh: PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED (page 3-20)

(1) Log into the machine.
Enter your user number or login name and password in the user authentication screen of the machine.

(2) Perform print all.
A confirmation prompt will appear. Touch the [OK] key. The print files stored in the quick file folder, main folder, and custom
folder will be printed automatically and then deleted.
Files with a password and files that are protected by the document filing function of the machine will not be printed. Files in a
folder (excluding My Folder) that has a password will also not be printed.
If you do not wish to "print all"...
Touch the [Cancel] key in step (2).

3-56

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER
DRIVER
When you do not have the printer driver installed on your computer, or when the software application used to open a file
that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver.
The file types (and corresponding extensions) that can be printed directly are shown below.

File Type

TIFF

JPEG

PCL

PDF/
Encrypted
PDF

PS

XPS

Extension

tiff, tif

jpeg, jpg,
jpe, jfif

pcl

pdf

ps

xps

• To print PDF and PS files, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed.
• To print XPS files, the XPS expansion kit must be installed.
• Depending on the file type, it may not be possible to print some files in the above table.

DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE
A file on an FTP server, in a network folder or in a USB memory device connected to the machine can be selected and
printed from the operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver.

3-57

Contents

PRINTER

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVER
When an FTP server is configured in the machine's Web pages, you can specify and print a file on the FTP server from
the operation panel of the machine. This saves you the trouble of downloading the file and printing it from a computer.
For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the Start Guide.
To configure FTP server settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Setting for Print from the MFP(FTP)] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 20 FTP servers can be configured.

(1)
COPY

IMAGE SEND

(2)

Access the FTP server.

(3)

(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.

DOCUMENT
FILING

(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
File Retrieve

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

Ex Data Access

(3) Touch the [FTP] key.

External Data Access

The [FTP] key cannot be touched when any FTP server
has not been configured.

1
FTP

USB Memory

Network Folder

File Retrieve

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

Touch the key of the FTP server that you
wish to access.

Ex Data Access
Back

FTP
Server 1

2

Server 2

1

Server 3

3

Server 4
Server 5
Server 6
Server 7

Touch the key of the file that you wish to
print.

Server 1
File or Folder Name

• The
icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
printed.
• The
icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders on the
FTP server. To display the files and folders in a folder, touch
the key of the folder.

File-01.tiff
Folder01

1
1

File-02.tiff
File-03.tiff
Folder02
File-04.tiff

3

File-05.tiff

• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Touch the

key to move up one folder level.

• When you move down a folder level by touching a folder key, the
key appears in the top right corner of the
screen. Touch this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.

3-58

Contents

PRINTER

Cancel

Print
File-01.tiff

Print the selected file.
(1) Select print conditions.
If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.

Paper Select
Auto

4

Number of Prints

1

(1 999)

(2) Touch the [Print] key.

Output

Fit To Page

Printing begins. When the message appears in the touch
panel, touch the [OK] key.

2-Sided
Quick File

Print

(1)

(2)

When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
☞ PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-69)

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY
A file in a USB memory device connected to the machine can be printed from the operation panel of the machine without
using the printer driver. When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your computer, you can copy a file into
a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly.

Connect the USB memory device to the
machine.

1

Use a FAT32 USB memory with a capacity of no more than 32 GB.

3-59

Contents

PRINTER

(1)
COPY

(2)

Access the USB memory device.

(3)

(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.

DOCUMENT
FILING

IMAGE SEND

(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
File Retrieve

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

Ex Data Access

(3) Touch the [USB Memory] key.

External Data Access

FTP

2

USB Memory

Network Folder

System Settings(Administrator) : Disabling of USB Memory Direct Print
This setting is used to disable printing of files in a USB memory.
When this setting is enabled, [USB Memory] key cannot be touched.

Touch the key of the file that you wish to
print.

USB Memory
File or Folder Name
File-01.tiff

• The
icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
printed.
• The
icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the
USB memory. To display the files and folders in a folder,
touch the key of the folder.

1

Folder01

1
File-02.tiff
File-03.tiff
Folder02
File-04.tiff

3

File-05.tiff

• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Touch the

key to move up one folder level.

• When you move down a folder level by touching a folder key, the
key appears in the top right corner of the
screen. Touch this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.

Cancel

Print
File-01.tiff

Print the selected file.
(1) Select print conditions.
If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.

Paper Select
Auto

Number of Prints

1

(1 999)

(2) Touch the [Print] key.

Output

4

Fit To Page

Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. When
the message appears in the touch panel, touch the [OK]
key.

2-Sided
Quick File

Print

(1)

(2)

To cancel printing...
To cancel printing while the file is being transferred, touch the [Cancel] key in the message screen that appears in the
touch panel.

3-60

Contents

PRINTER

Remove the USB memory device from
the machine.

5

When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
☞ PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-69)

DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDER
You can use the machine's operation panel to select and print a file on a server or in a shared folder of an individual's
computer on the same network as the machine.

(1)
COPY

IMAGE SEND

(2)

(3)

Access the network.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.

DOCUMENT
FILING

(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
File Retrieve

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

Ex Data Access

(3) Touch the [Network Folder] key.

External Data Access

FTP

1

USB Memory

Network Folder

System Settings(Administrator) : Disabling of Network Folder Direct Print
This setting is used to disable printing of files in a network folder.
When this setting is enabled, [Network Folder] key cannot be touched.

3-61

Contents

PRINTER

Select workgroup.

Access the network folder.

Search

(1) Touch the key of the workgroup that you
wish to access.

Workgroup

Workgroup Name
1

Work 1

17
Work 2
Work 3
Work 4
Work 5
Work 6

Select server.

(2) Touch the key of the server or computer
that you wish to access.

Search

Server

If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name
and password, check with your server administrator and
enter the appropriate user name and password.

Work 1
Server Name
1

Server 1

17
Server 2
Server 3
Server 4
Server 5
Server 6

2
Select network folder.

(3) Touch the key of the network folder.

Search

Network Folder
\\Server 1
Network Folder Name
1

User 1

17
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6

• You can touch the [Search] key and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder. For the
procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-77) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders can be displayed.
• Touch the

key to move up one folder level.

• To return to the workgroup selection screen, touch the

key.

• To change the sorting order of the displayed keys, touch the key that shows
or
in each screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
• To go to a particular page, touch the
number.

1

key that shows the current page number and enter the desired page

3-62

Contents

PRINTER

Touch the key of the file that you wish to
print.

\\Server 1\User 1
File or Folder Name
File-01.tiff

• The
icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
printed.
• The
icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the
network folder. To display the files and folders in a folder,
touch the key of the folder.

1

Folder01

15
File-02.tiff
File-03.tiff
Folder02
File-04.tiff

3

File-05.tiff

• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Touch the

key to move up one folder level.

• To return to the network folder selection screen, touch the

key.

• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.

Cancel

Print
File-01.tiff

Print the selected file.
(1) Select print conditions.
If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.

Paper Select
Auto

4

Number of Prints

1

(1 999)

(2) Touch the [Print] key.

Output

Fit To Page

Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. When
the message appears in the touch panel, touch the [OK]
key.

2-Sided
Quick File

Print

(1)

(2)

When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
☞ PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-69)

3-63

Contents

PRINTER

DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER
Settings can be configured in the Web pages of the machine to enable direct printing from a computer without using the
printer driver. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the Start Guide.

SUBMIT PRINT JOB
You can specify a file to be printed directly without using the printer driver.
In addition to a file on your computer, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your
computer, such as a file on another computer connected to the same network.
To directly print a file on a computer, click [Document Operations] and then [Submit Print Job] in the Web page menu.

FTP PRINT
You can print a file from your computer by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine.
• Configuring settings
To enable FTP Print, click [Application Settings] and then [Setting for Print from the PC] in the Web page menu, and
configure the port number. (Administrator rights are required.)
• Performing FTP Print
Type "ftp://" and then the IP address of the machine in the address bar of your computer's Web browser as shown
below.
(Example)
ftp://192.168.1.28
Drag and drop the file that you wish to print onto the "lp" folder that appears in your Web browser. The file will
automatically begin printing.
• If you printed a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) that includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
• When user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator) of the machine, the print function may be
restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.

3-64

Contents

PRINTER

E-MAIL PRINT
An e-mail account can be configured in the machine to have the machine periodically check your mail server and
automatically print received e-mail attachments without using the printer driver.
• Configuring settings
To use E-mail Print, you must first configure an e-mail account in the machine. To configure an account, click
[Application Settings] and then [E-mail Print Settings] in the Web page menu. (Administrator rights are required.) For
the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the Start Guide.
• Using E-mail Print
To print a file using E-mail Print, use your e-mail program on your computer to send the file as an attachment to the
machine's e-mail address.
Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format.
Commands are entered in the format "command name = value".
As an example, the control commands include the following:
Function

Command name

Values

Copies

COPIES

1-999

Staples*1

STAPLEOPTION

NONE, ONE, TWO, SADDLE

Punch*2

PUNCH

OFF, ON

Output

COLLATE

OFF, ON

2-sided print

DUPLEX

OFF, TOP, LEFT, RIGHT

Account
number*3

ACCOUNTNUMBER

Number (5 to 8 digits)

File type

LANGUAGE

PCL, PCLXL, POSTSCRIPT, PDF, TIFF,
JPG, XPS

Paper

PAPER

Name of available paper (A4, LETTER, etc.)

Document Filing

FILE

OFF, ON

FOLDERNAME

Maximum of 28 characters

Quick File

QUICKFILE

OFF, ON

Output tray

OUTTRAY

CENTER, FINISHER

Fit to page

FITIMAGETOPAGE

OFF, ON

Example
COPIES=2
DUPLEX=LEFT
ACCOUNTNUMBER=11111
PAPER=A4

*1 Only effective when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed.
*2 Only effective when a punch module is installed on a finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
*3 Can be omitted except when authentication is by user number.

• Enter the commands in Plain Text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect.
• To receive a list of the control commands, enter the command "Config" in the e-mail message.
• If nothing is entered in the body text (message) of the e-mail, printing will take place according to the "Printer Default
Settings" in the system settings. If you printed a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) that includes print settings, the settings will be
applied.
• Only enter a "File type" when you are specifying a page-description language. Normally there is no need to enter a file
type.

3-65

Contents

PRINTER

CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS
JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Print Job

JOB STATUS

Scan to

Fax Job

Job Queue

Sets / Progress

1

Computer01

002 / 001

Internet Fax
Status

Spool

Printing

2

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

3

Copy

020 / 000

Waiting

4

0312345678

001 / 000

Waiting

Job Queue
Complete

1
1

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

The job status display (A) is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the
job status screen. You can check the first four print jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and reserved jobs) in the job
status display (B).
Ready to scan for copy.

Job Status
MFP Status
Special Modes
002/001
2-Sided Copy
Output

Printing
002/000

Exposure
Auto

File
Quick File

Waiting
020/000
Waiting

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

001/000
Preview

Waiting

Tray1

(A)

(B)

3-66

Contents

PRINTER

SPOOL SCREEN/JOB QUEUE SCREEN/COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of the job queue screen that shows copy and print jobs waiting to be printed and the job
currently in progress, the completed job screen that shows jobs that have been completed, and the spool screen that
shows print jobs that have been spooled and encrypted PDF jobs that are waiting for a password to be entered.
(1)

Scan to

Print Job
Job Queue

(3)

Internet Fax

Fax Job

Sets / Progress

Status

Spool

Computer01

020 / ---

Rendering

Computer02

020 / ---

Spooling

Computer03

--- / ---

Spooling

Computer04

--- / ---

Spooling

Computer05

002 / ---

Encrypt PDF

Job Queue
1

(2)

Complete

1

Stop/Delete

Print Job

(4)

Scan to

Fax Job

Internet Fax

Job Queue

Sets / Progress

Status

1

Computer01

002 / 001

Printing

2

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

3

Copy

020 / 000

Waiting

4

0312345678

001 / 000

Waiting

Print Job

Job Queue
1

Complete

1

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

(1)

(2)

Mode select tabs

(5)
(6)
(7)
(6)

(7)

Job status screen selector key

(8)

Job list (spool screen)

Job list (job queue screen)
Jobs waiting to be printed appear in the job queue as
keys. The jobs are printed in order from the top of the
queue. Each job key shows information on the job and
the current status of the job.

(5)

Sets

Internet Fax
Status

1

Computer02

11:00 04/01 001/001 OK

2

Computer03

10:33 04/01 010/010 OK

3

Computer04

10:31 04/01 013/013 OK

4

file-01

10:30 04/01 010/010 OK

5

Copy

10:13 04/01 001/001 OK

6

Copy

10:03 04/01 001/001 OK

7

Computer05

10:01 04/01 003/003 OK

8

Copy

10:00 04/01 010/010 OK

Spool
Job Queue
1

Complete

2

(8)
Detail

(9)

Call

(10)

[Priority] key

[Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
Job list (completed jobs screen)
This shows up to 99 completed jobs. The result (status)
of each completed job is shown.

(9)

[Detail] key (completed jobs screen)
When a job is shown as a key in the job list, the [Detail]
key can be touched to show detailed information on the
job.

Spooled print jobs and encrypted PDF print jobs that
require a password to be entered are displayed.
(4)

Fax Job

Set Time

Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.

Use these tabs to select the mode that is shown in the
job status screen.
The status of print jobs can be checked by touching the
[Print Job] tab.

Touch this key to switch through the job queue screen,
the completed jobs screen, and the spool screen.
(3)

Scan to

Jobs Completed

Spool

(10) [Call] key
Touch this key to retrieve and use a print job stored using
the document filing function.

[Detail] key (job queue screen)
Touch this key to display detailed information on a job.

3-67

Contents

PRINTER

Job key display
Each job key shows the position of the job in the job queue and the current status of the job.

2
(1)
(1)

Computer01
(2)

002/000

(3)

(4)
(6)

Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job
queue.

(4)

Status

Message

Status

"Printing"

Printing is in progress.

"Waiting"

The job is waiting to be executed.

"Toner
Empty"

The toner cartridge is out of toner.
Replace the toner cartridge with a
new cartridge.

The computer login name of the user will appear in the
print job.
A "User Name" can be entered in the printer driver to
display the name of the user who executed the job.

"Paper
Empty"

The paper used for the job has run
out. Add paper or change to a
different paper tray.

Number of sets entered

"Limit"

The printing page limit has been
exceeded. Check with the
administrator of the machine.

"Error"

An error occurred while the job was
being executed. Clear the error
condition.

"Rendering"

Analyzing print data.

"Spooling"

Print data is being received or a job is
waiting for analysis after being
spooled.

"Encrypt
PDF"

Upon analysis, if a spooled job is
found to be an encrypted PDF, it
changes to the password entry wait
state.

Mode icon
The

(3)

icon appears when the job is a print job.

User name

This shows the number of sets specified.
(5)

(6)

Shows the job status.

When the job currently being printed is finished, the job
moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2)

(5)

Waiting

Number of completed sets
This shows the number of sets completed. "000" appears
while the job is waiting in the job queue.

3-68

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE
Encrypted PDF is used to protect a PDF file by requiring the entry of a password to print or edit the file. To directly print
an encrypted PDF file on an FTP server or in a USB memory device, etc. connected to the machine, follow the steps
below to enter the password and begin printing.
The PS3 expansion kit is required to use this function.

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

1
(1)

(3)
Scan to

Print Job
Job Queue

2

Status

Computer01

020 / ---

Rendering

Computer02

020 / ---

Spooling

Computer03

--- / ---

Spooling

Computer04

--- / ---

Spooling

Computer05

002 / ---

Encrypt PDF

Spool
Job Queue
1

Select the encrypted PDF print job.
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.

Internet Fax

Fax Job

Sets / Progress

(2)

Complete

(2) Change the print job status mode to
[Spool].

1

Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.

Stop/Delete

(3) Touch the print job key of the PDF file that
has the password.

Touch the [Yes] key.
Enter the password?

3

A text entry screen appears. Enter the password (32 characters
or less) and touch the [OK] key. The print job is released and
moved to the [Job Queue].
No

Yes

When both a master password and a user password (which is used to open the file) have been set, enter the master
password.

• To print an encrypted PDF file using the printer driver, enter the password when opening the file on your computer.
• Printing is not possible if you do not know the password for an encrypted PDF file. To delete a spooled print job, touch the
[No] key in the screen of step 3 and touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
• Encrypted PDF versions that can be directly printed are 1.6 (Adobe® Acrobat® 7.0) and earlier.

3-69

Contents

PRINTER

GIVING A PRINT JOB
PRIORITY/CANCELLING A PRINT JOB
GIVING A PRINT JOB PRIORITY
When the machine is busy copying or printing a received fax or other job, you can give priority to a print job that is
waiting to be printed and print it ahead of the other jobs.

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

1
(2)

(1)
Print Job
Job Queue

2

Scan to

Sets / Progress

(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.

Internet Fax

Fax Job
Status

Spool

Computer01

020 / 001

Printing

Computer02

020 / 000

Waiting

0312345678

002 / 000

Waiting

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

Job Queue
1

Complete

002 / 000

Waiting

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].

1

Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Detail

Copy

Give the desired job priority.

Priority
Stop/Delete

(3) Touch the key of the print job to which you
want to give priority.
(4) Touch the [Priority] key.

(3)

(4)

The job being printed stops and the job selected in (3) is
printed.

To check print information on the selected job, touch the [Detail] key.

3-70

Contents

PRINTER

CANCELLING A PRINT JOB
A job being printed, a job waiting to be printed, or a spooled job can be cancelled.

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

1
(2)

(1)
Print Job
Job Queue

Scan to

Sets / Progress

(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.

Internet Fax

Fax Job
Status

Spool

Computer01

020 / 001

Printing

Computer02

020 / 000

Waiting

0312345678

002 / 000

Waiting

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

Job Queue
1

Complete

002 / 000

Waiting

Copy

002 / 000

Waiting

(2) Change the print job status mode to [Spool]
or [Job Queue].

1

Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
Detail

Copy

Cancel the job.

Priority
Stop/Delete

(3) Touch the key of the print job that you wish
to cancel.
(4) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.

(3)

2

(4)

(5) A message appears to confirm the
cancellation. Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the job?
Computer02

No

Yes

The selected job key is deleted and printing is cancelled.
It is also possible to cancel printing with the [STOP] key (
) on the operation panel. When the [STOP] key (
pressed, a message will appear asking you if you want to cancel the job.
If you do not want to cancel the selected print job...
Touch the [No] key in step (5).

3-71

Contents

) is

PRINTER

CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND
PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT
If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded
in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel. Printing will begin automatically when the [OK] key is touched
and paper is loaded in the machine. If you wish to print on paper in another tray because the desired size of paper is not
immediately available, follow the steps below.

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

1
Print Job

Scan to

Job Queue
Computer01

Internet Fax

Fax Job

Sets / Progress
020 / 001

Status

Spool

Paper Empty

Display details on the print job for which
there is no paper.

Job Queue
1

Complete

1

2

Detail

(1) Touch the key of the job for which "Paper
Empty" appeared.
(2) Touch the [Detail] key.

Priority
Stop/Delete

(1)

(2)

OK

Detail
Computer01

020 / 001

Touch the [Paper Select] key.

Paper Empty

Data : File-01.tiff

3

Document
Style:

Colour / B/W : B/W
Paper : A3
Plain

Paper Select

2-Sided
(Book)

Output :
Special
Modes:

OK

Detail
Computer01

020 / 001

Paper Empty

Touch the key of the tray that has the
paper you wish to use.
Printing begins.

4

If you changed to a different paper size, printing may not take place correctly; for example part of the text or image may run
off the paper.

3-72

Contents

PRINTER

APPENDIX
PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATION LIST
Available functions and output results may vary depending on the type of printer driver being used.
PCL6

PCL5e

PS

Windows
PPD*1

Macintosh
PPD*1

1-999

1-999

1-999

1-999

1-999

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2,4,6,8,9,16

2,4,6,8,9,16

2,4,6,8,9,16

2,4,6,9,16

2,4,6,9,16

Order

Selectable

Selectable

Selectable

Selectable

Selectable

Border

On/Off

On/Off

On/Off

Yes

Selectable

2-Sided Print

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Fit To Page

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes*2

Selectable

Selectable

Selectable

No

Yes

Staple*3

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Punch*3

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Paper Size

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

8 size

8 size

8 size

Yes

Yes

Paper Selection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Output tray

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Pamphlet/Pamphlet
Staple*4

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

0 inch to
1.2 inch

0 inch to
1.2 inch

0 inch to
1.2 inch

Yes

Yes

Poster Printing

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Rotate 180 degrees

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes*5

Yes*5

Yes

Yes*5

Yes*5

Line Width Settings

Yes

No

No

No

No

Mirror Image

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes*6

Function
Frequently used
functions

Copies
Orientation
N-Up

Number of
pages

Binding Edge

Paper

Custom Paper

Convenient
printer functions

Margin Shift

Zoom/XY-Zoom

3-73

Contents

PRINTER

PCL6

PCL5e

PS

Windows
PPD*1

Macintosh
PPD*1

Different Paper

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes*7, 8

Transparency Inserts

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Carbon Copy

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Function
Special
functions

Tab Printing

Yes

Yes

Yes*9

Chapter Inserts

Yes

No

No

No

No

Page Interleave

Yes

No

No

No

No

Half Fold/
Mult-Sheet Fold

Half Fold

Half Fold

Half Fold

Half Fold

Tandem Print

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes*10

Retention

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Document Filing

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes*10

Image Adjustment

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Text To Black/
Vector To Black

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Watermark

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Image Stamp

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Overlay

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Normal/Fine

No

Normal/Fine

Normal/Fine

Normal/Fine

Graphics Mode
Selection

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Toner Save*11

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Resident font

80 fonts

80 fonts

136 fonts

136 fonts

35 fonts

bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics

bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics

bitmap,
TrueType,
Type1

bitmap,
TrueType,
Type1

No*12

Auto Configuration

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes*13

User Authentication

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Fold*4

Image adjusting
function

Functions to
combine text
and images
Image Quality

Font

Print Mode

Selectable download
font
Other functions

*1 The specifications of each function in Windows PPD and Macintosh PPD vary depending on the operating system
version and the software application.
*2 Only Mac OS X v10.4.11 and v10.5 to 10.5.8 and 10.6 to 10.6.1 can be used.
*3 Can be used when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed. (To use the punch function, a punch module must
be also installed.)
*4 Can be used when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
*5 The horizontal and vertical proportion cannot be set separately.
*6 Only Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2 can be used.
*7 Only covers can be inserted.
*8 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.2.8 or v10.3.9.
*9 Only the amount of the shift of the text string data created in the software application can be set.
*10 Cannot be used in Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2.
*11 This setting may not operate in some software applications and operating systems.
*12 True Type and Type1 can be selected in some versions of LaserWriter.
*13 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.2.8.

3-74

Contents

PRINTER

PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
Type

Built-in

Continuous printing speed

MX-M623U/MX-M623N: 62 pages/min, MX-M753U/MX-M753N: 75 pages/min (When printing
same document continuously on A4 (8-1/2"x11") plain paper in non-offset mode, excluding
processing time.)

Printing resolution

600x600 dpi / 1200x1200 dpi

Printer driver type

PCL5e, PCL6, PostScript 3 compatible*1, XPS*3

Supported protocols

TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, EtherTalk*1

Supported client PC
operating systems

See "VERIFYING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS" in the Start Guide.

Fonts

PCL5e, PCL6

80 European fonts, 28 barcode fonts*2, 1 bitmap font

PostScript 3 compatible*1

136 European fonts

Interface port

LAN connectivity: 10Base-T / 100Base-TX / 1000Base-T
USB connectivity: Supports USB 2.0 (Hi speed)

Memory

Standard system memory: 1GB
Expansion memory: 1GB*4

Print area

Entire page excluding margin of 4.2mm (11/64") at each edge. The actual print area may vary
depending on the printer driver and the software application.

*1
*2
*3
*4

When the PS3 expansion kit is installed and the machine is used as a PostScript printer.
Barcode font kit is required.
When the XPS expansion kit is installed.
Required when there is insufficient memory to handle certain print data. Must be used when the XPS expansion kit
is installed.

3-75

Contents

CHAPTER 4
FACSIMILE
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.
To use the fax function, the fax function must be available.

BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX
PREPARATIONS FOR FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CONNECTION TO THE TELEPHONE
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SETTING THE TELEPHONE LINE TYPE . . . . .
• MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH
IS IN THE "ON" POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . .
• STORING THE SENDER FAX NUMBER . . . . .

TRANSMISSION METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PLACEMENT ORIENTATION OF THE
ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE
TRANSMITTED IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . .
• THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL . . . . .
• WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR
OCCURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FAX DESTINATION CONFIRMATION
MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6

BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• [R] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF
ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN THE ADDRESS
BOOK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

4-26
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-31
4-32

USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT
TRANSMISSION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

ENTERING DESTINATIONS

USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR
TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO
SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION
MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE
NUMERIC KEYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
• RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION . . . . 4-19
• CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED
DESTINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER . . . . . . . 4-40
SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission) . . . . 4-41

USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

IMAGE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH
SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided
Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . .

USING THE RESEND FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
CHAIN DIALLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

4-47

4-48
4-49
4-56
4-57

CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

4-1

FACSIMILE

CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING
RECEPTION (Polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
• INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION
MANUALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

FAX RECEPTION
RECEIVING FAXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
• RECEIVING A FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
• RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER
MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE (Polling
Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS
(Polling security) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO
POLLING MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE
PUBLIC BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE
PUBLIC BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) . . . . . . . . 4-63
CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING . . . 4-64
• IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (Fax Data
Forward) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A
NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing
Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
• CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

4-104
4-104
4-105
4-107
4-108

PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION
F-CODE COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HOW F-CODES WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE
MACHINE FOR F-CODE
COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• F-CODE DIALLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPECIAL MODES
SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program). . . . . . . 4-73
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

4-109
4-109

4-110
4-110

CONFIDENTIAL COMMUNICATION USING
F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
• CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION . . . . 4-113

TRANSMITTING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan). . . . . . . . . 4-77
SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
(2in1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

POLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODES. . . . . . 4-115

SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

POLLING MEMORY TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A
MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE POLLING
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE
F-CODE MEMORY POLLING BOX . . . . . . . .
• DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR
F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION . . . . . . .

SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES
(Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
TRANSMITTING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode). . . 4-91
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE
TRANSMISSION (Original Count) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

4-117

4-117
4-120
4-121

RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif.
Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
USING F-CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124

CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction
Report) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO
FAXES (Own number sending) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE
SENDER INFORMATION (Own Name
Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100

4-2

FACSIMILE

USING AN EXTENSION PHONE
CONNECTING AND USING AN EXISTING
PHONE (Extension Phone Connection) . . . . . . 4-125
• RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING
A CALL ON THE EXTENSION PHONE
(Remote Reception) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• MAKING AND RECEIVING PHONE
CALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126

CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB
QUEUE IS COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE
JOB IN PROGRESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS . . . . . . . . . .

4-127
4-128
4-131
4-132
4-133

CANCELLING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A
RESERVED FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX
JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
CHECKING THE ACTIVITY LOG (Image
Sending Activity Report) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT . . . . . 4-136
• INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE
RESULT COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

4-3

FACSIMILE

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
FAX
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a fax machine.

PREPARATIONS FOR FAX
To use the machine as a fax, the telephone line must be connected and the type of line set.

CONNECTION TO THE TELEPHONE LINE
Be sure to use the provided telephone line cord to connect the machine to the wall telephone socket. Connect the end of
the line cord that has the core to the "LINE" socket on the machine. Insert the other end (the end without the core) into a
telephone line socket.
"LINE" socket

Click!

Core
Insert the end of the cord with the
core into the "LINE" socket.

In some countries, an adapter is required to
connect the telephone line cable to the wall
telephone socket, as shown in the illustration.

For United
Kingdom,
Malaysia

Wall socket
Adapter

For Australia

For New Zealand

4-4

Contents

FACSIMILE

SETTING THE TELEPHONE LINE TYPE
The machine's dial mode setting must be set to the type of telephone line you are using.
If the setting is not correct, dialling will not be possible.
Touch the [Auto Select] key in "Dial Mode Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The machine will automatically
set the dial mode to the type of line you are using.
You can also set the "Dial Mode Setting" manually.
• This Setting can only be activated in Canada.
• After setting the dial mode, do not change the setting unless you have a specific reason for changing it.

MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH IS IN THE
"ON" POSITION
When the main power indicator on the operation panel is lit, the main power is on.
If the main power indicator light is not lit, the main power is "off". Switch the main power switch to the "on" position and
press the [POWER] key ( ) on the operation panel.
If the fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, always keep the
main power switch in the "on" position.
When the [POWER SAVE] key (
) indicator light is blinking, the machine is in auto power shut-off mode. If the [POWER
SAVE] key (
) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will turn off and the machine will return to the ready
state after a brief interval.

Main power indicator

Main power switch

"On" position

[POWER SAVE] key/indicator

4-5

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME
Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine.
The date and time are set in the system settings of the machine. When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
system settings menu screen appears on the touch panel. Select [Default Settings], [Clock], and [Clock Adjust], and set
the year, month, day, hour, and minute.

If "Disabling of Clock Adjustment" has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the date and time cannot be set.

STORING THE SENDER FAX NUMBER
Store the user name and fax number in "Sender Data Registration".
Be sure to configure this information, as it is required for communication.
System Settings (Administrator): Sender Data Registration
Use this setting to program the sender name and sender fax number.

4-6

Contents

FACSIMILE

BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE
To use the fax function, select settings and operations in the base screen of fax mode. To display the base screen of fax
mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key and then touch the [Fax] tab.
COPY

IMAGE SEND

DOCUMENT
FILING

Ready to send.
Scan

Resend

Speaker

Internet Fax

Address Book

Original

Fax
Scan:

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

PC Scan
Auto

Send:

This screen only appears
when the fax function and
Internet fax function have
been installed.
The contents of the screen
will vary depending on the
devices that are installed.

File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

Each of the other modes that can be displayed by touching the [IMAGE SEND] key (scan, Internet fax, USB memory,
PC scan and data entry modes) also have base screens.
Transmission destinations can be stored in one-touch keys in the address book and retrieved from the address book
screen when you need to use them. The address book is shared by fax mode, scan mode, Internet fax mode and data
entry mode.
To display the address book screen, touch the [Address Book] key in the base screen. To display the base screen, touch
the [Condition Settings] key in the address book screen. This chapter refers to the base screen of fax mode as the "base
screen".
Base screen of fax mode
Scan
Address Book

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Address book screen
USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

PC Scan

5

10

15

Condition
Settings

Auto

Cc

To

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Exposure

Auto

Address Review

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Address Review

Special Modes

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

File

Sub Address

III III

Quick File

Sort Address

Freq.

Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

1
2

Direct TX

JJJ JJJ
ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

The procedures in this chapter begin from the base screen of fax mode.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
• Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
• Address book screen

4-7

Contents

FACSIMILE

BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE
This screen is used to select settings and operations in fax mode.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(7)

COPY

IMAGE SEND

DOCUMENT
FILING

Ready to send.
Scan

Internet Fax

Fax

Address Book

Original

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

Speaker

Resend

USB Mem. Scan

PC Scan

Auto

Scan:

Send:

(9)
(10)

Auto

(11)
(12)
(13)

File
Quick File

(8)

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

(14) (15)
(1)

(16)
(7)

Mode select keys

The keys that appear here can be changed to show
settings or functions that you prefer.
☞ Customizing displayed keys (page 4-9)

Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
To switch to fax mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key.
(2)

This shows various messages and the destinations
that have been entered.
The

(3)

(8)

Send mode tabs
(9)

[Address Book] key

(10) [Resend] key / [Next Address] key
Touch this key to redial a fax number. When entering a fax
number to be dialled, this key changes to the [Next Address]
key.
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 4-24)
(11) Image settings

[Direct TX] key

Image settings (original size, exposure, resolution) can
be selected.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-47)

Touch this key to send a fax by direct transmission.
When the [Direct TX] key is not highlighted, normal
transmission (memory TX mode) is selected.
☞ To fax a large number of sheet originals, use the
automatic document feeder. (page 4-26)
☞ If you wish to send a fax ahead of other previously
reserved fax transmissions, use direct transmission
mode. (page 4-28)
(6)

[Speaker] key / [Pause] key / [Space] key
Touch this key to dial using the speaker.
When entering a fax number to be dialled, the key
changes to the [Pause] key. When entering a
sub-address, the key changes to the [Space] key.
☞ TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER (page 4-40)

Touch this key to dial using a one-touch key or group
key. When the key is touched, the address book screen
appears.
☞ RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-18)
(5)

[Preview] key
Touch to check the image that will be sent in the touch
panel before transmission.
☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED
(Preview) (page 4-58)

icon on the left indicates fax mode.

Use these keys to change the mode of the image send
function.
Tabs of modes that cannot be used because the
appropriate options are not installed do not appear.
If the [Fax] tab does not appear, touch the
tab to move the screen.
☞ BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE (page 4-7)
(4)

Customized keys

(12)

key
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided scanning is
selected. Touch the key to display the selected special modes.
☞ Checking what special modes are selected (page 4-9)

(13) [Special Modes] key
Touch this key to use a special mode.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

[Sub Address] key
Touch this key to enter a sub-address and passcode for
F-code transmission.
☞ F-CODE DIALLING (page 4-110)

(14)

key
Touch this key to dial a fax destination using a search
number.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 4-21)

4-8

Contents

FACSIMILE

(15)

/

/

(16) This shows the currently selected fax reception
mode and the amount of free memory remaining.

key

When "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" or
"Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the
system settings (administrator), this will appear when a
fax is received.
: Only "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is enabled
: Only "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled
: Both settings are enabled
☞ PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold
Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-63)
☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING (page
4-64)

☞ RECEIVING FAXES (page 4-60)

Customizing displayed keys
Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. You can assign frequently used functions to these
keys to access the functions with a single touch. To change the function that is assigned to a key, use "Customize Key
Setting" in the Web pages. The following keys appear by factory default:
• [Address Review] key
Touch this to view a list of the destinations that have been selected in the address book and the numbers that have been
directly entered with the numeric keys. This is the same key as the [Address Review] key in the address book screen.
• [File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch either key to use Quick File or File in document filing mode.
Example: When "Dual Page Scan", "Job Build", and "Mixed Size Original" are assigned to the customized keys.
Scan
Address Book

These 3 keys can be changed
as desired.

Internet Fax

Fax

Original

Scan:

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Dual Page
Scan

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

PC Scan
Auto

Send:

Job Build
Mixed Size
Original
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

Displaying a program key in the base screen will enable you to call up the program by simply touching the key.
☞ STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program) (page 4-73)
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.

Checking what special modes are selected
The
The

key appears in the base screen when a special mode or 2-sided scanning is selected.
key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
Scan
Address Book

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

PC Scan

Function Review

Auto

Special Modes

OK

Erase

: Edge:10mm
Centre:10mm

Timer

: Day of the Week:Monday
Time: 21:30

Mixed Size
Original

: On

1
1

File
Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

The special mode settings cannot be changed from the function review screen. To change a setting, touch the [OK] key to
close the function review screen and then touch the [Special Modes] key and select the setting that you wish to change.

4-9

Contents

FACSIMILE

[R] key
When the machine is connected to a PBX, the "PBX Setting" can be enabled to automatically connect to the outside line
each time you dial normally. When the PBX setting is enabled, the [R] key appears in the base screen. To dial a number
inside your PBX, touch the [R] key before dialling to temporarily cancel the "PBX Setting".
Scan
Address Book

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

File
Quick File

R

Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• This Setting can only be activated in Germany.
• The [R] key can be included in a fax number stored in an one-touch key.
• When the [Speaker] key is touched, the "PBX Setting" is temporarily cancelled and the [R] key does not appear.
• When the [R] key is touched before dialling, an F-code (sub-address and passcode) cannot be used. Likewise, an
one-touch key in which an F-code (sub-address and passcode) is stored cannot be used.
System Settings (Administrator): PBX Setting
This is used to enable PBX Setting.

4-10

Contents

FACSIMILE

ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
This screen is used to select a destination from the list of stored destinations.
(10)
(1)

CCC CCC
0123456789

(2)
(3)

5

10

15

Condition
Settings

(11)

Cc

To

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

(4)

Address Review

(5)

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

(6)

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

(7)

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

(8)

Sort Address

(9)

1

(12)

2

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

(13)

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

(14)
(1)

This shows the destination that has been selected.

(2)

Number of displayed items selector key

(8)

Touch this key to change the index tabs to custom
indexes or to display one-touch keys by send mode.
☞ CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS
IN THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN (page 4-12)

Touch to change the number of destinations (one-touch
keys) displayed in the address book screen. Select 5, 10,
or 15 destinations.
(3)

(9)

[Condition Settings] key

(10) [To] key

[Address Review] key

Touch this key to enter a selected destination (one-touch
key).
☞ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
4-19)

Touch this key to view a list of the selected destinations.
The selected destinations can be changed.
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED
DESTINATIONS (page 4-20)
(5)

[Address Entry] key

(11) [Cc] key
Not used in fax mode.

Not used in fax mode.
(6)

[Global Address Search] key

(12) One-touch key display
This shows the one-touch keys of the destinations that
have been stored in the address book. This chapter
refers to keys in which single destinations and groups are
stored as one touch keys. Keys that have fax numbers
stored are indicated by
.
☞ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
4-19)

When the use of an LDAP server has been enabled in
the machine's Web page, a fax number can be obtained
from a global address book.
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-22)
(7)

[Sub Address] key
Touch this key to enter a sub-address and passcode for
F-code transmission.
☞ F-CODE DIALLING (page 4-110)

[Preview] key
Touch to check the image that will be sent in the touch
panel before transmission.
☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED
(Preview) (page 4-58)

Touch this key to select transmission settings and
operations. When the key is touched, the base screen
appears.
☞ BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE (page 4-8)
(4)

[Sort Address] key

(13) Index tabs
Touch this to change indexes.
☞ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
4-19)
(14)

key
Touch this key to retrieve a destination using a search
number.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 4-21)

4-11

Contents

FACSIMILE

When using the network scanner function or the Internet fax function, a different icon will appear in the one-touch key display
if a non-fax destination (address) is stored.
☞ RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-18)
• System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store fax numbers in one-touch keys.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting
This is used to change the default setting for the number of one-touch keys displayed in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
- Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
- Address book screen
• System Settings (Administrator): Address Book Default Selection
The following settings are available for the method of sorting the addresses that appear in the address book.
- Index type (alphabetical, custom)
- Address type (all, group, E-mail, FTP/Desktop, Network Folder, Internet fax, fax)

CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN
THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
You can show only destinations of a specific transmission mode in the address book screen, or change the displayed
index tabs from the alphabetical tabs to the custom tabs. The procedure for selecting destinations does not change.

5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review

1

Touch the [Sort Address] key.

Cc

To

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

2

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address
Preview

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

(1)

(2)
OK

Sort Address

2

1

Tab Switch

Address Type

ABC

All

Group

User

E-mail

FTP/Desktop

Internet Fax

Fax

Change the display mode.
(1) Touch the key of the mode or tab that you
wish to display.
• To show only the one-touch keys of a particular send
mode, touch the desired mode key under "Address
Type".
• To change the index tabs to the custom indexes, touch
the [User] key under "Tab Switch".

Network Folder

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

4-12

Contents

FACSIMILE

Index display
Indexes make it easy to search for a destination (one-touch key). The destinations are displayed separately using
alphabetical search characters and index numbers. To display a stored destination, touch the appropriate index tab. It is
convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the [Freq.]
index when you store the destination.
5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review

Cc

To

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

1
2

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

Index tabs

The destinations can be displayed in alphabetical order by their initials.
Each time the displayed index tab is touched, the display order changes in the following order: search numbers (page
4-21), ascending names, descending names, search numbers... When the display order is changed, the display order of
the other index tabs also changes.
Ordered by search number (default)
Freq.

Ascending names
Freq.

ABCD

Descending names
Freq.

ABCD

ABCD

Index names can be changed using "Custom Index" in the system settings, allowing you to create groups of one-touch
keys that can be easily recognized.
System Settings: Custom Index (page 7-21)
This is used to store custom index names. The custom index where a one-touch key appears is specified when the
transmission destination is stored in the key.

Narrowing the search letter range
An alphabet tab on an index tab can be touched to display keys to further narrow the search range. For example, when
the [ABCD] tab is touched, keys from "A" to "D" appear. If the [B] key is touched, only destinations starting with the letter
"B" will appear. To cancel, touch the key again. Note that the search letter range cannot be narrowed on the [Freq.] tab,
the [etc.] tab, or on a user index tab.
5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review

Cc

To

BBB AAA

BBB BBB

BBB CCC

BBB DDD

Address Entry

BBB EEE

BBB FFF

Global
Address Search

BBB GGG

BBB HHH

BBB III

BBB JJJ

Sort Address
Preview

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH
A

IJKL
B

4-13

C

1
2

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

D

Contents

FACSIMILE

FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for sending a fax.

Place the original.

1

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic
document feeder, or on the document glass.
1

Enter the destination fax number
Ready to send.
Scan

Internet Fax

Fax

Address Book

Original

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

Scan:

Speaker

Resend

USB Mem. Scan

PC Scan

Auto

File
Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

or

A4

Send:

Auto

• [Address Book] key: Select a destination that is stored in
the address book or look up a
destination in a global address book.
☞ RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER
FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK
(page 4-18)
•
key: Use a search number to specify a destination
stored in the address book.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION (page 4-21)
• [Resend] key: Select a fax number from the last eight
destinations used for transmission.
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page
4-24)
• Numeric keys: Enter a fax number.
☞ ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE
NUMERIC KEYS (page 4-17)

4-14

Contents

FACSIMILE

Select image settings.
Scan
Address Book
Direct TX

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

PC Scan

Send:

Auto

File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

Select settings for the original to be faxed.
• [Original] key: Use this key to select the original size, the
original send size, and 2-sided original
scanning.
☞ SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page
4-49), AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING
BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL
(2-Sided Original) (page 4-48)
• [Exposure] key: Use this key to adjust the exposure of the
image.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE (page
4-56)
• [Resolution] key: Use this key to adjust the resolution of the
image.
☞ CHANGING THE RESOLUTION
(page 4-57)

Special mode settings
Scan
Address Book

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Send:

PC Scan

Touch the [Special Modes] key to select special modes such
as timer transmission and the erase function.

Auto

File
Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

4-15

Contents

FACSIMILE

Begin transmission
Scan the original and send the fax.
If the original is placed on the document glass, follow these steps to start scanning and transmission:
When sending a fax normally (memory transmission)
(1) Press the [START] key.
(2) When scanning is finished, replace the original with the next original.
(3) Press the [START] key.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until all originals have been scanned.
(5) Touch the [Read-End] key.
When sending a fax in direct transmission mode
Multiple originals cannot be scanned in direct transmission mode.
Press the [START] key to start transmission.

When transmission ends, image settings and convenient special mode settings are cleared.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
The settings can be kept in effect a fixed period of time after scanning is completed.

4-16

Contents

FACSIMILE

ENTERING DESTINATIONS
This section explains how to enter destination fax numbers.
Destination fax numbers can be entered using the numeric keys, or by retrieving a previously stored fax number using
the address book or a search number.

ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE
NUMERIC KEYS
Enter the destination fax number with
the numeric keys.

Take care to enter the correct number.
If an incorrect number is entered...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) to clear the number and then enter the correct number.

Entering a pause between digits of the number
Enter a pause after the number used to dial out from a PBX (for example, after "0"), or after the country code when
dialling an international number.

1234567890Scan
Address Book

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

Pause

Next Address

USB Mem. Scan

PC Scan

Auto

A4

Send:

Touch the [Pause] key.
A hyphen "-" is entered when the [Pause] key is touched once.

Auto

File
Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

System Settings (Administrator): Pause Time Setting
This is used to set the length of pauses. The default setting is 2 seconds.

4-17

Contents

FACSIMILE

RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK
The address book screen shows stored destinations as one-touch keys.
A destination fax number is retrieved by simply touching the one-touch key of that destination. This is called "one-touch
dialling". It is also possible to store multiple fax numbers in a one-touch key, allowing you to retrieve all the numbers by
simply touching the key. This is called "group dialling". This dialling method is convenient when you wish to send a fax to
(or poll) multiple fax destinations.
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

Cc

To

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Address Review

Sort Address

1
2

Freq.

ABCD

Preview

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

When destinations of other scan modes are stored in addition to fax destinations, an icon indicating the mode appears
together with the name of the destination in each one-touch key.
Icon

Mode
Fax
Scan to E-mail
Internet fax (Direct SMTP)
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder
Scan to Desktop
Group key with multiple destinations

System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store destinations (names and fax numbers) in the address book.

4-18

Contents

FACSIMILE

RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION
A destination fax number is retrieved by simply touching the one-touch key of that destination.

Scan

1

Internet Fax

Fax

Address Book

Original

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

Scan:

USB Mem. Scan
A4

Auto

Send:

PC Scan

Touch the [Address Book] key.

Auto

File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

Select the destination.

(2)
CCC CCC
0123456789
5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review

2

Pause
Cc

To

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

Preview

1
2

Address Entry

Sort Address

Next Address

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

(1) Touch the index tab where the destination
is stored.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If you select an incorrect destination, touch the key again
to cancel the selection.

MNOP

QRSTU VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

(1)

• Frequently used destinations can be displayed in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the
[Freq.] index when you store the destination.
• To continue specifying other destinations...
Touch the [Next Address] key and repeat (1) and (2) of this step.

• System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting determines whether or not the [Next Address] key can be omitted before specifying the next destination.
Factory default setting: The [Next Address] key can be omitted.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Switching of Display Order
This is used to disable switching of the order of display of the one-touch keys in the address book screen. The currently
selected display order will be the order that is used after this setting is enabled.

4-19

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED DESTINATIONS
When multiple destinations have been entered, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a
destination (cancel selection of the destination).

5

10

15

Condition
Settings

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

Freq.

Address Review

1

Touch the [Address Review] key.

Cc

To

1
2

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.

OK

Address Review

001 CCC CCC

002 KKK KKK

003 LLL LLL

004 MMM MMM

005 NNN NNN

006 OOO OOO

007 PPP PPP

008 QQQ QQQ

009 RRR RRR

010 SSS SSS

011 TTT TTT

012 UUU UUU

1
2

To

2

Cc

To delete a destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to delete. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key. Touch the [Detail] key to check the specified destination type and name.

Deselect the address?
BBB BBB

Detail

4-20

No

Yes

Contents

FACSIMILE

USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION
A destination stored in the address book can be retrieved using the
of the modes or in the address book screen.

Scan
Address Book

1

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Send:

PC Scan

key. This can be done in the base screen of any

Touch the

key.

Auto

File
Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Enter the 4-digit search number of the
address with the numeric keys.
When the 4-digit search number is entered, the stored address
is retrieved and specified as a destination.

2

• The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.
• If you do not know the search number, print the one-touch address list using "Sending Address List" in the system
settings.
• When entering search numbers such as "0001" and "0011", "0" can be omitted. For example, to enter "0001", enter
"1" and touch the
key or the [Next Address] key.
If an incorrect search number is entered...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) to clear the number and enter the correct number.

4-21

Contents

FACSIMILE

RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK
If an LDAP server is stored in the Web pages, you can look up a destination fax number in a global address book.

Open the global address search screen.

(2)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Address Review

1

Cc

To

Sort Address

1
2

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the [Global Address Search] key.

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

(1)

(2)
Cancel

Server Change

Server 1
Server 2
Server 3
Server 4

OK

Search for the destination.
If only one LDAP server has been stored, (1) and (2) are not
necessary. Go directly to (3). If an authentication screen for the
LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password.

(1) Touch the key of the LDAP server that you
wish to use.
If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears,
enter your user name and password.

Server 5
Server 6
Server 7

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
(3) Search for the destination in the search
screen.
Enter search characters for the destination and touch the
[Search] key. The search results will appear after a brief
interval.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
TEXT" (page 1-77) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".

2

How to search
Enter a maximum of 64 characters for the search characters. The system will look for names starting with the entered
letters.
An asterisk can be used as follows:
XXX :
Names beginning with "XXX".
XXX:
Names that end with "XXX".
XXX : Names that include "XXX".
AA XX: Names that start with "AA" and end with "XX".

4-22

Contents

FACSIMILE

(2)
To
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Search Again

Select the destination.

(1)

(1) Touch the key of the desired destination.

Cc

If no names are found that match the search letters, a
message will appear. Touch the [OK] key to close the
message and touch the [Search Again] key to search
again.

Detail

XXX
XXX AAA

0123456789

XXX BBB

9876543210

XXX CCC

0612345678

XXX DDD

0687654321

XXX EEE

0676543210

XXX FFF

0601234567

1
2

Address Book

(2) Touch the [To] key.
This enters the selected destination.
If you wish to select another destination, repeat steps (1)
and (2) above.

3

• If 30 or more matches are found, a message will appear in the screen. Touch the [OK] key to close the message. A
maximum of 300 search results are displayed. If the desired destination was not found, touch the [Search Again]
key to add more search letters.
• To check the information stored in a destination...
Touch the key of the destination and then touch the [Detail] key. The information stored for the selected destination
will appear. Check the information and then touch the [OK] key to return to the search results screen.
• If a screen for selecting the item to be used appears...
If the selected destination includes an E-mail address or other address in addition to the fax number or telephone
number, you will need to select which item you wish to use. Touch the [Fax] key to retrieve the fax number.

Storing a destination from a global address book in the machine's
address book
A destination from a global address book can be stored in the machine's address book as a one-touch key.
Touch the [Detail] key in the search results screen of the global address book (the screen of step 3 above) to display
information on the selected destination. Touch the [Register] key in the detailed information screen and then touch the
item to be used (the [Fax] key in this case). The following screen will appear.
Exit

Direct Address / Individual
E-mail

Internet Fax

Fax

Search Number 0001
Name

AAA AAA

Initial

A

Fax No.

0123456789

Key Name

AAA AAA

Mode

Index

User 1

33.6 kbps/None

The information stored in the global address book is automatically entered. (The settings can be changed if needed. For
detailed information on each item, see "Address Control" (page 7-17) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".) However, configure
the items below manually. To complete the storing procedure, touch the [Exit] key.
• [Initial] key: Touch this key to enter the initials that determine where the destination will appear in the alphabetical
index and the order of one-touch key display. Enter up to 10 characters for the initials.
• [Index] key: Touch this key to select the custom index in which the address will appear. You can also select whether
or not the destination will be included on the [Freq.] tab of the address book.
• [Mode] key: Touch this key to configure the "Transmission Speed" and "International Correspondence Mode"
settings. These settings have already been configured, however, if the destination is an international
destination, or if you find that communication errors frequently occur when communicating with that
destination, you can try changing the settings.

4-23

Contents

FACSIMILE

USING THE RESEND FUNCTION
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by fax, Scan to E-mail, and/or Internet fax are stored. One of these
can be selected to resend to that destination.

Ready to send.
Scan

Internet Fax

Address Book
Direct TX

1

Original

Fax
Scan:

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

Speaker

Resend

USB Mem. Scan

PC Scan

Auto

8½x11

Touch the [Resend] key.

Auto

Send:

File
Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Cancel

Resend

2

No.01

AAA AAA

No.02

BBB BBB

No.03

CCC CCC

No.04

DDD DDD

No.05

EEE EEE

No.06

FFF FFF

No.07

GGG GGG

No.08

HHH HHH

Touch the key of the fax destination that
you wish to redial.
The last 8 transmission destinations appear.

• If numeric keys were pressed during the previous transmission, the [Resend] key may not dial the correct number.
• The fax addresses below are not stored as addresses for which resend is possible.
- A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key).
- Broadcast destinations
- Destinations transmitted to using a program
System Settings (Administrator): Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Send Mode
This prohibits use of the resend function. When this setting is enabled, the [Resend] key cannot be used in the base screen
of image send mode.

4-24

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHAIN DIALLING
Number sequences entered with the numeric keys and/or one-touch keys can be linked together with pauses and dialled
as a single number.
Use chain dialling to dial a long number (such as an international number) when the country code and/or area code are
stored separately in one-touch keys.
Example: Using chain dialling to dial an international number

Number to be dialled

Number to access
international telephone
service

010

Country
code

Area code

XXX

010

00

XX

Using the
numeric keys

Entry

XXX

Number of other
party

XXXX

Using a one-touch
key
Pause

CCC CCC

System Settings (Administrator): Pause Time Setting
This is used to set the length of pauses. The default setting is 2 seconds.

4-25

Contents

FACSIMILE

BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS
This section explains the basic procedures for sending a fax.

TRANSMISSION METHODS
The methods that can be used to send a fax from the machine are explained below. Select the method that best suits
your needs.
When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed, the destination cannot be changed, and destinations cannot be added. If you wish to change the mode or
destination, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the procedure below.
When "Default Address Setting" is set to "Apply E-mail address of the user for login.", pressing the [Add Address] key on the
touch panel switches modes and adds addresses.

To fax a large number of sheet originals, use the automatic document feeder.
The originals will be scanned into memory and then transmitted (memory transmission).
When memory transmission is selected and multiple originals are placed in the automatic document feeder (and the line
is free), transmission will begin as soon as the first page is scanned and will take place while the remaining pages are
being scanned (Quick Online transmission).
If transmission cannot begin immediately because the line is in use, all pages will be scanned into memory and the
transmission will be reserved.
☞ USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION (page 4-33)
When a fax transmission or reception is already in progress, the following procedure can be performed to reserve a
transmission job. To check reserved transmission jobs, display the job status screen.
☞ CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-127)

1

11
11
1

Transmission

4-26

11
11
1

Contents

FACSIMILE

• If memory becomes full while the first original page is being scanned, transmission will stop.
• In the following situations, the transmission will be automatically reserved (memory transmission)
- When the line is busy or a communication error occurs and automatic resending is enabled.
☞ WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY (page 4-31), WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS (page 4-31)
- The machine is already using the line to send or receive a fax.
- Another fax transmission was reserved ahead of your fax.
- One of the following functions is being used for transmission.
Broadcast transmission, F-code transmission, timer transmission, Dual Page Scan, 2in1, Card Shot, Job Build, Original
Count
- The document glass is being used (except when the speaker is being used to dial).
• Up to 94 transmission jobs can be reserved.
• When the transmission is finished, the scanned original pages are cleared from memory. However, when the document
filing function is used, the transmitted fax is stored.
System Settings (Administrator): Quick On Line Sending
This is used to disable Quick Online transmission. In this case, fax transmissions will be sent by memory transmission
(reserved and then transmitted).

4-27

Contents

FACSIMILE

To fax thick originals or pages of a book, use the document glass.
☞ USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION (page 4-36)

1
1

Transmission

When the document glass is being used for a transmission, Quick Online transmission will not operate.

If you wish to send a fax ahead of other previously reserved fax
transmissions, use direct transmission mode.
The original is transmitted directly to the receiving fax machine without being scanned into memory.
When direct transmission mode is used, transmission will begin as soon as the transmission in progress is completed
(ahead of any previously reserved transmissions).
To send a fax by direct transmission, touch the [Direct TX] key in the base screen.
☞ USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE (page 4-34)
☞ USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE (page 4-38)

Scan

1

Address Book

1

Direct TX
Sub Address

Transmission

Address Review

• When transmission in direct transmission mode ends, the mode automatically changes back to memory transmission
mode.
• When the document glass is used, multiple original pages cannot be scanned.

4-28

Contents

FACSIMILE

PLACEMENT ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL
When an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) original is placed in vertical orientation ( ), the image is automatically rotated 90 degrees
and transmitted in horizontal orientation ( ) (Rotation Sending). If the original is placed in horizontal orientation ( ), it
is transmitted in that orientation ( ) without being rotated.

Transmission

8-1/2" x 11"(A4)

8-1/2" x 11"R (A4R)
image is transmitted.

Rotated to 8-1/2" x 11"R
(A4R) orientation

8-1/2" x 11"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4R, B5 and A5) size originals are not rotated for transmission.
System Settings (Administrator): Rotation Sending Setting
The factory default setting is rotate before transmission. If this setting is disabled, the original will be transmitted in the
orientation in which it is placed.

AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE TRANSMITTED
IMAGE
If the width of the transmitted image is larger than the width of the paper in the receiving machine, the image will be
automatically reduced to fit the receiving machine's paper width.
Example: Reduced sizes and reduction ratios
Transmitted image
width

Receiving machine's
paper width

Reduced size

Ratio

A3

B4

B4

1 : 0.84

11" x 17" (A3)

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"R (A4R)

1 : 0.71

B4

A4

A4R

1 : 0.84

System Settings (Administrator): Auto Reduction Sending Setting
The factory default setting is automatic reduction enabled. If this setting is disabled, the image will be sent at full size and part
of the image may be cut off.

4-29

Contents

FACSIMILE

TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES
The following original sizes can be transmitted.
Minimum original size
Using the automatic document
feeder

5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)
(131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width))

Using the document glass

–

Maximum original size
11-5/8" (height) x 39-3/8"* (width)
(297 mm (height) x 1000 mm* (width))
11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width)
(297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width))

*A long original can be transmitted.

THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL
When a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan" in the base
screen.
When the automatic original detection function is operating and the original is a non-standard size, the closest standard
size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the correct original size.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 4-50)
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 4-52)

STANDARD SIZES
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size
Detector Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The factory default setting is "Inch-1".

List of original size detector settings
Standard sizes (detected original sizes)
Selections

Document feeder tray
(automatic document feeder)

Document glass
Inch-1

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3

Inch-2

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3

Inch-3

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3

AB-1

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"

AB-2

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm
(8-1/2" x 13")

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")

AB-3

A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")

AB-4

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 340 mm
(8-1/2" x 13-2/5")

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")

AB-5

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 343 mm
(8-1/2" x 13-1/2")

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")

4-30

Contents

FACSIMILE

WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY
If the line is busy when you send a fax, transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval. This
function only operates in memory transmission mode. In direct transmission mode or manual transmission mode, the
transmission will be cancelled. Wait briefly and then try sending the fax again.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ CANCELLING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A RESERVED FAX (page 4-134)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Line Busy
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be
established because the line is busy. The factory default setting is 2 attempts at an interval of 3 minutes.

WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS
If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time,
transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval. This function only operates in memory
transmission mode.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ CANCELLING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A RESERVED FAX (page 4-134)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Communication Error
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an error.
The factory default setting is attempt at an interval of 3 minutes.

4-31

Contents

FACSIMILE

FAX DESTINATION CONFIRMATION MODE
The fax destination confirmation mode displays a destination confirmation message when a fax transmission is
performed to prevent accidental transmission to the wrong destination. This function is enabled in the system settings
(administrator). When the function is enabled, a message will appear to confirm the destination when the [START] key is
pressed to begin fax transmission.
The message that appears will vary depending on the method used to specify the destination.
Destination specified by one-touch key/search
number

Destination specified by the numeric keys, [Resend]
key, or [Global Address Search] key

Enter the number again and
press the Start key.

Number Confirmation
BBB BBB
0312345678

Cancel

OK

OK

Make sure that the destination indicated in the message
is correct and touch the [OK] key. Scanning will begin.
If the destination is not correct, touch the [Cancel] key
and select the destination again.

Touch the [OK] key, re-enter the destination with the
numeric keys, and press the [START] key.
If the re-entered destination is correct, scanning will
begin.
If the re-entered destination is not correct, a message
will appear. Touch the [OK] key and re-enter the
destination. If an incorrect number is entered for
confirmation 3 times in a row, the screen will revert to the
base screen.

• If the [Sub Address] key was used to enter a sub-address and passcode, the fax number must be re-entered during
confirmation. After re-entering the fax number, touch the [Sub Address] key and enter the sub-address and passcode.
• If chain dialling was used, touch the [Pause] key to enter "-" during confirmation.

Functions that cannot be used
When the fax destination confirmation function is enabled, only one destination is allowed, and thus the following
functions cannot be used.
• Broadcast transmission to multiple destinations including fax destinations
Group keys and program keys that contain multiple fax destinations cannot be used. After one destination is specified,
keys such as another one-touch key, the [Next Address] key, the [Address Entry] key, and the [Global Address
Search] key cannot be touched.
• Transmission using the speaker key
A destination cannot be specified after the [Speaker] key is pressed.
System Settings (Administrator): Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode
This setting is used to have a destination confirmation message appear when a fax is sent.

4-32

Contents

FACSIMILE

USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION
This section explains how to use the automatic document feeder to send a fax.

1

Indicator
line

Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

1

When sending a multi-page fax, the automatic document feeder and the document glass cannot both be used to scan
the original pages.

Enter the destination fax number.

(2)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

Freq.

Address Review

2

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.

Cc

To

1
2

ABCD

Preview

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can also
directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).

Press the [START] key.

3

Scanning begins.
When scanning is completed, the machine sounds a beep.
When scanning is completed, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can be
used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report.

• If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmitted
after fax reception is completed.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop. If Quick
Online transmission is taking place, the originals that were scanned will be transmitted. If Quick Online is not enabled, the
transmission will be cancelled.
System Settings (Administrator): Scan Complete Sound Setting
The scan complete sound can be selected.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

4-33

Contents

FACSIMILE

USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE

1

Indicator
line

Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly.

1

Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

(3)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

2

Cc

To

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

Freq.

Address Review

Enter the destination fax number.

(2)

1
2

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
(3) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

• Only one destination can be entered. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key) cannot
be used.
• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).

Scan
Address Book
Direct TX

3

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

8½x11

Send:

PC Scan

Touch the [Direct TX] key.

Auto

File
Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Press the [START] key.
Transmission begins.

4
To cancel transmission...
While "Dialling. Press [
] to cancel." appears or while the fax is being transmitted, press the [STOP] key (

4-34

).

Contents

FACSIMILE

• The following functions cannot be used with direct transmission:
Program, Timer Transmission, 2in1, Card Shot, Job Build, Original Count, File, Quick File, Memory Box, 2-Sided Original
Scanning, Global Address Search (When the [Direct TX] key is highlighted)
• Resending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason.
• If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed, the direct transmission will
wait until the previous transmission is finished. When the previous transmission is completed, the direct transmission will
begin. While the direct transmission is waiting, the [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed to display the job status screen. No
other operations are possible.
☞CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-127)

4-35

Contents

FACSIMILE

USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR
TRANSMISSION
To fax a thick original or other original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder, open the automatic
document feeder and place the original on the document glass.

Original size
detector

Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale
mark

Document glass scale
mark

5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(A5)
B5
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)

1

B5R
8-1/2" x 11"R (A4R)
8-1/2" x 14" (B4)
11" x 17" (A3)

• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.
• When faxing a multi-page original, scan each page in order starting from the first page.
• When sending a multi-page fax, the automatic document feeder and the document glass cannot both be used to
scan the original pages.

Enter the destination fax number.

(2)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

Freq.

Address Review

2

Cc

To

Preview

1
2

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can also
directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).

4-36

Contents

FACSIMILE

3

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.

If you have another page to scan, change pages and then press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.

4
If no action is taken for one minute, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved.

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

Configure

5

A beep sounds.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
Read-End

• When scanning is completed, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number.
This number can be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "2in1" or "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be
changed, and this can only be done when scanning each even page number of the original pages.
To cancel transmission...
Press the [STOP] key (
) before the [Read-End] key is touched.

• If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmission
will take place after fax reception is completed.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and transmission will be
cancelled.

4-37

Contents

FACSIMILE

USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN
DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE
When sending a fax from the document glass in direct transmission mode, only one page can be transmitted.

Original size
detector

Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale
mark

5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(A5)

1

B5
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)

Document glass scale
mark

B5R
8-1/2" x 11"R (A4R)
8-1/2" x 14" (B4)
11" x 17" (A3)

• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.

(3)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

2

Cc

To

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

Freq.

Address Review

Preview

Enter the destination fax number.

(2)

1
2

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
(3) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• Only one destination can be entered. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key) cannot
be used.
• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).

4-38

Contents

FACSIMILE

Scan
Address Book

3

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

8½x11

Send:

PC Scan

Touch the [Direct TX] key.

Auto

File
Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Press the [START] key.
Transmission begins.

4
To cancel transmission...
While "Dialling. Press [
] to cancel" appears in the display, press the [STOP] key (

).

• The following functions cannot be used with direct transmission:
Program, Timer Transmission, 2in1, Card Shot, Job Build, Polling Memory, Original Count, File, Quick File, Memory Box,
2-Sided Original Scanning, Global Address Search
• Resending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason.
• If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed, the direct transmission will
wait until the previous transmission is finished. When the previous transmission is completed, the direct transmission will
begin. While the direct transmission is waiting, the [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed to display the job status screen. No
other operations are possible.
☞CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-127)

4-39

Contents

FACSIMILE

TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER
When the speaker is used to dial, the fax is sent after the number is dialled and the connection is established. If a person
answers, you will be able to hear his or her voice, but you will not be able to speak.

Place the original.
1

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
When the document glass is used, only one page can be
transmitted.

1

1

(3)
Telephone mode.

5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Speaker Volume

2

Sort Address

Enter the destination fax number.

(1)
Speaker

To

(1) Touch the [Speaker] key.

Resend

You will hear the dial tone through the machine's speaker.

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

1
2

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

(2) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(3) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
A group key cannot be used.

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

Fax Memory:100%

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Fax Manual
Reception

• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).
• After touching the [Speaker] key, you can touch the [Speaker Volume] key to adjust the volume of the speaker. The
speaker volume changes each time the [Speaker Volume] key is touched. Adjust the volume to the desired level.

Wait until the connection is made and then press the [START] key.
Transmission begins.

3
To cancel transmission...
Touch the [Speaker] key before the [START] key is pressed. The line will be disconnected and transmission will stop.

• When the speaker is used, transmission takes place without scanning the original into memory.
• A destination that includes an F-code (sub-address and passcode) cannot be used.
• A one-touch key that has multiple destinations or has a non-fax destination cannot be used.
System Settings (Administrator): Speaker Settings
The default volume level of the speaker can be changed in the "Speaker Settings".

4-40

Contents

FACSIMILE

SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission)
This function is convenient when you need to send the same fax to multiple destinations, such as sending a report to
branch offices in different regions. You can transmit to as many as 500 destinations in one broadcast operation.
(Combined maximum of 200 file server, desktop, and shared folder destinations.)

Transmission
Originals

It is convenient to store destinations to which you frequently send faxes by broadcast transmission in group keys. Group
dialling allows you to retrieve multiple fax numbers stored in a one-touch key by simply pressing the one-touch key. To
store group keys, see "Address Control" (page 7-17) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
When a group key is used to dial, the number of fax numbers that are dialled is the number of destinations that are
stored in the group key. When a group key that has 10 destinations is used, 10 fax numbers are dialled.

1

Place the original.

1

1

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.

4-41

Contents

FACSIMILE

Enter the destination fax number.

(2)
CCC CCC
0123456789
5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review

Pause

Next Address

Cc

To

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

1
2

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
(3) Repeat step (2) until all destinations are
selected.

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).
• It is convenient to use a group key to enter the destinations.

2

• After entering a destination with the numeric keys, if you wish to enter another destination with the numeric keys,
touch the [Next Address] key before entering the next destination. The [Next Address] key can be omitted before or
after a destination entered using a one-touch key. However, if "Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting"
is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the [Next Address] key must be touched before entering the next
destination.
Fax number entered
with the numeric keys

[Next Address]
key

Fax number
entered with the
numeric keys

Cannot be omitted

[Next Address]
key

Destination entered with
a one-touch key

Can be omitted*
* Cannot be omitted if "Must Input Next
Address Key at Broadcast Setting" is enabled
in the system settings (administrator).

System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting is used to prohibit omission of the [Next Address] key when entering destinations for broadcast
transmissions.

5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review

3

Touch the [Address Review] key.

Cc

To

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

2

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

Freq.

Preview

1

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

4-42

Contents

FACSIMILE

Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.

OK

Address Review

001 CCC CCC

002 KKK KKK

003 LLL LLL

004 MMM MMM

005 NNN NNN

006 OOO OOO

007 PPP PPP

008 QQQ QQQ

009 RRR RRR

010 SSS SSS

011 TTT TTT

012 UUU UUU

1
2

4

To

Cc

To cancel a specified destination...
Touch the key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion. Touch the
[Yes] key.
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED DESTINATIONS (page 4-20)

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

• A broadcast transmission takes place by memory transmission only.
• A broadcast transmission can be used in combination with the timer transmission function to transmit at night or any other
desired time. A broadcast transmission can also be used in combination with other convenient functions.
• The broadcast transmission can include Scan to E-mail and Internet fax destinations. In this case, the image sent to the
Scan to E-mail and Internet fax destinations will be black and white.

4-43

Contents

FACSIMILE

Resending to unsuccessful broadcast transmission destinations
The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the
destinations failed, resend the fax to those destinations.

1
Print Job

2

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

Scan to

Fax Job
Pages

Touch the [Complete] key.

Internet Fax

Address

Set Time

Status

1

Broadcast0001

10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting

2

0123456789

10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting

3

AAA AAA

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

4

BBB BBB

10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

5

Broadcast

10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Job Queue
1

Complete

If the job status screen of fax mode does not appear, touch the
[Fax Job] tab.

1

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will
appear in each of those modes.

Print Job

3

Display details on the broadcast
transmission.

(2)

(1)
Scan to

Fax Job

Address

Start Time

Pages

Broadcast0001

10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000

Status

Broadcast0002

10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK

CCC CCC

10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK

0123456789

10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK

Job Queue
1

Complete

(1) Touch the key of the completed broadcast
transmission.

1

(2) Touch the [Detail] key.
Detail

Call

"Broadcastxxxx" will appear as the destination of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared in the
touch panel when scanning ended appears in "xxxx".

4-44

Contents

FACSIMILE

Resend to unsuccessful destinations.

OK

Detail
Broadcast0001
Address

Start Time

Status

002

DDD DDD

10:01 04/01

NG00000

010

EEE EEE

10:10 04/01

NG00000

(1) Touch the [Failed] tab.

Retry
1

(2) Touch the [Retry] key.

1

File

Failed

All Destinations

(1) (2)

4

• The procedure after the [Retry] key is touched varies depending on whether or not the document filing function was
used.
Not using document filing
You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the
broadcast transmission operation.
Using document filing
The document filing operation selection screen will appear with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the
document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to rescan the original.)
If the job was stored in a confidential folder or was stored as confidential file, a password entry screen will appear
after you touch the [Retry] key. Enter the password.
• If the [All Destinations] key is touched in (1), all destinations will be displayed. The [Retry] key that appears in the
screen can be touched to resend to all destinations.

4-45

Contents

FACSIMILE

SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-Fax)
A document in a computer can be transmitted via the machine as a fax. Faxes are sent using the PC-Fax function in the
same way as documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver on your computer and then select the
Print command in the software application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as a fax.

Fax transmission

For more information on using PC-Fax, see the Help file for the PC-Fax driver.
• To use the PC-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed. For more information, see the Software Setup Guide.
• This function can only be used on a Windows® computer.
• This function can only be used for transmission. Faxes cannot be received to your computer.

4-46

Contents

FACSIMILE

IMAGE SETTINGS
Settings for scanning the original are selected in the base screen of each mode. The current state of each setting
appears to the right of the key used to select the setting.
Scan
Address Book

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

(1)

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

(2)

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

(3)

Address Review

Special Modes

File
Quick File
Preview

(1)

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

[Original] key
Touch this key to set the scan size, send size, and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning
settings.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF
AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 4-48),
SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE
(Enlarge/Reduce) (page 4-49)

(2)

[Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE (page 4-56)

(3)

[Resolution] key
Touch this key to select the scanning resolution.
☞ CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 4-57)

4-47

Contents

FACSIMILE

AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN
ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original)
The automatic document feeder will automatically scan both sides of the document.

Transmission

2-sided original

1

Front and back are
sent as two pages

Touch the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-47)
Specify the binding style of the 2-sided
original (book or tablet) and the
orientation in which the original is placed.

OK

Fax/Original

Scan Size
Auto

100% Send Size
A4

Auto

(1) Touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the
[2-Sided Tablet] key.

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

A book and a tablet are bound as shown below.
Booklet

(1)

(2)

Tablet

(3)

A J
E
C L
G

2

A B
E F
K L

(2) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation] key.
If the wrong orientation is selected here, the image may
not be sent properly.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
To cancel 2-sided scanning, touch the highlighted key so that it is no longer highlighted.

• 2-sided scanning automatically turns off after the transmission operation is completed.
• 2-sided scanning is not possible when direct transmission or speaker transmission is performed.

4-48

Contents

FACSIMILE

SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE
(Enlarge/Reduce)
When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected and displayed in the base screen.
The size of the placed original is indicated as the scan size, and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the send size.
Scan

Internet Fax

Address Book

Original

Fax
Scan:

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

File
Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

In the above screen, the scan size (the placed original) is A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size is auto. If, for example, the
scan size were A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size were B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"), the image would be reduced before
transmission.
"Scan Size"
Transmission
"Send Size" is set to
B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
The image is reduced
to B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
before transmission

A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

• Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected.
☞ STANDARD SIZES (page 4-30)
• When the original size is a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan
size.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 4-50)
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 4-52)

4-49

Contents

FACSIMILE

Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.)
If the original is a non-standard size or you wish to change the scan size, touch the [Original] key to specify the original
size manually. Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and follow the steps below.

Touch the [Original] key.

1

The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-47)

OK

Fax/Original

Scan Size
Auto

100% Send Size
Auto

A4

2

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

(1)

(2)
OK

Fax/Original

Manual

Specify the scan size.
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Auto

3

Touch the [Scan Size] key.

Manual

A5

B5R

B4

AB

A5R

A4

A3

Inch

B5

A4R

Long Size

216x340

216x343

Size Input

• If you are sending a long original, touch the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long
original. The maximum length that can be scanned is 1000 mm (39-3/8") (the maximum height is 297 mm
(11-5/8")).
☞ TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 4-30)
• To specify an inch size for the scan size, touch the [AB
scan size.

4-50

Inch] key to highlight the [Inch] side and then specify the

Contents

FACSIMILE

OK

Fax/Original

Scan Size
B5

4

Touch the [OK] key.

100% Send Size
Auto

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed.

4-51

Contents

FACSIMILE

Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values)
When scanning a non-standard size original such as a postcard or card, follow these steps to specify the original size.
The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8").

Touch the [Original] key.

1

The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-47)

Fax/Original

Scan Size
Auto

OK

Touch the [Scan Size] key.

OK

Touch the [Size Input] key.

100% Send Size
Auto

A4

2

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

Fax/Original
Auto

A4

Manual

3

A5

B5R

B4

AB

A5R

A4

A3

Inch

B5

A4R

Long Size

216x340

216x343

Size Input

(1), (2)

(3)

Fax/Original

OK
Cancel

Size Input

4

X

420

(25
mm

432)

Y

297

(25
mm

297)

OK

Enter the scan size.
(1) Touch the X (width) numeric value display
key and enter the width.
(2) Touch the Y (height) numeric value display
key and enter the height.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
To complete the setting and return to the screen of step 3,
touch the [OK] key next to the [Cancel] key.

You can also touch the

keys to change the number.

4-52

Contents

FACSIMILE

OK

Fax/Original

Touch the [OK] key.
The specified size appears in the [Scan Size] key.

Scan Size
X420 Y297

5

Send Size
Auto

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

• When the scan size is specified by numerical values, the send size cannot be specified.
• When the automatic document feeder is used, an original longer that 432 mm (17") can be scanned (maximum width
1000 mm (39-3/8")). In this case, touch the [Long Size] key in the screen of step 3.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 4-50)
☞ TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 4-30)

4-53

Contents

FACSIMILE

Specifying the send size of the original
Specify the send size as a paper size. If a send size bigger than the scan size is selected, the image will be enlarged. If
a send size smaller than the scan size is selected, the image will be reduced.
The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by
numerical values.

1

Touch the [Original] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-47)

OK

Fax/Original

Scan Size
Auto

100% Send Size
Auto

A4

2

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

(1)

(2)
OK

Fax/Original

Manual

Specify the send size.
(1) Touch the desired send size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Auto

3

Touch the [Send Size] key.

Manual

A5

B5R

B4

AB

A5R

A4

A3

Inch

B5

A4R

216x340

216x343

• Depending on the "Scan Size" setting, it may not be possible to select some sizes for the "Send Size". Size keys
that cannot be specified for the "Send Size" are greyed out to prevent selection.
• To specify an inch size for the send size, touch the [AB
send size.

4-54

Inch] key to highlight the [Inch] side and then specify the

Contents

FACSIMILE

(1)

(2)
OK

Fax/Original

141% Send Size

Scan Size
Auto

A4

A3

Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
key.
If the wrong orientation is selected here, the image may
not be sent properly when using enlargement/reduction.

4

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the "Scan Size" and the "Send Size".

4-55

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
The exposure can be changed to match the darkness of the original.
Refer the following tables to select appropriate settings.

Exposure settings
Exposure

When to select

Auto

This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original.

Manual

1-2

Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.

3

Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).

4-5

Select this setting when the original consists of faint text.

Touch the [Exposure] key.

1

The current exposure setting appears to the right of the [Exposure] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-47)

(1)

(2)

(3)
OK

Fax/Exposure

Select the exposure.
(1) Touch the [Manual] key.
(2) Adjust the exposure with the

Auto

2

When the exposure is set to [Auto], the
keys
cannot be used.
The exposure darkens when the
key is touched,
and lightens when the
key is touched.
To return to auto exposure adjustment, touch the [Auto]
key.

Manual

1

3

keys.

5

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the exposure setting can be changed each time you change
pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun.
(However, when "Job Build" in the special modes is used, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is
inserted.)
System Settings (Administrator): Default Exposure Settings
This is used to change the default exposure setting.

4-56

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHANGING THE RESOLUTION
The resolution can be selected to match the characteristics of the original, such as text or photo, the size of the text, and
the darkness of the image.
Refer the following tables to select appropriate settings.

Resolution settings
Resolution

When to select

Standard

Select this setting when your original consists of normal-sized text (like the text in this manual).

Fine

Select this setting when your original has small text or diagrams with fine lines.
The original will be scanned at twice the resolution of the [Standard] setting.

Super Fine

Select this setting when your original has intricate pictures or diagrams.
A higher-quality image will be produced than with the [Fine] setting.

Ultra Fine

Select this setting when your original has intricate pictures or diagrams.
This setting gives the best image quality. However, transmission will take longer than with the
other settings.

Half Tone

Select this setting when your original is a photograph or has gradations of colour (such as a
colour original).
This setting will produce a clearer image than [Fine], [Super Fine], or [Ultra Fine] used alone.
Halftone cannot be selected when [Standard] is used.

Touch the [Resolution] key.

1

The current resolution setting appears to the right of the [Resolution] key.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-47)

(1)

(2)

Fax/Resolution

OK

Select the resolution.
(1) Touch the key of the desired resolution.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Standard

Fine

2

Super Fine

Half Tone

Ultra Fine

When [Fine], [Super Fine], or [Ultra Fine] is selected, the [Half Tone] key can be touched to select halftone.

• When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the resolution setting can be changed each time you change pages.
When using the automatic document feeder, the resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (However, when
"Job Build" in the special modes is used, the resolution can be changed each time a new set of originals is inserted.)
• When a fax is sent at [Ultra Fine], [Super Fine], or [Fine] resolution, a lower resolution will be used if the receiving machine
does not have that resolution.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Resolution Setting
This is used to change the default resolution setting.

4-57

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview)
If you touch the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the scanned image in the touch panel before
sending the image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
Depending on the size of the transmission data, part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen in the touch
panel.

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Scan
Address Book
Direct TX

2

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Send:

PC Scan

Touch the [Preview] key to highlight it.

Auto

File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

Select transmission settings and press the [START] key.

3

"Originals are being read" appears while the originals are being scanned, and when scanning is finished, the preview screen
appears on the touch panel. Transmission will not take place until you touch the [Start Sending] key in the preview screen.

Preview
B/W
Sender Info
Function Rev.

4

Check the preview image and then touch
the [Start Sending] key.
Transmission begins.
For information on the preview screen, see "PREVIEW CHECK
SCREEN" (page 4-59).

Display Rotation

0001

/0010

Start
Sending

System settings (administrator): Default Preview
You can specify whether or not the [Preview] key function will be enabled in the base screens of the image send modes and
in the address book.

4-58

Contents

FACSIMILE

PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the preview check screen.

Preview
B/W
Sender Info
Function Rev.

(1)

(3)
(4)
(5)

Display Rotation

(6)
0001

Start
Sending

/0010

(7)

(2)
(1)

(3)

Preview image

Touch to display the sender information for fax own
number.
This key can only be touched when the entire preview
image is displayed in the preview screen.

A preview of the scanned original appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and slide
it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to scroll.)
(2)

(4)

Change page keys

[Sender Info] key

[Function Rev.] key
Touch to check special mode settings or scan settings for
two-sided originals.

When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.

(5)

• Page number display:
This shows the total number of pages
and the current page number. You can
touch the current page number key and
enter a number with the numeric keys
to go to that page number.

Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
"4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.

(6)

"Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.

(7)

[Start Sending] key
Touch to begin transmission.

• A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual send result.
• The preview image reflects certain scanning and special mode settings.
Settings reflected in the preview image are as follows:
Scanning settings: Original
Special modes: Erase, Dual Page Scan, Card Shot, 2in1

4-59

Contents

FACSIMILE

FAX RECEPTION
This section explains the basic procedures for receiving faxes.

RECEIVING FAXES
When the reception mode is set to "Auto Reception", the machine will receive and print faxes automatically. The fax
reception mode is displayed in the base screen.
Scan
Address Book

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

File
Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

This shows the current fax
reception mode and the amount
of free memory remaining.

• When fax reception is in progress, it is possible to reserve a transmission by performing the transmission in memory
transmission mode.
☞TRANSMISSION METHODS (page 4-26)
• To print received faxes, make sure that the required paper is loaded in the machine's paper trays. It is not necessary to
load A4 (8-1/2" x 11") paper and B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") paper in both the vertical ( ) and horizontal (
) orientations.
Differences in orientation are automatically adjusted when faxes are received.
When a fax smaller than A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size is received, the size of the paper used for printing will vary depending on the
orientation (vertical or horizontal) in which the sender placed the original.
• System Settings: Receive Setting (page 7-107)
This is used to change the fax reception mode. "Auto Reception" should normally be used.
Select "Manual Reception" when an extension phone is connected to the machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): Allow/Reject Number Setting
You can store numbers and specify whether or not reception is allowed from those numbers.

4-60

Contents

FACSIMILE

RECEIVING A FAX
When a fax is transmitted to the machine, the machine automatically receives and prints the fax.

Beep

The machine rings and fax reception
begins automatically.
A beep sounds when reception ends.

1
• System Settings (Administrator): Speaker Settings
This is used to change the volume and tone of the reception beep.
• System Settings (Administrator): Number of Calls in Auto Reception
This is used to change the number of rings on which fax reception begins automatically. To receive faxes without
the machine ringing, select "0" rings.

The fax is automatically printed.

2
• If a password entry screen appears...
A password must be entered to print the received fax. When the correct password is entered, the received fax is
printed.
☞PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-63)
• The output tray and stapling (when a finisher is installed) can be selected.
The number of copies of received faxes that are printed and the output tray can be selected. When a finisher is
installed, the number of copies printed, the output tray, and stapling can be selected.

• If printing of a copy job or print job is in progress when a fax is received, the fax will not be printed until the previously
reserved job is completed.
• Received faxes will not be printed when the machine cannot print due to an error condition such as out of paper, out of
toner, or a paper misfeed. The faxes will be printed automatically when the error condition is cleared. (If the machine ran
out of paper, touch the [OK] key in the touch panel after loading paper.
• When received faxes cannot be printed, the faxes can be forwarded to another fax machine.
☞FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (Fax Data Forward) (page 4-66)
• System Settings (Administrator): Duplex Reception Setting
This is used to have received faxes printed on both sides of the paper.
• System Settings (Administrator): Receiving Date & Time Print
Use this to select whether or not the date and time of reception is added when a received image is printed.

4-61

Contents

FACSIMILE

RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY
A fax can be received manually using the touch panel. While the machine rings, touch the [Speaker] key in the base
screen and then touch the [Fax Manual Reception] key that appears.
Telephone mode.
Scan

Internet Fax

Fax

Address Book

Original

Speaker Volume

Exposure

Auto

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

Scan:

Speaker

Resend

USB Mem. Scan

PC Scan

Auto

Send:

Auto

File
Quick File

Fax Memory:100%

Fax Manual
Reception

• When a call is answered by touching the [Speaker] key, you will be able to hear the other party, however, you will not be
able to speak.
• Even when you use an extension phone to answer a call, you can touch the [Fax Manual Reception] key in the touch panel
to begin fax reception. You can also use the extension phone to begin fax reception.
☞RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION PHONE (Remote Reception) (page 4-126)

4-62

Contents

FACSIMILE

PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print)
"Hold Setting for Received Data Print" can be enabled in the system settings (administrator) to have faxes received to
memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is used, a password
entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received.
Received data is stored.
Enter password via the 10-key.

Cancel

When the previously programmed 4-digit password is entered with the numeric keys, printing begins.
The [Cancel] key can be touched to close the password entry screen. If this is done, the data in memory key (
) will
blink in the touch panel. The password entry screen will reappear when you touch the blinking key (
) or change
modes.
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), a password can be
entered to display the received data list screen. If you wish to check an image before printing it, continue from step 1 on
the next page.
• The received faxes will be retained in memory regardless of whether they were received automatically or manually.
• If "Fax Data Receive/Forward" is executed in the system settings to forward received faxes to another machine, faxes
retained in memory will also be forwarded. At that time, the same password entry screen as for printing will appear.
Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered.
System Settings (Administrator): Hold Setting for Received Data Print
Enable this setting to have received faxes retained in memory until a password is entered. This setting is also used to
program the password.

4-63

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled* in the system settings (administrator), you can check a received
image in the touch panel before printing it out. When this function is enabled, follow the steps below to print a received image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
Depending on the size of the received data, part of the image in the image check screen on the touch panel may not appear.

When an image is received, a confirmation
prompt will appear. Touch the [Yes] key.

The memory has received data.
Check the data?

If this message appears while you are configuring settings of
any type and you touch the [Yes] key, the settings that you are
configuring will be cancelled. If this message appears in
another mode, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode after checking the image.

1
No

Yes

Select the received image

(1)
Received Data List

Select All

Thumbnail

2

(1) Touch the key of the received image that
you want to check.

Back

Multiple received images can be checked.

0123456789

04/04/2010

10:28

Not checked

BBB BBB

04/04/2010

10:14

Checked

1

9876543210

04/04/2010

10:12

Not checked

5

BBB BBB
0612345678

04/04/2010

10:08

Checked

BBB BBB
0123456789

04/04/2010

10:00

Not checked

CCC CCC

04/04/2010

10:00

Checked

Image Check

Delete

(2) Touch the [Image Check] key.
• To show thumbnails of the received images, touch the
[Thumbnail] key.
• To delete an image that has been selected, touch the
[Delete] key. To print an image that has been selected,
touch the [Print] key.

Print

(2)

When the [Select All] key is touched, it will change into the [Cancel All] key. When all received data has been selected
using the [Select All] key, the selection can be cancelled by touching the [Cancel All] key.

0123456789

Check the received image and then
touch the [Print] key.

Back

Image Check
04/04/2010

3

10:28

1 / 3

Display Rotation

0001 /0010

Printing begins.
For information on the image check screen, see "IMAGE
CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-65).

Print

If the screen of step 1 appears when you are configuring settings in the setting screens of any of the modes, the configured
settings will be cancelled if you view the image. After viewing the image, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode, regardless of which mode you were in previously.
System Settings (Administrator): Received Data Image Check Setting
Use this to specify whether or not a received fax can be viewed before it is printed.

4-64

Contents

FACSIMILE

IMAGE CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the image check screen.

Back

Image Check
0123456789

04/04/2010

10:28

1 / 3

Display Rotation

Print
0001

(1)
(1)

(2)

0010

(3)

(4)
(4)

Information display

Preview image
An image of the selected received image appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to
scroll.)

(3)

(5)

(7)

"Display Rotation" key

[Print] key
Touch to start printing.

(6)

Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
"4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.

Change page keys
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.

(6)

This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.

This shows information on the displayed image.
(2)

(5)

(7)

Image select key
When multiple images are selected for preview display,
use this to change the displayed images.

A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.

4-65

Contents

FACSIMILE

FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES
(Fax Data Forward)
When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another
previously programmed fax machine.
This function is convenient in an office or work area that has two or more telephone lines and another fax machine is
connected to a different line than the machine.

The machine

The machine cannot print

Forwarding
destination

Forwarding
Printing
Received fax
Forwarding of received faxes is executed in the system settings of the machine. Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key on
the operation panel to display the system setting menu screen in the touch panel. Select [Fax Data Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings], and then touch the key that executes received fax forwarding.
• If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be
forwarded.
• A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job. If transmission does not take place because the transmission was
cancelled or an error occurred, the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed.
• All faxes received are forwarded. Note, however, that faxes received to an F-code confidential memory box cannot be
forwarded.
• If a password entry screen appears after touching the [OK] key, "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" has been enabled.
Enter the password with the numeric keys to begin forwarding.
☞PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-63)
• System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward (page 7-23)
Use this to forward received faxes when the machine is unable to print.
• System Settings (Administrator): Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding
This is used to store the forwarding fax number.

4-66

Contents

FACSIMILE

FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A
NETWORK ADDRESS
(Inbound Routing Settings)
You can have received faxes automatically forwarded to an e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or
network folder address. This function can be used to forward received faxes to a specified address without printing them.
The machine

Forwarding

Received fax
• This function cannot be used for faxes received by confidential reception.
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)

CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS
All inbound routing settings are configured in the Web pages. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the
Start Guide.
The following explanation assumes that the Web pages have been accessed with administrator rights.
To configure inbound routing settings, follow the steps below.

4-67

Contents

FACSIMILE

Enabling the inbound routing function.
(1) In the Web page menu, click [Application
Settings], [Inbound Routing Settings], and
then [Administration Settings].
(2) Select [Enable] in "Inbound Routing" and
click the [Submit] button.

1
Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen,
and from specifying which table is used. To do so, select the checkboxes below
.
• Disable Registration of Forward Table • Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table • Disable Change of Forward
Approval
When inbound routing is enabled, you can also specify whether or not you wish the machine to print the forwarded
faxes.
To have all received faxes printed before being forwarded, select "Print Out All Report" in "Print Style Setting". To
have received faxes printed only when an error prevents forwarding, select "Print at Error".
If an error occurs when [Not Print and Forward to the Following E-mail Address at Error] is selected, received data is
not printed, but is forwarded to the specified e-mail address.
After configuring the settings, be sure to click the [Submit] button.

Storing sender addresses.
If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses
forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Send
addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you
store a forwarding table.

(1) Click [Sender Number/Address
Registration] in the [Inbound Routing
Settings] menu in the Web page.

2

(2) Enter the sender address in "Internet Fax
Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate,
and click the [Add to List] button.
The entered address will be added to the "Address to be
Entered" list.
• Specify whether the address will be directly entered
(maximum of 1500 characters) or selected from a
global address book by clicking the [Global Address
Search] button.
• To store multiple addresses, repeat this step.

(3) When you have finished adding addresses,
click the [Submit] button.
• A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.
• To delete an entered address, select the address in "Address to be Entered" and click the [Delete] button.

4-68

Contents

FACSIMILE

(2)

Store a forwarding table.

(3) (4)

Follow the steps below to store a forwarding table that
combines a specified sender and forwarding address.

(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu and click the [Add] button.
(2) Enter a "Table Name".
(3) Select the line used for reception.
(4) Select the sender whose faxes will be
forwarded.
• To forward all received faxes, select [Forward All
Received Data].
• To forward only data received from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender].
To forward all data except data from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Senders except
Below]. Select the appropriate senders from the list and
click the [Add] button.

(5) Select the forwarding conditions.
• To always forward received data, select [Always
Forward].
• To specify a day and time on which received data will
be forwarded, select [Forward on Selected Day & Time]
and select the checkbox
of the desired day of the
week. To specify a time, select the [Set Forwarding
Time] checkbox
and specify the time.

3

(6) Select the file format.

(8)

(7)

(6)

The format can be set separately for each forwarding
address (for each of forwarding addresses 1, 2, and 3 in
the table).

(5)

(7) Select the forwarding address.
Forwarding addresses can be selected from the
machine's address book. (Multiple addresses can be
selected.) A maximum of 1000 forwarding addresses can
be stored (a combined maximum of 100 file server,
desktop, and network folder addresses can be stored).

(8) Click [Submit].
• When selecting senders from the "Sender Number/Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key
on your keyboard to select multiple senders.
• A maximum of 50 forwarding tables can be stored.
• Images sent in TIFF format may not display correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file
format to PDF.
• Up to three forwarding day and time settings can be set for one forwarding table, and a forwarding destination can
be set for each set time. To configure these settings, use the forwarding list tabs to access each setting.
• When the forwarding destination is a file server, desktop, or shared folder, the computer of that destination must be
powered on.

4-69

Contents

FACSIMILE

(2)

Specifying forwarding tables to be used.
To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding
tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.

(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu.
(2) Select [Always Forward] or [Forward on
Selected Day & Time] from the forwarding
table.
The forwarding permission settings that appear here are
linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 3. If you
wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set
in step 3, set the forwarding permission settings

4

(3) Click [Submit].

(3)

To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected

4-70

and click [Delete].

Contents

FACSIMILE

SPECIAL MODES
This section explains special modes that can be used for fax transmission.

SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is touched in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. Touch the
key to switch between the two screens. When the [OK] key is
touched in the special modes screen, the selected settings are entered and the base screen reappears.

1st screen

2nd screen
OK

Fax/Special Modes

(1)

(2)
Program

(4)

Timer

(7)
(10)

(1)

Job
Build
Original
Count

(3)

(8)

2in1

Mixed Size
Original

(11)

(6)

(13)

Dual Page
Scan

Erase

(5)

Fax/Special Modes

(15)

1
Card Shot

(9)

2

(8)

[Program] key

☞ STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program) (page

[Erase] key

(9)

☞ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE

[Dual Page Scan] key

2

[Mixed Size Original] key

☞ TRANSMITTING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT

[Slow Scan Mode] key

☞ FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode) (page

(10) [Original Count] key

☞ TRANSMITTING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO

☞ CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count) (page 4-93)

[Timer] key

☞ SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer)

(11) [File] key
Touch this to use the File function of document filing
mode.

[2in1] key

☞ SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (2in1)

(12) [Quick File] key
Touch this to use the Quick File function of document
filing mode.

[Card Shot] key

☞ SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE

(13) [Verif. Stamp] key*1

PAGE (Card Shot) (page 4-84)
(7)

2
Polling

4-91)

(page 4-81)
(6)

(17)

SIZES (Mixed Size Original) (page 4-89)

(page 4-79)
(5)

Memory Box

Quick File

SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan) (page 4-77)
(4)

Report

(16)

(12)
File

IMAGE (Erase) (page 4-75)
(3)

Own Name
Select

(14) Transaction

Slow Scan
Mode

4-73)
(2)

Verif.
Stamp

OK

☞ STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif. Stamp)
(page 4-95)

[Job Build] key

☞ SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES (Job
Build) (page 4-87)

4-71

Contents

FACSIMILE

(16) [Memory Box] key

(14) [Transaction Report] key

☞ CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE

☞ SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE

TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report)
(page 4-97)

POLLS YOUR MACHINE (Polling Memory) (page
4-104)

(15) [Own Name Select] key

(17) [Polling] key

☞ TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER

☞ CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING

INFORMATION (Own Name Select) (page 4-100)

RECEPTION (Polling) (page 4-101)

* Does not appear when the stamp unit is not installed.
Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.

[OK] key and [Cancel] key
In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:
Fax/Special Modes
Erase

Cancel

OK

(A)

OK

(B)
(C)

Edge
Erase

Centre
Erase

Edge+Centre
Erase

Edge

10

(0-20)
mm

Side Erase

(A) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the base screen.
(B) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the special modes menu screen. Touch this key when you
wish to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special modes menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special modes menu
screen.

4-72

Contents

FACSIMILE

STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program)
A program is a group of transmission settings stored together. When transmission settings are stored in a program, the
settings can be retrieved and used for a fax job by means of a simple operation.
For example, suppose that the same A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are distributed to branch offices in various
regions once a month.
(1) The same documents are faxed to each branch office
(2) To save paper, two document pages are faxed as a single page
(3) Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmission
A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size
documents to be distributed

1

Fax received by recipients.

1

2

1

2

2

When a job program is not stored

When a job program is stored

Enter the fax numbers of the branch offices

Retrieve the stored program.

Select the 2in1 function.

Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.

Select erase settings

Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Considerable time is required to send the documents each
month because the above settings must be selected.
In addition, mistakes may occasionally be made when
selecting the settings, so incorrect transmissions may occur.

When a program is stored, settings are selected with ease by
simply pressing the program key.
In addition, transmission takes place based on the stored
settings so there are no chances for mistakes.

• Programs are stored, edited, and deleted using "Address Control" in the system settings. See "Program" (page
7-22) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
• Programs can also be stored using the Web pages. Click [Job Programs] and then [Image Send] in the Web page menu.
• The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can
be used repeatedly for transmission.
• The following settings can be stored in programs.
Destinations:
One-touch keys, group keys, search numbers
Image settings:
Original scan size, Image orientation, duplex scanning, exposure, resolution
Special modes:
Polling reception, Erase, Dual Page Scan, Job Build, Mixed Size Original, Slow Scan Mode,
Original Count, Verif. Stamp, 2in1
Preview
F-code communication: A destination that includes an F-code can be stored to perform an F-code operation.
• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Up to 500 destinations can be stored in each program.

4-73

Contents

FACSIMILE

Place the original.

1

Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the
program.

Select the special modes.

2

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Program] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(1)

Retrieve the stored program.

(2)

Program

(1) Touch the desired program key.

OK

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

3

Program A

Program B

Program C

Program D

Program E

Program F

Program G

Program H

Program I

Program J

Program K

Program L

1
2

Select additional settings.

Program : Program C
0123456789
Scan

Internet Fax
Original

Address Review

4

Fax
Scan:

Exposure

Auto

Resolution

Standard

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Send:

Special Modes

File

PC Scan
Auto

When a program is used, the following settings can be
additionally specified:
• Image settings: Original scan size*, send size
• Special modes: Timer Transmission, Card Shot, File, Quick
File, Own Name Select, Transaction Report
* When stored in the program, this cannot be additionally
specified.

Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• The screen that appears will vary depending on the destination stored in the program.
• The mode cannot be changed here.
• Functions stored in the program cannot be cancelled here.

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

4-74

Contents

FACSIMILE

ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows on images produced when scanning thick originals or books. (This function
erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form. The function does not detect shadows and erase only the
shadows.)
Scanning a thick book
Not using the erase
function

Using the erase
function

Shadows appear here.
Shadows appear in the image.

No shadows appear.

Erase modes
Edge Erase

1
2

Centre Erase

Edge + Centre Erase

Side Erase

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)
Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Erase] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

4-75

Contents

FACSIMILE

(1)

(2)

(3)
OK

Fax/Special Modes
Cancel

Erase

Select the erase settings.
(1) Touch the desired erase mode.
Select one of the 4 erase modes.
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.

OK

Erase
Edge
Erase

Centre
Erase

Edge+Centre
Erase

Edge
Side Erase

10

OK

Cancel

(0-20)
mm

Erase position
for Original Side 2

Up
Side Erase

Left

Right
Same Side as
Side 1
Different Side
from Side 1

Down

4

Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase
and make sure that a checkmark (
) appears.
When performing two-sided scanning, set the erase edge
on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the settings, touch the [OK]
key.

(2) Set the erasure width with the

keys.

0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1") can be entered.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

When the erase function is used, erase takes place at the edges of the original image. If you also use a reduction or an
enlargement setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. For example, if the erase width setting is
20 mm (1") and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 10 mm (1/2" ).
To cancel an erase setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment
The default erase width setting is linked to the copy mode system setting, and can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1"). The
factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2").

4-76

Contents

FACSIMILE

TRANSMITTING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan)
The left and right sides of an original can be transmitted as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to
fax the left and right pages of a book or other bound document as separate pages.
Example: Faxing the left and right pages of a book

Book or bound document

The left and right pages are sent as two pages.
Example:
Original scan size

Transmitted image

A3 (11" x 17") x 1 page

A4 (8-1/2" x 11") x 2 pages

• When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• The send size cannot be changed.

Place the original face down on the
document glass.
Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark
.

Size mark
Centreline of
A3 original

1

Centreline of
11" x 17" original

The page on this side
is scanned first.
Centreline of original
A3
(11" x 17")

2

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

4-77

Contents

FACSIMILE

(2)

(3)
OK

Fax/Special Modes

Select Dual Page Scan.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Program

3

Dual Page
Scan

Erase

1
Timer

Job
Build
Original
Count

Card Shot

2in1

Slow Scan
Mode

Mixed Size
Original

File

2

(2) Touch the [Dual Page Scan] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Quick File

Press the [START] key.

4

Scanning begins.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

• To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function. (Note, however, that
"Centre Erase" and "Edge + Centre Erase" cannot be used.)
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.
To cancel Dual Page Scan...
Touch the [Dual Page Scan] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

4-78

Contents

FACSIMILE

SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer)
When this function is used, transmission takes place automatically at a specified time.
The timer transmission function makes it easy to perform reserved transmissions, broadcast transmissions and other
transmissions at night or other times when phone rates are low.
A timer setting can also be specified for polling reception to receive a fax when you are not present.

During the day, set up a
broadcast transmission to
take place at 20:00

At 20:00, the broadcast
transmission begins automatically
(Transmission to the first destination
takes place)

• When a timer transmission is set, keep the main power switch "on". Transmission will not take place if the main power is
turned off at the specified time.
• When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not
possible to leave the document in the auto document feeder or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved
time of transmission.
• Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, special modes, etc.) are automatically cleared after the
transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original and settings are stored
on the built-in hard drive.)

1
2

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)
Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Timer] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

4-79

Contents

FACSIMILE

(1)

(2)

OK

Cancel

Timer

Day of the Week

If you do not wish to specify a day, select [---]. In this
case, transmission will begin when the time specified in
(2) arrives.

Time

10

hh.

00

keys.

(1) Specify the day.

OK

Fax/Special Modes

---

Set the time with the

(3)

(2) Specify the time (hour, minute)

mm.

Select the time in 24-hour format.
You can also directly touch a numeric display key to
change the setting with the numeric keys.

4

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
When this screen is opened, the setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CLEAR ALL]
key (
) to cancel the operation. Correct the time in the system settings and then perform the timer transmission
procedure.
☞ CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME (page 4-6)

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

• The time can be specified up to a week in advance.
• Up to 94 timer transmissions can be stored at once.
• Only one timer polling operation can be stored at once. If you wish to poll multiple machines, store a serial polling timer
operation.
• If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer operation will begin after that transmission
is finished.
• Other operations can be performed after a timer transmission is set up.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
• If a timer transmission is given priority in the job status screen, the time specification is cancelled. The transmission will
begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.
☞ GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX JOB (page 4-135)
To cancel timer transmission...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

4-80

Contents

FACSIMILE

SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
(2in1)
Two original pages can be reduced and sent as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large
number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent.
Portrait-oriented originals
Transmission

1

1

2

Landscape-oriented originals

2

Transmission
1

1

2

2

Place the original.
When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.

Originals

Document feeder tray

Document glass

Place the originals face up.

Place the originals face down.

Portrait orientation

1

1

1

1

2

Landscape orientation

1

2

2

1

1

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

4-81

Contents

FACSIMILE

(3)

(2)

OK

Fax/Special Modes

Select 2in1.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

3

1
Timer

Scan

File

Internet Fax

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

(2) Touch the [2in1] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Quick File

Fax
Scan:

Original

2

Slow Scan
Mode

Mixed Size
Original

Original
Count

Address Book

Card Shot

2in1

Job
Build

4

Dual Page
Scan

Erase

Program

USB Mem. Scan
A4

Auto

PC Scan

Send:

Touch the [Original] key.

Auto

File
Quick File
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

(1)

(2)
OK

Fax/Original

Scan Size
Auto

100% Send Size
Auto

A4

Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
key.

5

If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
transmitted.
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

2-Sided
Tablet

Press the [START] key.

6

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
The [Configure] key can be touched in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan
size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be
changed.)
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

4-82

Contents

FACSIMILE

• Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
• The 2in1 function cannot be used when the original is other than A4 (8-1/2" x 11") or B5 or A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size.
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.
To cancel 2in1...
Touch the [2in1] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

4-83

(

Contents

)

FACSIMILE

SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot)
This function lets you send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side
separately.
Transmitted image
Originals
Front

Transmission

Back

Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
size portrait scan transmission

Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
size landscape scan transmission

When using card shot, the original must be scanned on the document glass.

Place the original face down on the
document glass.

1

2

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)
Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Card Shot] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

4-84

Contents

FACSIMILE

(1)

(B)

(A)

(2)
OK

Fax/Special Modes
Card Shot

(25-210)
mm

Y

(25-210)
mm

(1) Enter the original size.
• Touch the [X] key and enter the horizontal dimension
(X) of the original with the
keys.
• Touch the [Y] key and enter the vertical dimension (Y)
of the original with the
keys.
(A) To return the original size to the default size, touch
the [Size Reset] key.
(B) To automatically enlarge or reduce the image size to
the send size, touch the [Fit to Send Size] key. Do not
touch this key if you wish to scan the original at the
original size that you entered.

OK

Cancel

X

Specify the original size.

Fit to
Send Size

Size Reset

4

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Y

X

• You can also touch the

keys to change the number.

• The send size is automatically selected based on the original size you entered.
• After selecting Card Shot, you can touch the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the
send size. In this case, the screen of step 3 appears when you touch the scan size key. For the procedure for
setting the send size, see "Specifying the send size of the original" (page 4-54).

Press the [START] key to scan the front of the card.

5

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

Turn the card over so that the back is face down, and press the [START] key to
scan the back of the card.

6

Before scanning the back of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key in the touch panel to change the exposure.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

4-85

Contents

FACSIMILE

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

7

Configure

Read-End

If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key to change the exposure,
resolution, scan size, and send size.

• The ratio cannot be specified and "Rotation Sending Setting" cannot be selected.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
To cancel Card Shot...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

4-86

Contents

FACSIMILE

SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES
(Job Build)
This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic
document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. Use this function when there are more original pages
than can be placed at once in the auto document feeder.
When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you
select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.
Originals

Originals are
scanned in
separate sets.

1

Transmission

1

1

101

Up to 999 pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.

2

Indicator
line

Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

1

1

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)
(2)

(3)
OK

Fax/Special Modes

Select job build mode.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Program

3

Erase

Dual Page
Scan
1

Timer

Job
Build
Original
Count

2in1

Mixed Size
Original

File

Card Shot

Slow Scan
Mode

2

(2) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Quick File

4-87

Contents

FACSIMILE

Press the [START] key to scan the first set.

4

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

Insert the next set of originals and press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.

5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

). All scanned data will be cleared.

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

Configure

Read-End

6
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when Job Build is used in combination with 2in1 in the special modes, only the exposure
can be changed when scanning each even-numbered page of the original pages.

• If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be cancelled.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
To cancel Job Build....
Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.

4-88

Contents

FACSIMILE

TRANSMITTING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original)
This feature lets you scan and transmit originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size
originals mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically
detects the size of each original.

B4

B4
A3

A3

This feature can only be used with the following combinations of original sizes:
• A3 and B4
• A3 and B5
• B4 and A4
• A4 and B5
• A4R and B5
• B4 and A4R
• B4 and A5
• B5 and A5
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14"
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13"
• 11" x 17" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

1

Place the originals with
the corners aligned
together in the far left
corner.
B4
(8-1/2" x 14")

B4
(8-1/2" x 14")

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far
left corner of the document feeder tray.

A3 (11" x 17")

2

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)
(3)

(2)

OK

Fax/Special Modes

Select the mixed size original setting.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
Program

Erase

Dual Page
Scan
1

Timer

3

Job
Build
Original
Count

2in1

Mixed Size
Original

File

Card Shot

Slow Scan
Mode

2

(2) Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key so that
it is highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Quick File

If an original scan size has been specified, a message will appear when the [Mixed Size Original] key is touched. To
enable the Mixed Size Original setting, change the scan size setting to auto and then touch the [Mixed Size Original]
key again.

4-89

Contents

FACSIMILE

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

• Once mixed size originals has been selected, an original scan size cannot be specified.
• When the mixed size original setting is selected, rotation sending does not operate.
To cancel the mixed size original setting...
Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.

4-90

Contents

FACSIMILE

FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.

A

A

B
C
D

B

C

D

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
1

Adjust the document guides slowly.

1
If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.

2

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)
(2)

OK

Fax/Special Modes

Program

3

(3)

Erase

Job
Build
Original
Count

2in1

Mixed Size
Original

File

Card Shot
Slow Scan
Mode

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

Dual Page
Scan
1

Timer

Select slow scan mode.

2

(2) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Quick File

4-91

Contents

FACSIMILE

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

When this function is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.
To cancel slow scan mode...
Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
This is used to have scanning always take place using slow scan mode.

4-92

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count)
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before transmission. Checking the number of
scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.

2

Indicator
line

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)
(3)

(2)

OK

Fax/Special Modes

Program

3

Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

1

1

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.

1
Timer

Job
Build
Original
Count

2in1

Card Shot
Slow Scan
Mode

Mixed Size
Original

File

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

Dual Page
Scan

Erase

Select the original count function.

2

(2) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Quick File

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.

4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.

4-93

Contents

FACSIMILE

(A)

(B)

XX pages of original have been scanned.
Send the scanned data?

Cancel

5

(P.x)

OK

When scanning ends, check the number
of original sheets scanned and touch the
[OK] key.
Transmission will begin.
• When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will
appear after the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The message on the screen shows the number of sheets
scanned in (A), and the number of pages (sheet sides)
scanned in (B). For example, if both sides of one original
sheet are scanned, "1" will appear in (A) and "2" will appear
in (B).

If this step is not performed for one minute while the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and
settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the
image will not be reserved for transmission.
If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets...
Touch the [Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings
and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert the original sheets in the automatic document feeder again and
press the [START] key to re-scan.

When original count is enabled for a broadcast transmission that includes destinations of different modes, original count will
operate in all modes.
To cancel the Original Sheet Count function...
Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Original Count Setting
This can be enabled to have the number of original sheets always counted. The setting can be enabled separately for each
mode.

4-94

Contents

FACSIMILE

STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif. Stamp)
This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all
originals were correctly scanned.
Position of stamp

Originals
are
scanned

1
Originals

1

An "O" mark is
stamped
in fluorescent
pink.

To use this function, the optional stamp unit must be installed.

1

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.

1

2

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)
(3)

(2)

Fax/Special Modes

Verif.
Stamp

3

(4)
OK

Sending
Line

Memory Box

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

Transaction
Report
2

Own Name
Select

Select "Verif. Stamp".

Polling

2

(2) Touch the
screens.

keys to switch through the

(3) Touch the [Verif. Stamp] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.

4-95

Contents

FACSIMILE

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

4
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

• When two-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice.
• If an error occurs during scanning, an original that was not scanned may be stamped.
• When the "O" mark that is stamped on originals starts to become faint, replace the stamp cartridge. For the procedure for
replacing the stamp cartridge, see "REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE" (page 1-75) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
To cancel the stamp function...
Touch the [Verif. Stamp] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Verification Stamp
This setting is used to always have originals stamped.

4-96

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT
(Transaction Report)
A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when a transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission
is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of other party,
time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
☞ INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN (page 4-137)
Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the system settings; however, you can temporarily select
different conditions for a transmission. To change the transaction report print conditions at the time of transmission,
follow the steps below.

1
2

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

3

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Transaction Report] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(1)

(2)
OK

Fax/Special Modes
Cancel

Transaction Report

Always Print

Print at Error

OK

Select print conditions.
(1) Select the print conditions.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Do not Print

Print Original Image

4
• The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows:
"Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails.
"Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails.
"Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report.
• When the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected
, part of the transmitted original is included on the
transaction report.
• Even if the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected
, the original cannot be printed when speaker dialling,
direct transmission, polling reception, or F-code transmission is used.

4-97

Contents

FACSIMILE

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.
To cancel the transaction report setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
• System Settings (Administrator): Transaction Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing transaction reports.
The factory default setting is
.
Single Sending: Print Out All Report/ Print Out Error Report Only /No Printed Report
Print Out All Report /Print Out Error Report Only/No Printed Report
Broadcasting:
Receiving:
Print Out All Report/Print Out Error Report Only/ No Printed Report
Confidential Reception (fax mode): Print Out Notice Page /No Printed Report
• System Settings (Administrator): Original Print on Transaction Report
The first page of a transmitted fax can be printed on the transmission report.

4-98

Contents

FACSIMILE

ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO
FAXES (Own number sending)
Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender fax number, number of pages) is automatically added to the
top of each fax page you transmit.
Example of the sender information printed

04/APR/2010/Sat 3:00 PM

(1)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

AAAAA FAX No. 0123456789 P.001/001

(2)

(3)

(4)

Date, time:
The date and time of transmission.
Sender name:
The sender name programmed in the machine.
Sender fax number: The sender fax number programmed in the machine.
Page numbers:
Page number / total pages (the total page number is only printed
when the fax is sent by memory transmission.)

Information programmed in Own Number Sending
Date, time:
Adjust the setting in "Clock Adjust" in the system settings.
Sender name, sender fax number: Program the sender name and fax number in "Sender Data Registration" in the system
settings (administrator). If you intend to use own number sending, be sure to configure
this information.
Page numbers:
Select whether or not to include page numbers in "Printing Page Number at Receiver" in
the system settings (administrator).
Page numbers appear in the format "page number / total pages". Only the page number
is printed when manual transmission or quick online transmission is used.
System Settings (Administrator): Date/Own Number Print Position Setting
This is used to set the position where the sender information is printed. The sender information can be printed outside the
scanned original image or inside the scanned original image.

Outside scanned image (factory default setting)

Inside scanned image

Sender
information

Sender
information

Originals

Originals

The transmitted image length will be: length of sender
information + length of original image. When the fax is
printed by the receiving machine, it may be reduced or
divided onto two pages.

4-99

The sender information is printed inside the original
image, and thus the transmitted image length is the
length of the original. Note that the sender information
will overlap part of the original image (the overlapped
part of the original image will not appear).

Contents

FACSIMILE

TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER
INFORMATION (Own Name Select)
You can select the sender information printed on a transmitted fax from a list of stored senders.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

1

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Own Name Select] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(1)
Cancel

Own Name Select

Select the sender information.

(2)

(1) Touch the desired sender information key.

OK

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

2

AAAAA

BBBBB

CCCCC

DDDDD

EEEEE

FFFFF

GGGGG

HHHHH

IIIII

JJJJJ

KKKKK

LLLLL

1
2

Fax/Special Modes

Verif.
Stamp

OK

Touch the [OK] key.

Transaction
Report
2

3

Own Name
Select

Memory Box

Polling

2

Sending
Line

System Settings (Administrator): Registration of Own Name Select
This is used to store sender information for Own Name Select.

4-100

Contents

FACSIMILE

CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING
RECEPTION (Polling)
The Polling function allows the receiving machine to call the transmitting machine and initiate reception of a document in
that machine.
Because the receiving machine initiates reception of a document, this is called "Polling Reception".

(1) Requests fax transmission.

Transmission
(3) The fax is received.

(2) The previously prepared
document is transmitted.

Make sure that an original is not placed in the machine when using the polling reception function.

(3)
Fax/Special Modes

Verif.
Stamp

1

(2)

(4)
OK

Transaction
Report
2

Own Name
Select

Memory Box

Polling

2

Sending
Line

Select polling reception.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(2) Touch the
screens.

keys to switch through the

(3) Touch the [Polling] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.

Enter the destination fax number.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-17)

2

• Multiple fax numbers can be entered.
Polling will take place in the order that the numbers were entered.
Polling multiple machines is called "Serial Polling".
Up to 500 fax numbers can be entered. In this procedure, one-touch keys that have a sub-address and passcode
cannot be used.
• To enter multiple fax numbers, touch the [Next Address] key after entering a fax number and enter the next fax
number.

4-101

Contents

FACSIMILE

3

Press the [START] key.
Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.

• Polling reception can be used in combination with the timer function to poll at any specified time, such as at night or when
you are not present (Only one timer polling reception can be set.).
• This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
• The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the polling reception.
To cancel polling reception...
Touch the [Polling] key in the screen of step 1 so that it is not highlighted.

4-102

Contents

FACSIMILE

INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLY
Use this procedure when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax
information service.
• Make sure that an original is not placed in the machine when using the polling reception function.
• This function cannot be used to poll multiple machines (serial polling).

(3)
Telephone mode.
5

10

To

You will hear the dial tone through the machine's speaker.

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

(2) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.

1
2

Speaker Volume

1

(1) Touch the [Speaker] key.

Resend

Speaker

15

Condition
Settings

Enter the destination fax number.

(1)

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

(3) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
A group key cannot be used.

Sort Address

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Fax Manual
Reception

Fax Memory:100%

• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-17).
• After touching the [Speaker] key, you can touch the [Speaker Volume] key to adjust the volume of the speaker. The
speaker volume changes each time the [Speaker Volume] key is touched. Adjust the volume to the desired level.

(3)

OK

Fax/Special Modes

Verif.
Stamp

2

Receive the fax.

(2)

Transaction
Report
2

Own Name
Select
Sending
Line

Memory Box

Polling

2

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(2) Touch the
screens.

keys to switch through the

(3) When you hear the fax tone, touch the
[Polling] key.
The fax is received.

• This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
• The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the polling reception.

4-103

Contents

FACSIMILE

SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER
MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE
(Polling Memory)
Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called "Polling
Memory".
Prior to polling, the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box.
This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
(1) Requests fax transmission.

Polling
memory box

Transmission
(2) The document in the memory box is
transmitted.

(3) The fax is received.

RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS (Polling security)
To only allow specified machines to poll your machine, you can restrict polling to machines whose programmed sender
fax number matches a fax number stored in your machine as a polling passcode number. This is called "Polling
Security".
To use this function, first store polling passcode numbers (the sender fax numbers programmed in the other machines)
in the machine's system settings, and then enable polling security.
Up to 10 fax numbers can be stored as polling passcode numbers.
System Settings (Administrator): Fax Polling Security
This is used to enable polling security. This is used to store fax numbers as polling passcode numbers.

4-104

Contents

FACSIMILE

SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY
Follow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission (Public Box).

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

Confidential
Reception

Polling Memory

3

Data Store

Touch the [Data Store] key.

Exit

Memory Box

Data Check

Delete Data

Data Check

Back

Memory Box - Data Store

Touch the [Public Box] key.

Public Box

4

Box 1

Box 2

Box 3

Box 4

Box 5

Box 6

Box 7

Box 8

Box 9

Box 10

Box 11

Box 12

2

(1)

(2)
OK

Memory Box - Data Store

5

1

Specify the number of polling times.
(1) Touch the key for the desired number of
times.
Touch the [Once] key if you want the document cleared
from memory after it is transmitted. Touch the [Unlimited]
key to allow polling an unlimited number of times.

Once

Unlimited

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

4-105

Contents

FACSIMILE

Memory Box - Data Store
Memory Box
List

Original

Scan:

Exposure

Auto

Resolution

Standard

Auto

A4

Send:

Auto

Select image settings and special
modes.

Special Modes

6
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• A program, timer setting, transaction report, polling, verif. stamp and filing cannot be selected.
• To return to the screen of step 4, touch the [Memory Box List] key.

Press the [START] key.

7

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) while the original is being scanned.

If another document remains in the memory box (Public Box), the newly scanned document is added to the previous
document. In this case, the number of polling times will be the number set for the newly scanned document.

4-106

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE PUBLIC BOX
You can check the document stored in the machine's public box for memory polling.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

1

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

Confidential
Reception

Polling Memory

2

Data Store

Touch the [Data Check] key.

Exit

Memory Box

Data Check

Data Check

Delete Data

Back

Memory Box - Data Check

Touch the [Public Box] key.

Public Box
Box 1

Box 2

Box 3

Box 4

Box 5

Box 6

Box 7

Box 8

Box 9

Box 10

Box 11

Box 12

1
2

3

When nothing is stored in the Public Box, the [Public Box] key will be greyed out.

Touch the [Image Check] key.
Press [Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.

4
Cancel

Print

Image Check

The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-65).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.

4-107

Contents

FACSIMILE

DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOX
Delete a document from the Public Box when it is no longer needed.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

1

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

Confidential
Reception

Polling Memory

2

Data Store

Touch the [Delete Data] key.

Exit

Memory Box

Data Check

Data Check

Delete Data

Back

Memory Box - Delete Data

Touch the [Public Box] key.

Public Box
Box 1

Box 2

Box 3

Box 4

Box 5

Box 6

Box 7

Box 8

Box 9

Box 10

Box 11

Box 12

1
2

3

When nothing is stored in the Public Box, the [Public Box] key will be greyed out.

Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the data in the memory box?
Press [Image Check] to check data.

4

Image Check

No

Yes

• The document is deleted and you return to the screen of step 3.
• You can touch the [Image Check] key to check the image in
the touch panel before deleting it. For information on the
image check screen, see "IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page
4-65).

To cancel the deletion...
Touch the [No] key. You will return to the screen of step 3.

4-108

Contents

FACSIMILE

PERFORMING F-CODE
COMMUNICATION
This section explains how to perform F-code communication operations. F-code communication is possible with
machines of other manufacturers that also support F-code communication.

F-CODE COMMUNICATION
Exchange of confidential documents (confidential communication), retrieval (polling) and distribution (polling memory) of
information, distribution of information to multiple destinations (relay broadcast transmission) are possible with other
machines that support F-code communication.
An F-code* is specified in each communication, enabling a higher level of security.
* F-code is a communication function based on the G3 standard of the ITU-T.
The ITU-T is a United Nations organization that establishes communications standards. It is a department of the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU), which coordinates global telecommunications networks and services.

HOW F-CODES WORK
A fax that is transmitted with an F-code is received to the memory box in the receiving machine specified by the F-code
(sub-address and passcode). If the F-code sent by the transmitting machine does not match the F-code in the receiving
machine, reception will not take place.
The fax is received to
the memory box
specified by the
F-code

Memory box for F-code
communication

Box name:
Sub-address:
Passcode:

BBBB
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX

Fax number of other
machine
+
F-code
Sub-address:
Passcode:

AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX

The products of other manufacturers may use different terms for "sub-address" and "passcode". If you need to contact the
operator of another machine regarding sub-addresses and passcodes, refer to the terms used by the ITU-T in the table below.
The machine

ITU-T
F-code polling memory box

F-code confidential box

F-code relay broadcast
memory box

Sub Address

SEP

SUB

SUB

Passcode

PWD

SID

SID

An F-code consists of a sub-address and passcode, and cannot be longer than 20 digits.

4-109

Contents

FACSIMILE

CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR
F-CODE COMMUNICATION
Before the F-code communication function can be used, special memory boxes must be created using "F-Code Memory
Box" in the system settings.
A box name and F-code (sub-address and passcode) are programmed in each box, and an F-code communication
function is assigned to each box.
After you have created a memory box, inform the other party of the sub-address and passcode of the box.
Memory box for F-code
communication

• Box Name
• Sub Address
• Passcode
• End receiving machines (only in an
F-code relay broadcast memory box)
• Print PIN (only for F-code confidential
reception)

To use the following F-code communication functions, F-code memory boxes must be created in your machine.
F-code confidential reception, F-code polling memory, F-code relay broadcast transmission
To use the following F-code communication functions, F-code memory boxes must be created in the other machine.
F-code confidential transmission, F-code polling reception, F-code relay request transmission
System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-105)
This is used to configure memory boxes for F-code communication.
• Up to 100 memory boxes can be created.
• The memory box name cannot be longer than 18 characters, and the sub-address and passcode cannot be longer than 20
digits.

F-CODE DIALLING
When performing an F-code operation, the F-code (sub-address and passcode) is appended to the fax number that is
dialled. Check the F-code (sub-address and passcode) programmed in the memory box in the other machine before you
perform an F-code transmission. It is convenient to store an F-code together with the fax number in a one-touch key or
group key.

0123456789
Fax number of other
machine

/
*

AAAAAAAA
Sub Address

/
*

XXXXXXXX
Passcode

* Touch the [Sub Address]
key in the screen to enter
"/".

When the following F-code functions are used, your machine dials the other machine.
F-code confidential transmission, F-code polling reception, F-code relay request transmission
When the following F-code functions are used, the other machine dials your machine.
F-code confidential reception, F-code polling memory, F-code relay broadcast transmission
• If the destination machine does not have a passcode configured in the F-code, do not enter a passcode when dialling that
machine.
• F-code communication cannot be performed when using the speaker or performing manual transmission.
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store and edit one-touch keys and group keys.

4-110

Contents

FACSIMILE

CONFIDENTIAL COMMUNICATION USING
F-CODES
By sending a fax to an F-code memory box (confidential) in the receiving machine (your machine or the other machine),
the sender can direct the transmission specifically to the user of the box.
This is convenient for sending sensitive documents that you do not wish people other than the recipient to see, or when
the receiving machine is shared by multiple departments.
To print an F-code confidential fax, the print passcode must be entered.
Sender

Receiver

Sub-address:
Passcode:

AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX

Transmission with an
F-code
Reception in F-code Memory Box
Sub-address:
Passcode:

AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
Print passcode: Enter BBBB

The fax is printed.

The F-code (sub-address and passcode) of the memory box to be used should be verified by the sender and the recipient
before the fax is sent.
System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-105)
This is used to create memory boxes for F-code confidential communication (confidential reception).
A memory box name, sub-address, passcode, and print passcode are programmed in each box.

4-111

Contents

FACSIMILE

F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
Follow the steps below to send a confidential fax by adding an F-code to the fax number.

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Enter the destination fax number.

(2)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

Freq.

Address Review

1
2

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

2

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.

Cc

To

(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
the fax number with the numeric keys.

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.

(3), (5)

(3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric
keys.
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.
If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.

Press the [START] key.

3

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

This function can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. This function can also be
stored in a program.

4-112

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F-CODE
CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION
When an F-code confidential fax is sent to your machine, the fax is received to the memory box specified by the F-code.
To check received faxes, enter the print passcode.

The machine rings and the fax is
received.

Beep

A beep sounds when reception ends.

1

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

Confidential
Reception

Polling Memory

3

Data Store

Data Check

Delete Data

Memory Box - Confidential Reception

4

Touch the [Data Check] key.

Exit

Memory Box

Data Check

Back

Box 1

Box 2

Box 3

Box 4

Box 5

Box 6

1
1

Touch the key of the memory box
containing the confidential fax.
" " appears in the keys of memory boxes that have received
faxes. The keys of memory boxes that have not received faxes
are greyed out and cannot be selected.

4-113

Contents

FACSIMILE

Enter the print passcode with the
numeric keys.

Enter PIN via the 10-key.

As each digit is entered, "–" changes to " ".

5

Cancel

Take care to enter the correct print passcode. If you make a mistake, a message will appear and you will return to the
entry screen. You can touch the [Cancel] key to return to step 4.

Touch the [Image Check] key.
Press [Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.

6
Cancel

Print

Image Check

The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-65).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.

• The confidential fax is automatically given priority in the print job queue.
• The fax is automatically cleared from the memory box after printing.
• If you forget the print passcode...
There is no way to check a forgotten passcode on the machine. Take care not to forget the passcode. In the event that you
forget the passcode or need to verify the passcode, contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
System Settings (Administrator): Transaction Report Print Select Setting
You can specify whether or not a transmission report is printed when an F-code confidential fax is received.

4-114

Contents

FACSIMILE

POLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODES
This function enables your machine to call another machine and initiate reception of a fax stored in an F-code memory
box (polling memory) in the other machine. During the polling operation, your machine must correctly specify the F-code
(sub-address and passcode) configured in the other machine or polling reception will not take place.
Transmission request (polling)
using an F-code

The machine

Sub-address:
Passcode:

AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
The other machine
F-code polling memory box

Transmission
Box name:
Sub-address:
Passcode:

BBBB
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX

• Verify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) of the memory box in the other machine before you perform F-code polling
reception.
• Do not place an original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass when using this function.
• The receiving machine bears the phone charges of the transmission.

(3)
Fax/Special Modes

Verif.
Stamp

1

(2)

(4)
OK

Transaction
Report
2

Own Name
Select
Sending
Line

Memory Box

Polling

2

Select polling.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)
(2) Touch the
screens.

keys to switch through the

(3) Touch the [Polling] key so that it is
highlight.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.

4-115

Contents

FACSIMILE

Enter the destination fax number.

(2)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

Freq.

Address Review

1
2

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
the fax number with the numeric keys.

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

2

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.

Cc

To

(3), (5)

(3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric
keys.
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.
If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.

3

Press the [START] key.
Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.

• Polling multiple machines (serial polling) is not possible.
• F-code polling reception can be used in combination with a timer setting. Only one polling reception operation with a timer
setting can be stored at a time.
☞ SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer) (page 4-79)
To cancel polling...
Touch the [Polling] key in the screen of step 1 so that it is not highlighted.

4-116

Contents

FACSIMILE

POLLING MEMORY TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES
When your machine receives a transmission request from another machine, this function sends a fax stored in an
F-code memory box (polling memory) in your machine to that machine. The other machine must correctly specify the
F-code configured in your machine or transmission will not take place.
The document to be transmitted must be scanned into an F-code polling memory box.
Transmission request (polling)
using an F-code
The other
machine

Sub-address:
Passcode:

AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX

The machine
F-code polling memory box

Box name:
Sub-address:
Passcode:

BBBB
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX

Transmission

System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-105)
This is used to create memory boxes (polling memory) for F-code polling memory transmission.
A memory box name, sub-address, and passcode are programmed in each box.

SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A MEMORY BOX FOR
F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION
Follow these steps to scan a document into a memory box (polling memory) for F-code polling transmission.

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

2

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

4-117

Contents

FACSIMILE

Confidential
Reception

Polling Memory

3

Data Store

Touch the [Data Store] key.

Exit

Memory Box

Data Check

Data Check

Delete Data

Back

Memory Box - Data Store
Public Box

4

Box 1

Box 2

Box 3

Box 4

Box 5

Box 6

Touch the key of the F-code memory
polling box.

1
2

Box 7

Box 8

Box 9

Box 10

Box 11

Box 12

(1)

(2)
OK

Memory Box - Data Store

5

Specify the number of polling times.
(1) Touch the key for the desired number of
times.
Touch the [Once] key if you want the document cleared
from memory after it is transmitted. Touch the [Unlimited]
key to allow polling an unlimited number of times.

Once

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Unlimited

Memory Box - Data Store
Memory Box
List

Original

Scan:

Exposure

Auto

Resolution

Standard

Auto

A4

Send:

Auto

Select image settings and special
modes.

Special Modes

6
Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• A program, timer setting, transaction report, polling, verif. stamp and filing cannot be selected.
• To return to the screen of step 4, touch the [Memory Box List] key.

4-118

Contents

FACSIMILE

Press the [START] key.

7

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) while the original is being scanned.

• If other documents have already been stored in the memory box, the document is added to the previously stored
documents.
• The factory default setting for the number of polling times is "Once" (after the document is transmitted to the receiving
machine, it is automatically cleared).

4-119

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F-CODE MEMORY
POLLING BOX
You can check the document stored in the F-code memory polling box.
A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

1

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

Confidential
Reception

Polling Memory

2

Data Store

Touch the [Data Check] key.

Exit

Memory Box

Data Check

Data Check

Delete Data

Back

Memory Box - Data Check
Public Box

3

Box 1

Box 2

Box 3

Box 4

Box 5

Box 6

Box 7

Box 8

Box 9

Box 10

Box 11

Box 12

Touch the key of the F-code memory
polling box where the document you
wish to print is stored.

1
2

appears in keys that have documents stored.

Touch the [Image Check] key.
Press [Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.

4
Cancel

Print

Image Check

The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-65).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.

4-120

Contents

FACSIMILE

DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE
POLLING TRANSMISSION
When a document in an F-code memory polling box is no longer needed, follow the steps below to delete it.
A document in a memory box cannot be deleted while the document is being transmitted.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

1

(2) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 4-71)

Confidential
Reception

Polling Memory

2

Data Store

Touch the [Delete Data] key.

Exit

Memory Box

Data Check

Data Check

Delete Data

Back

Memory Box - Delete Data
Public Box

3

Box 1

Box 2

Box 3

Box 4

Box 5

Box 6

Box 7

Box 8

Box 9

Box 10

Box 11

Box 12

1
2

Touch the key of the F-code memory
polling box that has the document you
wish to delete.
appears in keys that have documents stored.

Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the data in the memory box?
Press [Image Check] to check data.

4

Image Check

No

Yes

• The document is deleted and you return to the screen of step 3.
• Printing will begin.
You can touch the [Image Check] key to check the image in
the touch panel before deleting it. For information on the
image check screen, see "IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page
4-65).

To cancel the deletion...
Touch the [No] key. You will return to the screen of step 3 without deleting the document.

4-121

Contents

FACSIMILE

RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES
This function is used to send a fax to an F-code relay broadcast memory box in another machine and have that machine
relay the fax to multiple end receiving machines.
When the end receiving machines are far from your machine, sending the fax to a relay machine that is close to the end
receiving machines can help reduce phone charges. A relay request transmission can be used in combination with the
timer transmission function to further reduce phone costs.

☞ SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer) (page 4-79)

Relay machine
F-code relay broadcast
memory box

The machine

The fax is transmitted to
each of the end receiving
machines programmed in
the F-code relay
broadcast memory box.

End receiving
machines

Transmission

Transmission specifying an F-code
Sub-address:
Passcode:

AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX

Box name:
Sub-address:
Passcode:

BBBB
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX

End receiving machines are
programmed in this box

• Verify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) and end receiving machines programmed in the relay broadcast memory
box in the relay machine before you perform an F-code relay request transmission.
• Before this function can be used, the end receiving machines must be programmed in the F-code relay broadcast memory
box in the relay machine.
• The end receiving machines do not need to support F-code communication.
• This function can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. An F-code relay request
transmission can also be stored in a program.
• Your machine (the machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission) only bears the cost of sending the fax to the
relay machine. The relay machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the end receiving machines.
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)
System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-105)
This is used to create memory boxes for F-code relay broadcast transmission.
A memory box name, sub-address, passcode, and end receiving machines are programmed in each box.

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

4-122

Contents

FACSIMILE

Enter the destination fax number.

(2)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

Sub Address

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

Freq.

Address Review

1
2

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

2

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.

Cc

To

(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
the fax number with the numeric keys.

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.

(3), (5)

(3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric
keys.
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
"/" appears.

(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.
If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.

Press the [START] key.

3

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
When the relay machine receives the fax, it will automatically transmit the fax to each of the end receiving machines
programmed in the memory box.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) while the original is being scanned.

4-123

Contents

FACSIMILE

RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
USING F-CODES
When your machine receives an F-code relay request transmission, the fax is received to an F-code relay broadcast
memory box in your machine. Your machine then relays the fax to each of the end receiving machines programmed in
the memory box. Transmission to the end receiving machines takes place automatically.

The machine
F-code relay broadcast
memory box

The other
machine

The fax is transmitted to
each of the end receiving
machines programmed in
the F-code relay
broadcast memory box.

End receiving
machines

Transmission

Transmission specifying an F-code
Sub-address:
Passcode:

AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX

Box name:
Sub-address:
Passcode:

BBBB
AAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX

End receiving machines are
programmed in this box

• Prior to the operation, inform the requesting party of the sub-address and passcode of the relay broadcast memory box in
your machine.
• Program the end receiving machines in the F-code relay broadcast memory box when you create the box in your machine.
☞ CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR F-CODE COMMUNICATION (page 4-110)
• The end receiving machines do not need to support F-code communication.
• The machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission only bears the cost of sending the fax to your machine (the relay
machine). Your machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the end receiving machines.
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)

4-124

Contents

FACSIMILE

USING AN EXTENSION PHONE
This section explains how to use an extension phone to make voice calls and receive a fax after talking with the other
party.

CONNECTING AND USING AN EXISTING
PHONE (Extension Phone Connection)
You can connect an existing extension phone to the machine.
The phone can be used for voice calls and to start fax reception on the machine.
As an example, you can make a phone call using the existing phone, speak to the other party, and then press the
[START] key to fax an original that has been placed to that party. You can also press the [START] key when an original
is not placed to receive a fax.
Connect the extension phone as shown below.
Extension phone socket
Existing extension
phone (example)
Core
Click!

Click!
Attach the provided core to
your extension telephone cord
and then connect the cord to
the machine.

Make sure you hear a "click"
sound indicating that the
cord is securely connected.

• Connect an extension phone that has a modular socket. Use standard phone line cable to connect the phone. If other than
a standard phone line cable is used, the connection may not work correctly.
• If the plug on the telephone line cord does not fit into the socket on your extension phone, contact your dealer or nearest
authorised service representative.

4-125

Contents

FACSIMILE

RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON
THE EXTENSION PHONE (Remote Reception)
Follow the steps below if you need to start fax reception after answering a call and speaking on the extension phone.
If you are on a pulse-dial (rotary) line, set the extension phone to issue tone signals.

When you hear ringing, answer the call
on the extension phone.

1

Signal the machine to start fax
reception.

2

Press

on the keypad of the extension phone.

Replace the extension phone.
The machine sounds a beep when reception ends.

3

If the extension phone is still lifted when fax transmission ends, an alarm signal will sound and a message will appear in the
touch panel. The alarm and message will stop when the extension phone is replaced.
• System Settings: Receive Setting (page 7-107)
To use remote fax reception, set this setting to "Manual Reception".
• System Settings (Administrator): Remote Reception Number Setting
This is used to change the number used for remote fax reception. The factory default setting is "5".

MAKING AND RECEIVING PHONE CALLS
You can make and receive calls like normal on your extension phone. A phone call can also be made by dialling on the
machine.

4-126

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX
JOBS
This section explains how to check the status of reserved transmission jobs and received faxes.

JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Reserved transmissions and received faxes are referred to as jobs here.
Example: Pressing the key in fax mode
Print Job

JOB STATUS

Scan to

Fax Job
Pages

Internet Fax

Address

Set Time

Status

Broadcast0001

10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting

0123456789

10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting

AAA AAA

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

BBB BBB

10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Broadcast

10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Job Queue
1

Complete

1

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

The job status display is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the job
status screen.
Scan
Address Book

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Direct TX

Exposure

Auto

Sub Address

Resolution

Standard

Address Review

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

File
Quick File
Preview

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Sending

4-127

Contents

FACSIMILE

JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of two screens: the job queue screen, which shows reserved jobs and the job currently in
progress, and the completed jobs screen. To switch between the two screens, touch the job status screen selector key
((2) below).
Job queue screen

Completed job screen

(1)
Print Job

Scan to

(1)
Internet Fax

Fax Job

Address

Set Time

Pages

Broadcast0001

10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting

0123456789

10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting

Print Job

Status

AAA AAA

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

BBB BBB

10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Broadcast

10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Job Queue
1

Complete

(2)

1

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

(6)

Mode select tabs

Broadcast0001

10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000

Broadcast0002

10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK

CCC CCC

10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK

0123456789

10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK

Job status screen selector key
(7)

[Priority] key
(8)

(2)

Detail

(7)

Call

(8)

Job queue screen

Completed jobs screen [Detail] key

[Call] key
Touch this key to retrieve and use a transmission or
reception job that was stored using the document filing
function.

[Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
☞ CANCELLING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A
RESERVED FAX (page 4-134)

Complete

1

This shows detailed information on the results of
completed broadcast transmission jobs, completed serial
polling jobs, and completed jobs that used the document
filing function. Select the key of the desired job in the
completed jobs screen (9) and then touch the [Detail]
key.
From the details screen, it is possible to resend the fax to
destinations to which transmission was not successful.
☞ CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 4-133)

Job queue screen [Detail] key

Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
☞ GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX JOB
(page 4-135)
(5)

Job Queue
1

Jobs are shown as keys in the order they were reserved.
Each key shows information on a job and its current
status.
☞ Job key display (page 4-129)

This shows detailed information on a broadcast
transmission or serial polling job that is reserved or in
progress. Select the key of the desired job in the job
queue screen (6) and then touch the [Detail] key.
☞ CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN
PROGRESS (page 4-132)
(4)

Status

(9)

Touch this key to switch between the job queue screen
and the completed jobs screen.
(3)

Pages

(3)
(4)
(5)

Use these tabs to select the job status screen of each
mode.
(2)

Internet Fax

Fax Job

Start Time

(6)
(1)

Scan to

Address

(9)

Completed jobs screen
This shows up to 99 completed transmission/reception
jobs. A description of each job and the result (status) are
shown.
Broadcast transmission jobs, serial polling jobs, received
fax forwarding jobs, and transmission/reception jobs that
used the document filing function are indicated as keys.

4-128

Contents

FACSIMILE

Job key display
The following information is shown in the job queue keys and completed job keys that appear in the job status screen.

3
(1)
(1)

AAA AAA
(2)

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

(3)

(4)

Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job
queue.
When the job currently being transmitted is finished, each
job moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.

(2)

(4)

(6)

Time reserved / Time started
In the job queue screen, the date and time the job was
reserved. In the completed jobs screen, the date and
time the job was started.

(5)

Number of pages
Shows the number of pages transmitted / total number of
original pages.

Mode icon
This indicates the type of job. In the completed jobs
screen, a colour bar indicating black & white will appear
next to the icon. (However, the colour bar icon does not
appear in the key of a job that used document filing or in
the key of a transmission/reception job that was
cancelled.)

(5)

(6)

Status
Shows the job status.
• Job in progress
Message

Status

"Connecting"

Connecting

"Sending"

Sending

"Receiving"

Receiving

Fax reception

"Tel"

Speaking with the other party using
an extension phone

Broadcast transmission, Serial polling
or Inbound routing

"Stopped"

The job has been stopped.

"Error"

An error occurred while the job was
being executed.

Icon

Job type
Fax transmission

PC-Fax transmission

• Job waiting to be executed
(3)

Name of other party
For a transmission, the name or fax number of the
destination. For a reception, the fax number of the
sending party.
In the case of a broadcast transmission or serial polling
operation, "Broadcast" or "Multi Polling" appears together
with a broadcast control number (4-digits).

4-129

Message

Status

"Waiting"

The job is waiting to be executed.

"Retry Mode"

The job is being re-attempted due
to a communication error or other
problem.

The day and
time are
displayed.

Timer transmission job (the
specified time is displayed)

Contents

FACSIMILE

• Completed job
Message

Status

"Send OK"

Transmission completed.

"In Memory"

Reception completed but the fax
has not been printed.

"Received"

Printed received fax data.

"Forward OK"

The received fax has been
forwarded.

"Stopped"

The job was stopped.

"Delete"

Deleted received data in the image
check screen.

"Number of
successful
transmission
destinations /
Total
destinations
OK"

Completion of a broadcast
transmission, serial polling or
inbound routing operation.
If transmission to 3 destinations
was successful out of a total of 5,
"003/005" will appear.

"No
response"

An error occurred because there
was no response from the
destination.

"Busy"

An error occurred because the
other party was busy.

"Reject
Reception"

A fax was sent from a party that
has been blocked by the anti junk
fax function.

"NGxxxxxx"

Transmission/reception was not
successful because a
communication error occurred (a
6-digit error code appears in
xxxxxx.)

"Error"

An error occurred while the job was
being executed.

4-130

Contents

FACSIMILE

OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB QUEUE IS
COMPLETED
When a normal transmission job is completed, it moves to the completed jobs screen and "Send OK" appears in the
status column.
Received faxes, timer transmission jobs, retry jobs, and forwarding jobs are handled in the job status screen as
explained below.

Fax reception jobs
While a fax is being received, "Receiving" appears in the job queue screen.
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears.
After the fax is printed, the status changes to "Printed".

Timer transmission jobs
A timer transmission job appears at the bottom of the job queue screen until the specified time arrives.
When the specified time arrives, the job is executed. If another job is in progress, the timer job is started when the other
job is completed.

Retry jobs
A retry job appears at the bottom of the job queue screen. When the set retry interval elapses, the job is executed. If
there are jobs reserved ahead of the retry job, the retry job is reserved at the bottom of the job queue and executed
when its turn arrives.

Fax reception jobs when Inbound Routing is enabled
When Inbound Routing is enabled in the Web pages, fax reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print
setting.
☞ FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 4-67)
• Received fax is not printed
"Receiving" appears in the job queue screen while the fax is being received. When reception is completed, the job
moves to the job queue of the job status screen of scan mode.
• Received fax is printed
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears. After the fax is
printed, "Printed" appears. The job being sent is added to the job status screen of scan mode. When forwarding is
finished, "Forward OK" appears.

4-131

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN
PROGRESS
The detailed contents of a broadcast transmission or serial polling job can be displayed. Select (touch) the key of the job
that you wish to check and touch the [Detail] key. The job details screen will appear (see below).

OK

Detail
Broadcast0001

Progress:

Fax No. :

0123456789

Name:

AAA AAA

Number:

050

Fax Connecting

Pages:

Fax Waiting

050/100

005/010

Failed

All Destinations

The job name and progress (number of completed destinations / total destinations) appear at the top of the screen.
Touch a tab to display the information that appears on that tab. The following information appears on each tab.
Tab name

Information displayed

Fax Connecting

Information on the current destination appears.
Fax No.: The fax number of the destination.
Name: The name of the destination.
Number: The broadcast control number (3-digits).
Pages: Number of pages completed / total number of pages

Fax Waiting

This shows information on the destinations that are waiting. A broadcast control
number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name of the other destination.
Status: The status of communication.

Failed

This shows information on destinations for which communication failed. A broadcast
control number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start Time: The time when communication began.
Status: The status of communication.

All Destinations

This shows all destinations specified in the job. A broadcast control number (3-digits)
appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of the destination.
Start time: The time at which communication began.
Status: The status of communication.

4-132

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS
You can check a list of the destinations, the destinations for which transmission failed, and other detailed information on
completed broadcast transmission jobs, received fax forwarding jobs, serial polling jobs, and jobs that used document
filing. Touch the key of the desired job in the completed jobs screen and touch the [Detail] key. The job detail screen
(see below) will appear.

OK

Detail
Broadcast0001
Address

Start Time

Status

002

DDD DDD

10:01 04/01

NG000000

010

EEE EEE

10:10 04/01

NG000000

File

Failed

Retry
1
1

All Destinations

The job name appears at the top of the job detail screen.
To view details on the job, touch one of the tabs. The following information appears on each tab.
Tab name

Information displayed

File

Information on a transmission/reception that used document filing.
To retrieve the file and use it, touch the [Call] key.

Failed

This shows information on destinations for which communication failed. A broadcast
control number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Description of failure (error)
The [Retry] key can be touched to re-attempt transmission to that destination.*

All Destinations

Shows all addresses specified in the job. A broadcast control number (3-digits)
appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Communication result
The [Retry] key can be touched to transmit to all destinations again.*

* Recalling is not possible for a broadcast transmission that includes a Scan to FTP address, Scan to Network Folder
address, or Scan to Desktop address.

4-133

Contents

FACSIMILE

CANCELLING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A
RESERVED FAX
Follow the steps below to cancel a fax transmission that is in progress or a reserved fax job.

1
Print Job

2

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

Scan to

Fax Job
Pages

Internet Fax

Address

Set Time

Status

1

Broadcast

10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting

2

0123456789

10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting

3

AAA AAA

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

4

BBB BBB

10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

5

Broadcast

10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Job Queue
1

Select the fax job that you wish to
cancel.
(1) Touch the key of the fax job to be cancelled.

Complete

1

(2) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

(1)

(2)

Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the job?
BBB BBB

3

10:30 04/01

No

Yes

If you do not wish to cancel the selected fax job...
Touch the [NO] key.

Printing of received faxes and forwarding jobs set using "Inbound Routing Settings" cannot be cancelled.
☞ FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 4-67)

4-134

Contents

FACSIMILE

GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX
JOB
When multiple jobs are waiting to be transmitted, the jobs are normally transmitted in the order they were reserved.
If you need to give priority to a job and send it ahead of the other jobs, follow the steps below.

1
Print Job

2

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

Scan to

Fax Job
Pages

Select the fax job to which you wish to
give priority.

Internet Fax

Address

Set Time

Status

Broadcast

10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting

0123456789

10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting

AAA AAA

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

BBB BBB

10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Broadcast

10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Job Queue
1

(1) Touch the key of the desired job.

Complete

1

(2) Touch the [Priority] key.
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

(1)

The selected job moves up to the position immediately
following the job in progress. The job will be executed
when the job in progress is completed.

(2)

If the job in progress is a broadcast transmission job or a serial polling job, the priority job will be transmitted between
destinations of the broadcast transmission or serial polling job. However, if the priority job is a broadcast transmission job or
a serial polling job, it will be executed after the current job is completed.

4-135

Contents

FACSIMILE

CHECKING THE ACTIVITY LOG
(Image Sending Activity Report)
IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT
You can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result,
etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred.
The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201,
or at a specified time (once a day only).

The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted.
System Settings (Administrator): Activity Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing activity reports. The factory default setting is not to print.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 201, or at a specified
time (once a day only).

4-136

Contents

FACSIMILE

INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN
Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction
report or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.
Examples of messages that are printed in the result column
Message

Explanation

OK

The transaction was completed normally.

G3

Communication took place in G3 mode.

ECM

Communication took place in G3 ECM mode.

SG3

Communication took place in Super G3 mode.

Forwarding

The received data was forwarded.

NO RESPONSE

No response from the receiving party.

BUSY

Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line.

CANCEL

The transmission was cancelled while in progress.

MEMORY OVER

The memory became full during quick on-line transmission.

MEM.FULL

The memory became full during reception.

LENGTH OVER

The transmitted fax was over 1.5 m (59") long and therefore could not be received.

ORIGINAL ERROR

Direct transmission or manual transmission was not successful because a misfeed occurred.

PASS# NG

The connection was broken because the polling passcode was not correct.

NO RX POLL

The machine that was polled does not have a polling function.

RX POLL FAIL

The other machine refused the polling operation, or your machine broke the connection when
polled because no data was in memory.

NO F-CODE POLL

The other machine refused an F-code polling operation, or your machine broke the connection
when polled because no data was in its F-code memory polling box.

RX POLL# NG

The connection was broken because the sub-address for F-code polling memory was not valid.

F POLL PASS# NG

The connection was broken because the passcode for F-code polling memory was not valid.

BOX NO. NG

Your machine broke the connection because the specified sub-address for an F-code memory
box does not exist.

F PASS# NG

Your machine broke the connection because the other machine sent an incorrect passcode for
F-code communication.

RX NO F-CODE POLL

F-code polling was attempted, however, the other machine did not have an F-code polling memory box.

NO F FUNC

F-code communication was attempted, however, the other machine does not support F-code
communication.

NO F-CODE

F-code communication was refused by the other machine because of an incorrect sub-address or
other reason.

M. BOX: [xxxxxx]

Data was received to a confidential or relay broadcast memory box, or data was sent from a
memory polling box.
The name of the memory box appears in [xxxxxx], and the type of F-code operation (relay request
reception, polling memory transmission, or confidential reception) appears in
.

FAIL xx (xxxx)

The transaction failed due to a communication error.
First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99.
Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians.

REJECTED

A fax was sent from a party from which reception is blocked.

4-137

Contents

FACSIMILE

FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS
Model

MX-FXX2

Applicable telephone line

Public switched telephone network, PBX

Scanning resolution
(supports ITU-T standards)

8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard), 8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Fine, Fine-Halftone), 8 x 15.4 lines/mm (Super
Fine, Super Fine - Halftone), 16 x 15.4 lines/mm (Ultra Fine, Ultra Fine - Halftone)

Transmission speed

33.6 kbps down to 2.4 kbps Automatic fallback

Compression method

MH / MR / MMR / JBIG

Transmission modes

Super G3, G3 (the machine can only send faxes to and receive faxes from machines that support
G3 or Super G3)

Input document size

AB sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 216 mm x 340 mm, 216 mm x 343 mm
Inch sizes: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
Long originals (max. width 11-45/64" (297 mm) x max. length 39-23/64" (1000 mm) can be
transmitted using the automatic document feeder. Scanning one side is possible.)

Paper sizes

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)

Transmission time *1

Approx. 2 seconds (Super G3 mode/33.6 kbps, JBIG)
Approx. 6 seconds (G3 ECM mode/14.4 kbps)

Power supply

Supplied from the machine

Dimensions

192 mm (W) x 52 mm (D) x 215 mm (H) (7-9/16" (W) x 2-3/64" (D) x 8-15/32" (H))

Weight

Approx. 1.0 kg (2.2 lbs.)

Remarks

Extension telephone connection

Possible (1 telephone)

Number of one-touch keys for storing
destinations*2

Maximum number of keys: 1000

Number of destinations that can be stored in a
group (1 key)*2

Maximum number of destinations in one group
(1 key): 500

Timer transmission

Yes

Program function

Yes (48 programs)

F-code transmission

Supported (SUB/SEP (sub-address) and
SID/PWD (passcode) signals can be
transmitted / received)

Image memory

8 MB standard

*1 Transmission speed is for an A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" document with approximately 700 characters at standard resolution
(8 x 3.85 lines/mm) sent in high speed mode (33.6 kbps (JBIG) or 14.4 kbps). This is only the time required to
transmit the image information; the time required to send protocol signals is not included. Actual transmission times
will vary depending on the contents of the document, the receiving machine type, and telephone line conditions.
*2 Total number of all destinations (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, Scan to Network folder, Internet
Fax, Fax and Group)

4-138

Contents

CHAPTER 5
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and the Internet fax function.
To use the network scanner function, the network scanner function must be available.
To use the Internet fax function, the internet fax function must be available.
USB memory mode can be used without installing a peripheral device.
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

NETWORK SCANNER

USING THE RESEND FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
PREPARATIONS FOR USE AS A NETWORK
SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH
IS IN THE "ON" POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . .
• STORING SENDER INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .
• SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB
PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES
FOR EACH SCAN MODE IN THE
ADDRESS BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN
TO DESKTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP
ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE

5-5

SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE . . . . . . . . . 5-28
• CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

5-5
5-5
5-5

SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• SPECIFY THE FOLDER IN WHICH THE
FILE WILL BE STORED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• ENTERING A FILE NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

5-6

5-6

SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE. . . . . 5-41
• CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
AND BODY TEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

5-7

SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission) . . . . 5-47
• BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONS THAT
INCLUDE INTERNET FAX
DESTINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

5-8

BASE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
• CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF
ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN THE ADDRESS
BOOK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-I-Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

SCAN SEND SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

IMAGE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH
SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided
Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE
AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHANGING THE COLOUR MODE . . . . . . . . .

ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
• TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . 5-17
• THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL . . . . . 5-17

ENTERING DESTINATIONS
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
• RETRIEVING A DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
• CHECKING AND DELETING THE
SELECTED DESTINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

5-53

5-54
5-55
5-61
5-63
5-64
5-68

CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
• PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY . . . . . . . . 5-22
• SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER . . . . . . . 5-23

5-1

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS

SPECIAL MODES

RECEIVING AN INTERNET FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
• MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET
FAXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113

SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) . . . . 5-73
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) . . . . . . . 5-114

SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan). . . . . . . . . 5-77

CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING . . 5-115
• IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116

SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET
FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS
(Inbound Routing Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
• CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117

WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE
IMAGE (Suppress Background). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO
A SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE
(Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC
Scan Mode)

SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121

SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode). . . 5-90
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE
TRANSMISSION (Original Count) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

METADATA DELIVERY
METADATA DELIVERY (Data Entry) . . . . . . . . . 5-127

SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
(2in1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA
TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
• SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB
PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
• METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN
TO DESKTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128

CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report) . . 5-101

TRANSMITTING METADATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
• METADATA FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131

STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif. Stamp). . . 5-94
ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A
TRANSMISSION (Blank Page Skip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96

CHECKING THE STATUS OF
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB
QUEUE IS COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS . . . . . . . . . .

NETWORK SCANNER / INTERNET FAX*1
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
PULL SCAN FUNCTION (TWAIN)
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132

5-103
5-104
5-107
5-108

STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED
OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN
TRANSMISSION JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY
LOG (Image Sending Activity Report) . . . . . . . . 5-111
• IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT . . . . . 5-111
• INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE
RESULT COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111

5-2

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
NETWORK SCANNER
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a network scanner.

NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
The network scanner function of the machine can be used to scan an original, create an image file, and send the file
over a network to a computer, FTP server, or other destination. Scanning is also possible from your computer using a
TWAIN-compliant application.
The network scanner function provides the following scanning modes.

Scan modes
To use scanner mode, the network scanner expansion kit must be installed.
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE (page 5-28)

Scan to E-mail
The scanned file is sent to an e-mail address.

Scan to FTP
The scanned file is sent to a specified directory of an FTP server.
When the file is sent, it is also possible to send an e-mail to a previously stored e-mail
address to inform the recipient of the location of the file. (This is called "Scan to FTP
(Hyperlink)".)

Scan to Desktop
The scanned file is sent to a specified folder on your computer.
To use Scan to Desktop, software must be installed from the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner
Utilities" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. For the system requirements of the
software, see the manual (PDF format) or the Readme file on the CD-ROM. For the
procedures for installing the software, see the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide".

Scan to Network Folder
The scanned file is sent to a Network Folder on a Windows computer on the same network
as the machine.

5-3

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

USB memory mode
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE (page 5-35)
USB Memory Scan
The scanned file is sent to and stored in a USB memory device connected to the machine.

Internet fax mode
To use the Internet fax function, the Internet fax expansion kit must be installed.
☞ SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE (page 5-41)

Internet fax transmission
The scanned file is sent as an Internet fax. Reception of Internet faxes is also possible.
The machine supports Direct SMTP, which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your
company without using a mail server.

PC scan mode
☞ SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) (page 5-121)
PC Scan
A TWAIN-compliant application on a computer connected to the same network as the
machine is used to scan a document or image.
To use PC Scan, the scanner driver must be installed from the "Software CD-ROM" that
accompanies the machine.
Operating systems that can be used are Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/
Server 2008/7.

Data entry mode
The application integration module is required to use the metadata transmission function.
☞ METADATA DELIVERY (page 5-127)

Metadata delivery
The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner function to append a metadata* file to a
scanned image file. (This is called metadata delivery.)
Information entered using the touch panel or automatically generated by the machine can be sent to a directory on an
FTP server or an application on a computer as a metadata file in XML format.
* Metadata is information about a file, how it is to be processed, and its relation to other objects.

5-4

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

PREPARATIONS FOR USE AS A NETWORK
SCANNER
MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH IS IN THE
"ON" POSITION
The main power is "on" when the main power indicator on the right side of the operation panel is lit.
If the main power indicator is not lit, the main power is "off". Switch the main power switch to the "on" position and press
the [POWER] key ( ) on the operation panel.
If the Internet fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, always
keep the main power switch in the "on" position.
When the [POWER SAVE] key (
) indicator light is blinking, the machine is in auto power shut-off mode. If the [POWER
SAVE] key (
) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will turn off and the machine will return to the ready
state after a brief interval.
Main power indicator
Main power switch

LOGOUT

"On" position

[POWER SAVE] key/indicator

CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME
Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine.
The date and time are set in the system settings of the machine. When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
system settings menu screen appears on the touch panel. Select [Default Settings], [Clock], and [Clock Adjust], and set
the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
If "Disabling of Clock Adjustment" has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the date and time cannot be set.

STORING SENDER INFORMATION
Be sure to configure this information, as it is required for communication.
Before using Scan to E-mail
Store a default sender name in "Sender Name" and a reply e-mail address in "Reply E-mail Address". These will be
used when a sender is not selected.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Sender Set
This is used to store the sender name and e-mail address that is used when a sender is not selected.

Before using Internet fax
Store a sender name in "Sender Name" and a sender Internet fax address in "Own Address".
System Settings (Administrator): Sender Data Registration
Use this setting to program the sender name and sender address.

5-5

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES
To use scan mode and Internet fax mode, the basic network scanner settings, server settings such SMTP and DNS
server settings, and sender addresses must be configured in the Web pages.
• Server settings
To configure server settings, click [Network Settings] and then [Services Settings] in the Web page menu.
(Administrator rights are required.)
• Basic network scanner settings
To configure network scanner settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Network Scanner Settings] in the Web
page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)
• Internet fax settings
To configure the network scanner settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Internet Fax Settings] in the Web
page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)

STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK
To use Scan to FTP or Scan to Desktop, the destination must be stored in the address book. For Scan to E-mail,
Internet Fax, and Scan to Network Folder, the destination can be directly entered or looked up in a global address book
at the time of transmission, however, the procedure is simpler when the destination is stored in the address book. Store
each type of destination as explained below.
Types of transmission in scanner mode
• Scan to FTP:

Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [FTP] in
[Address Type] and store an address.

• Scan to Network Folder: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Network
Folder] in [Address Type] and store an address.
• Scan to E-mail:

Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [E-mail]
in [Address Type] and store an address. Addresses can also be stored in the system
settings.

• Scan to Desktop:

See "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP" (page 5-7). Scan to Desktop
destinations can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Address Book] in the Web page
menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Desktop] in [Address Type] and store an
address.

A total of 1000 addresses can be stored. Among these, a combined maximum of 200 Scan to Network Folder, Scan to FTP,
and Scan to Desktop addresses can be stored.

Transmission in Internet fax mode:
Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Internet
Fax] or [Direct SMTP] for the [Address Type], and store the address. Addresses can also be
stored in the system settings.
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store destination addresses for Scan to E-mail and Internet fax.

5-6

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP
To store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool must be installed
from the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. To scan an image to your
computer, Network Scanner Tool must be running on your computer.

INSTALLING NETWORK SCANNER TOOL
To install Network Scanner Tool, see the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide" that accompanies the machine. When a
standard installation is performed, Network Scanner Tool is installed with Sharpdesk.
When you restart your computer after installing Network Scanner Tool, the Setup Wizard will start automatically. Follow
this wizard to set up Network Scanner Tool. This will store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to
Desktop. The stored destination will be displayed as a one-touch key in the address book screen.
The following window appears while Network Scanner Tool is being set up. The item selected in "My Profiles" (C) will be
the name of the one-touch key.
Scan

Internet Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Fax

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Scan:

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

(B)

Auto

Text

Auto

Address Review

(A)

Send:

PC Scan

PDF

Preview

5

10

15

Condition
Settings

To

Cc

AAA AAA

AAA BBB

Comp-DESKTOP

AAA CCC

AAA DDD

AAA EEE

1
2

Address Review
Address Entry
Global
Address Search

Sort Address

(C)

AAA FFF

AAA GGG

AAA HHH

AAA III

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH
A

Preview

IJKL
B

C

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

D

(B)

(D)

The profile name is determined by the combination of the text entered in "Prefix" (A) and the profile*.
The one-touch key is assigned to an index tab in the address book screen based on the text entered in "Initial" (B).
* This defines how an image sent to your computer is processed. For more information, see profile explanation (D).

ADDING DESTINATIONS
For the number of computers that can be stored in the machine as destinations of Scan to Desktop, see the number of
licences indicated in the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide". To store more destinations, a licence kit is required. Store Scan
to Desktop destinations by installing Network Scanner Tool on each computer.

5-7

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP ADDRESS
The machine supports Direct SMTP, which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your company without using a
mail server. For the procedure for storing a Direct SMTP address in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION
ADDRESSES FOR EACH SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 5-6). Stored Direct SMTP addresses are
included in the address book for Internet fax mode.

If the destination is busy
If the destination is busy, the machine will wait briefly and then automatically resend.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-109)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Line Busy
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be
established because the line is busy. The factory default setting is 2 attempts at an interval of 3 minutes.

When a communication error occurs
If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time,
transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
☞ STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-109)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Communication Error
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an error.
The factory default setting is attempt at an interval of 3 minutes.

5-8

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

BASE SCREEN
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Internet fax mode, and PC scan mode are used by selecting operations and settings in
the base screens of those modes. To display the base screen of a mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key in the touch
panel and then touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
Base screen of scan mode

(1)

COPY

(2)

DOCUMENT
FILING

IMAGE SEND

Ready to send.

(3)
(4)

Scan

Resend

Internet Fax

Address Book

Original

Fax

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Scan:

(5)

Address Entry

Exposure

(6)

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

(7)
(8)

Auto

(9)

PC Scan
Auto

Send:

Text

(10)
PDF

(11)

Preview

(12) (13)
Base screen of USB memory mode

(1)
(2)
(3)
(14)
(15)

COPY

IMAGE SEND

Base screen of Internet fax mode

DOCUMENT
FILING

(1)

Stored to
File Name

Internet Fax
Original
Exposure

Fax
Scan:
Auto

Resolution

200X200dpi

File Format

PDF

Colour Mode

Mono2

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

Auto

(1)

Address Book

Original

Fax
Scan:

Exposure

(10) (6)

Send Settings

Resolution

200X100dpi

Address Review

File Format

TIFF-F

File

Special Modes

PDF

(7)
(13)

Preview

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

Auto

Auto

Quick File

(8)

Preview

(4)

Mode select keys

(9)

PC Scan

(10)

I-Fax Manual
Reception

(13)
(12)
(16)
(17)

[Address Book] key
Touch this key to use a one-touch key or a group key. When
the key is touched, the address book screen appears.
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-18)

(5)

Various messages are displayed here.

[Address Entry] key
Touch this key to manually enter an destination address
instead of using a one-touch key.
☞ ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22)

The icon of the selected mode appears on the left.
(3)

Internet Fax

Address Entry

Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
To use scan mode, USB memory mode, Internet fax
mode, PC scan mode, or data entry mode, touch the
[IMAGE SEND] key.
(2)

Scan

Resend

(5)

Text

Special Modes

(8)

(3)
(4)

PC Scan

DOCUMENT
FILING

IMAGE SEND

Ready to send.

(2)

Ready to send.
Scan

COPY

Send mode tabs
(6)

Touch one of these tabs to change the image send
mode.
Tabs of modes that cannot be used because the
corresponding options are not installed do not appear.
If the [USB Mem. Scan] and [PC Scan] tabs do not
appear, touch the
tab to move the screen.
If the [Scan], [Internet Fax], [Fax], and [Data Entry] tabs
do not appear, touch the
tab move the
screen.
The [Data Entry] tab appears when the application
integration module is installed. For information on
metadata delivery using the [Data Entry] tab, see
"METADATA DELIVERY" (page 5-127).

[Send Settings] key
Touch this key to select or enter the subject, file name,
sender name, or body text, which has been previously
stored in the Web page.
Scan modes:
☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT (page 5-32)
Internet fax mode:
☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND
BODY TEXT (page 5-44)

5-9

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(7)

(13) [Special Modes] key

Customized keys

Touch this key to use a special mode.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

The keys that appear here can be changed to show
settings or functions that you prefer.
☞ Customizing displayed keys (page 5-11)
(8)

(14) [Stored to] key

[Preview] key

Touch to select the folder in USB memory where a file
will be stored.
☞ SPECIFY THE FOLDER IN WHICH THE FILE WILL
BE STORED. (page 5-39)

Touch to check the image that will be sent in the touch
panel before transmission.
☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED
(Preview) (page 5-69)
(9)

(15) [File Name] key

[Resend] key/[Next Address] key
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by Scan
to E-mail, fax and/or Internet fax are stored. Touch this key
to select one of these destinations. After a destination is
selected, this key changes to the [Next Address] key.
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 5-27)
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19)

Touch this key to enter a file name when storing a file to
USB memory.
☞ ENTERING A FILE NAME (page 5-40)
(16)

(10) Image settings
Image settings (original size, exposure, resolution, file
format, and colour mode) can be selected.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
(11)

key
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
selected special modes.
☞ Checking what special modes are selected (page 5-11)

(12)

key
Touch this key to specify a destination using a search number*.
* 4-digit number assigned to a destination when it is stored.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 5-21)

/

/

key

When "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" or
"Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the
system settings (administrator), this will appear when an
Internet fax is received.
: Only "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is
enabled
: Only "Received Data Image Check Setting" is
enabled
: Both settings are enabled
☞ PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 5-114)
☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING
(page 5-115)
(17) [I-Fax Manual Reception] key
Touch this key to receive an Internet fax manually.
☞ MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES (page 5-113)

When sending an image, you can retrieve and use a stored transmission destination from the address book screen. The
address book screen is shared by scan mode, Internet fax mode, fax mode and data entry mode.
Touch the [Address Book] key in the base screen to switch to the address book screen. Touch the [Condition Settings]
key in the address book screen to switch to the base screen.
Base screen of scan mode
Scan

Internet Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Fax
Scan:
Auto

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Address book screen
USB Mem. Scan

Auto

Send:

PC Scan

5

10

15

Condition
Settings

Auto

To

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

1
2

Address Review

Text

Address Entry
Global
Address Search

PDF

Sort Address
Preview

Preview

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

• This chapter uses the base screen of scan mode as an example when operations common to all modes are explained.
• The procedures in this chapter assume that the base screen of scan mode appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
• Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
• Address book screen

5-10

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Customizing displayed keys
Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. Set these keys to functions that you frequently
use to access the functions with a single touch. The customized keys are configured using "Customize Key Setting" in
the Web pages. The following keys appear by factory default:
• [Address Review] key
Touch this key to display a list of the destinations that have been selected in the address book. This is the same key
as the [Address Review] key in the address book screen.
• [File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch either of these keys to use the File function or Quick File function of document filing mode.
In USB memory mode...
Customized keys do not initially appear, however, up to three keys can be added.
Example: When "Dual Page Scan", "Job Build", and "Mixed Size Original" are assigned to the customized keys
Scan

These three keys can be changed
as desired.

Internet Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Fax
Scan:

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Resolution

200X200dpi

Dual Page
Scan

File Format

PDF

Job Build

Colour Mode

Mono2

Mixed Size
Original

Special Modes

Auto

Text

Auto

Send Settings

Send:

PC Scan

PDF

Preview

• Displaying a program key in the base screen will enable you to retrieve the program by simply touching the key.
☞STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) (page 5-73)
• The functions that can be selected for the customized keys vary depending on the mode.
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.

Checking what special modes are selected
The
The

key appears in the base screen when a special mode or 2-sided scanning is selected.
key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
Scan

Internet Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

Fax
Scan:
Auto

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

PC Scan

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Erase

Edge:10mm
Centre:10mm

Timer

Day of the Week:Monday
Time:21:30

Mixed Size
Original

On

Text

200X200dpi

Address Review

OK

Function Review

Auto

PDF

1
1

Preview

The special mode settings cannot be changed from the review screen. To change a setting, touch the [OK] key to close the
review screen and then touch the [Special Modes] key and select the setting that you wish to change.

5-11

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
This screen is used to select transmission destinations.
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)

(10)

(11)

AAA AAA
xxx@xx.xxx.com
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

To

Cc

AAA AAA

Bcc

BBB BBB

(4)

Address Review

(5)

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

(6)

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

(7)

Sort Address

(8)

Preview

1

(12)

2
CCC CCC

Freq.

DDD DDD

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

(13)

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

(14)
(1)

This shows the selected destination.

(2)

Number of displayed items selector key

(9)

Touch this key to enter the selected destination
(one-touch key).
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19)

Touch this key to change the number of destinations
(one-touch keys) displayed in the address book screen.
Select 5, 10, or 15 keys.
(3)

(10) [Cc] key
When using Scan to E-mail, touch the [Cc] key when you
wish to send a "Carbon copy" of the e-mail to an
additional destination.

[Condition Settings] key
Touch this key to select transmission settings. When the
key is touched, the base screen appears.
☞ BASE SCREEN (page 5-9)

(4)

(11) [Bcc] key
When using Scan to E-mail, touch the [Bcc] key when
you wish to send a "Blind carbon copy" of the e-mail to an
additional destination.
When an address is specified as a Bcc recipient, other
recipients will not know that the address is a recipient.
This key only appears when Bcc has been enabled using
"Bcc Setting" in the system settings (administrator).

[Address Review] key
Touch this key to view a list of the selected destinations.
Destination selections can be changed.
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED
DESTINATIONS (page 5-20)

(5)

[Address Entry] key
Touch this key to manually enter a destination address
instead of using a one-touch key.
☞ ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22)

(6)

(12) One-touch key display
The destinations (one-touch keys) stored in each index
are displayed. This chapter refers to keys in which
destinations and groups are stored as one-touch keys.
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19)

[Global Address Search] key
When the use of an LDAP server has been enabled in
the machine's Web pages, a transmission address can
be obtained from a global address book.
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-25)

(7)

(13) Index tabs
Touch this to change the displayed index tab.
☞ Index display (page 5-14)
(14)

[Sort Address] key
Touch to change the index tabs to custom indexes or to
display one-touch keys by send mode.
☞ CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS
IN THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN (page 5-13)

(8)

[To] key

[Preview] key

key
Touch this key to specify a destination using a search
number*.
* 4-digit number assigned to a one-touch key or group
key when it is stored.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 5-21)

Touch to check the image that will be sent in the touch
panel before transmission.
☞ CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED
(Preview) (page 5-69)

5-12

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

• Icons appear in the one-touch keys in the address book to indicate which mode is used for transmission.
☞RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-18)
• For information on storing addresses in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 5-6).
• For information on storing destinations for Scan to Desktop, see "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP"
(page 5-7).
• System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store Scan to E-mail and Internet fax addresses in one-touch keys.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting
This is used to change the default setting for the number of one-touch keys displayed in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
- Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
- Address book screen
• System Settings (Administrator): Address Book Default Selection
The following settings are available for the method of sorting the addresses that appear in the address book.
- Index type (alphabetical, custom)
- Address type (all, group, E-mail, FTP/Desktop, Network Folder, Internet fax, fax)

CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN
THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
You can show destinations of only a specific transmission mode in the address book screen, or change the displayed
index tabs from the alphabetical tabs to the custom tabs. The procedure for selecting destinations does not change.

Touch the [Sort Address] key.
5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review

1

Address Entry
Global
Address Search

Sort Address
Preview

To

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

2

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

(1)

(2)
OK

Sort Address

2

1

Tab Switch

Address Type

ABC

All

Group

User

E-mail

FTP/Desktop

Internet Fax

Fax

Change the display mode.
(1) Touch the key of the mode or tab that you
wish to display.
• To show only the one-touch keys of a particular send
mode, touch the desired mode key under "Address
Type".
• To change the index tabs to the custom indexes, touch
the [User] key under "Tab Switch".

Network Folder

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

5-13

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Index display
Indexes make it easy to search for a destination (one-touch key). The destinations are displayed separately using
alphabetical search characters and index numbers. To display a stored destination, touch the appropriate index tab. It is
convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the [Freq.]
index when you store the destination.
5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review
Address Entry
Global
Address Search

Sort Address

To

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

1
2

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

Index tabs

The destinations can also be displayed in alphabetical order by initial.
Each time the displayed index tab is touched, the display order changes in the following order: search numbers (page
5-21), ascending names, descending names. When the display order is changed, the display order of the other index
tabs also changes.
Ordered by search number (default)
Freq.

Ascending names
Freq.

ABCD

Descending names
Freq.

ABCD

ABCD

Index names can be changed using "Custom Index" in the system settings, allowing you to create groups of one-touch
keys that can be easily recognized.
System Settings: Custom Index (page 7-21)
This setting is used to store custom index names. The custom index where a one-touch key appears is specified when the
transmission destination is stored in the key.

Narrowing the search letter range
An alphabet tab on an index tab can be touched to display keys to further narrow the search range. For example, when
the [ABCD] tab is touched, keys from "A" to "D" appear. If the [B] key is touched, only destinations starting with the letter
"B" will appear. To cancel, touch the key again. Note that the search letter range cannot be narrowed on the [Freq.] tab,
the [etc.] tab, or on a user index tab.
5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review
Address Entry
Global
Address Search

Sort Address
Preview

To

Cc

BBB AAA

BBB BBB

BBB CCC

BBB DDD

1
2

BBB EEE

BBB FFF

BBB GGG

BBB HHH

BBB III

BBB JJJ

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH
A

IJKL
B

5-14

C

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

D

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCAN SEND SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for scanning and transmission. Select settings in the order shown below to
ensure smooth transmission.
For the detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter.

Place the original.

1

Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic
document feeder, or on the document glass.
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE (page 5-28)
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE (page
5-35)
☞ SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE (page 5-41)

1

Enter the destination
Ready to send.
Scan
Address Book

Resend

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Auto

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

Text

200X200dpi
PDF

Preview

Specify the destination of the scan transmission.
• [Address Book] key:
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS
BOOK (page 5-18)
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-25)
• [Address Entry] key:
☞ ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22)
•
key:
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 5-21)
• [Resend] key:
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 5-27)

Select settings
Scan

Internet Fax

Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Preview

Scan:
Auto

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Send:

Text

PDF

PC Scan
Auto

Settings can be selected for scanning the original.
• Original (2-sided original, scan size, send size)
• Exposure • Resolution • File Format • Colour Mode
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
• Send Settings (File Name)
Scan mode, Data entry mode:
☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO,
AND BODY TEXT (page 5-32)
USB memory mode:
☞ ENTERING A FILE NAME (page 5-40)
Internet fax mode:
☞ CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY
TEXT (page 5-44)

5-15

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Special mode settings
Scan

Internet Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Fax

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Scan:
Auto

A4

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

Special modes can be selected.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

Text

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

PDF

Preview

Start scanning and transmission
Start scanning and transmission.
If the original is placed on the document glass, follow these steps to start scanning and transmission:
(1) Press the [START] key.
(2) When scanning is finished, replace the original with the next original.
(3) Press the [START] key.
(4) Repeat (2) and (3) until all originals have been scanned.
(5) Touch the [Read-End] key.

After the original is scanned, the settings revert to the default settings.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
The settings can be kept in effect a fixed period of time after scanning is completed.

5-16

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ORIGINAL SIZES
TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES
The following original sizes can be transmitted
Minimum original size
Using the automatic document feeder

131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width)
(5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width))

Using the document glass

–

Maximum original size
297 mm (height) x 1000 mm* (width)
(11-5/8" (height) x 39-3/8"* (width))
297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width)
(11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width))

* A long original can be transmitted. (When only scan destinations are selected for scan transmission or metadata transmission,
scanning will take place in Mono2 at a resolution of 300X300dpi or less. When a resolution of 600X600dpi is used for Internet fax
transmission, the maximum original size is 800 mm (31-1/2").)

THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL
When a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan" in the base screen.
When the automatic original detection function is operating and the original is a non-standard size, the closest standard
size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the correct original size.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 5-56)
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 5-57)

STANDARD SIZES
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size
Detector Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
List of original size detector settings
Selections

Standard sizes (detected original sizes)
Document feeder tray
Document glass
(automatic document feeder)

AB-1

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"

AB-2

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm
(8-1/2" x 13")

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")

AB-3

A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")

AB-4

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 340 mm
(8-1/2" x 13-2/5")

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")

AB-5

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 343 mm
(8-1/2" x 13-1/2")

A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")

Inch-1

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

A4, A3, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

Inch-2

11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

A4, A3, 11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

Inch-3

11" x 17", 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5"),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

A4, A3, 11" x 17", 216 mm x 340 mm
(8-1/2" x 13-2/5"), 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

5-17

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ENTERING DESTINATIONS
This section explains how to specify destination addresses, including selecting an address from the address book and
retrieving an address by entering a search number.

RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK
The address book screen shows stored destinations as one-touch keys.
The destinations are displayed in order by search number.
5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review

To

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

2

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

1

Freq.

ABCD

Preview

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

The address book screen shows the destinations of all modes of the image send function. Each one-touch key shows
the name of the destination and an icon indicating the mode to be used.
Icon

Mode
Fax
Scan to E-mail
Internet fax (Direct SMTP)
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder
Scan to Desktop
Group key with multiple destinations

• For information on storing addresses in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 5-6).
• For information on storing destinations for Scan to Desktop, see "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP"
(page 5-7).
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-17)
This is used to store Scan to E-mail and Internet fax addresses in one-touch keys.

5-18

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

RETRIEVING A DESTINATION
A destination is retrieved by selecting its one-touch key.

Scan

1

Internet Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Fax

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Scan:

A4

Send:

PC Scan

Touch the [Address Book] key.

Auto

Auto

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Preview

(3)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

To

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Address Review

Sort Address
Preview

2

Specify the destination.

(2)

1
2

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

(1) Touch the index tab where the destination
is stored.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If you select an incorrect destination, touch the key again
to cancel the selection.

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

(3) Touch the [To] key.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

This enters the selected destination.

(1)
• It is convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in
the [Freq.] index when you store the destination.
• To continue specifying other destinations...
It is possible to specify multiple scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, Scan to Network
Folder), Internet fax, and fax mode destinations when performing a broadcast transmission (maximum of 500
destinations). To specify multiple destinations, repeat (1) through (3) of this step.
When performing Scan to E-mail, you can select a one-touch key and then touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key to
send Cc or Bcc copies of the e-mail.

• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting determines whether or not the [Next Address] key can be omitted before specifying the next destination.
Factory default setting: the [Next Address] key can be omitted.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Switching of Display Order
This is used to disable switching of the order of display of the one-touch keys in the address book screen. The currently
selected display order will be the order that is used after this setting is enabled.

5-19

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED
DESTINATIONS
When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a
destination from the list (cancel selection of the destination).

5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review

1

To

Touch the [Address Review] key.

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

2

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address
Preview

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

2

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.

OK

Address Review

001 AAA AAA

002 BBB BBB

003 KKK KKK

004 LLL LLL

005 MMM MMM

006 NNN NNN

007 OOO OOO

008 PPP PPP

009 QQQ QQQ

010 RRR RRR

011 SSS SSS

012 TTT TTT

To

1

1
2

Cc

To check Cc or Bcc destinations, touch the corresponding tab.
To cancel selection of a destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key. Touch the [Detail] key to check the specified destination type and name.

Deselect the address?
AAA AAA

Detail

5-20

No

Yes

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION
A destination stored in the address book can be retrieved using the
of the modes or in the address book screen.

Scan
Address Book

1

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Auto

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Send:

PC Scan

key. This can be done in the base screen of any

Touch the

key.

Auto

Text

PDF

Preview

Enter the 4-digit search number of the
address with the numeric keys.
When the 4-digit search number is entered, the stored address
is retrieved and specified as a destination.

2

• The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.
• If you do not know the search number, print the one-touch address list using "Sending Address List" in the system
settings.
• When entering search numbers such as "0001" and "0011", "0" can be omitted. For example to enter "0001", enter
"1" and touch the
key or the [Next Address] key.
If an incorrect search number is entered...
Press the [CLEAR] key (
) to clear the number and enter the correct number.

5-21

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY
Scan to E-mail, Internet fax, Network Folder and data entry mode addresses can be manually entered.

Display the address input screen.

(2)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review

1

To

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Before touching the [Address Entry] key in the base
screen, touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.

2

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

1

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

(2) Touch the [Address Entry] key.
QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

Enter the destination address.
Select the destination type.

2

E-mail

Network Folder

Internet Fax

Direct SMTP

(1) Touch the key of the desired delivery
method.
• Touch the [E-mail] key to open the delivery method
selection screen. Normally the [To] key is touched.
• Touch the [Network Folder] key to open the network
folder entry screen. To specify a network folder, see
"SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER" (page 5-23).
• If you touched the [Address Entry] key in the base
screen in step 1, the delivery methods that can be
selected vary depending on the mode being used.

(2) Enter the destination address in the text
entry screen that appears.
Enter the destination address and touch the [OK] key.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
TEXT" (page 1-77) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
• If you wish the destination to be a Cc destination, touch the [Cc] key.
• The [Bcc] key only appears when Bcc has been enabled using "Bcc Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
If you wish the destination to be a Bcc destination, touch the [Bcc] key.
• When Internet fax mode is selected, the base screen appears after the destination address is entered. However, if
"I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the reception report
request screen will appear. If you wish to receive a report, touch the [Yes] key. If not, touch the [No] key. (When
Direct SMTP is used, transmission confirmation is not performed.)

• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting
This setting is used to request a reception report when an Internet fax is sent. When the destination is specified by directly
entering the address, a message will appear asking you if you wish to receive a report. (When Direct SMTP is used,
transmission confirmation is not performed.)
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen and the
delivery type selection screen.

5-22

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER
A network folder on a server or computer connected to the same network as the machine can be directly specified.
Select [Network Folder] in step 2 on the previous page and follow the steps below.

Network Folder

Cancel

OK

Touch the [Browse] key.
• To directly enter a folder, touch the [Folder Path] key. A
text entry screen will appear.
• If a user name and password are required, check with
the administrator of the server and enter the user name
and password.

Folder Path

Browse

1

User Name
Password

For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-77) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

5-23

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Access the network folder.

(1)
Select workgroup.

Search

Workgroup

OK

Cancel

(1) Touch the key of the workgroup that you
wish to access.

Workgroup Name
1

Work 1

16
Work 2
Work 3
Work 4
Work 5
Work 6

(2)
Select server.

Search

Server

(2) Touch the key of the server or computer
that you wish to access.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name
and password, check with your server administrator and
enter the appropriate user name and password.

OK

Cancel

Work 1
Server Name
1

Server 1

16
Server 2
Server 3
Server 4
Server 5

2

Server 6

Select network folder.

Network Folder

(3) Touch the key of the network folder.

(4)

(3)

Search

(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 1. Touch the [OK] key
again to enter the folder.

OK

Cancel

\\Server 1
Network Folder Name
1

User 1

3
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6

• You can touch the [Search] key and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder. For the
procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-77) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders can be displayed.
• To move up one level, touch the

key.

• The [Cancel] key can be pressed to return to the screen of step 1.
• To change the sorting order of the displayed keys, touch the key that shows
or
in each screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
• To go to a particular page, touch the
number.

1

key that shows the current page number and enter the desired page

5-24

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK
When an LDAP server is configured in the Web pages, you can look up an address in a global address book and
retrieve the address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission (excluding Direct SMTP addresses).

Open the global address search screen.

(2)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.

Cc

AAA AAA

Address Review

1

To

1
2

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

(2) Touch the [Global Address Search] key.

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

(1)

(2)
Cancel

Server Change
Server 1
Server 2
Server 3

OK

Search for the destination.
If only one LDAP server has been stored, (1) and (2) are not
necessary. Go directly to (3). If an authentication screen for the
LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password.

(1) Touch the key of the LDAP server that you
wish to use.

Server 4

If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears,
enter your user name and password.

Server 5
Server 6
Server 7

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
(3) Search for the destination in the search
screen.
Enter search characters for the destination and touch the
[Search] key. The search results will appear after a brief
interval.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
TEXT" (page 1-77) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".

2

How to search
Enter the search characters (maximum of 64 characters). The system will look for names starting with the entered
letters.
An asterisk can be used as follows:
XXX : Names beginning with "XXX".
XXX: Names that end with "XXX".
XXX : Names that include "XXX".
AA XX: Names that start with "AA" and end with "XX".

5-25

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(2)
To
Condition
Settings
Address Review
Search Again

Select the destination.

(1)

(1) Touch the key of the desired destination.

Cc

If no names are found that match the search characters, a
message will appear. Touch the [OK] key to close the
message and touch the [Search Again] key to search
again.

Detail

XXX
XXX AAA

AAA@xx.xxx.com

XXX BBB

BBB@xx.xxx.com

XXX CCC

CCC@xx.xxx.com

XXX DDD

DDD@xx.xxx.com

XXX EEE

EEE@xx.xxx.com

XXX FFF

FFF@xx.xxx.com

1
2

Address Book

(2) Touch the [To] key.
This enters the selected destination.
If you wish to enter another destination, repeat (1) and (2)
of this step.

3

• If 30 or more matches are found, a message will appear in the screen. Touch the [OK] key to close the message. Up
to 300 matches can appear. If no names are found that match the search letters, touch the [Search Again] key to
search again using more search letters.
• To check the information stored in a destination...
Touch the key of the destination and then touch the [Detail] key. The information stored for the selected destination
will appear. Check the information and then touch the [OK] key to return to the search results screen.
• If a screen for selecting the item to be used appears...
If the selected destination includes a fax number, telephone number, or other contact information in addition to the
e-mail address or Internet fax address, you will need to select which item you wish to use. Touch the [E-mail] key or
the [Internet Fax] key to retrieve the address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission.

Storing a destination from a global address book in the machine's
address book
A destination address obtained from a global address book can be stored as a destination (one-touch key) in the
address book of the machine.
Touch the [Detail] key in the search results screen of the global address book (the screen of step 3 above) to display
information on the selected destination. Touch the [Register] key in the detailed information screen and then touch the
item to be used (the [E-mail] key or the [Internet Fax] key). The following screens will appear.
E-mail address registration screen
Exit

Direct Address / Individual
Internet Fax

E-mail
Search Number
Name

E-mail

Fax

Search Number
Name

AAA AAA
A

Address

AAA@xx.xxx.com

Key Name

AAA AAA

Index

User 1

Colour/Greyscale:PDF/Medium
B/W

Exit

Direct Address / Individual

0001

Initial

File Format

Internet fax address registration screen

:PDF/MMR(G4)

Internet Fax

Fax

0001
AAA AAA

Initial

A

Address

AAA@xx.xxx.com

Key Name

AAA AAA

Compression

MH (G3)

I-Fax Report

Off

Index

User 1

The information stored in the global address book is automatically entered. (The settings can be changed if needed. For
detailed information on each item, see "Address Control" (page 7-17) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".) However, configure
the items below manually. To complete the storing procedure, touch the [Exit] key.
• [Initial] key: Touch this key to enter the initials that determine where the destination will appear in the alphabetical
index and the order of one-touch key display. Enter up to 10 characters for the initials.
• [Index] key: Touch this key to select the custom index in which the address will appear. You can also select whether
or not the destination will be included on the [Freq.] tab of the address book.
• [File Format] key: Set the format for Scan to E-mail. Default format settings have already been configured; however,
selecting format settings when you store a destination saves you the trouble of selecting the
settings each time you transmit to that destination.
• [Compression] key: Touch this key to set the compression mode when sending an Internet fax.
• [I-Fax Report] key: Touch this key to request a reception report when sending an Internet fax.

5-26

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

USING THE RESEND FUNCTION
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by Scan to E-mail, Internet fax (including Direct SMTP addresses)
and/or fax are stored. One of these can be selected to resend to that destination.

Ready to send.

1

Resend

Internet Fax

Scan

Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Scan:
Auto

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Touch the [Resend] key.

PC Scan
Auto

Send:

Text

200X200dpi
PDF

Preview

Cancel

Resend

Touch the key of the desired address.
The last 8 addresses used for transmission are displayed.

2

No.01

AAA AAA

No.02

BBB BBB

No.03

CCC CCC

No.04

DDD DDD

No.05

EEE EEE

No.06

FFF FFF

No.07

GGG GGG

No.08

HHH HHH

• When the [Resend] key is touched and a destination selected, the mode of the selected destination is automatically
selected.
• The following types of addresses are not stored for resending.
- A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key).
- Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder addresses.
- Broadcasting destinations
- Addresses used only for BCC delivery
- Destinations transmitted to using a program
System Settings (Administrator): Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Send Mode
This prohibits use of the resend function. When this setting is enabled, the [Resend] key cannot be used in the base screen
of image send mode.

5-27

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE
SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE
This section explains the basic procedure for transmission in scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to
Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder).
When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed, the destination cannot be changed, and destinations cannot be added. If you wish to change the mode or
destination, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the procedure below.
When "Default Address Setting" is set to "Apply E-mail address of the user for login.", pressing the [Add Address] key on the
touch panel switches modes and adds addresses.

Place the original.

Original size
detector
1

Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and
prevent correct detection of the document size.

1

• When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.

Document glass
Originals

Document feeder tray
Place the original face up.

Place the original face down and align the
corner with the tip of the arrow mark
in the
top left corner of the document glass scale.

Portrait orientation*

1

1

1

1

Landscape orientation

1

1

1

* To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown above in "Landscape orientation" and specify the
placement orientation in step 3.
• Place A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation ( ). If placed in landscape (horizontal)
orientation (
), an incorrect size will be detected. For an A5R (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) size original, enter the original
size manually.
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.

5-28

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(4)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

(3)

Specify the destination.

(2)

To

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Address Review

Sort Address

1
2

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
The icon on the key indicates the type of destination
stored in the key.
: Scan to E-mail

etc.

: Scan to FTP

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

: Scan to Network Folder
: Scan to Desktop

(3) Touch the [To] key.
The destination is specified.

2

(4) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.
• After a one-touch key is touched, if the screen is changed without touching the [To] key, the destination is
automatically specified.
• When performing Scan to E-mail, you can also send Cc or Bcc copies to other destinations. Touch the desired
destination and then touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key.
• Multiple destinations can be specified. To specify multiple destinations, repeat steps (2) and (3).
• You can also select multiple one-touch keys and then touch the [To] key (or the [Cc] or [Bcc] key) to specify all
selected keys at once.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. Destinations
for Scan to E-mail and Scan to Network Folder can also be manually entered or looked up in a global address book.
For more information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 5-18).
System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.

(1)
Scan

3

(2)
Internet Fax

Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Scan:
Auto

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

Switch to scan mode and display the
image settings screen.
(1) Touch the [Scan] tab.

Text

(2) Touch the [Original] key.
PDF

Preview

The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], [File Format], and [Colour Mode] are indicated at the right
of each key. To change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-54), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-55), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 5-61), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-63), CHANGING THE FILE
FORMAT (page 5-64), CHANGING THE COLOUR MODE (page 5-68), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

5-29

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1)
Scan/Original

Auto

100% Send Size
A4

Auto

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.

OK

Scan Size

4

(2)

To enable the original to be scanned in the correct orientation
(the orientation of the top edge of the original that is shown at
the top of the display), specify the orientation in which the
original was placed in step 1.

(1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the
key. If
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key.

2-Sided
Tablet

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 2.
The original orientation is initially set to
necessary.

. If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one
page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will take place.
• The image is scanned in the mode set in "Colour mode". For the colour mode settings, see "CHANGING THE
COLOUR MODE" (page 5-68).

5

• If Encrypt PDF is selected for the file format ([PDF] is selected in the format settings screen and the [Encry.]
checkbox is set to
), you will be prompted to enter a password when you press the [START] key.

Please enter encrypt PDF
password.

Cancel

Entry

Touch the [Entry] key to open the keyboard screen, enter a password (maximum of 32 characters), and touch the
[OK] key. The recipient must use the password entered here to open the Encrypt PDF file.
To cancel Encrypt PDF, touch the [Cancel] key. The format settings screen will appear to let you change the file
type. Select a new file type and press the [START] key to begin transmission.

6

If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.

5-30

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

Configure

A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
Read-End

7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed
when scanning an even-numbered original page.

• When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can
be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcast
transmission, this number will also appear in the key of the job in the job status screen. For this reason, making a note of
the number is useful for checking the result.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
• When performing Scan to E-mail, take care not to send a file that is too large. In particular, multi-page files tend to be large.
When sending a multi-page file or other large file, it may be necessary to reduce the number of scanned pages or reduce
the send size.
• Storing a mail signature
You can have preset text automatically added at the end of e-mail messages as a mail signature. This is convenient when
you wish to have a corporate policy or other preset text appear at the bottom of e-mail messages. To store the text for the
mail signature, click [Application Settings], [Network Scanner Settings] and then [Administration Settings] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 900 characters can be entered. (The mail signature is not included in the
maximum number of characters that can be entered in the e-mail message.)
Use "Pre-Setting Mail Signature" in the system settings (administrator) to specify whether or not a mail signature is added.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

• System Settings (Administrator): Image Send Settings
Use this to configure scanner transmission settings, including the default resolution and exposure settings, the default
colour mode and file format, the file compression method for broadcasting, the file size limit for Scan to E-mail, and the
default sender and destination.
• System Settings (Administrator): Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Use this setting to specify whether or not a mail signature is added at the end of e-mail messages. By factory default, a
mail signature is not added.

5-31

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO,
AND BODY TEXT
The subject, file name, reply-to, and body text can be changed when performing a scan transmission. Preset items can
be selected or text can be directly entered.
• When performing Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder, only the file name is used.
• If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Web page are used.
• If the sender name is not changed, the name set in "Default Sender Set" in the system settings is used. If this is not
configured, the reply address in [Network Settings] - [Services Settings] - [SMTP Settings] in the Web pages is used.
(Administrator rights are required.)
• Selections for the subject, file name, and body text are configured by clicking [Application Settings] and then [Network
Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-77) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

1

Touch the [Send Settings] key in the base screen.
☞ BASE SCREEN (page 5-9)
If you are sending to a Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder destination, go to step 4.

To change the subject, touch the
[Subject] key.

OK

Send Settings

Subject
File Name

2

Reply-To
Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc

(1)
Cancel

Subject

Enter the subject.

(2)

(1) Touch a Pre-Set text key.

OK

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Direct Entry
No.01 Sub: Schedule coordination

No.02 Sub: Monthly Schedule

No.03 Sub: Minutes of planning m

No.04

No.05

No.06

No.07

No.08

No.09

No.10

No.11

No.12

1
5

3

• If you wish to directly enter the text, touch the [Direct Entry] key to open the text entry screen. Enter the text and
touch the [OK] key.
• The text in a pre-set text key can be edited by touching the pre-set text key and then the [Direct Entry] key. The text
entry screen will appear with the selected pre-set text entered. (When a destination is stored using the Web pages,
up to 80 characters can be entered. However, only 54 characters can be entered in the touch panel.)

5-32

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Subject

To change the file name, touch the [File
Name] key.

OK

Send Settings

• The file name is entered in the same way as the subject.
• If you are sending to a Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or
Scan to Network Folder destination, go to step 9.

Sub: Schedule coordination meeting

File Name

4

Reply-To
Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc

Subject
File Name

To change "Reply-To", touch the
[Reply-To] key.

OK

Send Settings

Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
Material for planning meeting

Reply-To

5

Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc

If user authentication is being used, the information of the user that logged in will be applied, and thus "Reply-To"
cannot be changed.

Cancel

Reply-To
6

12

Global
Address Search
Address Entry

6

ABC
User

Specify a user for "Reply-To" and touch
the [OK] key.

OK

18
AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

1
3

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

KKK KKK

LLL LLL

All

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

• Touch the key that you wish to use for "Reply-To".
• You can touch the [Global Address Search] key to specify a
user stored in a global address book for "Reply-To". You can
also touch the [Address Entry] key to directly enter an e-mail
address.

etc.

• To specify the return address, you can touch the
key and enter a user number that has been previously stored
using "User List" in the system settings (administrator).
• A key can only be selected for the return address if an e-mail address has been stored for that user in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator).

5-33

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Subject

7

To change the body text, touch the
[Body Text] key.

OK

Send Settings

Sub: Schedule coordination meeting

File Name

Material for planning meeting

Reply-To

AAA AAA

Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc

Clear All

Body Entry

Enter the body text and touch the [OK]
key.

OK

Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached scanned data,
which you have requested.

• To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Web page,
touch the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the body text, touch the [Edit] key.

8
Pre-Set Select

Edit

• 1800 characters can be entered. (A line break counts as one character.)
• To clear all entered text, touch the [Clear All] key. When this key is touched, the entire body of the message is
erased immediately; not just the selected line.
• Each line of the entered text can be selected with the
keys. To edit the selected line, touch the [Edit] key.
The text entry screen will appear with the selected text entered.

Subject

9

Touch the [OK] key.

OK

Send Settings

Sub: Schedule coordination meeting

File Name

Material for planning meeting

Reply-To

AAA AAA

Body Text

Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached sca

Add 'Reply to' to Cc

The [Add 'Reply to' to Cc] checkbox can be selected

to send a Cc copy to the sender.

When storing pre-set text for the subject and file name in the Web pages, up to 80 characters can be entered.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed Setting
The setting for the number of subject keys and file name keys displayed in one screen can be changed to 6, 12, or 18.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Sender Set
This is used to store the sender name and e-mail address that is used when a sender is not selected.

5-34

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE
Follow the steps below to send a scanned image to a commercially available USB memory device that has been
connected to the machine. This stores the file in the USB device.
• Use a FAT32 USB memory with a capacity of no more than 32 GB.
• When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be changed. To
switch to USB memory mode, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the steps below. When "Default Address Setting" is
set to "Apply E-mail address of the user for login.", pressing the [Add Address] key on the touch panel switches to USB memory scan mode.

Connect the USB memory to the USB
connector (Type A) on the machine.

1

Place the original.

Original size
detector
1

Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and
prevent correct detection of the document size.

1

• When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.

Document glass
Originals

Document feeder tray
Place the original face up.

Place the original face down and align the
corner with the tip of the arrow mark
in the
top left corner of the document glass scale.

Portrait orientation*

2
1

1

1

Landscape orientation

1

1

1

* To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown above in "Landscape orientation" and specify the
placement orientation in step 4.
• Place A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation ( ). If placed in landscape (horizontal) orientation
(
), an incorrect size will be detected. For an A5R (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) size original, enter the original size manually.
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.

5-35

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(2)
Scan

Internet Fax

Stored to

Original

File Name

Exposure

(1)
Fax
Scan:
Auto

Resolution

200X200dpi

File Format

PDF

Colour Mode

Mono2

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

PC Scan

Send:

Auto

Switch to USB memory mode and
display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the [USB Mem. Scan] tab
If the [USB Mem. Scan] tab does not appear, touch the
tab to move the screen.

Text

(2) Touch the [Original] key.

PDF

Special Modes
Preview

3
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination.
• If a destination of another mode has been previously specified, a message will appear when you change to USB
memory mode indicating that the destination setting will be cleared. Touch the [OK] key in the message screen and
go to the next step.
• The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], [File Format], and [Colour Mode] are indicated at the
right of each key. To change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-54), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-55), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 5-61), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-63), CHANGING THE
FILE FORMAT (page 5-64), CHANGING THE COLOUR MODE (page 5-68), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

(1)
USB Mem. Scan/Original

Auto

100% Send Size
A4

Auto

Image Orientation

4

Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.

OK

Scan Size

2-Sided
Booklet

(2)

To enable the original to be scanned in the correct orientation
(the orientation in which the top edge of the original appears at
the top of the display), specify the orientation in which the
original was placed in step 2.

(1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the
key. If
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key.

2-Sided
Tablet

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 3.
The original orientation is initially set to
necessary.

. If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not

5-36

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one
page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will begin. Go to step 8.

Do not disconnect the USB memory until "Sending data has been completed." appears in the touch panel.

5

• The image is scanned in the mode set in "Colour mode". For the colour mode settings, see "CHANGING THE
COLOUR MODE" (page 5-68).
• If Encrypt PDF is selected for the file format ([PDF] is selected in the format settings screen and the [Encry.]
checkbox is set to
), you will be prompted to enter a password when you press the [START] key.

Please enter encrypt PDF
password.

Cancel

Entry

Touch the [Entry] key to open the keyboard screen, enter a password (maximum of 32 characters), and touch the
[OK] key. The recipient must use the password entered here to open the Encrypt PDF file.
To cancel Encrypt PDF, touch the [Cancel] key. The format settings screen will appear to let you change the file
type. Select a new file type and press the [START] key to begin transmission.

6

If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

Configure

A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
Read-End

7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed
when scanning an even-numbered original page.

5-37

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

When "Sending data has been
completed." appears in the touch panel,
disconnect the USB memory.

8

Do not disconnect the USB memory while "Processing data." or "Sending data." appears in the touch panel.

• When transmission to USB memory is completed, "Sending data has been completed." is displayed. After a brief interval
the message is cleared and the base screen of image send mode reappears. (The base screen of image send mode is the
screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.)
• If the USB memory becomes full during scanning...
A message will appear and scanning will stop. The scanned data will not be stored. However, if the file format is set to
JPEG and the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox is selected, files for which scanning is completed will be stored in USB
memory.
• To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

• To cancel scanning to USB memory...
While scanned data is being stored in the USB memory, the message "Sending data." and the [Cancel] key appear in the
touch panel. To cancel the storing operation, touch the [Cancel] key.
• System Settings: USB-Device Check (page 7-28)
This is used to check the connection of a USB device to the machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): Scan Settings
This is used to set the default colour mode and file format.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Scan Function
The use of PC scan mode and USB memory mode can be prohibited.

5-38

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SPECIFY THE FOLDER IN WHICH THE FILE WILL BE
STORED.
When sending a file to USB memory, a folder can be specified in USB memory. A new folder can also be created in USB
memory.
If a folder is not specified, the file will be stored on the first level of the USB memory.

Internet Fax

Scan
Stored to
File Name

1

Original
Exposure

Fax
Scan:
Auto

Resolution

200X200dpi

File Format

PDF

Colour Mode

Mono2

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

PC Scan

Touch the [Stored to] key.

Auto

Text

PDF

Special Modes
Preview

(A)
Stored to
\

Select the folder.

(2)

(1)
Cancel

(1) Touch the key of the folder in which you
wish to store the file.

OK

New Folder

If the selected folder contains another folder, you can
select that folder. The current folder level appears in (A).

Folder Name
Folder 1

1
1

Folder 2
Folder 3

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen. The [Stored to] key will
be highlighted.

Folder 4

2

• To create a new folder on the currently displayed level, touch the [New Folder] key. A text entry screen will appear.
Enter a folder name and touch the [OK] key. For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page
1-77) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• To move up one level, touch the

key. This key appears when a folder on the second level or lower is selected.

• To change the order of the keys that appear in a screen, touch the key that shows
touched, the order changes between ascending and descending.

or

. Each time the key is

Specify a folder name and file name that are within the allowed number of display characters of your operating system. If the
file name or folder name exceeds the allowed number of characters, it may not be possible to display the scanned file.

5-39

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ENTERING A FILE NAME
The file name can be directly entered when performing a scan transmission.
• If the file name is not entered, the settings in the Web page are used.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-77) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

Scan
Stored to
File Name

Internet Fax
Original
Exposure

Fax

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Scan:

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

Text

Auto

Resolution

200X200dpi

File Format

PDF

Colour Mode

Mono2

PDF

Special Modes
Preview

(A)

Touch the [File Name] key. A text entry screen will appear. Enter the file name and touch the [OK] key. The entered file
name will appear in (A).

5-40

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE
The basic procedure for sending a fax in Internet fax mode is explained below. This procedure can also be used to
perform direct transmission by Direct SMTP.
When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed, the destination cannot be changed, and destinations cannot be added. To switch to Internet fax mode, touch the
[Cancel] key in the touch panel and follow the steps below.
When "Default Address Setting" is set to "Apply E-mail address of the user for login.", pressing the [Add Address] key on the
touch panel switches to Internet fax mode.

1

Original size
detector
1

Place the original.
• Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or
face down on the document glass.
• Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and
prevent correct detection of the document size.

• Place A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation ( ). If placed in landscape (horizontal) orientation
(
), an incorrect size will be detected. For an A5R (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) size original, enter the original size manually.

1

• Image rotation
A4, B5R, A5R, and 16K (8-1/2" x 11" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) originals are rotated 90 degrees and transmitted in A4R,
B5, A5, or 16KR (8-1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2") orientation. (A4R, B5, and A5 (8-1/2" x 11"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
originals cannot be rotated for transmission.)
Transmission

• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.
System Settings (Administrator): Rotation Sending Setting
This is used to select whether or not a scanned original image is rotated before transmission.
The default setting is: rotate A4 to A4R, B5R to B5, and A5R to A5 (8-1/2" x 11" to 8-1/2" x 11"R, and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R
to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2").

5-41

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(4)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review
Address Entry
Global
Address Search

2

Sort Address

(3)

Specify the destination.

(2)

To

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

1
2

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

(2) Touch the key of the desired destination.
The
icon appears in one-touch keys in which Internet
fax addresses are stored.

(3) Touch the [To] key.
QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.

The destination is specified.

(4) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.

• After a one-touch key is touched, if the screen is changed without touching the [To] key, the destination is
automatically specified.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter a destination or look up a destination in a global address book. For more information, see
"ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 5-18).

(1)
Scan

3

Switch to Internet fax mode and display
the image settings screen.

(2)

Internet Fax

Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

200X100dpi

Address Review

File Format

TIFF-F

File

Special Modes

Scan:

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

PC Scan

(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.

Auto

Send:

Auto

(2) Touch the [Original] key.

Quick File
I-Fax Manual
Reception

Preview

The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], and [File Format] are indicated at the right of each key. To
change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-54), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-55), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 5-61), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-63), CHANGING THE FILE
FORMAT (page 5-64), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

(1)
Internet Fax/Original

(2)

Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.

OK

Scan Size
Auto

100% Send Size
A4

When specifying the orientation of the image to be transmitted,
specify the orientation of the original placed in step 1.

Auto

(1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.

4

If the top edge of the original is up, touch the
key. If
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key.

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 2.
The original orientation is initially set to
necessary.

. If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not

5-42

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Press the [START] key.

5

6

Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one page,
go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will take place.

If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

Configure

A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
Read-End

7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "2in1" or "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be
changed when scanning an even-numbered original page.

• When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can
be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcast
transmission, this number will also appear in the key of the job in the job status screen. For this reason, making a note of
the number is useful for checking the result.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
• Storing a mail signature
You can have preset text automatically added at the end of e-mail messages as a mail signature. This is convenient when
you wish to have a corporate policy or other preset text appear at the bottom of e-mail messages. To store the text for the
mail signature, click [Application Settings], [Network Scanner Settings] and then [Administration Settings] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 900 characters can be entered. (The mail signature is not included in the
maximum number of characters that can be entered in the e-mail message.)
Use "Pre-Setting Mail Signature" in the system settings (administrator) to specify whether or not a mail signature is added.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Send Settings
This is used to select Internet fax transmission settings such as the receive report setting, rotation setting, size restriction
setting, and sender information attachment setting.
• System Settings (Administrator): Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Use this setting to specify whether or not a mail signature is added at the end of e-mail messages. By factory default, a
mail signature is not added.

5-43

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY
TEXT
The subject, file name, and body text can be changed when performing an Internet fax transmission. Preset items can
be selected or text can be directly entered.
• If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Web page are used.
• Selections for the subject, file name, and body text are configured by clicking [Application Settings] and then [Network
Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-77) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

1

Touch the [Send Settings] key in the base screen.
☞ BASE SCREEN (page 5-9)
To change the subject, touch the
[Subject] key.

OK

Send Settings

Subject

2

File Name

Body Text

(1)
Cancel

Subject

Enter the subject.

(2)

(1) Touch a pre-set text key.

OK

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Direct Entry
No.01 Sub: Schedule coordination

No.02 Sub: Monthly Schedule

No.03 Sub: Minutes of planning m

No.04

No.05

No.06

No.07

No.08

No.09

No.10

No.11

No.12

1
5

3

• If you wish to directly enter the text, touch the [Direct Entry] key to open the text entry screen. Enter the text and
touch the [OK] key.
• The text in a pre-set text key can be edited by touching the pre-set text key and then the [Direct Entry] key. The text
entry screen will appear with the selected pre-set text entered. (When a destination is stored using the Web page,
up to 80 characters can be entered. However, only 54 characters can be entered in the touch panel.)

5-44

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

OK

Send Settings

Subject

To change the file name, touch the [File
Name] key.
The file name is entered in the same way as the subject.

Sub: Schedule coordination meeting

File Name

4
Body Text

OK

Send Settings

Subject
File Name

To change the body text, touch the
[Body Text] key.

Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
Material for planning meeting

5
Body Text

Clear All

Body Entry

OK

Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached scanned data,
which you have requested.

Enter the body text and touch the [OK]
key.
• To select a pre-set message previously stored in the Web
page, touch the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the message, touch the [Edit] key.

6
Pre-Set Select

Edit

• 1800 characters can be entered. (A line break counts as one character.)
• To clear all entered text, touch the [Clear All] key. When this key is touched, the entire body of the message is
erased immediately; not just the selected line.
• Each line of the entered text can be selected with the
keys. To edit the selected line, touch the [Edit] key.
The text entry screen will appear with the selected text entered.

5-45

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

OK

Send Settings

Subject

Touch the [OK] key.

Sub: Schedule coordination meeting

File Name

Material for planning meeting

Body Text

Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached sca

7

When storing pre-set text for the subject and file name in the Web pages, up to 80 characters can be entered.
System Settings (Administrator): The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed Setting
The setting for the number of subject keys and file name keys displayed in one screen can be changed to 6, 12, or 18.

5-46

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission)
The same scanned image can be sent to multiple scan modes, Internet fax mode, and fax mode destinations in a single
operation. Up to 500 destinations can be selected in one broadcast operation. (Combined maximum of 200 file server,
desktop, and shared folder destinations.)
Transmission
Originals

If you frequently use broadcasting to send images to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to store those
destinations in a group key.

1

Place the original.

1

1

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.

5-47

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(3)
5

10

15

Condition
Settings

Specify the destination.

(2)

To

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Address Review

Sort Address

2

(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
The destination is specified.

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until all
destinations are selected.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Preview

2

1

(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.

• To add Cc or Bcc recipients, select a recipient and touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key.
• If "Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), touch the
[Next Address] key before specifying the next destination.
• One-touch keys that cannot be used for broadcast transmission are greyed out to prevent selection.
• If a Scan to FTP (Hyperlink) address is specified in a broadcast transmission, hyperlink e-mail transmission will not
take place.
• If you frequently use broadcasting to send images to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to store those
destinations in a group key.

5

10

15

Condition
Settings
Address Review

3

To

Touch the [Address Review] key.

Cc

AAA AAA

BBB BBB

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

2

Address Entry

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

Global
Address Search

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Sort Address
Preview

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

4

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Auto Reception
Fax Memory:100%

Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.

OK

Address Review

001 AAA AAA

002 BBB BBB

003 KKK KKK

004 LLL LLL

005 MMM MMM

006 NNN NNN

007 OOO OOO

008 PPP PPP

009 QQQ QQQ

010 RRR RRR

011 SSS SSS

012 TTT TTT

To

1

1
2

Cc

If the transmission includes Cc or Bcc destinations, touch the [Cc] tab or the [Bcc] tab to check those destinations.
To cancel a specified destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key.
☞ CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-20)

5-48

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

If Internet fax or fax destinations are included in the broadcast transmission, scanning will take place in [Mono2].
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

5-49

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONS THAT INCLUDE
INTERNET FAX DESTINATIONS
When a broadcast transmission includes both scan mode and Internet Fax mode destinations, the Internet Fax mode
settings (original orientation and other various settings) are given priority. When performing this type of broadcast
transmission, note the information below.
The orientation of Internet fax mode is given priority. When "Rotation Sending Setting"
is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the image is rotated 90 degrees. For
this reason, in some cases the image may not be displayed in the correct orientation.

Original placement orientation

Send size

When the file format is set to [TIFF-S] in Internet fax mode, transmission is only
possible in A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R) size.

Exposure

The Internet fax settings are given priority.
When the file format is set to [TIFF-S] in Internet fax mode and a high resolution
setting is selected in scan mode, the resolution will be changed to [200X200dpi].

Resolution

The compression mode will be changed to the compression mode set in
"Compression Mode at Broadcasting" in the system settings (administrator).

File compression mode
Colour scanning
Special modes

Scanning will take place in Mono2 regardless of the colour mode setting.
This cannot be selected in scan mode, however, if selected in Internet fax mode, it will
also be applied to scan destinations.

2in1

If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes destinations for which an
attachment size limit has been set using "Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
(E-mail)" or "Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)" in
the system settings (administrator), the limit will also apply to destinations for which a
limit is not set. (The limitation setting of Scan to E-mail or Internet fax is given priority.)

Scan file size

Resending to unsuccessful broadcast transmission destinations
The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the
addresses failed, resend the image to those addresses.

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

1
(1)
Print Job
Address

2

Scan to
Set Time

(1)

Status

Broadcast0001

10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting

AAA AAA

10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting

BBB BBB

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

CCC CCC

10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

DDD DDD

10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Display the jobs completed screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
display.

Internet Fax

Fax Job
Pages

(2)

Job Queue
1

Complete

(2) Touch the [Complete] key.

1

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will
appear in each of those modes.

5-50

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1)

(2)

Print Job

Scan to

Address

3

Internet Fax

Fax Job

Start Time

Pages

Status

Broadcast0001

10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000

Broadcast0002

10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK

Broadcast0003

10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK

DDD DDD

10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK

Job Queue
1

Complete

1

Display details on the broadcast
transmission.
(1) Touch the key of the completed broadcast
transmission.
(2) Touch the [Detail] key.

Detail

Call

"Broadcastxxxx" will appear as the address of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared in the
touch panel when scanning ended appears in "xxxx".

Resend the image to the unsuccessful
destinations.

OK

Detail
Broadcast0001

002

Address

Start Time

Status

EEE EEE

10:01 04/01

NG000000

Retry
1

(1) Touch the [Failed] tab.

1
010

FFF FFF

File

4

10:10 04/01

(2) Touch the [Retry] key.

NG000000

Failed

(1)

All Destinations

(2)

• The steps to follow after the [Retry] key is touched differ depending on whether or not the document filing function is
used.
Not using document filing
You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the
steps of the broadcast transmission.
Using document filing
You will return to the document filing resend screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the
document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to rescan the original.)
• If the [All Destinations] tab is touched in (1), all destinations will be displayed. The [Retry] key that appears in the
screen can be touched to resend to all the destinations.

5-51

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-I-Fax)
A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as an Internet fax (PC-I-Fax function). Internet faxes are sent using the
PC-I-Fax function in the same way as documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your
computer and then select the Print command in the software application. Image data for transmission will be created and
sent as an Internet fax.

PC-I-Fax
transmission

For the procedures for using this function, see the PC-Fax driver Help.
• To send an Internet fax using the PC-I-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed and then updated using the
CD-ROM that accompanies the Internet fax expansion kit. For more information, see the Software Setup Guide.
• This function can only be used on a Windows computer.
• This function can only be used for transmission. Internet faxes received on the machine cannot be received to a computer
that is connected to the machine.

5-52

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

IMAGE SETTINGS
Settings for scanning the original are selected in the base screen of each mode. The current state of each setting
appears to the right of the key used to select the setting.
Scan

Internet Fax

Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Scan:
Auto

USB Mem. Scan
Send:

Auto

PC Scan
Auto

(1)
(2)

Text

(3)
PDF

(4)
(5)

Preview

(1)

[Original] key
Touch this key to set the scan size, send size, and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning
settings.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF
AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-54),
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-55)

(2)

(4)

[File Format] key
Touch this key to change the format (file type) of the
scanned image file.
☞ CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT (page 5-64)

(5)

[Colour Mode] key
Touch this key to select the colour mode for scanning.
This key does not appear in Internet fax mode.
☞ CHANGING THE COLOUR MODE (page 5-68)

[Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 5-61)

(3)

[Resolution] key
Touch this key to select the resolution for scanning.
☞ CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-63)

5-53

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN
ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original)
The automatic document feeder can be used to automatically scan both sides of an original.
Scan transmission

2-sided original

Front and reverse sides are scanned

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.

1

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.

☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
(3)
Scan/Original

OK

Scan Size
Auto

Specify the binding style of the 2-sided
original (book or tablet) and the
orientation in which the original is placed.

100% Send Size
A4

(1) Touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the
[2-Sided Tablet] key.

Auto

A book and a tablet are bound as shown below.

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Tablet

2-Sided
Booklet

2

(1)

Book

A J
E
C L
G

(2)

Tablet

A B
E F
K L

(2) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation] key.
If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
transmitted.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
To cancel 2-sided scanning, touch the highlighted key so that it is no longer highlighted.

2-sided scanning automatically turns off after the transmission operation is completed.

5-54

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND
SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce)
When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected and displayed in the base screen.
The size of the placed original is indicated as the scan size, and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the send size.
Scan
Address Book

Internet Fax
Original

Fax

USB Mem. Scan

Scan:

Auto

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

A4

PC Scan

Send:

Auto

Text

Auto

PDF

Preview

In the above screen, the scan size (the placed original) is A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size is auto. For example, if the
scan size is A4 (8-1/2" x 11") and the send size is B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"), the image will be reduced before transmission.
"Scan Size"
Transmission
"Send Size" is set to
B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")

The image is reduced
to B5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
before transmission

A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

• Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected.
☞ STANDARD SIZES (page 5-17)
• When the original size is a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan
size.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 5-56)
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 5-57)

5-55

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.)
If the original is a non-standard size or you wish to change the scan size, touch the [Original] key to specify the original
size manually. Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and follow the steps below.

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.

1

(2) Touch the [Original] key.
The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.

☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)

Scan/Original

Touch the [Scan Size] key.

OK

Scan Size
Auto

100% Send Size
Auto

A4

2
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

(1)

Specify the scan size.

(2)

(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.

OK

Scan/Original

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Auto

Manual

3

Manual

A5

B5R

B4

AB

A5R

A4

A3

Inch

B5

A4R

Long Size

216x340

216x343

Size Input

• If you are sending a long original, touch the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long
original. The maximum width that can be scanned is 39-3/8" (1000 mm) (the maximum height is 11-5/8" (297 mm)).
☞ TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 5-17)
• To specify an inch size for the scan size, touch the [AB

Scan/Original

OK

Scan Size
B5

4

Inch] key to highlight the [Inch] side and then specify the scan size.

Touch the [OK] key.

100% Send Size
Auto

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. In addition, when only scan
destinations are selected for scan transmission or metadata transmission, scanning will take place in Mono2.

5-56

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values)
When scanning a non-standard size original such as a card, follow these steps to specify the original size. The width can
be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8").

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.

1

(2) Touch the [Original] key.
The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.

☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)

Scan/Original

Scan Size
Auto

OK

Touch the [Scan Size] key.

OK

Touch the [Size Input] key.

100% Send Size
Auto

A4

2
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

Scan/Original
Auto

A4

Manual

3

A5

B5R

B4

AB

A5R

A4

A3

Inch

B5

A4R

Long Size

216x340

216x343

Size Input

(1), (2)

(3)

Scan/Original

OK
Cancel

Size Input

4

X

420

(50
mm

432)

Y

297

(50
mm

297)

OK

Enter the scan size (original size).
(1) Touch the X (width) numeric value display
key and enter the width.
(2) Touch the Y (height) numeric value display
key and enter the height.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Touch the [OK] key next to the [Cancel] key to complete
the setting and return to the screen of step 3.

You can also touch the

keys to change the number.

5-57

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Scan/Original

OK

Touch the [OK] key.
The specified size appears in the [Scan Size] key.

Scan Size
X420

Y247

5

Send Size
Auto

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

• When the scan size is specified by numerical values, the send size cannot be specified.
• When the automatic document feeder is used, an original longer than 432 mm (17") can be scanned (maximum width
1000 mm (39-3/8")). In this case, touch the [Long Size] key in the screen of step 3.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 5-56)
☞ TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 5-17)

5-58

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Specifying the send size of the image
Specify the send size as a paper size. If a send size bigger than the scan size is selected, the image will be enlarged. If
a send size smaller than the scan size is selected, the image will be reduced.
• The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by
numerical values.
• The send size cannot be specified when [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode. (The send size is fixed at
A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R).)

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.

1

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.

☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)

Scan/Original

OK

Scan Size
Auto

Touch the [Send Size] key.

100% Send Size
A4

Auto

2
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

(1)

(2)

Scan/Original

OK

3

(1) Touch the desired send size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Auto

Manual

Specify the send size.

Manual

A5

B5R

B4

AB

A5R

A4

A3

Inch

B5

A4R

216x340

216x343

• Depending on the paper size specified for the "Scan Size", it may not be possible to select some sizes for the "Send
Size". Size keys that cannot be specified for the "Send Size" are greyed out to prevent selection.
• To specify an inch size for the send size, touch the [AB
send size.

5-59

Inch] key to highlight the [Inch] side and then specify the

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(2)
Scan/Original

OK

Scan Size
Auto

(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
key.

141% Send Size
A4

Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.

A3

If this setting is not correct when sending an image with a
changed ratio, a suitable image may not be transmitted.

4

Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

2-Sided
Tablet

(1)

The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the "Scan Size" and the "Send Size".

5-60

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE
TYPE
The exposure and original image type can be set appropriately for the original to enable optimum scanning.
Refer the following tables to select appropriate settings.

How to select the exposure
Exposure

When to select
This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original. (Only
when mono2 is set.)

Auto

Manual

1-2

Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.

3

Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).

4-5

Select this setting when the original consists of faint text.

How to select the original image type (Scan mode, USB memory mode and Data entry mode)
Setting

Description

Text/Prtd. Photo

This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and
printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.

Text/Photo

This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and
photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.

Text

Use this mode for regular text documents.

Photo

Use this mode to scan photos.

Printed Photo

This mode is best for scanning printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or
catalogue.

Map

This mode is best for scanning the colour shading and fine details found on most maps.

Select the mode and display the exposure settings screen.

1

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Exposure] key.

☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
Read the displayed message and touch
the [OK] key.

When Fax/I-Fax address is included,
exposure setting shared among Fax/
I-Fax/ Scanner mode is selected.

2

This message does not appear in USB memory mode or
Internet fax mode. Go to the next step.
OK

If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes both scan mode destinations and Internet fax destinations, the
exposure settings for Internet fax mode will have priority.

5-61

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode

(2)

(1)

(3)

Select the exposure and original image
type.
(1) Select the original image type.
Touch the original image type key that matches the
original image type.

OK

Scan/Exposure
Auto

(2) Adjust the exposure with the

1

3

keys.

Original Image Type

Manual

5

Text

Text/
Prtd.Photo

Text/Photo

Printed
Photo

Photo

Map

The exposure darkens when the
key is touched,
and lightens when the
key is touched.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Moiré Reduction

3

Internet fax mode

(1) Touch the [Manual] key.
(1)

(2)

(3)

(2) Adjust the exposure with the

The exposure darkens when the
key is touched,
and lightens when the
key is touched.

OK

Internet Fax/Exposure

keys.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Auto

Manual

1

3

5

• In Internet fax mode, the original image type and moiré reduction cannot be selected.
• To reduce the occurrence of line patterns (moiré effect) when scanning printed matter, touch the [Moiré Reduction]
checkbox so that a checkmark
appears.

When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the exposure setting can be changed each time you change
pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun.
(However, when "Job Build" is used in the special modes, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is
inserted.)
System Settings (Administrator): Default Exposure Settings
This is used to change the default exposure setting.

5-62

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE RESOLUTION
The resolution setting can be selected.

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.

1

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Resolution] key.

☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
Select the resolution.
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode

(1)

(2)

(1) Touch the key of the desired resolution.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

OK

Scan/Resolution

100X100dpi
200X200dpi
300X300dpi
400X400dpi
600X600dpi

2

Internet fax mode

(1)

(2)
OK

Internet Fax/Resolution

200X100dpi
200X200dpi
200X400dpi
Half Tone
400X400dpi
600X600dpi

In Internet fax mode, the [Half Tone] key can be touched to select halftone (except when [200X100dpi] is selected).
When the original has many gradations of light and dark such as a photo or colour illustration, halftone provides a
more attractive image than regular transmission.

5-63

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

How to select the resolution
For normal text originals, 200X200dpi (200X100dpi in Internet fax mode) produces an image that is sufficiently legible.
For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600X600dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high
resolution setting will result in a large file, and if the file is too large, transmission may not be possible. In this event,
reduce the number of pages scanned or take other measures to decrease the file size.
☞ CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT
Specifying the send size of the image (page 5-59)
• When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the resolution setting can be changed each time you
change pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has
begun. (However, when "Job Build" is used in the special modes, the resolution can be changed each time a new set of
originals is inserted.)
• When [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode, only [200X100dpi] or [200X200dpi] can be selected.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Resolution Setting
This is used to change the default resolution setting.

CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT
Changing the format
(Scan mode, USB memory mode and Data entry mode)
The file format (file type and compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image can be changed at the
time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number of pages per file can
be changed.
The file format for sending a scanned image is specified when the destination is stored in a one-touch key; however, you can
change the format at the time of transmission.

Select the mode and display the image settings screen.

1

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [File Format] key.

☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
Read the displayed message and touch
the [OK] key.

Select a file format to apply it to
all scan destinations.

The message does not appear in USB memory mode. Go to
the next step.

2
OK

5-64

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Set the format.
● Scanning in Mono2
(1)

(1) Select the file type.

(2)

To send a file using Encrypt PDF, touch the [Encry.]
checkbox to select it (
).

OK

Scan/File Format
File Type
PDF

Compression Mode
Encry.

(2) Select the compression mode.

None

TIFF

MH (G3)

XPS

MMR (G4)

B/W
Colour/Grey

Programmed
Specified Pages per File

(1-99)

● Scanning in colour/greyscale
(2)

(3)

File Type

3

When [Colour/Grey] is highlighted, [Colour/Grey] mode is
selected.

OK

Scan/File Format
Compression Ratio

PDF

Encry.

Low

TIFF

High

Medium

XPS

(1) Touch the indicated key to select [Colour/Grey] mode.

(1)

U-Fine

(2) Select the file type.
• To send a file using Encrypt PDF, touch the [Encry.]
checkbox to select it (
).
• When Enhanced compression kit is installed, the [High] and
[U-Fine] checkboxes appear. To suppress image quality
deterioration and reduce the data size of a file to be
transmitted, Compact PDF can be selected. [U-Fine] can only
be selected when Compact PDF is set.

B/W
High

Colour/Grey

JPEG
Programmed
Specified Pages per File

(1-99)

(3) Select the compression ratio.
• High compression results in a smaller file size,
however, the image quality is slightly degraded.
• When [High] is selected in the file format settings, the
compression ratio cannot be selected.
•
•
•
•
•

The [Programmed] key does not appear in USB memory mode.
When this screen is displayed, the setting screen of [B/W] mode initially appears.
The format setting of [B/W] mode is the file format when the colour mode is set to [Mono2].
The format setting of [Colour/Grey] mode is the file format when the colour mode is set to [Full Colour] or [Greyscale].
The file type of [B/W] mode and the file type of [Colour/Grey] mode are linked. The file type cannot be set separately
for each. (When [JPEG] is selected for [Colour/Grey] mode, [TIFF] is automatically selected for [B/W] mode.)
• Note the following when the file format is set to Compact PDF ([PDF] is selected and the [High] checkbox is set to
):
- When Compact PDF is set for one address in a broadcast transmission, the file will be sent as a Compact PDF
file to all scanner addresses.
- When Compact PDF format or Compact PDF (Ultra Fine) format is set for one address in a broadcast transmission, the
file will be sent in Compact PDF (Ultra Fine) format to all scanner addresses.
- If a fax destination is specified or the resolution is set after Compact PDF is set, the Compact PDF setting will be
cancelled, the file format will be [PDF], and the compression ratio will be [High].
- If Compact PDF is set when a resolution setting has been specified in scanner (or other) mode, the resolution
setting will be cancelled and the Compact PDF resolution will be used for transmission.
- When Compact PDF is selected, [Resolution] cannot be changed while waiting for the next original or in
[Configure] in the job build settings.
- Resolution is 300 x 300 dpi.

5-65

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(3)
OK

Scan/File Format
File Type
PDF

Compression Ratio
Low

Encry.

TIFF

Medium

High

XPS

B/W
High

U-Fine

JPEG
Programmed

4

Specified Pages per File

(1)

1

(1-99)

Colour/Grey

To change the number of pages per file,
enter the number of pages and exit the
format settings.
(1) Touch the [Specified Pages per File]
checkbox so that a checkmark
appears.
(2) Set the number of pages per file with the
keys.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.

(2)

• When a checkmark does not appear in the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox
scanned pages.

, one file is created for all

• When [Specified Pages per File] is selected, consecutive numbers are added to the created file names.
• When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, one file is created for each page (a file cannot be created for multiple
pages). For this reason, the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox does not appear.

• When the file format is set to Encrypt PDF ([PDF] is selected in the format settings screen and the [Encry.] checkbox is set
to
), a screen prompting you to enter a password will appear when the [START] key is pressed to start scan send
transmission.
• Touch the [Entry] key in the displayed screen to open the keyboard screen. Enter a password (maximum of 32 characters)
and touch the [OK] key. Scanning and transmission will begin.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial File Format Setting
This sets the default file format setting for scanner transmission.

5-66

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Changing the format (Internet fax mode)
The file format for sending an Internet fax is normally set to [TIFF-F]. If the destination Internet fax machine does not
support full mode (it only supports simple mode), follow the steps below to select [TIFF-S].

Switch to Internet fax mode and display the file format settings screen.

1

(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
(2) Touch the [File Format] key.

☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
(1)

(2)
OK

Internet Fax/File Format

Select the file format.
(1) Touch the key of the desired format.
If you selected [TIFF-F], select the compression mode.

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

2

File Type
TIFF-S

Compression Mode
TIFF-F

MH (G3)
MMR (G4)

When [TIFF-S] is selected, the transmission settings are restricted as follows:
• Resolution:

The selections are [200X100dpi] and [200X200dpi]. If [TIFF-S] is selected after [200X400dpi],
[400X400dpi] or [600X600dpi] is selected, the resolution automatically changes to [200X200dpi].

• Send size:

Always A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R). If [TIFF-S] is selected after the send size is changed, the send size is
automatically changed to A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R). If a size larger than A4 (8-1/2" x 11") is scanned, the size
will automatically be reduced to A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R). When this format is included in a broadcast
transmission, the image will be transmitted to all destinations at A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R).

• Special modes: When a ratio setting is selected and the original size is entered, Dual Page Scan, Card Shot, 2in1, and
Mixed Size Original cannot be used.
System Settings (Administrator): Compression Setting
This is used to set the default compression mode for Internet fax transmission.

5-67

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE COLOUR MODE
This procedure is used to change the colour mode used to scan the original when the [START] key is pressed.
This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.

Mode
Auto

Scanning method

Greyscale

The machine detects whether the original is colour or black and white and automatically selects full
colour or black and white (Mono2 or Greyscale) scanning.

Mono2
Full Colour

The original is scanned in full colour. This mode is best for full colour originals such as catalogues.

Greyscale

The colours in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of grey (greyscale).

Mono2

Colours in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for text-only originals.

Select the mode and display the colour mode settings screen.

1

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Colour Mode] key.

☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
Read the displayed message and touch
the [OK] key.

Image will be sent in [Mono2]
if Fax or I-Fax destination is included.

A message does not appear in USB memory mode. Go to the
next step.

2

OK

When a broadcast transmission is performed using mixed send modes, the image is sent in Mono2.

Scan/Colour Mode

3

OK

Auto

Greyscale

Full Colour

Mono2

Select the colour mode.
(1) Touch the key of the desired colour mode.
If [Auto] is selected, select whether or not the original will
be scanned in greyscale or mono2 when it is detected that
the original is a black & white original. Note that if the file
format is set to JPEG, scanning will take place in
greyscale.

Greyscale

Mono2

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
(1)

(2)

• System Settings (Administrator): Default Colour Mode Settings
The default colour mode can be changed.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode
This prohibits selection of the black and white original scanning setting when [Auto] is selected for the colour mode.

5-68

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview)
If you touch the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the scanned image in the touch panel before
sending the image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
Depending on the size of the transmission data, part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen in the touch
panel.

1

Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the program.

Scan

2

Internet Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Fax
Scan:
Auto

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Send:

Touch the [Preview] key to highlight it.

PC Scan
Auto

Text

PDF

Preview

Select transmission settings and touch the [START] key.

3

"Originals are being read" appears while the originals are being scanned, and when scanning is finished, the preview screen
appears on the touch panel. Transmission will not take place until you touch the [Start Sending] key in the preview screen.

Check the preview image and then touch
the [Start Sending] key.

Preview
B/W

Function Rev.

4

Transmission begins.
For information on the preview screen, see "PREVIEW CHECK
SCREEN" (page 5-70).

Display Rotation

0001

/0010

Start
Sending

System settings (administrator): Default Preview
You can specify whether or not the [Preview] key function will be enabled in the base screens of the image send modes and
in the address book.

5-69

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the preview check screen.

Preview
B/W
Sender Info
Function Rev.

(1)

(3)
(4)
(5)

Display Rotation

(6)
0001

Start
Sending

/0010

(7)

(2)
(1)

(3)

Preview image

(2)

(4)

Change page keys

[Sender Info] key
When Internet fax mode is selected, touch to display the
sender information for I-fax own address send.
This key can only be touched when the entire preview
image is displayed in the preview screen.

A preview of the scanned original appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and slide
it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to scroll.)

[Function Rev.] key
Touch to check special mode settings or scan settings for
two-sided originals.

When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.

(5)

• Page number display:
This shows the total number of pages
and the current page number. You can
touch the current page number key and
enter a number with the numeric keys
to go to that page number.

Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
"4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.

(6)

"Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.

(7)

[Start Sending] key
Touch to begin transmission.

• A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
• The preview image reflects certain scanning and special mode settings.
Settings reflected in the preview image are as follows:
Scanning settings: Original
Special modes: Erase, Dual Page Scan, Card Shot, 2in1, Suppress Background, Mixed Size Original

5-70

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SPECIAL MODES
This section explains special modes that can be used in scan send mode.

SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is touched in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. Touch the
key to switch between the two screens. When the [OK] key is
touched in the special modes screen, the selected settings are entered and the base screen reappears.

☞ Internet fax mode (page 5-72)

Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode
1st screen

2nd screen
OK

Scan/Special Modes

(1)

(2)

(3)

Program

(4)

Timer

(7)
(10)

Job
Build
Original
Count

Erase

(5)

Suppress
Background

(8)

Mixed Size
Original

(11)

(1)

[Program] key*1, 2

(2)

[Erase] key

(6)
(9)

(13)

Dual Page
Scan

Card Shot

2

Slow Scan
Mode

(12)
File

Quick File

☞ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE

(8)

☞ SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE

(9)

ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count) (page 5-92)
(11) [File] key*1
Touch this to use the File function of document filing mode.
(12) [Quick File] key*1
Touch this to use the Quick File function of document
filing mode.

[Card Shot] key

☞ SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A

(13) [Verif. Stamp] key*3

☞ STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif. Stamp)

SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) (page 5-83)
(7)

(page 5-94)

[Job Build] key

☞ SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job

☞ SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
☞ CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED

(Suppress Background) (page 5-81)
(6)

[Slow Scan Mode] key

(10) [Original Count] key*1

[Suppress Background] key

☞ WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE

☞ SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES

(page 5-90)

key*1

☞ SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME

[Mixed Size Original] key

(Mixed Size Original) (page 5-88)

[Dual Page Scan] key

(Timer Transmission) (page 5-79)
(5)

Skip
2

☞ STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) (page 5-73)

[Timer]

(14) Blank Page

2

PAGES (Dual Page Scan) (page 5-77)
(4)

Verif.
Stamp

1

IMAGE (Erase) (page 5-75)
(3)

OK

Scan/Special Modes

(14) [Blank Page Skip] key

☞ ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A

Build) (page 5-86)

TRANSMISSION (Blank Page Skip) (page 5-96)
*1 Does not appear in USB memory mode.
*2 Does not appear in data entry mode.
*3 Does not appear when the stamp unit is not installed.
In USB memory mode, this appears in the 1st screen.

5-71

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Internet fax mode
The keys explained below can only be used in Internet fax mode. The other keys are the same as those explained in
"Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode" (page 5-71).

1st screen

2nd screen
OK

Internet Fax/Special Modes

Program

Timer

Job
Build
Original
Count

(1)

Erase

(1)

2in1

Mixed Size
Original

File

Verif.
Stamp

Dual Page
Scan

Card Shot

OK

Internet Fax/Special Modes

(2) Transaction
Report

1

2

2

2

Slow Scan
Mode

Quick File

[2in1] key

☞ SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (2in1)

(2)

[Transaction Report] key

☞ CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE

(page 5-98)

TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report)
(page 5-101)

Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.

[OK] key and [Cancel] key
In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:
Scan/Special Modes
Cancel

Erase

OK

(A)

OK

(B)
(C)

Edge
Erase

Centre
Erase

Edge+Centre
Erase

Edge

10

(0-20)
mm

Side Erase

(A) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the base screen.
(B) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the special mode menu screen. Touch this key when you wish
to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special mode menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special mode menu
screen.

5-72

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs)
A destination, original settings, and functions can be stored in a program. When you wish to use those settings to send
an image, they can be retrieved with ease.
For example, suppose A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are scanned into a file and sent to each branch office once a month.
(1) The same documents are sent to each branch office
(2) Each page of a bound document is successively transmitted
(3) Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmission
When a job program is not stored

When a job program is stored

Enter the address of each branch office.

Touch a stored program key.

Select Dual Page Scan.

Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.

Select Erase settings.

Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Considerable time is required to send the documents each
month because the above settings must be selected.
In addition, mistakes may occasionally be made when
selecting the settings, so incorrect transmissions may occur.

When a program is used, settings are selected with ease by
simply pressing the stored key.
In addition, transmission takes place based on the stored
settings so there are no chances for mistakes.

• Programs are stored, edited, and deleted using "Address Control" in the system settings. See "Program" (page
7-22) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
• Programs can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Job Programs] and then [Image Send] in the Web page menu.
• The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can
be used repeatedly for transmission.
• The following settings can be stored in programs.
Image send mode: Scan, Internet fax
Destinations
Image settings: Original scan size, Image orientation, duplex scanning, exposure, resolution
Special modes: Erase, Dual Page Scan, Suppress Background, Job Build, Mixed Size Original, Slow Scan Mode, Original
Count, Verif. Stamp, Blank Page Skip, 2in1
Preview
• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program.
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode or data entry mode.

1

Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the program.

5-73

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Select the special modes.

2

(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Program] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
(1)

Retrieve the stored program.

(2)

(1) Touch the desired program key.

OK

Program

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

3

Program 1

Program 2

Program 3

Program 4

Program 5

Program 6

Program 7

Program 8

Program 9

Program 10

Program 11

Program 12

1
2

Select additional settings.

Program:Program 1
xxx@xx.xxx.com
Scan

Internet Fax
Original
Exposure

4

Fax
Scan:
Auto

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

Send:

When a program is used, the following settings can be
additionally specified:
• Image Settings: Original scan size*, send size, file format,
colour mode
• Send settings
• Special modes: Timer Transmission, Card Shot, File, Quick
File, Transaction Report
* When stored in the program, this cannot be additionally
specified.

PC Scan
Auto

Text

PDF

Preview

• The screen that appears will vary depending on the destination stored in the program.
• The mode cannot be changed here.
• Functions stored in the program cannot be cancelled here.

Press the [START] Key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

5-74

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows on images produced when scanning thick originals or books. (This function erases
the parts of the image where shadows tend to form. The function does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows.)
Scanning a thick book
Not using the erase
function

Using the erase
function

Shadows appear here
Shadows appear in the
image.

No shadows appear.

Erase modes
Edge Erase

Centre Erase

Edge + Centre Erase

Side Erase

• Shadows at the edges of the original can also be erased when the automatic document feeder is used.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.

3

(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Erase] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

5-75

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1)

(2)

Select the erase settings.

(3)

(1) Touch the desired erase mode.

OK

Scan/Special Modes
Cancel

Erase

Select one of the 4 erase modes.
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.

OK

Erase
Edge
Erase

Centre
Erase

Edge+Centre
Erase

Edge
Side Erase

10

OK

Cancel

(0-20)
mm

Erase position
for Original Side 2

Up
Side Erase

Left

Right
Same Side as
Side 1
Different Side
from Side 1

Down

4

Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase
and make sure that a checkmark (
) appears.
When performing two-sided scanning, set the erase edge
on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the settings, touch the [OK] key.

(2) Set the erasure width with the

keys.

0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1") can be entered.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then press the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

When the erase function is used, erase takes place at the edges of the original image. If you also use a reduction or an
enlargement setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. For example, if the erase width setting is
20 mm (1") and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 10 mm (1/2").
To cancel the erase setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment
The default erase width setting is linked to the copy mode system setting, and can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 1"). The
factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2").

5-76

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan)
The left and right sides of an original can be scanned as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to
successively scan each page of a book or other bound document.
Example: Scanning the left and right pages of a book

Book or bound document

The pages are scanned as two separate pages.
Example:
Original scan size
A3 (11" x 17") x 1 page

Transmitted image
A4 (8-1/2" x 11") x 2 pages

• When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• The send size cannot be changed.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

Place the original face down on the
document glass.
Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size
mark .
Size mark

Centreline of
A3 original

1

Centreline of
11" x 17" original
The page on this
side is scanned first.
Centreline of original
A3
(11" x 17")

2

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

5-77

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
(1)

(1) Press the [Dual Page Scan] key so that it is
highlighted.

OK

Scan/Special Modes

4

Select Dual Page Scan.

(2)

Program

Erase

Timer

Suppress
Background

Dual Page
Scan

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
1

Job
Build
Original
Count

Card Shot

Slow Scan
Mode

Mixed Size
Original

File

2

Quick File

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

• To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function. (Note, however, that
"Centre Erase" and "Edge + Centre Erase" cannot be used.)
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.
To cancel the dual page scan setting...
Touch the [Dual Page Scan] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is no longer highlighted, and touch the [OK] key.

5-78

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer Transmission)
This function lets you specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place.
Transmission begins automatically at the specified time.

Set a transmission to
take place at 20:00

At 20:00, the transmission
begins automatically

• When a timer transmission is stored, keep the main power switch in the "on" position. If the main power switch is in the "off"
position at the specified time, transmission will not take place.
• When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not
possible to leave the document in the auto document feeder or on the document glass and have it scanned at the specified
time of transmission.
• Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, special modes, etc.) are automatically cleared after the
transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original and settings are stored
on the built-in hard drive.)
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode.

1
2

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.

3

(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Timer] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

5-79

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1)

(2)

Set the time with the

(3)

(1) Specify the day.

OK

Scan/Special Modes
Cancel

Timer

If you do not wish to specify a day, select [---]. In this
case, transmission will begin when the time specified in
(2) arrives.

OK

Time

Day of the Week

10

hh.

00

keys.

(2) Specify the time (hour, minute)

mm.

Select the time in 24-hour format.
You can also directly touch a numeric display key to
change the setting with the numeric keys.

4

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
When this screen is opened, the setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CLEAR ALL] key
(
) to cancel the operation. Correct the time in the system settings and then perform the timer transmission procedure.
☞ CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME (page 5-5)

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

The original is scanned into memory. The original cannot be scanned at a specified time.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

• The time can be specified up to a week in advance.
• Up to 94 timer transmissions can be stored at once.
• If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer transmission will begin after that
transmission is finished.
• Other transmissions can be performed as usual after a timer transmission is stored.
• A timer transmission can be deleted in the job status screen.
• If a timer transmission is given priority in the job status screen, the time specification is cancelled. The transmission will
begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.
☞GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN TRANSMISSION JOB (page 5-110)
To cancel timer transmission...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

5-80

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE
(Suppress Background)
This feature is used to suppress light background areas.
Level [+]

The lightness level at which
suppression takes place
can be adjusted.

Level [-]
• This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.

3

(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Suppress Background] key.
Read the message that appears and then touch the [OK] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

5-81

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1)

Select the suppress background setting.

(2)

(1) Adjust the background suppression level.

OK

Scan/Special Modes
Cancel

Suppress Background

Touch the [+] key to suppress only faint background.
Touch the [-] key to suppress faint to dark background.

OK

Light areas of the original may be suppressed as background.

4

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
1

3

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

When the original is scanned in [Mono2], the suppress background function will not operate.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

To cancel the background suppression setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

5-82

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO
A SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot)
This function lets you send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side
separately.
Scanned image
Originals
Front

Transmission

Back
Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size landscape scan transmission
size portrait scan transmission

• When using card shot, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

Place the original face down on the
document glass.

1

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.

3

(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Card Shot] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

5-83

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1)

(B)

(A)

Specify the original size.

(2)

(1) Enter the original size.

OK

Scan/Special Modes

X

86

(25~210)
mm

Y

54

(25~210)
mm

• Touch the X (width) numeric value display key and
enter the width.
• Touch the Y (height) numeric value display key and
enter the height.
(A) To return the original size to the default size, touch the
[Size Reset] key.
(B) To automatically enlarge or reduce the image to fit the
send size, touch the [Fit to Send Size] key. If you wish
to scan the original at the entered original size, there
is no need to touch this key.

OK

Cancel

Card Shot

Fit to
Send Size

Size Reset

4

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Y

X

• You can also touch the

Keys to change the number.

• The send size will be selected automatically based on the entered original size.
• After selecting Card Shot, you can touch the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the
send size. In this case, the screen of this step appears when you touch the scan size key. For the procedure for
setting the send size, see "Specifying the send size of the image" (page 5-59).

Press the [START] key to scan the front side of the card.

5

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

Turn the card over and Press the [START] key to scan the reverse side of the
card.

6

Before scanning the back of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key in the touch panel to change the exposure.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

5-84

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

7

Configure

Read-End

If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key to change the exposure,
resolution, scan size, and send size.

The ratio cannot be specified and "Rotation Sending Setting" cannot be selected.
To cancel Card Shot...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.

5-85

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE
(Job Build)
This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic
document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. Use this function when the number of originals that
you wish to scan exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be inserted in the automatic document feeder at
once.
When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you
select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.
Originals
1

Originals are
scanned in
separate sets.

Transmission

1

1

101

• Up to 999 pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

1

1

Indicator
line

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

5-86

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1)

(1) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.

OK

Scan/Special Modes

4

Select job build mode.

(2)

Dual Page
Scan

Program

Erase

Timer

Suppress
Background

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
1

Job
Build
Original
Count

Card Shot

2

Slow Scan
Mode

Mixed Size
Original

File

Quick File

Press the [START] key to scan the first set of originals.

5

To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

Insert the next set of originals and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.

6
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.

Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original.
(Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].

Configure

Read-End

7
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when Job Build is used in combination with "2in1" in the special modes, only the exposure
can be changed when scanning each even-numbered page of the original pages.

If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be cancelled.
To cancel the job build function....
Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.

5-87

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original)
This feature lets you scan originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals
mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the
size of each original.
Originals
(B4 (8-1/2" x 14") original mixed
in with A3 (11" x 17") originals)

Files created
1st page

B4
B4

A3

Scanned in at B4
(8-1/2" x 14")
size

2nd to 4th pages

A3
Scanned in at
A3 (11" x 17")
size

This feature can only be used with the following combinations of original sizes:
• A3 and B4
• A3 and B5
• B4 and A4
• A4 and B5
• A4R and B5
• B4 and A4R
• B4 and A5
• B5 and A5
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14"
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13"
• 11" x 17" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

1

Place the originals with
the corners aligned
together in the far left
corner.
B4
(8-1/2" x 14")

B4
(8-1/2" x 14")

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far
left corner of the document feeder tray.

A3 (11" x 17")

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

5-88

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Select the mixed size original setting.

(2)

(1)

(1) Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key so that
it is highlighted.

OK

Scan/Special Modes

Program

Erase

Timer

Suppress
Background

Dual Page
Scan

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

1

4

Job
Build
Original
Count

Card Shot

2

Slow Scan
Mode

Mixed Size
Original

File

Quick File

If an original scan size has been specified, a message will appear when the [Mixed Size Original] key is touched. To
enable the Mixed Size Original setting, change the scan size setting to auto and then touch the [Mixed Size Original]
key again.

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

• Once mixed size originals has been selected, an original scan size cannot be specified.
• Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled.
To cancel the Mixed Size Original setting...
Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.

5-89

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS
(Slow Scan Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.

A

A

B
C
D

B

C

D

When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

1

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Adjust the original guides slowly.

1
If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

5-90

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1)

(1) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.

OK

Scan/Special Modes

4

Select slow scan mode.

(2)

Program

Erase

Timer

Suppress
Background

Dual Page
Scan

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

1

Job
Build
Original
Count

Card Shot
Slow Scan
Mode

Mixed Size
Original

File

2

Quick File

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

• When this function is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.
• Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled.
To cancel slow scan mode...
Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
This is used to have scanning always take place in slow scan mode.

5-91

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count)
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before transmission. Checking the number of
scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode.
• The setting can be enabled separately for each mode.

2

Indicator
line

Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.

1

1

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
(2)

(1)

OK

Scan/Special Modes

4

Program

Erase

Timer

Suppress
Background

Dual Page
Scan
1

Job
Build
Original
Count

Mixed Size
Original

File

Card Shot

Select the original count function.
(1) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

2

Slow Scan
Mode

Quick File

5-92

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.

5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.

(A)

(B)

XX pages of original have been scanned.
Send the scanned data?

Cancel

6

(P.x)

OK

When scanning ends, check the number
of original sheets scanned and touch the
[OK] key.
Transmission will begin.
• When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will
appear after the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The message on the screen shows the number of sheets
scanned in (A), and the number of pages (sheet sides)
scanned in (B). For example, if both sides of one original
sheet are scanned, "1" will appear in (A) and "2" will appear
in (B).

If this step is not performed for one minute while the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and
settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the
image will not be reserved for transmission.
If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets...
Touch the [Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings
and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert the original sheets in the automatic document feeder again and
press the [START] key to re-scan.

When a broadcast transmission is performed, if the original count function is selected in any of the modes, the function will
operate for all destinations.
To cancel the Original Sheet Count function...
Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Original Count Setting
This can be enabled to have the number of original sheets always counted. The setting can be enabled separately for each
mode.

5-93

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif. Stamp)
This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all
originals were correctly scanned.
Position of stamp
Originals are
scanned

1

1

An "O" mark is
stamped
in fluorescent
pink.

Originals

• To use this function, the optional stamp unit must be installed.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

1

Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.

1

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

5-94

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(2)

(1)

Scan/Special Modes

Verif.
Stamp

Select "Verif. Stamp".

(3)

(1) Touch the
screens.

OK

Blank Page
Skip

keys to switch through the

(2) Touch the [Verif. Stamp] key so that it is
highlighted.

4

(3) Touch the [OK] key.

Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.

5
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

• When two-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice.
• If an error occurs during scanning, an original that was not scanned may be stamped.
• When the "O" mark that is stamped on originals starts to become faint, replace the stamp cartridge. For the procedure for
replacing the stamp cartridge, see "REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE" (page 1-75) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
To cancel the stamp function...
Touch the [Verif. Stamp] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Verification Stamp
This setting is used to always have originals stamped.

5-95

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A
TRANSMISSION (Blank Page Skip)
When blank pages are included in originals scanned, the blank pages can be detected and automatically eliminated
from transmission.
Blank pages are not sent

Blank pages
Send

• This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
• Depending on the original, some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not sent, and some
pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus sent.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.

1

Original size
detector
1

1

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

2
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.

Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.

3

(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(4) Touch the [Blank Page Skip] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)

5-96

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(1)

Set blank page skipping.

(2)

(1) Select the type of blank page to be skipped.

OK

Scan/Special Modes
Cancel

Blank Page Skip

Select from two types.
To include blank pages on which the content on the
opposite side shows through, touch [Skip Blank and Back
Shadow].

OK

4
Skip Blank Page

Skip Blank and Back Shadow

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original and press the [START] key. When all
originals have been scanned, touch the [Read-End] key on the touch panel. A beep sounds and the transmission is
completed.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will take place.

(A)

When scanning is completed, check the
number of original sheets and the
number of sheets to be sent, and touch
[OK].

(B)

XX pages of original have (P.x)
been scanned.
YY sheets of original
will be Perform the job?

Cancel

6

Scanning begins.
• When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will
appear after the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The number of scanned original sheets appears in (A), the
number of scanned sides in (B), and the number of sheets to
be sent excluding blank pages in (C). For example, if five
original sheets that include two blank pages are scanned by
duplex scanning, (A) will show "5", (B) will show "10", and (C)
will show "8".

OK

(C)

If this step is not performed for one minute while the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and
settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the
image will not be reserved for transmission.

To cancel the Blank Page Skip function...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System settings (administrator): Original Feeding Mode
Use this setting to always skip blank pages when sending.

5-97

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
(2in1)
Two original pages can be reduced to half their original size and sent together as a single page.
Portrait-oriented originals
Transmission

1

1

2

2

Landscape-oriented originals
Transmission
1

1

2

2

This function cannot be used in scan mode, USB memory mode, or data entry mode.

Place the original.
When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.

Originals

Document feeder tray

Document glass

Place the originals face up.

Place the originals face down.

Portrait orientation

1

1

1

1

2

Landscape orientation

1

1

2

1

2

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)

5-98

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Select the special modes.

3

(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
(2)

(1)

OK

Internet Fax/Special Modes

4

1
Timer

Scan

Address Entry
Send Settings

File

Internet Fax

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

2

Quick File

Fax

Original

(1) Touch the [2in1] key so that it is
highlighted.

Slow Scan
Mode

Mixed Size
Original

Original
Count

Address Book

Card Shot

2in1

Job
Build

5

Dual Page
Scan

Erase

Program

Select 2in1.

Scan:

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

A4

PC Scan

Touch the [Original] key.

Auto

Send:

Auto

Exposure
Resolution

200X100dpi

Address Review

File Format

TIFF-F

File

Special Modes

Quick File
I-Fax Manual
Reception

Preview

(2)
OK

Internet Fax/Original

Scan Size
Auto

(1) Touch the "Image Orientation" key with the
same orientation as the original image.

100% Send Size
A4

Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.

Auto

If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
transmitted.

6
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

2-Sided
Tablet

(1)

5-99

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Press the [START] key.

7

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
The [Configure] key can be touched in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan
size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be
changed.)
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

• Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size.
• The 2in1 function cannot be used when the original is other than A4, B5, or A5 (8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2") size.
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.
To cancel 2in1...
Touch the [2in1] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.

5-100

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT
(Transaction Report)
A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when an Internet fax transmission fails or when a broadcast
transmission is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of
other party, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
☞ INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN (page 5-111)
This function cannot be used in scan mode, USB memory mode, or data entry mode.

Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the system settings; however, you can temporarily select
different conditions for a transmission. To change the transaction report print conditions at the time of transmission,
follow the steps below.

1
2

Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.

Specify the destination.
☞ ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.

3

(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the

keys to switch through the screens.

(4) Touch the [Transaction Report] key.

☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
(1)

(2)
OK

Internet Fax/Special Modes
Cancel

Transaction Report

Always Print

4

Print at Error

OK

Select print conditions.
(1) Select the print conditions.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

Do not Print

Print Original Image

• The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows:
"Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails.
"Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails.
"Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report.
• When the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected
, part of the transmitted original is included on the
transaction report.

5-101

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Press the [START] key.

5

Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

) to cancel the operation.

For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.
To cancel the transaction report setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
• System Settings (Administrator): Transaction Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing transaction reports.
The factory default setting is
.
Single Sending: Print Out All Report/ Print Out Error Report Only /No Printed Report
Print Out All Report /Print Out Error Report Only/No Printed Report
Broadcasting:
Receiving:
Print Out All Report/Print Out Error Report Only/ No Printed Report
• System Settings (Administrator): Original Print on Transaction Report
This is used to have part of the transmitted original printed on the transaction report.

5-102

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING THE STATUS OF
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS
This section explains how to check the status of reserved transmission jobs and received Internet faxes.

JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Reserved transmissions and received Internet faxes are referred to as jobs here.
Example: Pressing the tab in scan mode
Print Job
Address

JOB STATUS

Scan to

Internet Fax

Fax Job

Set Time

Pages

Status

1

Broadcast0001

10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting

2

AAA AAA

10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting

3

BBB BBB

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

4

CCC CCC

10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Job Queue
1

Complete

1

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

The job status display is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the job
status screen.
Scan
Address Book

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Auto

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

Text

PDF

Preview
Sending

5-103

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of two screens: the job queue screen that shows reserved jobs and the job currently in
progress, and the completed jobs screen. To switch between the two screens, touch the job status screen selector key
((2) below).
Job queue screen

Complete screen
(1)

Print Job
Address

Scan to

(1)

Pages

Print Job

Internet Fax

Fax Job

Set Time

Address

Status

1

Broadcast0001

10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting

2

AAA AAA

10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting

3

BBB BBB

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

4

CCC CCC

10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Job Queue
1

Complete

(2)

1

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

(6)

Mode switch tabs

Broadcast0001

10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000
10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK

1

Broadcast0003

10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK

1

DDD DDD

10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK

(5)

Job Queue
Complete

(2)

Detail

(7)

Call

(8)

Job status screen selector key

(7)

Job queue screen [Detail] key

Job queue screen
Jobs are shown as keys in the order they were reserved.
Each key shows information on the job and its current
status.
☞ Job key display (page 5-105)
Completed jobs screen [Detail] key
This shows detailed information on the results of
completed broadcast transmissions and jobs that used
the document filing function. Select the key of the desired
job in the completed jobs screen (9) and then touch the
[Detail] key.
☞ CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 5-108)

This shows detailed information on broadcast
transmission jobs and the status of jobs. Select the key of
the desired job in the job queue screen (6) and then
touch the [Detail] key.
(4)

Status

(9)

Touch this key to switch between the job queue screen
and the completed jobs screen.
(3)

Pages

(3)
(4)
(5)

Use these tabs to change the job status screen mode.
(2)

Internet Fax

Fax Job

Start Time

Broadcast0002

(6)

(1)

Scan to

[Priority] key
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
☞ GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN TRANSMISSION
JOB (page 5-110)

(8)

[Stop/Delete] key

(9)

[Call] key
Touch this key to call up and use a transmission or
reception job stored with the document filing function.

Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
☞ STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED
OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-109)

5-104

Completed jobs screen
This shows up to 99 completed transmission or reception
jobs in each mode. A description of the job and the result
(status) are shown.
Jobs that used document filing function, broadcast
transmission jobs, and received Internet fax forwarding
jobs are indicated as keys.

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Job key display
The following information is shown in the job queue keys and completed job keys that appear in the job status screen.
Direct SMTP information is also included in Internet fax transmission/reception information.

AAA AAA

3
(1) (2)
(1)

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

(3)

(4)

Displays the number (position) of the job in the job queue.
When the job currently being transmitted is finished, the
job moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.

(2)

(4)

Icon

(6)

Time reserved/Time started
In the job queue screen, the date and time the job was
reserved. In the completed jobs screen, the date and
time the job was started.

(5)

Mode icon
This indicates the type of job. In the completed jobs
screen, a colour bar appears next to the icon to indicate
whether the job was executed in colour or black & white.
(However, the colour bar icon does not appear in the key
of a job that used document filing or in the key of a
transmission/reception job that was cancelled.)

(5)

Number of pages
Shows the number of pages transmitted/total number of
original pages.

(6)

Job type
Scan to E-mail or Inbound routing
error
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder

Status
Shows the job status.
• Job in progress
Display

Status

"Connecting"

Connecting to the destination.

"Sending"

Sending data.

"Receiving"

Receiving an Internet fax.

"Stopped"

The job has been stopped.

"Error"

An error occurred while the job was
being executed.

• Job waiting to be executed

Scan to Desktop

Display
Internet fax transmission
Internet fax reception

Status

"Waiting"

The job is waiting to be executed.

"Retry Mode"

The job is being re-attempted due
to a communication error or other
problem.

"Report Wait"

An Internet fax has been sent for
which a receive report was
requested, and the machine is
waiting for the receive report.

A day and
time is
displayed

Timer transmission job (the
specified time is displayed)

PC-I-Fax transmission
Broadcast transmission or Inbound
routing
Metadata transmission
(3)

Name of communicating party (address)
For a transmission, the name or address of the destination.
For a reception, the address of the sending party.
In the case of a broadcast transmission, "Broadcast"
appears together with a broadcast control number
(4-digits).
In the case of an inbound routing error, "Error
Forwarded" appears.

5-105

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

• Completed job
Display

Status

"Send OK"

Transmission was completed.

"In Memory"

An Internet fax has been received
but has not yet been printed.

"Received"

Printed received fax data.

"Forward OK"

A received Internet fax has been
forwarded.

"Stopped"

The job was stopped.

"Delete"

Deleted received data in the image
check screen.

"Number of
successful
transmission
destinations/
Total
destinations
OK"

Completion of a broadcast
transmission or inbound routing
operation.
If transmission to 3 destinations
was successful out of a total of 5,
"003/005 OK" will appear.

"No
Response"

An error occurred because there
was no response from the
destination.

"OK Report"

A receive report was requested for
a transmission, the transmission
was completed normally, and the
receive report was received from
the destination.

"NG Report"

A receive report was requested for
a transmission, however, the
transmission did not take place
correctly and a transmission failed
report was received.

"No Report"

An e-mail was received without an
attached file and thus printing was
not possible.

"Received"

An e-mail was received, however,
the attached file was not a TIFF-F
file or there was no attached file,
and thus printing was not possible.

"Rejected"

An Internet fax was sent from a
party that is blocked.

"NGxxxxxx"

Transmission/reception was not
successful because a
communication error occurred (a
6-digit error code appears in
xxxxxx.)

"Error"

An error occurred while the job was
being executed.

5-106

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB QUEUE IS
COMPLETED
When a normal transmission job is completed, it moves to the completed jobs screen and "Send OK" appears in the
status column.
Received Internet faxes, timer transmission jobs, and forwarding jobs are handled in the job status screen as explained
below.

Internet fax reception jobs
While an Internet fax is being received, "Receiving" appears.
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears.
When printing ends, the status changes to "Printed" and the job is completed.

Timer transmission jobs
A timer transmission job appears at the bottom of the job queue until the specified time arrives.
When the specified time arrives, the job is executed. If another job is in progress, the timer job is started when the other
job is completed.

Internet fax transmission jobs that request a receive report
After completion of an Internet fax transmission job (excluding Direct SMTP transmission jobs) that requests a receive
report, the job is placed on standby at the bottom of the job queue screen. "Report Wait" appears in the status column.
When the receive report is received from the destination, or if the report is not received within the timeout time, the job
moves to the completed jobs screen.

Reception jobs when "Inbound Routing Settings" are enabled
When "Inbound Routing Settings" are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting.

☞ FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 5-117)

• Received Internet fax is not printed
"Receiving" appears while the Internet fax is being received. When reception is completed, the job moves to the job
queue of the job status screen of scan mode.
• Received Internet fax is printed
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears. When printing
ends, the status changes to "Printed" and the job is completed. In addition, the job is added to the job queue of the job
status screen of scan mode. When forwarding received Internet faxes is finished, "Forward OK" appears.

5-107

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS
You can check a list of the destinations, the destinations for which transmission failed, and other detailed information on
completed jobs that used document filing function, broadcast transmission jobs, and received Internet fax forwarding
jobs. Touch the key of the job for which you wish to display information in the completed jobs screen and touch the
[Detail] key. The job detail screen (see below) will appear.

OK

Detail
Broadcast0001
Address

Start Time

Status

002

EEE EEE

10:01 04/01

NG000000

010

FFF FFF

10:10 04/01

NG000000

Retry
1
1

File

Failed

All Destinations

The job name appears at the top of the job detail screen.
To view details on the job, touch one of the tabs. The following information appears on each tab.
Tab name

Information displayed

File

Shows information on a transmission/reception that used document filing function.
To call up the file and use it, touch the [Call] key.

Failed

Shows information on addresses for which communication failed.
Address: Address name or number
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Description of failure (error)
The [Retry] key can be touched to re-attempt transmission to that address.*

All Destinations

Shows all addresses specified in the job.
Address: Address name or number
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Communication result
The [Retry] key can be touched to transmit to all addresses again.*

* Recalling is not possible for a broadcast transmission that includes a Scan to FTP address, Scan to Network Folder
address, or Scan to Desktop address.

5-108

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING
TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE
TRANSMITTED
Follow the steps below to stop a job that is being transmitted or is waiting to be transmitted.

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

1
(1)
Print Job
Address

2

Select the job that you wish to stop.

(1)

Scan to

Pages

(1) Touch the mode tab of the job to be
stopped.

Internet Fax

Fax Job

Set Time

Status

1

Broadcast

10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting

2

AAA AAA

10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting

3

BBB BBB

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

4

CCC CCC

10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Job Queue
1

(2) Touch the key of the job to be stopped.

Complete

1

(3) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

(2)

(3)

Touch the [Yes] key.
Delete the job?
CCC CCC

3

10:31 04/01

No

Yes

If you do not want to stop the selected job...
Touch the [No] key.

Printing of a received Internet fax cannot be stopped.

5-109

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN
TRANSMISSION JOB
When multiple jobs are waiting to be transmitted, the jobs are normally transmitted in the order they were reserved. If
you need to give priority to a job and send it ahead of the other jobs, follow the steps below.

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

1
(1)
Print Job
Address

2

Scan to
Set Time

Select the job to which you wish to give
priority.

(1)
Internet Fax

Fax Job
Pages

Status

1

Broadcast

2

AAA AAA

10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting

3

BBB BBB

10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting

4

CCC CCC

10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting

Job Queue

10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
1

Complete

(1) Touch the mode tab of the job to be given
priority.

1

(2) Touch the key of the job to be given priority.
(3) Touch the [Priority] key.

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

The selected job moves up to the position immediately
following the job in progress. The job will be executed
when the job in progress is completed.

(2) (3)

5-110

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY
LOG (Image Sending Activity Report)
IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT
You can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result,
etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred.
The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201,
or at a specified time (once a day only).
The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted.
System Settings (Administrator): Activity Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing activity reports. The factory default setting is not to print.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 201, or at a specified
time (once a day only).

INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN
Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction
report or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.
Examples of messages that are printed in the result column
Message

Explanation

OK

The transaction was completed normally.

OK REPORT

A receive report was requested for a transmission, the transmission was completed normally, and
the receive report was received from the destination.

CANCEL

A transmission was stopped while in progress, or a reserved transmission job was cancelled.

MEM. FULL

The memory became full during reception.

REJECTED

An Internet fax was sent from a party that is blocked.

NG REPORT

A receive report was requested for a transmission, however, the transmission did not take place
correctly and a transmission failed report was received.

NO REPORT

A receive report was requested for a transmission, however, a report was not received within the
timeout time.

NG LIMIT

Transmission was not possible because the file size exceeded the machine's file size limit setting.

RECEIVED

An e-mail was received, however, the attached file was not a TIFF-F file or there was no attached
file, and thus printing was not possible.

FAIL xx (xxxx)

The transaction failed due to a communication error.
First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99.
Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians.

5-111

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS
This section explains the basic procedures for receiving Internet faxes.

RECEIVING AN INTERNET FAX
The Internet fax function periodically* connects to the mail server (POP3 server) and checks whether or not Internet
faxes have been received. When faxes have been received, the faxes are automatically retrieved and printed.
* The default setting is once every 5 minutes.
If faxes will be received at night, keep the main power switch in the "on" position.

Internet faxes are received automatically.
Beep

A beep sounds when reception ends.

1

The faxes are printed automatically.

2

If the machine is out of paper or there is no paper that matches the size of the received fax, a message will appear in the
touch panel. Follow the instructions in the message to load an appropriate size of paper.
• System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward (page 7-23)
When printing is not possible because the machine has run out of paper or toner, received Internet faxes can be forwarded
to and printed by another previously stored Internet fax machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Default Settings
These settings are used to select how received faxes are handled when the [POWER] key (
) is "off" (the main power switch
is "on"), the volume of the beep that sounds when reception ends, and whether or not received e-mail messages are printed.
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Receive Settings
Settings related to Internet fax reception can be configured such as the interval for checking for received faxes, duplex
reception, output settings, auto reduction printing, and storing allow/reject reception addresses.
• System Settings (Administrator): Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting
This setting is used to allow/refuse reception from stored addresses and domains.
• System Settings (Administrator): Receiving Date & Time Print
Use this to select whether or not the date and time of reception is added when a received image is printed.

5-112

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES
If the interval for checking for received faxes is somewhat long and you wish to check immediately, you can manually
initiate reception.
Touch the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key to connect to the mail server and retrieve received faxes.
Scan
Address Book

Internet Fax

Fax

Original

Scan:

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

200X100dpi

Address Review

File Format

TIFF-F

File

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

Auto

Quick File
I-Fax Manual
Reception

Preview

If POP3 server settings are not configured in the Web pages, the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key is greyed out to prevent
selection.
System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward (page 7-23)
This setting is used to hide the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key that appears in the base screen of Internet Fax mode. When the
[I-Fax Manual Reception] key is hidden, manual reception is initiated by touching the [Reception Start] key in the screen that
appears when "Fax Data Receive/Forward" - "I-Fax Settings" is selected.

5-113

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print)
"Hold Setting for Received Data Print" in the system settings (administrator) can be enabled to have faxes received to
memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is enabled, a
password entry screen appears in the touch panel when received Internet faxes are retrieved.
Received data is stored.
Enter password via the 10-key.

Cancel

When the previously programmed 4-digit password is entered with the numeric keys, printing begins.
The [Cancel] key can be touched to close the password entry screen; however, the data in memory key (
) will blink
in the touch panel. The password entry screen will reappear when you touch the blinking key (
) or change modes.
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), a password can be
entered to display the received data list screen. If you wish to check an image before printing it, continue from step 1 on
the next page.

• The received faxes will be retained in memory regardless of whether they were received automatically or manually.
• If "Fax Data Receive/Forward" is enabled in the system settings so that received faxes are forwarded to another machine,
faxes retained in memory are also forwarded. At that time, the same password entry screen will appear as for printing.
Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered.
System Settings (Administrator): Hold Setting for Received Data Print
Enable this setting to have faxes received to memory without being printed. This setting is also used to program the
password that must be entered to print the faxes.

5-114

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled* in the system settings (administrator), you can check a received
image in the touch panel before printing it out. When this function is enabled, follow the steps below to print a received image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
Depending on the size of the received data, part of the image in the image check screen on the touch panel may not appear.

When an image is received, a confirmation
prompt will appear. Touch the [Yes] key.

The memory has received data.
Check the data?

If this message appears while you are configuring settings of
any type and you touch the [Yes] key, the settings that you are
configuring will be cancelled. If this message appears in
another mode, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode after checking the image.

1
No

Yes

Select the received image

(1)
Received Data List

2

(1) Touch the key of the received image that
you want to check.

Back
Select All

Thumbnail

Multiple received images can be checked.

AAA AAA

04/04/2010

10:28

Not checked

BBB BBB

04/04/2010

10:14

Checked

1

0123456789

04/04/2010

10:12

Not checked

5

BBB BBB
9876543210

04/04/2010

10:08

Checked

BBB BBB
0612345678

04/04/2010

10:00

Not checked

CCC CCC

04/04/2010

10:00

Checked

Image Check

Delete

(2) Touch the [Image Check] key.
• To show thumbnails of the received images, touch the
[Thumbnail] key.
• To delete an image that has been selected, touch the
[Delete] key. To print an image that has been selected,
touch the [Print] key.

Print

(2)

When the [Select All] key is touched, it will change into the [Cancel All] key. When all received data has been selected
using the [Select All] key, the selection can be cancelled by touching the [Cancel All] key.

AAA AAA

Check the received image and then
touch the [Print] key.

Back

Image Check
04/04/2010

3

10:28

1 / 3

Display Rotation

0001 /0010

Printing begins.
For information on the image check screen, see "IMAGE
CHECK SCREEN" (page 5-116).

Print

If the screen of step 1 appears when you are configuring settings in the setting screens of any of the modes, the configured
settings will be cancelled if you view the image. After viewing the image, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode, regardless of which mode you were in previously.
System Settings (Administrator): Received Data Image Check Setting
Use this to specify whether or not a received Internet fax can be viewed before it is printed.

5-115

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

IMAGE CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the image check screen.

Back

Image Check
AAA AAA

04/04/2010

10:28

1 / 3

Display Rotation

Print
0001

(1)
(1)

(2)

0010

(3)

(4)
(4)

Information display

Preview image
An image of the selected received image appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to
scroll.)

(3)

(5)

(7)

"Display Rotation" key

[Print] key
Touch to start printing.

(6)

Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
"4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.

Change page keys
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.

(6)

This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.

This shows information on the displayed image.
(2)

(5)

(7)

Image select key
When multiple images are selected for preview display,
use this to change the displayed images.

A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.

5-116

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET
FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS
(Inbound Routing Settings)
Received Internet faxes can be automatically forwarded to an e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or
network folder address. When this function is enabled, you can also have received Internet faxes forwarded without
printing them.
The machine

Forwarding

Received Internet fax
When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be
printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)

CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS
All inbound routing settings are configured in the Web pages. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the
Start Guide.
The following explanation assumes that the Web pages have been accessed with administrator rights.
To configure inbound routing settings, follow the steps below.

5-117

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Enabling the inbound routing function.
(1) In the Web page menu, click [Application
Settings], [Inbound Routing Settings], and
then [Administration Settings].
(2) Select [Enable] in "Inbound Routing" and
click the [Submit] button.

1
Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen,
and from specifying which table is used. To do so, select the checkboxes below
.
• Disable Registration of Forward Table • Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table • Disable Change of Forward Approval
When inbound routing is enabled, you can also specify whether or not you wish the machine to print the forwarded faxes.
To have all received faxes printed before being forwarded, select "Print Out All Report" in "Print Style Setting". To
have received faxes printed only when an error prevents forwarding, select "Print at Error".
If an error occurs when [Not Print and Forward to the Following E-mail Address at Error] is selected, received data is
not printed, but is forwarded to the specified e-mail address.
After configuring the settings, be sure to click the [Submit] button.

Storing sender addresses.
If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses
forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Send
addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you
store a forwarding table.

(1) Click [Sender Number/Address
Registration] in the [Inbound Routing
Settings] menu in the Web page.

2

(2) Enter the sender address in "Internet Fax
Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate,
and click the [Add to List] button.
The entered address will be added to the "Address to be
Entered" list.
• Specify whether the address will be directly entered
(maximum of 1500 characters) or selected from a
global address book by clicking the [Global Address
Search] button.
• To store multiple addresses, repeat this step.

(3) When you have finished adding addresses,
click the [Submit] button.
• A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.
• To delete an entered address, select the address in "Address to be Entered" and click the [Delete] button.

5-118

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(2)

Store a forwarding table.

(3) (4)

Follow the steps below to store a forwarding table that
combines a specified sender and forwarding address.

(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu and click the [Add] button.
(2) Enter a "Table Name".
(3) Select the line used for reception.
(4) Select the sender whose faxes will be
forwarded.
• To forward all received faxes, select [Forward All
Received Data].
• To forward only data received from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender]. To
forward all data except data from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Senders except
Below]. Select the appropriate senders from the list and
click the [Add] button.

(5) Select the forwarding conditions.
• To always forward received data, select [Always
Forward].
• To specify a day and time on which received data will
be forwarded, select [Forward on Selected Day & Time]
and select the checkbox (
) of the desired day of the
week. To specify a time, select the [Set Forwarding
Time] checkbox (
) and specify the time.

3

(6) Select the file format.

(8)

(7)

(6)

The format can be set separately for each forwarding
address (for each of forwarding addresses 1, 2, and 3 in
the table).

(5)

(7) Select the forwarding address.
Forwarding addresses can be selected from the
machine's address book. (Multiple addresses can be
selected.) A maximum of 1000 forwarding addresses can
be stored (a combined maximum of 100 file server,
desktop, and network folder addresses can be stored).

(8) Click [Submit].
• When selecting senders from the "Sender Number/Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key
on your keyboard to select multiple senders.
• A maximum of 50 forwarding tables can be stored.
• Images sent in TIFF format may not display correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file
format to PDF.
• Up to three forwarding day and time settings can be set for one forwarding table, and a forwarding destination can
be set for each set time. To configure these settings, use the forwarding list tabs to access each setting.
• When the forwarding destination is a file server, desktop, or shared folder, the computer of that destination must be
powered on.

5-119

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

(2)

Specifying forwarding tables to be used.
To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding
tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.

(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu.
(2) Select [Always Forward] or [Forward on
Selected Day & Time] from the forwarding
table.
The forwarding permission settings that appear here are
linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 3. If you
wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set
in step 3, set the forwarding permission settings.

4

(3) Click [Submit].

(3)

To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected

5-120

and click [Delete].

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER
(PC Scan Mode)
BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE
You can install the scanner driver on your computer from the CD-ROM that accompanies the machine, and use a
TWAIN* compliant application to scan an image using your computer.
Scanning from your computer is most useful for scanning a single original such as a photo, particularly when you want to
adjust scan settings as you scan. By contrast, scanning at the machine is most useful for continuous scanning of
multiple originals.
* An interface standard used for scanners and other image input devices. When the scanner driver is installed on your
computer, you can use any TWAIN-compliant application to scan an image.
• Scanning in PC scan mode is only possible when the scanner driver has been installed from the "Software CD-ROM"
using the integrated installer. For the procedures for installing the scanner driver and configuring settings, see the
Software Setup Guide.
• This function cannot be used when it has been disabled using "Disable Scan Function" in the system settings (administrator).
• The procedures for selecting the scanner driver and starting scanning vary depending on the TWAIN-compliant
application. For more information, see the manual for the application or Help.
• When a large image is scanned at high resolution, the amount of data will be very large and scanning will take a long time.
Be sure to select appropriate scan settings for the original (text, photo, etc.).
• When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot
be changed. If you wish to change the mode or destination, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the
procedure below.

As an example, the procedure for scanning from the "Sharpdesk" application that accompanies the machine is
explained below.

[At the machine]

1

Place the original.

1

1

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.

5-121

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Scan

Internet Fax

Fax

USB Mem. Scan

PC Scan

Touch the [PC Scan] tab to switch to PC
Scan mode.
If the [PC Scan] tab does not appear, touch the
to move the screen.

This machine is in the PC scan mode.
Do not remove the original.

tab

Scanner IP address:250.160.102.106

2

Exit

When PC scan mode is selected, only the [Exit] key displayed in the touch panel can be used on the machine; no
other keys can be used.

[At your computer]
Start the TWAIN-compliant application
on your computer and select [Select
Scanner] from the [File] menu.

3

Select the scanner driver of the
machine.
(1) Select [SHARP MFP TWAIN K].
(2) Click the [Select] button.

4
(1)

(2)

5-122

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

~ Sharpd esk

Filel Edit

View

Too l!>

Internet

Output Zone

New Folder

Ctrl+N

Open.

Ctrl+O

Help

Select [Acquire Image] from the [File]
menu.
The scanner driver opens.

'--

p,t

Rename
Delete
Sharpdesk Folders...

5

Ctrl+ P

Print.
Acq uire Im age ..
~e l ect ~can ner

...

From Scanner or Camera.
Send As
Propertie!> ..
Exit

Alt+ F4

5-123

(

Contents

)

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Preview the image.
(1) Select the location where the original is
placed.
"Scanning Source" menu:
• If the original is a one-sided original and is placed in the
document feeder tray, select [SPF(Simplex)].
• If the original is a 2-sided original and is placed in the
document feeder tray, select [SPF(Duplex - Book)] or
[SPF(Duplex - Tablet)] depending on whether the
original is a book-style or tablet-style original. In
addition, select [Left edge is fed first] or [Top edge is
fed first] depending on the orientation of the original.

(2) Select scan settings.

6

(1) (2)

"Scanning Mode" menu:
Switch between the "Standard" screen and the
"Professional" screen. In the "Standard" screen, select
"Monitor", "Photo", "FAX" or "OCR" depending on the
original type and your scanning purpose.
If you wish to change the initial settings of any of the four
buttons or select the resolution or other advanced
settings, change to the "Professional" screen.
"Image Area" menu:
Select the scan area. If "Auto" is selected, the original size
detected by the machine will be scanned. You can also
set the scanning area in the preview window with your
mouse.

(3)

(3) Click the [Preview] button.
The preview image will appear in the scanner driver.
If you are not satisfied with the preview image, repeat (2)
and (3).
If the [Zoom Preview] checkbox is selected before the
[Preview] button is clicked, the selected area will be
enlarged in the preview window. If the checkmark is
removed, the preview image will return to normal. Note
that if SPF is selected in the "Scanning Source" menu, the
[Zoom Preview] function cannot be used.
• For further information on the scan settings, click the
open scanner driver Help.

button in the preview image screen of step 7 to

• If the [Preview] button is clicked when scanning from the document feeder tray, only one original page will be
scanned for the preview image. If you wish to include that original in the scan, return it to the document feeder tray.

5-124

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Select scanning settings while viewing
the image.

7

[Rotate] button:
Each time this button is clicked, the preview image rotates 90
degrees. This lets you change the orientation of the image
without picking up and placing the original again. The image file
will be created using the orientation that appears in the preview
window.
[Image Size] button:
Click this button to specify the scan area by entering numerical
values. Pixels, mm, or inches can be selected for the units of
the numerical values. If a scanning area has already been
specified, the entered numbers will change the area relative to
the top left corner of the specified area.
button:
When a preview image is displayed and a scanning area is not
specified, you can click the
button to automatically set the
scanning area to the entire preview image.
• For further information on the scan settings, click the

button to open scanner driver Help.

• If the originals are placed in the document feeder tray, only the top page will be previewed. The top page will be
delivered to the original exit tray. Be sure to return the previewed page to the document feeder tray before
previewing again or scanning.

Click the [Scanning] button.
Scanning begins. The image appears in your application.
Assign a file name to the scanned image and save it as
appropriate in the software application you are using.

8

5-125

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

[At the machine]
Touch the [Exit] key in the touch panel.
This machine is in the PC scan mode.
Do not remove the original.

9

Scanner IP address:250.160.102.106

Exit

Touch the [Yes] key.
PC scan in progress.
Finish PC scan mode?

10
No

Yes

5-126

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

METADATA DELIVERY
This section explains metadata delivery, which can be used when the application integration module kit is installed.

METADATA DELIVERY (Data Entry)
When the application integration module kit is installed and an image file is generated for a scan send transmission,
metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) can be generated based on
pre-stored information and transmitted as a separate file. The metadata file is created in XML format. By linking the
metadata with applications such as document management software, a workflow application, or an encryption server, a
sophisticated document solution environment can be built.

Scan to
Desktop
Metadata
(XML file)
Client PC that uses Network
Scanner Tool

Server

Image file

Fax server, document
management software,
workflow application,
encryption server, etc.

Scan to E-mail
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder

Using the application integration module kit, information on a generated image file can be entered at the touch panel and
transmitted along with the image as an XML file.

5-127

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA
TRANSMISSION
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES
All settings related to metadata are configured in the Web pages. (Administrator rights are required.)
To configure metadata settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Metadata Settings] in the Web page menu.
When configuring settings, be sure to enable metadata transmission.

Storing Metadata Sets
Store the items (the metadata set) that are written to the XML file that is generated during scanning. Up to 10 metadata
items can be configured in a metadata set. A stored metadata set can be selected at the time of transmission.
Addresses specified in "Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry" when a metadata set is stored can be selected as
transmission destinations at the time of transmission using one-touch keys, manual entry, and/or a global address book
search. (Addresses for which metadata entry is not allowed cannot be specified as transmission destinations.)

METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP
When Network Scanner Tool is used in its factory default configuration, a file will be generated with a new file name on
the computer. When Network Scanner Tool is used as a means of sending a metadata file to a third party software
application, this setting must be disabled to allow cross referencing between the image file and XML file by means of the
file name generated by the computer. (When setting the file name in [Send Settings], to ensure that a previously existing
file on a computer is not overwritten by a transmitted file of the same name, be sure to configure the file name so that
name duplication cannot occur; for example, by including a unique extension (the date, etc.) in the generated file name.
If the file name setting is left blank, the machine will automatically generate a file name that is unique.)
• It is recommended that you use Network Scanner Tool to receive metadata. For more information, see the Network
Scanner Tool User's Guide (PDF format) on the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM.
• For information on the licence agreement and how to use the CD-ROM that accompanies the application integration
module, see the separate "Sharpdesk licence kit" manual.
• Using third party software applications
Various types of third party software applications exist. Some applications can start automatically from Network Scanner
Tool and some cannot. When the auto-run function of an application is enabled, Network Scanner Tool will start the
application with the ".exe" command using the file name as a parameter. Normally an application is started twice, once for
the image file and once for the XML file. For example, when Network Scanner Tool is set to start the application
"APP.EXE", the following commands are applied when the two files "IMG.TIF" and "IMG.XML" are received.
APP.EXE IMG.TIF
APP.EXE IMG.XML

5-128

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

TRANSMITTING METADATA
When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed. If you wish to change the mode or destination, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the
procedure below.

Follow the steps below to select a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata transmission.

Switch to data entry mode and display
the metadata set screen.

(1)
Scan

1

Internet Fax

Fax

Address Book

Original

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Scan:

Data Entry
Auto

Auto

A4

Send:

(1) Touch the [Data Entry] tab.

Auto

Text

(2) Touch the [Metadata Entry] key.
PDF

Metadata Entry

Preview

(2)

• If no metadata sets have been stored, the [Data Entry] tab cannot be selected. Store a metadata set in the Web
pages and then perform the transmission procedure.
• If a specific metadata set has been specified as the default set, go to step 3.

(1)

(2)
Cancel

Metadata Set
Set Name:Metadata 1

2

Metadata 1

Metadata 2

Metadata 3

Metadata 4

Metadata 5

Metadata 6

Metadata 7

Metadata 8

Metadata 9

Metadata 10

OK

Select a metadata set.
(1) Touch the key of the metadata set that you
wish to use.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.

5-129

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

Cancel

Metadata Set

Data Entry

The keys of the items stored in the
metadata set will appear. Touch the key
of the item that you want to enter.

OK

Set Name:Metadata 1
User ID
1

From Name

2
Reply To

3

DocumentPassword
AccessPassword
BillCode1

If you accidentally selected the wrong metadata set or wish to use a different metadata set when a default metadata
set has been set, touch the [Metadata Set] key. Touch the [OK] key in the message screen that appears. You will
return to the screen of step 1. Metadata items entered to that point will be cancelle.

(1)

Enter the selected metadata item.

(2)

(1) Touch the key of the value that you wish to
enter.

Data Entry
Cancel

User ID
6

4

12

OK

• When the entry values of the metadata item are in the
form of selections, the selections are shown as keys.
When a value is editable, you can touch the [Direct
Entry] key to manually enter the value.
• If the metadata item requires the entry of text, a text
entry screen will appear. Enter the required information.

Direct Entry

18

Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

Value 6

Value 7

Value 8

Value 9

Value 10

Value 11

Value 12

1
2

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

• To change the number of keys displayed in the screen, touch the number of displayed items selector key. Select 6,
12, or 18 keys.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-77) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".

Cancel

Metadata Set

Data Entry

When you have finished entering all
items, touch the [OK] key.

OK

Set Name:Metadata 1
Value 1

User ID

5

From Name

xxxx xxxx

Reply To

xxx@xx.xx.com

2

DocumentPassword

xxxx xxxx

AccessPassword

xxxxxx

BillCode1

xxxxxx

Scan
Address Book

6

1

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

Preview

Auto

Select image settings and any other
settings, and perform the scan send
procedure.

Data Entry
Auto

A4

Send:

Auto

Text

PDF

Metadata Entry

• The procedures for selecting settings and performing
transmission are the same as in the other modes.
• To make changes to entered values, touch the [Metadata
Entry] key once again. The entry screen of the selected
metadata set will appear.

5-130

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

• Transmission cannot be performed if the [Data Entry] tab is displayed and no metadata settings have been configured. To
perform transmission without sending metadata, switch to a different mode by touching the tab of that mode and then
perform transmission.
• Before configuring metadata settings, you can specify addresses in all modes to be used. After metadata settings have
been configured, only addresses in modes that are allowed in the selected metadata set can be specified.
• When metadata settings have been configured or an address is specified in the [Data Entry] tab, it will not be possible to
switch to another mode.
• Metadata delivery is possible using the document filing function. The [Data Entry] tab appears in the transmission settings
screen of document filing mode to allow metadata delivery. In addition, metadata delivery using document filing can be
performed in [Document Operations] in the Web pages.

METADATA FIELDS
The following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted.
• Data automatically generated by the machine: These data are always included in the XML file and are automatically
stored on your computer.
• Previously defined fields:
These fields are automatically recognized by the machine and
assigned to appropriate XML tags. These fields are selectable, and
can only be included in the XML file if enabled in the Web pages.
• User defined fields:
Custom fields can be added to the XML file. These fields are selectable
and can be defined in the Web pages.
If a defined metadata field is one of the following fields, a message will appear informing you that the field cannot be
entered. Enter appropriate information in the related items of the send settings.
Name entered in
metadata field

Description

Where entered

fromName

Name of the user who sent the job. If the
name is not entered as metadata, the sender
name determined by the usual rules for
determining the sender name will be applied
as metadata.

[Reply-To]
(Sender name of selected sender)

replyTo

E-mail address to which the transmission
result will be sent.

[Reply-To]
(E-mail address of selected sender)

documentSubject

Job name appearing in the e-mail "Subject"
line, or job name on the fax cover sheet.
When the user enters a [Subject] in the send
settings screen in the touch panel, the
entered value is applied as metadata.

[Subject]
(Blank until a value is set in the send settings
screen.)

fileName

Enter the file name of the image to be sent.

[File Name]
(Only when the [Allow Custom Filenames]
checkbox is selected
in the metadata
settings screen in the Web pages.)
(Blank until a value is set in the send settings
screen.)

5-131

Contents

SCANNER/INTERNET FAX

NETWORK SCANNER / INTERNET FAX*1
SPECIFICATIONS
Type

Built-in

Scanning resolution (dpi)

100 x 100, 200 x 200, 300 x 300, 400 x 400, 600 x 600
Internet Fax: 200 x 100, 200 x 200, 200 x 400, 400 x 400, 600 x 600 (200 x 100, 200 x 200 when
file type is TIFF-S) Halftone can be selected for resolutions other than 200 x 100 dpi.

Scanning speed

MX-M623N/MX-M753N/MX-M623U/MX-M753U:
Colour (A4 / 8-1/2" x 11") One-sided: 75 pages/min. (200 x 200 dpi),
Two-sided: 75 pages/min. (200 x 200 dpi)
Black and white (A4 / 8-1/2" x 11") One-sided: 75 pages/min. (200 x 200 dpi),
Two-sided: 75 pages/min. (200 x 200 dpi)

Interface port

LAN connectivity: 10Base-T / 100Base-TX / 1000Base-T

Supported protocols

TCP/IP (IPv4)

File formats

Remarks

Colour
(including greyscale)

File types: TIFF, JPEG, PDF, Encrypted PDF, XPS, Compact
PDF*2
Compression ratio: High / Medium / Low

Black and white

File types: TIFF, PDF, Encrypted PDF, XPS
Compression modes: None / Medium (G3) / High (G4)

Internet Fax
(black and white only)

File types: TIFF-FX (TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
Compression modes: Medium (G3) / High (G4)

Number of one-touch keys for
storing destinations*3

Maximum number of keys: 1000

Number of destinations that can
be stored in a group (1 key)*3

Maximum number of destinations in one group (1 key): 500

Scan destinations

Scan to E-mail / Scan to FTP / Scan to Desktop / Scan to
Network Folder

*1 Internet fax expansion kit is required.
*2 Enhanced compression kit is required.
*3 Total number of all destinations (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, Scan to Network folder, Internet
Fax, Fax, and Group)

PULL SCAN FUNCTION (TWAIN)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supported protocol

TCP/IP (IPv4)

Supported client PC
operating systems

Windows 2000 / XP / Server 2003 / Vista / Server 2008 / 7

Colour modes

Full Colour, Greyscale, Mono Diffusion, Mono 2 gradation

Resolution settings

75 dpi, 100 dpi, 150 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi
(The resolution can be specified by entering a numerical value from 50 to 9600 dpi. However,
when a high resolution is specified, it is necessary to reduce the scanning area.)

Scanning area

Maximum: A3 (11" x 17")

5-132

Contents

CHAPTER 6
DOCUMENT FILING
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing function. The document filing
function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job, or the data of a print job, as a file on the machine's
hard drive. The file can be called up as needed.
This chapter assumes that you are already familiar with copy mode, scanner mode, and the other modes of the
machine.
For information on procedures of copy, scanner and other modes that remain the same when those modes are used in
conjunction with the document filing function, see the chapters for those modes.

USING STORED FILES

DOCUMENT FILING
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . .
• USES OF DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BEFORE USING DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . .
• IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING
DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH
MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE. . . . . . 6-24

6-2
6-2
6-3
6-4

FOLDER AND FILE SELECTION SCREENS . . . . 6-26
• FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
• FILE SELECTION SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
SELECTING A FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
• JOB SETTINGS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

6-7

PRINTING A STORED FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
• PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
• MULTI-FILE PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

6-8

BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

SENDING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
• SEND SETTINGS SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING

PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
• FILE PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
• CHANGING THE PROPERTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File" . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
SAVING A FILE WITH "File" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• FILE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

MOVING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
DELETING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43

SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to
HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
• "Scan to HDD" SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
• PERFORMING "Scan to HDD". . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE . . . . 6-44
• IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

6-1

DOCUMENT FILING

DOCUMENT FILING
This section provides information that you should know before using the document filing function, including an overview
of document filing, the features and functions of document filing, and points to keep in mind when using document filing.

OVERVIEW
The document filing function allows you to save the document image of a copy or image send job, or the data of a print
job, as a file on the machine's hard drive.
The stored file can be retrieved and printed or transmitted as needed.

Saving a file

Retrieving and using a stored file
Internet Fax

Send

Print

Scan

Fax
Print

Copy

Hard drive

Scan to HDD

Hard drive

Document information used in any of the modes
is saved to the hard drive as a file.

A stored file can be printed. A stored file can also be
sent as a fax or sent to another computer over a
network. A stored file can also be kept for archive
purposes.

TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING
There are three ways to save a file using document filing: "Quick File", "File", and "Scan to HDD".

Quick File

As a copy, scan send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard
drive. Use this function when you want to quickly and easily store document data without specifying a
file name or other information.
The stored file can also be used by other people. Do not use this method to save files that you do not
want others to use, such as files containing sensitive or confidential information.

File

As a copy, scan send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard
drive. Unlike Quick File, various types of information can be appended to the file when the file is saved
to enable efficient file management.
A password can also be established to prevent the file from being retrieved up by others.

Scan to HDD

This function scans a document and stores it as a file. Like File, various types of information can be
appended to the file when it is stored.

6-2

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

USES OF DOCUMENT FILING
Quickly using a file
Example: You prepared handouts consisting of numerous pages for a meeting, however, another handout is
needed for a newly added participant.
The handout was not saved using document filing

The handout was saved using document filing

Ratio and special mode settings must be
reselected.
The stored file is simply retrieved and
printed.
The numerous original pages must all be
rescanned.

Not likely to be completed in time for the meeting...

Printing is accomplished quickly and the handout is ready in
time for the meeting!

Copy settings must be reselected and the original must be
rescanned.
As indicated above, to obtain another set of output, the
settings must be selected all over again. If you don't remember
the settings, much effort may be expended to get the same
output result as the previous time.

By retrieving a job stored using document filing, there is no
need to reselect copy settings or rescan the original.
The job can be retrieved and printed using the same settings
quickly and easily.

As shown in the example, storing a job with the document filing function frees you of the need to rescan the original and
select settings, saving considerable time.

Convenient for managing frequently used documents
Example: Managing a large number of business forms
Not using document filing
It takes time to find the form you need.

Using document filing
The required form can be easily retrieved from the
document filing list,
and document management is much more efficient.

File Retrieve

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

Ex Data Access
Search

Main Folder
File Name

s?

Daily

Back
Date
1

day form

li
Paid ho

User Name

Busi

ness

repo

rt for

ms?

trip f
orms

?

Paid holiday forms

Name 1

04/04/2010

Daily report forms

Name 1

04/04/2010

Business trip forms

Name 1

04/04/2010

Daily report forms

Name 1

04/04/2010

Daily report forms

Name 1

04/04/2010

Switch Display

All Files

2

Multi-File Print

Application forms, report forms, and other business forms can be stored on the hard drive for easy retrieval, letting you
print the number of copies you need when you need them.

6-3

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

BEFORE USING DOCUMENT FILING
This section provides information that you should know before using the document filing function.

Folders
Three types of folders are used to store files by document filing.

Folders on the hard drive

Quick File
Folder

Main Folder
Custom Folder

Quick File Folder
Documents scanned using the [Quick File] key are stored in this folder. A user name and file name are automatically
assigned to each job.
Main Folder
Documents scanned using the [File] key are stored in this folder.
When you store a job in the Main folder, you can specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name.
A password can also be set when storing a file ([Confidential] save).
Custom Folder
Folders with custom names can be created inside this folder.
When a document is scanned using the [File] key and a folder is selected, the document is stored in the specified folder.
Like the Main folder, a custom folder allows you to specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name when storing a job.
Passwords can be established for custom folders and for files saved in custom folders.
A maximum of 1000 custom folders can be created on the hard drive.

Items convenient to store
When storing a job using "File" or "Scan to HDD", it is convenient to store the items below. These settings are not
needed when storing a job using "Quick File".
User Name

This is necessary if you will be assigning a user name to stored files. User names are stored in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator). A user name is also used as a search condition when searching for a file.

Custom Folder

The Main folder is initially available as a location for storing files by "File" and "Scan to HDD". When
custom folders have been created using "Document Filing Control" in the system settings, a custom
folder can be specified as a location for storing files. A password can also be established for a custom
folder to restrict access to the folder.

My Folder

"My Folder" is specified using "User List" in the system settings (administrator). The main folder or a
previously created custom folder can be selected as "My Folder", or a new folder can be created as
"My Folder". When user authentication is used, "My Folder" is always created and is selected as the
destination of "File" and "Scan to HDD".

• System Settings: Document Filing Control (page 7-27)
This is used to create custom folders for document filing. A password can also be established for a custom folder.
• System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store a user name and specify a folder as "My Folder".

6-4

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Maximum number of pages and files that can be stored by document filing
Combined total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom
folders and in the Main folder
Maximum number of pages
20000

Maximum number of files
3000

Number of pages and number of files that can be stored in the Quick File folder
Maximum number of pages
10000

Maximum number of files
1000

Copying in sort mode uses the same memory area as the Quick File folder. For this reason, when too much data has
been stored in the Quick File folder, it may not be possible to perform a large copy job using sort mode. Delete
unneeded files.
The actual number of pages and number of files that can be stored may be lower depending on the contents of the
original images and the settings selected when the files were stored.

6-5

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Automatic deletion of files
You can have document filing data in specified folders automatically deleted at regular intervals by specifying the folders
and the time. Periodic deletion of files stored in the machine helps to prevent the leaking of sensitive information and
frees space on the hard drive.
Every day, every week, or every month can be selected for the deletion cycle, and a time can be set for each selection.
For example, you can set file deletion to take place every week on Friday at 6:00 PM.
Automatic file deletion settings are configured in "Automatic Deletion of File Settings" in the system settings
(administrator).
To check the settings, print the following list in the system settings.
To check information on the deletion cycle: Print the "Administrator Settings List" in the system settings (administrator).
To check information on the folders selected for file deletion: Print the "Document Filing Folder List" in the system settings.
When "Automatic Deletion of File Settings" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), all files in the specified folders
will be deleted when the set time arrives. Take care not to store files that you wish to keep in folders specified for file deletion.
• System Settings: Document Filing Control (page 7-27)
This shows a list of the folder names for document filing.
• System Settings (Administrator): Automatic Deletion of File Settings
Configure settings for automatic deletion at regular intervals of files stored using the document filing function.
• System Settings (Administrator): Administrator Settings List
Use this to print a list of the administrator settings, including document filing settings.

6-6

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Files
When a file is saved using "File", the following information can be appended.

User Name: Name 1
File Name: Meeting handout
Password: 12345678

"Meeting minutes" folder

Saving a file with this information allows you to distinguish it from other files.
User name: Use this to specify the owner of the file. The user name must first be stored in "User List" in the system
settings.
File Name: A file name can be entered.
Folder:
Select which folder the file will be saved in.
Confidential: A password (5 to 8 digits) can be established to prevent others from using the file.
The above information cannot be specified when a file is saved with Quick File.
System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store user names.

IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING
Note the following when using document filing:
• Files saved using "Quick File" are assigned the "Sharing" property. "Sharing" files can be retrieved and printed or
transmitted by anyone, and thus Quick File should not be used to save sensitive or confidential documents that you do
not wish others to use.
• When saving a file with "File", use the "Confidential" property. A password can be set for a "Confidential" file to
prevent the file from being used by other people. Take care to keep the password of a stored "Confidential" file secret.
• The property of a stored "Confidential" file can be changed to "Sharing" by "Property Change" when the file is used.
Do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used by others.
• Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the
leaking of sensitive information due to manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File function or
File function, or incorrect operation of the Quick File function or File function by the operator that saves the data.

6-7

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE
In copy or image send mode, the original can be saved as a file on the hard drive at the same time it is copied or
transmitted. In addition, Scan to HDD can be used to save the scanned data of an original to the hard drive without
copying or transmitting the data.

Copy mode
The original is saved as an image file at the same time it is copied.
(1)

(1) Touch the [COPY] key.

(2)

COPY

(2) Touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key.

DOCUMENT
FILING

IMAGE SEND

Ready to scan for copy.

0
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Output

Exposure
Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

Image Send mode
Example: Base screen of scan mode
The original is saved as an image file at the same time it is scanned and transmitted.
(2)

(1) Touch the [IMAGE SEND] key.

(1)
COPY

IMAGE SEND

(2) Touch the [Scan] tab.

DOCUMENT
FILING

Ready to send.
Scan
Address Book

(3) Touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key.

Resend

Internet Fax
Original

Fax
Scan:

Address Entry

Exposure

Send Settings

Resolution

200X200dpi

Address Review

File Format

PDF

File

Colour Mode

Mono2

Quick File

Special Modes

USB Mem. Scan
Auto

Send:

PC Scan
Auto

Auto

PDF

Preview

(3)

6-8

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Scan to HDD mode
The scanned original is saved as an image file. Neither printing nor transmission are performed when Scan to HDD is
used.
(2)
COPY

(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.

(1)

(2) Touch the [Scan to HDD] tab.

DOCUMENT
FILING

IMAGE SEND

Ready to scan to HDD.
Press [Start] to scan original.
File Retrieve
File
Information

Scan to HDD
Original
Exposure
Resolution
Colour Mode

HDD Status
Scan:

Ex Data
Auto

Store:

Auto

Auto
600X600dpi
Mono2

Special Modes

Preview

[File] key and [Quick File] key
The "File" key and/or "Quick File" key will not appear in the base screen of copy mode or image send mode if one or both of
the keys has been changed to a different function using "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu. In this case, touch
the [Special Modes] key in the base screen of either mode. Document filing can be performed by touching the [Quick File]
key or [File] key in the special modes menu.
Using document filing in print mode
To use document filing in print mode, select document filing in the printer driver. For more information on using document
filing in print mode, see "CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS" (page 3-53) in "3. PRINTER".
Using document filing in PC-Fax/PC-I-Fax mode
To use document filing in PC-Fax or PC-I-Fax mode, select document filing settings in the PC-Fax driver. For more
information, see Help in the PC-Fax driver.
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.

6-9

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING
MODE
Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key in the touch panel to open the base screen of document filing mode.
Files stored on the hard drive in the machine can be retrieved from this screen.
When user authentication is used and My Folder is configured, the file selection screen of My Folder will appear.
If the user that logged in does not have My Folder configured, the folder selection screen will appear.
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-26)
☞ FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-27)
(1)

COPY

DOCUMENT
FILING

IMAGE SEND

(4)

(2)
File Retrieve

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

Search

Folder Select

(3)

(5)
(6)

Ex Data Access

Main Folder

Quick File Folder

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

User 6

User 7

User 8

1
2

User 10

User 9
All Folders

(1)

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRST

(5)

Mode switch keys

[File Retrieve] tab

(6)

Touch this tab to retrieve a file stored by document filing.
The folder selection screen will appear.
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-26)
(3)

(4)

[External Data Access] tab

[Search] key
Touch this key to search for a file stored in a folder.
You can search using the user name, file name, or folder
name.
☞ SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE (page 6-47)

[Scan to HDD] tab
Touch this key to select Scan to HDD. Neither printing
nor transmission are performed.
The file will be stored in the Main folder or a custom
folder.
☞ SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to HDD)
(page 6-18)

UVWXYZ

This can be selected when an FTP server is stored or a
USB memory device is connected to the machine.
☞ "DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE"
(page 3-57) in "3. PRINTER"

Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
To switch to document filing mode, touch the
[DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2)

(7)

(7)

When retrieving a stored file, use this to select the
folder where the file is stored.

☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-26)

[HDD Status] tab
Touch this key to check how much of the machine's hard
drive is being used.
The amount used is shown as a percentage.
HDD Status

Main Folder:10%
Custom Folder:40%
0

25

Free Space:50%

50

75

Quick File Folder:20%

0

25

50

100%

Free Space:80%
75

100%

6-10

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT
FILING
This chapter explains how to save an original as an image file using the Quick File, File, and Scan to HDD functions of
document filing mode.

SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"
When copying, printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, print mode, or image send mode (excluding USB
memory scan mode), "Quick File" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Quick File folder.
The image can retrieved at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the
original.
As an example, the procedure for storing a document in the Quick File folder while copying is explained below.

Place the original.
1

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.

1

1

Special Modes

Touch the [Quick File] key.

2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure

2

Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

Preview

Touch the [OK] key.
Scanned data is automatically stored
in the quick file folder. Do not store
confidential data to the folder.

3

You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the [Quick
File] key will be highlighted.
OK

To cancel Quick File...
Touch the [Quick File] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted after you touch the [OK] key.

6-11

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Select copy settings and then press the [START] key.

4

• Copying begins and the scanned document image is saved to the hard drive.
The selected copy settings are also saved.
• To prevent accidental saving of the document, the message "The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder." appears
for 6 seconds (default setting) after the [START] key is pressed.
The message display time can be changed using "Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then press the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

When a file is stored using Quick File, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Year-Day_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: Copy_04042010_112030)
Stored to: Quick File Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
Only the file name and location of a file stored in the Quick File Folder can be changed.
To cancel Quick File...
Touch the [Quick File] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Delete All Quick Files
With the exception of protected files, all files in the quick file folder can be deleted at once.
Settings can be configured to delete all files by key operation and to have all files automatically deleted when the power is
turned on.

6-12

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

SAVING A FILE WITH "File"
When copying, printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, print mode, or image send mode (excluding USB
memory scan mode), "File" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Main folder or a previously created
custom folder. The image can retrieved at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to
locate the original.
As an example, the procedure for using "File" while copying is explained below.

Place the original.
1

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.

1

1

Special Modes

Touch the [File] key.

2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure

2

Auto

File
Quick File

Copy Ratio

Original

Paper Select

100%

Auto

Auto
A4
Plain

A4

(1)
File Information

Preview

(2)
Cancel

OK

Select the "File" settings.
(1) Select file information settings.
To select the user name, file name, folder, and
confidential setting, see "FILE INFORMATION" (page
6-15).
• Specifying a user name: (page 6-15)
• Assigning a file name: (page 6-16)
• Specifying the folder: (page 6-16)
• Storing a file as a confidential file: (page 6-17)
After configuring the above settings, you will return to this
screen. Go to the next step.
If you do not wish to assign a user name or other
information to the file, go to the next step.

Confidential
Password

3

User Name

User Unknown

File Name

Copy_04042010_112030

Stored to

Main Folder

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the
[File] key will be highlighted.

6-13

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Select copy settings and then press the [START] key.

4

• Copying begins and the scanned document image is saved to the hard drive.
The selected copy settings are also saved.
• For the procedure for placing the original, see step 4 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"" (page 6-11).
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

When a file is stored using File without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically
assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: Copy_04042010_112030)
Stored to: Main Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
To cancel the File operation...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.

6-14

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

FILE INFORMATION
This section explains the settings that are configured in step 3 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "File"" (page 6-13). Specifying
a user name, file name, folder, and confidential setting makes it easier to manage and search for a file. In addition, when
confidential is selected and a password is established, other people will not be able to view the file without permission.

Specifying a user name

File Information

Cancel

Touch the [User Name] key.

OK

When user authentication is used, the user name that was used
for login is automatically selected. In this case, this step is not
needed.

Confidential
Password

1

User Name

User Unknown

File Name

Copy_04042010_112030

Stored to

Main Folder

The user name must be previously stored in "User List" in the system settings (administrator).

(B)

(A)
Cancel

User Name
6

12

Touch the desired user name in the list
of user names that is displayed.

(2)
OK

(1) Select the user name.

18
Name 2

Name 1

There are two ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch
the key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the
key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----]
appears in the message display. Enter the
"Registration No." set during user registration. This
will allow you to select the user name.

1

Name 3

Name 4

Name 5

Name 6

Name 7

Name 8

Name 9

Name 10

Name 11

Name 12

2

2

ABC
User

All

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
The user name that you touched is selected and you
return to the screen of step 1. The selected user name
appears.

6-15

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Assigning a file name
A file name can be assigned to the file.

File Information

Cancel

Touch the [File Name] key.

OK

A text entry screen will appear. Enter the file name and touch
the [OK] key.
A maximum of 30 characters can be entered.

Confidential
Password
User Name

User Unknown

File Name

Copy_04042010_112030

Stored to

Main Folder

Specifying the folder

Cancel

File Information

Touch the [Stored to:] key.

OK

Confidential
Password

1

User Name

Name 1

File Name

file-01

Stored to

Main Folder

If a user name with a "My Folder" setting is selected, "My Folder" of that user will automatically be selected.

(1)

Select the folder in which you want to
store the file.

(2)
OK

Stored to:

Main Folder

2

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

User 6

User 7

User 8

User 9

User 10

All Folders

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRST

1

(1) Touch the key of the folder where you want
to store the file.
If a password has been set for the folder, a password
entry screen appears. Enter the password of the touched
folder with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and touch the
[OK] key.

2

UVWXYZ

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

6-16

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Storing a file as a confidential file
A password can be set for the file to prevent others from viewing it. Set a password (5 to 8 digits) with the numeric keys.

(1)

Enable the confidential property.

(2)
Cancel

File Information

OK

(1) Select the [Confidential] checkbox so that a
checkmark
appears.

Confidential

1

Confidential mode is enabled and a password can be
entered.

Password
User Name

Name 1

File Name

file-01

Stored to

User 1

Password

(2) Touch the [Password] key.

Cancel

OK

Enter a password (5 to 8 digits) with the
numeric keys and touch the [OK] key.
As each digit is entered, "-" changes to " ".

2

Enter password via the 10-Key pad.

6-17

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to
HDD)
Scan to HDD is used to store a scanned document in the Main folder or a custom folder. Neither printing nor
transmission are performed.

"Scan to HDD" SCREEN
The following screen appears when the [Scan to HDD] tab is touched in document filing mode. Touch the keys below to
select Scan to HDD settings.
The current setting of each key appears to the right of the key.
COPY

DOCUMENT
FILING

IMAGE SEND

Ready to scan to HDD.
Press [Start] to scan original.
File Retrieve

(1)

File
Information

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

Original

Scan:

Exposure

(1)

Auto

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Special Modes

Preview

(7)

[File Information] key

[Colour Mode] key
Use this key to select the colour mode when storing a
document.
☞ [Colour Mode] key (page 6-20)

(8)

[Special Modes] key

key
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
selected special modes.

Use this key to select special modes for Scan to HDD.
☞ Special modes screen for Scan to HDD (page 6-21)
(3)

Store:

Mono2

Information can be appended to a file stored by Scan to
HDD. The settings are configured in the same way as file
information for "File".
☞ FILE INFORMATION (page 6-15)
(2)

A4

Auto

Colour Mode

(3)

Auto

600X600dpi

Resolution

(2)

Ex Data Access

[Preview] key
Touch to check the image to be stored before performing
Scan to HDD.
☞ Checking the image before storing it (Preview) (page
6-22)

(4)

[Original] key
Touch this key to set the scanning size, storing size and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning settings.
☞ [Original] key (page 6-19)

(5)

[Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.

(6)

[Resolution] key
Use this to select the resolution that will be used when
the file is transmitted.
When "Long Size" is specified, only resolution settings of
300 X 300 dpi and under can be selected.

6-18

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

[Original] key
When the [Original] key is touched, the following screen appears. This screen is used to change the original size and
select scanning settings for 2-sided originals.
(1)

(2)

(4)
OK

Scan to HDD/Original

Scan Size
Auto

100% Store Size
A4

Auto

Original
Image Orientation
2-Sided
Booklet

2-Sided
Tablet

(3)

(1) Touch the [Scan Size] key.
If the original is a non-standard size that cannot be detected by auto original size detection, touch the [Scan Size] key and specify the original size.

(2) Touch the [Store Size] key.
If you wish to store the file at a different size than the original size, touch the [Store Size] key and change the store size.

(3) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the
key. If the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key.
If the original is a 2-sided original, touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the [2-Sided Tablet] key as appropriate for the original type.

(4) Touch the [OK] key.
The settings are stored and you return to the Scan to HDD screen.

[Exposure] key
To adjust the exposure, touch the [Exposure] key.
Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original and touch the
When finished, touch the [OK] key.

or

key to adjust the exposure level.
(3)

Scan to HDD/Exposure

OK

Auto
Original Image Type

Manual

Exposure
1

3

5

Text

Text/
Prtd.Photo

Text/Photo

Printed
Photo

Photo

Map

Moiré
Reduction

(2)

(A)

(1)

(1) Select the appropriate original type for the original to be scanned.
(2) Select [Auto] or [Manual].
If you selected [Manual], touch the
lighter image, touch the
key.)
When the exposure is set to [Auto], the

or

key to adjust the exposure. (For a darker image, touch the

key. For a

keys cannot be used.

(A): Moirè Reduction
To reduce the moirè effect when scanning printed matter, touch the [Moirè Reduction] checkbox so that a checkmark

appears.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
The settings are stored and you return to the Scan to HDD screen.

6-19

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

[Colour Mode] key
Touch the [Colour Mode] key to open the colour mode setting screen for Scan to HDD.
Scan to HDD/Colour Mode

OK

Auto
Storage Format of Mono2
Full Colour

Colour Mode
Greyscale

High Capacity Mode

Send Allowed Mode

Mono2

The following settings can be selected for the scanning colour when the [START] key is pressed.
Mode

Scanning method

Auto

The machine automatically detects whether each original is colour or black & white and switches
the mode appropriately (full colour for a colour original or black & white for a black & white original).
If colour originals are mixed together with black & white originals, set the colour mode to [Auto] to
have the colour mode change appropriately for each original.

Full Colour

The original is scanned in full colour. This mode is best for full colour originals such as catalogues.
Even when the original is black and white, it is scanned as a full colour original.

Greyscale

The colours in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of grey (greyscale).

Mono 2

Colours in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for text-only originals.
[High Capacity Mode] or [Send Allowed Mode] can be selected as the storage format for Mono2.
High Capacity Mode:
When this mode is selected, the stored file cannot be transmitted.
Send Allowed Mode:
When this mode is selected, the stored file can be transmitted.

When you have finished selecting the mode, touch the [OK] key.

6-20

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Special modes screen for Scan to HDD
When the [Special Modes] key is touched, the following screen appears. For more information on each setting, see
"SPECIAL MODES" (page 5-71) in "5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX".
(1)

(2)

(3)
OK

Scan to HDD/Special Modes

Dual Page
Scan

Erase
Job
Build

Special Modes

Mixed Size
Original

Card Shot
Slow Scan
Mode

Original
Count

(4)
(1)

(5)

(6)
(6)

[Erase] key

[Dual Page Scan] key
The left and right sides of an original can be scanned as
two separate pages. This function is useful when you
wish to successively scan each page of a book or other
bound document.

(3)

[Card Shot] key
This function lets you store the front and reverse sides of
a card as a single page.

(4)

(7)

[Job Build] key
This function lets you separate a many-page original into
sets, scan each set using the automatic document
feeder, and store all pages as a single file. Use this
function when there are more original pages than can be
placed at once in the auto document feeder.

(5)

[Mixed Size Original] key
This feature lets you scan originals of different sizes at
the same time; for example, B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size
originals mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size
originals. When scanning the originals, the machine
automatically detects the size of each original.
Originals of mixed widths and sizes can be scanned (A3
and B4, A3 and B5, A4 and B4, A4 and B5, B4 and A4R,
B4 and A5, B5 and A4R, B5 and A5 (11" x 17" and
8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13", 11" x 17" and
5-1/2" x 8-1/2")).

The erase function is used to erase shadow lines on
images produced when scanning thick originals or books
on the document glass.
(2)

(7)

[Slow Scan Mode] key
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals
using the automatic document feeder. This function helps
prevent thin originals from misfeeding.

[Original Count] key
When using the automatic document feeder to scan an
original, you can check whether or not the correct
number of pages were scanned before storing the
document.

6-21

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Checking the image before storing it (Preview)
If you touch the [Preview] key and then start Scan to HDD, the screen below appears.
Before the scanned data is stored, you can check a preview of the scanned image in this screen and return to the Scan
to HDD settings screen to change settings

Preview

Reset
Colour

Function Rev.

Display Rotation

0001

(1)
(1)

Start
Storing

0010

(2)

(3)
(3)

Preview image
This shows an image of the selected file.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to
scroll.)

(2)

Change page keys

(5) (6) (7)

"Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.

(4)

[Start Storing] key
This starts Scan to HDD.

(5)

When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.

(4)

Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
"4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.

• Page number display:This shows the total number of
pages and the current page number.
You can touch the current page
number key and enter a number with
the numeric keys to go to that page
number.

(6)

[Function Rev.] key
Use this to check special mode settings and original
settings.

(7)

[Reset] key
Use this key if you need to change settings after
checking an image or settings. You will return to the
setting screen.

• A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. Differs from the actual storage result.
• Depending on the size of the image, part of the image may be clipped off in the preview screen on the touch panel.

6-22

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

PERFORMING "Scan to HDD"
Place the original.
1

Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.

1

1

(4)
COPY

(2)

(1)

(3)

DOCUMENT
FILING

IMAGE SEND

(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.

Ready to scan to HDD.
Press [Start] to scan original.
File Retrieve
File
Information

Scan to HDD
Original
Exposure
Resolution

2

Colour Mode

Switch to document filing mode and
select Scan to HDD settings.

HDD Status
Scan:

(2) Touch the [Scan to HDD] tab.

Ex Data Access
Auto

Auto

A4

Store:

Auto

If you do not wish to select settings, go to the step 3.

(3) Select the original size, exposure,
resolution, compression ratio, colour mode,
and special modes.

600X600dpi
Mono2

Special Modes

See ""Scan to HDD" SCREEN" (page 6-18).

(4) Touch the [File Information] key.

Preview

The settings are the same as for "File". See "FILE
INFORMATION" (page 6-15).
If the original is 2-sided, be sure to touch the [Original] key and then touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the [2-Sided
Tablet] key as appropriate for the original.

Press the [START] key.

3

Scanning begins.
For the procedure for placing the original, see step 4 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"" (page 6-11).
When Preview is enabled, the preview screen appears.
☞ Checking the image before storing it (Preview) (page 6-22)
A beep will sound to indicate that Scan to HDD is completed.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (

).

When Scan to HDD is performed without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically
assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: HDD_04042010_112030)
Stored to: Main Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.

6-23

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

USING STORED FILES
This section explains how to retrieve a file stored by document filing and print or transmit the file.

SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE
This section explains the basic procedure for retrieving and using a stored file. The screens and procedures differ
depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled.
See the sequence that applies to your situation.
For information on user authentication procedures, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page 1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING
THE MACHINE". For information on enabling user authentication and storing user names, see "User Control" (page
7-49) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
Files stored by document filing can also be retrieved and used from the Web pages. Click [Document Operation] and then
[Document Filing] in the Web page menu, and select the folder that contains the file you wish to use.
You can also show a preview of a stored file in the web pages.

Change the mode.
COPY

File Retrieve

IMAGE SEND

Scan to HDD

Switch to document filing mode.
☞ BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE (page
6-10)

DOCUMENT
FILING

HDD Status

Ex Data Access
Search

Folder Select
Main Folder

Quick File Folder
1

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

User 6

User 7

User 8
User 10

User 9
All Folders

2

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRST

UVWXYZ

6-24

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Select the file that you wish to retrieve.
File Retrieve

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

Ex Data Access
Search

Main Folder
File Name

User Name

Back
Date
1

file-01

Name 1

04/04/2010

file-02

Name 2

04/04/2010

file-03.tiff

Name 3

04/04/2010

file-04

Name 4

04/04/2010

file-05.tiff

Name 5

04/04/2010

Switch Display

All Files

2

• Select the folder in the folder selection screen.
When the folder is selected, the files in the folder will
appear. Select the file that you wish to retrieve.
• Thumbnail images of the stored files can be displayed for
file selection.
☞ FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-27)
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-29)
• The search function can be used to retrieve a file.
☞ SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE (page 6-47)

Multi-File Print

Select the operation.
Job Settings

Cancel

file-01

Name 1

A4

F. Colour

Select the job.

Print

Send

Move

Delete

Property
Change

Image Check

Detail

Select the desired operation and configure settings.
☞ JOB SETTINGS SCREEN (page 6-30)
☞ PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 6-31)
☞ SENDING A STORED FILE (page 6-37)
☞ PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 6-39)
☞ MOVING A STORED FILE (page 6-41)
☞ DELETING A STORED FILE (page 6-43)
☞ CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE (page 6-44)

6-25

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

FOLDER AND FILE SELECTION SCREENS
To use a file stored by document filing, the folder and file must be selected. The folder selection screen and file selection
screen are explained below.

FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN
Two different screens appear depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled on the machine.
When user authentication is not enabled
(1)

(2)

When user authentication is enabled

(3)

(1)
Search

Folder Select
Main Folder

(2)

(3)

My Folder

Folder Select

Quick File Folder

(5)

Main Folder

Quick File Folder

1
User 1

User 2

User 3

1
User 1

User 2

User 4

User 3

User 4

User 5

User 6

User 5

User 6

User 7

User 8

User 7

User 8

User 9

User 10

User 9

All Folders

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRST

2

UVWXYZ

All Folders

[Main Folder] key

(4)

JKLMN

OPQRST

UVWXYZ

Index tabs
All folders appear on the [All Folders] tab.
Touch a tab to display the custom folders whose initials
(set in "Document Filing Control" in the system settings)
match the letters on the tab.

Custom folder keys
The custom folders that have been created using
"Document Filing Control" (page 7-27) in system settings
are displayed. Touch a key to display the files in that
folder.
If a password has been set for a custom folder, a
password entry screen will appear when the folder is
touched. The password must be entered.

(3)

EFGHI

(4)

Touch this key to retrieve a file from the Main folder. The
files in the Main folder will appear.
(2)

2

User 10
ABCD

(4)

(1)

Search

(5)

[My Folder] key
This key appears when user authentication is enabled.
Touch the key to display the file selection screen of "My
Folder".

[Quick File Folder] key
Touch this key to retrieve a file from the Quick File folder.
The files in the Quick File folder will appear.
☞ SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File" (page 6-11)

6-26

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

FILE SELECTION SCREEN
The file selection screen of the Quick File folder, Main folder, and custom folders is explained below.
The file selection screen can be displayed in "List screen" format or "Thumbnail screen" format. (To select the format,
see "(5) [Switch Display] key" below.)
This chapter assumes that the "List screen" format is selected.
(1)

(2)
File Retrieve

Scan to HDD

(3)

HDD Status

Ex Data Access

User Name

Back

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

Ex Data Access
Search

Main Folder

Back

04/04/2010

file-02

Name 2

04/04/2010

file-03.tiff

Name 3

04/04/2010

file-04

Name 4

04/04/2010

file-05.tiff

Name 5

04/04/2010

All Files

1

1

2

2

Display Items
8

Multi-File Print

aaa.tiff

bbb.tiff

ccc

ddd

eee.tiff

fff.tiff

ggg.tiff

hhh.tiff

All Files

Switch Display

Multi-File Print

(5)

(6)

(7)

(6)

[List screen]

[Thumbnail screen]

File keys

(3)

The stored files are displayed. An icon showing which mode
the file was stored from, the file name, the user name, and
the date the file was stored appear in each file key.
When a file is touched, the job setting screen appears.
Job icons

Copy

Internet fax
transmission
Direct SMTP
transmission

Print

Fax
transmission

Scan to
E-mail

Scan to
HDD

Scan to
FTP

Scan to
Desktop

Scan to
Network
Folder

PC-Fax
transmission

PC-I-Fax
transmission

[Back] key
Touch this key to return to the base screen of document
filing mode.
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-26)

(4)

Page key
When multiple pages exist, use this key to enter the
number of a page that you want to display. When the key
is touched, a page number entry screen appears. Enter
the desired page number (4 digits) with the numeric keys.
For example, to display page 3, enter "0003".

(5)

[Switch Display] key
The displayed file keys can be changed by job type and can
be displayed as thumbnail images. The currently selected
job type appears to the right of the [Switch Display] key. [All
Files] is initially selected. When the [Switch Display] key is
touched, the following screen appears.
Switch Display

Thumbnail screen
The first page of thumbnail images of the stored files appears.
The confidential icon ( ) will appear instead of a
thumbnail image for files stored as confidential files.
(2)

Sort Order
Date

Name 1

(5)
(1)

(4)

Date

file-01

Switch Display

(3)
File Retrieve

Search

Main Folder
File Name

(4) (1)

OK

Filter by Job
All Files

Scan

Copy

Internet Fax

Printer

Fax

Scan to HDD

[File Name] key, [User Name] key, [Date] key
Display Style

Use these keys to change the order of display of the file
keys. When one of the keys is touched,
or
appears in the key.
• When
appears in the [File Name] key or [User
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user name
in ascending order.
When
appears in the [Date] key, the files appear in
order from the oldest date.
• When
appears in the [File Name] key or [User
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user name
in descending order.
When
appears in the [Date] key, the files appear in
order from the most recent date.

6-27

List

Thumbnail

If you wish to display only the file keys of a specific job
type, select the job type from the job type display at the
top of the screen.
To display thumbnail images of the files, touch the
[Thumbnail] key. To change from the thumbnail screen to
the list screen, touch the [List] key. When finished, touch
the [OK] key.

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

(6)

[Multi-File Print] key
Touch this to select multiple files in a folder for printing.
☞ MULTI-FILE PRINTING (page 6-33)

(7)

Sort Order / Display Items
This can be used in the thumbnail screen.
The order of display of the file thumbnails can be
changed in "Sort Order".
Select "Date
", "Date
", "File Name
", "File Name
", "User Name
", or "User Name
".
The number of displayed file thumbnails can be changed
in "Display Items".
Select 2 thumbnails or 8 thumbnails.

6-28

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

SELECTING A FILE
This section explains how to select a file to be used.

(2)

Select the folder that contains the file
you wish to use.

(1)

COPY

DOCUMENT
FILING

IMAGE SEND

(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
File Retrieve

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

The folder selection screen will appear. If a different tab
appears, touch the [File Retrieve] tab.
When user authentication is enabled and "My Folder" is
configured in "User List" in the system settings, the
custom folder specified as "My Folder" opens. To display
the folder selection screen, touch the [Back] key.

Ex Data Access
Search

Folder Select
Main Folder

Quick File Folder
1

1

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

User 6

User 7

User 8

User 9

User 10

All Folders

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRST

2

(2) Touch the key of the folder that contains the
desired file.
UVWXYZ

If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
entry screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.

Search

Main Folder
File Name

User Name

Back
Date
1

file-01

Name 1

04/04/2010

file-02

Name 2

04/04/2010

file-03.tiff

Name 3

04/04/2010

file-04

Name 4

04/04/2010

file-05.tiff

Name 5

04/04/2010

Switch Display

All Files

2

Touch the key of the desired file.
If a password is set for the selected file, a password entry
screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and
touch the [OK] key.

Multi-File Print

2
• Touch the [Switch Display] key to display the keys of a particular mode such as copy or scanner mode, or to display
thumbnail images of the files.
The [Switch Display] key allows you to quickly find a file.
• You can touch the [File Name] key, the [User Name] key, or the [Date] key to change the order of display of the files.
• The [Multi-File Print] key can be touched to select multiple files in a folder for printing.
☞ MULTI-FILE PRINTING (page 6-33)
• When "Display only the Files of Logged-in Users" is enabled under System Settings (Administrator): Authority
Group List (Document Filing), only files saved by the currently logged-in user are displayed.

6-29

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

JOB SETTINGS SCREEN
When a file key is touched, the following screen appears. Touch the key of the operation that you wish to perform and
select settings.
(1)
File Retrieve

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

Ex Data Access
Search

Main Folder
File Name

User Name

(2)

Job Settings
Back

Cancel

file-01

Date

Name 1

A4

B/W

Select the job.
1

file-01

Name 1

04/04/2010

file-02

Name 2

04/04/2010

file-03.tiff

Name 3

04/04/2010

file-04

Name 4

04/04/2010

Name 5

04/04/2010

2

file-05.tiff
Switch Display

All Files

(8)

File display

[Cancel] key
(9)

Touch this key to cancel the operation and return to the
file selection screen.
(3)

Delete

Image Check

Detail

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

[Image Check] key

[Detail] key
Touch this key to show detailed information on the
selected file.
When this key is touched, the following screen appears.

[Print] key
Touch this key to print the selected file.
☞ PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 6-31)

(4)

Move

Property
Change

An image of the stored file appears.
☞ CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE (page
6-44)

This shows information on the currently selected file (job
icon, file name, user name, store size, and colour mode).
(2)

Send

Multi-File Print

(3)
(1)

Print

OK

Job Settings / Detail
File Name

[Move] key

file-01

Name 1

Folder:Main Folder

Use this procedure to change the location of a file (move
a file to a different folder).
☞ MOVING A STORED FILE (page 6-41)
(5)

[Send] key
This is used to send a stored file by fax, Internet fax, scan
send, or other method.
☞ SENDING A STORED FILE (page 6-37)

(6)

[Delete] key
Touch this key to delete a file that is no longer needed.
☞ DELETING A STORED FILE (page 6-43)

(7)

[Property Change] key
Use this key to change the property ("Sharing", "Protect",
or "Confidential") of a stored file.
☞ PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 6-39)

6-30

Size:A4

Resolution:600X600dpi

Date:04/04/2010 11:20

Colour / B/W:

Data Size:40B

Pages:10

Document
Style:

Special
Modes:

Output:

File Type:

B/W
Send Allowed Mode

If you wish to change the file name, touch the [File Name]
key in this screen.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter the desired file
name.
The
key appears when a special mode is selected.
Touch the
key to display the special mode selection
confirmation screen.

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

PRINTING A STORED FILE
A file stored using document filing can be retrieved and printed when needed. The settings used when the file was
stored are also stored, and thus the file can be printed again using those settings. The file can also be modified before
printing by changing the print settings.
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-29)

Job Settings

Cancel

file-01

Name 1

A4

Touch the [Print] key.

B/W

Select the job.

1

Print

Send

Move

Delete

Property
Change

Image Check

Detail

Job Settings / Print
file-01

Cancel
Name 1

A4

B/W

Paper Select

2

Auto

Number of Prints

1

(1

999)

Print and Delete the Data

Output
Print and Save the Data
2-Sided
Special Modes

Touch the [Print and Delete the Data] key
or the [Print and Save the Data] key.
If the [Print and Delete the Data] key is touched, the files will be
automatically deleted after printing.
If the [Print and Save the Data] key is touched, the files will be
saved after printing.
Output settings, 2-sided printing, special modes, the number of
copies, and other settings can be selected. For more
information, see "PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN" (page 6-32).

• When a long size document is stored from Scan to HDD or scan mode, the file cannot be printed. A file stored from scan
mode that included fax mode or Internet fax mode destinations in a broadcast transmission can be printed.
• If print settings are changed when a stored file is printed, the only changed setting that can be stored is the number of
copies.
• The printing speed may be somewhat slow depending on the resolution and exposure mode settings of the stored file.

6-31

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN
Cancel

Job Settings / Print
file-01

Name 1

A4

B/W

Paper Select

(1)

Auto

1
(2)
(3)
(4)

(1)

(5)

Number of Prints
(1

999)

Output

(5)

[Paper Select] key

(7)

key
Use these keys to set the number of copies. The number
of copies can also be selected by directly touching the
numeric display and changing the number with the
numeric keys.

[Output] key

(6)

[2-Sided] key
Use this key to select the orientation of the image on the
reverse side of the paper for 2-sided printing. To have the
front and back images oriented in the same direction,
touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key. To have the front and
back images oriented opposite to each other, touch the
[2-Sided Tablet] key. Note that the size and orientation of
the saved image may cause these keys to have the
opposite effect. If neither of these keys is selected
(neither is highlighted), 1-sided printing will take place.

(4)

Print and Save the Data

Special Modes

Use this key to select Sort, Group or Staple Sort, and to
select the output tray.
(3)

(6)

2-Sided

Use this key to set the paper size.
(2)

Print and Delete the Data

[Print and Delete the Data] key
Printing begins when this key is touched. When printing
is finished, the file will be automatically deleted.

(7)

[Print and Save the Data] key
Printing begins when this key is touched. The file will not
be deleted after printing.

[Special Modes] key
Touch this key to select "Margin Shift", "Pamphlet Style",
"2in1 / 4in1", "Tandem Print", or "Stamp".
This key does not appear if the file was saved from print
mode.

6-32

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

MULTI-FILE PRINTING
Multiple files in a folder can be selected for printing.

Search

Main Folder
File Name

User Name

Touch the [Multi-File Print] key.

Back

To select files of a particular job type, touch the [Switch
Display] key, select the job type from the screen that appears,
and touch the [OK] key.
Touch the [Switch Display] key to show only files of a selected
job type.

Date
1

1

file-01

Name 1

04/04/2010

file-02

Name 2

04/04/2010

file-03

Name 3

04/04/2010

file-04

Name 4

04/04/2010

file-05

Name 5

04/04/2010

Switch Display

Multi-File Print

All Files

Multi-File Print

Select All

File Name

2

OK

User Name

Select the keys of the files that you wish
to print.

Back
Date
1

file-01

Name 1

04/04/2010

file-02

Name 2

04/04/2010

file-03

Name 3

04/04/2010

file-04

Name 4

04/04/2010

file-05

Name 5

04/04/2010

Switch Display

All Files

Touch the keys of the files that you wish to print. Touched file
keys will be highlighted to indicate that they have been
selected.
To cancel the selection of a file, touch the highlighted file key so
that it is no longer highlighted.
To select all displayed file keys except those of confidential
files, touch the [Select All] key.
The [Batch Print] key can be used to print all files of a particular
user in a folder or all files that have the same password in a
folder. For more information, see "Batch printing" (page 6-35).

2

Batch Print

2
• Multi-file printing of confidential files is not possible.

• A file in the currently selected folder cannot be selected simultaneously with a file in a different folder.
• If the job type is changed with the [Switch Display] key or the screen is changed with the [Back] key while a file is
selected, the selection of the file will be cancelled.
• When the [Select All] key is touched, it will change into the [Cancel All] key. To cancel the selection of all files that
was made with the [Select All] key, touch the [Cancel All] key.
• If all files are selected without using the [Select All] key, the key will not change into the [Cancel All] key. If selection
of all files is cancelled without using the [Cancel All] key, the key will remain the [Cancel All] key.

Multi-File Print

Select All

File Name

User Name

OK

Back
Date
1

3

file-01

Name 1

04/04/2010

file-02

Name 2

04/04/2010

file-03

Name 3

04/04/2010

file-04

Name 4

04/04/2010

file-05

Name 5

04/04/2010

Switch Display

All Files

Touch the [OK] key
The selected file is entered and the screen changes to the print
screen.

2

Batch Print

6-33

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

(1)

Printing a selected file.

(2) (3)
Cancel

Job Settings / Print
Number of Selected Files: 5

Number of Prints

1

(1

999)

Print and Delete the Data

Print and Save the Data
Apply the Number from Stored Setting of
Each Job.

4

The number of selected files appears in the number of selected
files display.
If you wish to use the number of copies that was stored with the
file, go to step (3).

(1) Touch the [Apply the Number from Stored
Setting of Each Job] checkbox so that it is
not selected ( ).
(2) Set the number of copies with the
keys.
You can also directly touch the numeric display and
change the number with the numeric keys.

(3) Touch the [Print and Delete the Data] key or
the [Print and Save the Data] key.
If the [Print and Delete the Data] key is touched, the files
will be automatically deleted after printing.
If the [Print and Save the Data] key is touched, the files
will be saved after printing.

6-34

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Batch printing
All files in a folder that have the same user name and password can be printed at once. When the [Multi-File Print] key is
touched, it changes into the [Batch Print] key.

Select All

Multi-File Print
File Name

OK

User Name

Touch the [Batch Print] key.

Back
Date
1

1

file-01

Name 1

04/04/2010

file-02

Name 2

04/04/2010

file-03

Name 3

04/04/2010

file-04

Name 4

04/04/2010

file-05

Name 5

04/04/2010

All Files

Switch Display

Batch Print

Touch the [User Name] key.

Cancel

Batch Print
User 1/

2

When user authentication is used, the user name that was used
for login is automatically selected.
When "Display only the Files of Logged-in Users" is enabled
under System Settings (Administrator): Authority Group List
(Document Filing), the user name of the currently logged-in
user is selected and other user names cannot be selected.

All Files

User Name

2

Password

Delete the
Data

Print and Delete the Data

Print and Save the Data

(B)(D)

(C)

Select the user name.

(A)
Cancel

User Name
6

12

Default User
Direct Entry

User

3

OK

18
User Unknown

All Users

ABC

Change PRT.No.

1

Name 3

Name 4

Name 5

Name 6

Name 7

Name 8

Name 9

Name 10

Name 11

Name 12

2

All

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

There are four ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
The user name can be selected from the factory stored
users.
(C) Touch the
key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----] appears in
the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.

When [Selection of [All Users] is not allowed.] checkbox and [Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed.] checkbox
are disabled in the system settings (administrator), the [All Users] key and [User Unknown] key can be selected.
The [All Users] key can be touched to select all files in the folder (the files of all users).
The [User Unknown] key can be touched to select all files in the folder that do not have a user name.

6-35

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Cancel

Batch Print
User 1/

All Files

User Name

4

Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and
touch the [OK] key. Only files that have the same password will
be selected.
If you do not wish to enter a password, go to the next step.

Name 1

Password

Delete the
Data

Print and Delete the Data

Print and Save the Data

User 1/

Change PRT.No.

Cancel

Batch Print
All Files

User Name
Password

Print and Delete the Data

Print and Save the Data

5

To set the number of copies, touch the
[Change PRT.No.] key.
If you wish to use the number of copies stored with each file, go
to step 6.

Name 1

Delete the
Data

If a password has been established,
touch the [Password] key.

Change PRT.No.

Cancel

Batch Print
Cancel

Change Print Number

1

(1

OK

(1) Touch the [Apply the Number from Stored
Setting of Each Job] checkbox so that it is
not selected ( ).
(2) Set the number of copies with the
keys.

999)

You can also directly touch the numeric display and
change the number with the numeric keys.

Apply the Number from Stored Setting of
Each Job.

(3) Touch the [OK] key.
(1)

Cancel

Batch Print
User 1/

(2) (3)

All Files

User Name

Name 1

Password

6

Delete the
Data

Print and Delete the Data

Print and Save the Data

Change PRT.No.

Touch the [Print and Delete the Data] key
or the [Print and Save the Data] key.
If the [Print and Delete the Data] key is touched, the files will be
automatically deleted after printing.
If the [Print and Save the Data] key is touched, the files will be
saved after printing.
If there are no files that match the search conditions, you will
return to the file list screen.

All files that match the current search conditions can be deleted by touching the [Delete the Data] key.

6-36

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

SENDING A STORED FILE
A file stored by document filing can be retrieved and transmitted whenever needed. The settings used when the file was
stored are also stored, and thus the file can be transmitted using those settings. If needed, you can also change the
transmission settings to modify the retrieved file.
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-29)

Job Settings

Cancel

file-01

Name 1

A4

Touch the [Send] key.

F. Colour

Select the job.

1

Print

Send

Move

Delete

Property
Change

Image Check

Detail

Select transmission settings.

Address Book
Address Entry
Send Settings

2

Name 1

file-01
F. Colour

Resolution

200X200dpi

File Format

PDF

For information on the settings, see "SEND SETTINGS
SCREEN" (page 6-38).
PDF

Special Modes

B/W Send

3

Press the [START] key.

• A file saved in black and white or greyscale cannot be transmitted in colour.
• A stored print job cannot be transmitted.
• These transmission methods require installation of the corresponding options.
• If any of the following special modes were included in the saved file, the file cannot be transmitted.
"Pamphlet Copy", "Covers/Inserts", "Photo Repeat", "Multi-Page Enlargement", "Multi Shot" for copying.
• If any of the following special modes were included in the saved file, the file can be transmitted but the special modes will
not be executed.
"Margin Shift", "Transparency Inserts", "Book Copy", "Tab Copy", "Stamp", "Sharpness", "Centring"
• Depending on the reduction or enlargement ratio used when storing a file, it may not be possible to send the stored file
using a selected resolution setting. In this event, try changing the resolution.
However, when sending a stored file by Internet fax, transmission may not be possible even if the resolution is changed.
• A scanned file that was saved in [High Capacity Mode] cannot be transmitted.

6-37

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

SEND SETTINGS SCREEN
The keys that appear in the send settings are explained below. For more information on each of the settings, see "BASE
SCREEN OF FAX MODE" (page 4-7) in "4. FACSIMILE" and "BASE SCREEN" (page 5-9) in "5. SCANNER /
INTERNET FAX".
Example of scan mode
(6)
Ready to send.

(1)
(2)

Scan

Cancel

Internet Fax

(7)

Fax

Address Book

(3)

Address Entry

(4)

Send Settings

Name 1

file-01
F. Colour

Resolution

200X200dpi

File Format

PDF

(8)

PDF

(9)

Special Modes

(5)
(1)

B/W Send

(9)

Send mode tabs
Touch the appropriate tab to select fax mode, scan
mode, Internet fax mode, etc.

(2)

[Address Entry] key or [Sub Address] key
Use this key to directly enter an address when sending a
file in scan mode or Internet Fax mode.
In fax mode this appears as the "Sub Address" key. Use
this key to enter a sub-address and password for F-code
communication.

(4)

[Send Settings] key
This key appears in scan mode and Internet fax mode.
Touch the key to enter a subject and a file name when
performing a transmission. In scan mode, a sender can
also be specified.

(5)

key
The 4-digit search number that was assigned to a
one-touch key or group key when the key was stored can
be entered to specify a destination.

(6)

[Next Address] key
This key appears when at least one address has been
entered. Use this key when you are sending a file to
multiple destinations.

(7)

[Cancel] key
This returns you to the job settings screen.

(8)

File name / User name display

Any of these keys can be touched to change the
corresponding settings of the file to be sent. The
settings that can be selected vary by mode.
• Scan mode
[Resolution] key
Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
cannot be selected.
[File Format] key
This lets you select the file type, compression ratio,
and colour mode.
[Special Modes] key
This displays the [Timer] key.
• Internet fax mode
[Resolution] key
Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
cannot be selected.
[File Format] key
Use this to select the file type and compression ratio.
[Special Modes] key
This displays the [Timer] and [Transaction Report]
keys.
• Fax mode
[Resolution] key
Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
cannot be selected.
[Special Modes] key
This displays the [Timer], [Own Name Select], and
[Transaction Report] keys.

[Address Book] key
Touch this key to display the destinations stored in the
address book.

(3)

(10)

(10) [B/W Send] checkbox
Select this checkbox if the file was saved in colour and
you wish to send it in black & white.
When the file is saved in black & white, this checkbox
does not appear.

This shows the icon of the file to be sent, the file name,
the user name, and the colour mode (colour/black &
white).

6-38

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES
FILE PROPERTIES
A protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being moved,
or automatically or manually deleted.
Three properties are available for saved files: [Sharing], [Protect], and [Confidential]. When saved with the [Sharing]
property, a file is not protected. When saved with the [Protect] or [Confidential] property, a file is protected.
Files saved to the Quick File folder are all saved as [Sharing] files. When a file is saved to the Main folder or a custom
folder, [Sharing] or [Confidential] can be selected.
Sharing

A [Sharing] file can be changed to [Protect] or [Confidential] using [Property Change] in the Job Settings.

Protect

"Protect" prevents a file from being moved or deleted. A password cannot be established. The
appears with the mode icon in the file key of a protected file.

icon

To protect a "Confidential" file, a password is set. (The password must be entered to retrieve the file.) The
icon appears with the mode icon in the file key of a confidential file.

Confidential

CHANGING THE PROPERTY
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-29)

Job Settings

Cancel

file-01

Name 1

A4

Touch the [Property Change] key.

B/W

Select the job.

1

Property
Change

Print

Send

Move

Delete

Image Check

Detail

(1)

(2)

Job Settings / Property Change
file-01

2

Cancel
Name 1

Sharing

Confidential

Protect

Password

A4

OK

Select the property.
(1) Touch the key of the desired property.
When the [Confidential] key is touched, the [Password]
key can be touched.
Touch the [Password] key, enter a password (5 to 8 digits)
with the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key.

B/W

(2) Touch the [OK] key.

6-39

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Restrictions on changing the property
• A file that is set to "Sharing" can be changed to "Protect" or "Confidential". However, a "Sharing" file that is saved in the
Quick File folder can only be changed to "Protect".
• A file that is set to "Protect" can be changed to "Sharing" or "Confidential". However, a "Protect" file that is saved in the
Quick File folder can only be changed to "Sharing".
• A file that is saved in the Quick File folder cannot be changed to "Confidential". If the file is moved to the Main folder or a
custom folder, the property can be changed to "Confidential".
• Two properties cannot be selected for a single file.

6-40

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

MOVING A STORED FILE
Use this procedure to change the location of a file (move a file to a different folder).
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.

☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-29)

Job Settings

Touch the [Move] key.

Cancel

file-01

Name 1

A4

B/W

Select the job.

1

Print

Send

Move

Delete

Property
Change

Image Check

Detail

Touch the [Move to:] key.

Cancel

Job Settings / Move
file-01

Name 1

A4

B/W

Select the folder the file is moved to.

File Name

file-01

Move to:

2

Move

• A file cannot be moved to the Quick File Folder. With this procedure, the original name is changed and the file is
moved to the specified folder. (Unlike the "Save As" command on a computer, the file is not copied to the specified
folder with the original file remaining in the original location.)
• To change the file name, touch the [File Name] key.

(1)

Select the destination folder.

(2)

(1) Touch the key of the folder to which you
want to move the file.

OK

Job Settings / Move

Main Folder
User 1

3

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

User 6

User 7

User 8

User 9

User 10

All Folders

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRST

If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
entry screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.

1
2

(2) Touch the [OK] key.
UVWXYZ

The above screen shows the custom folders as an
example.

6-41

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Cancel

Job Settings / Move
file-01

Name 1

A4

Touch the [Move] key.

Mono2

Select the folder the file is moved to.

4

File Name

file-01

Move to:

User 2

Move

A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be moved. To move a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or
"Confidential".

6-42

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

DELETING A STORED FILE
Stored files that are no longer needed can be deleted.
Select the file that you wish to delete and touch the [Delete] key.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-29)

Job Settings

Cancel

file-01

Name 1

A4

Touch the [Delete] key.

B/W

Select the job.

1

Print

Send

Move

Delete

Property
Change

Image Check

Detail

Check the file and then touch the [Yes]
key.

Delete the file data?

2

Name 1
file-01

No

Yes

A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be deleted. To delete a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or
"Confidential".

6-43

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE
You can check an image of a file stored using document filing.
Select the desired file and touch the [Image Check] key.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 6-29)

Depending on the size of the image, part of the image may be clipped off in the image check screen on the touch panel.

Job Settings

Touch the [Image Check] key.

Cancel

file-01

Name 1

A4

B/W

Select the job.

1

Print

Send

Move

Delete

Property
Change

Image Check

Detail

file-01

Check the image of the file.

Back

Image Check
Name 1

2

A4

Mono2

For information on each of the items, see "IMAGE CHECK
SCREEN" (page 6-45).

Display Rotation

0001 /0010

Detail

6-44

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

IMAGE CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the image check screen.
Image Check
file-01

Back
A4

Name 1

B/W

Display Rotation

0001

(1)
(1)

(2)

Detail

0010

(3)

(4)
(4)

Information display

Preview image
This shows an image of the selected file.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the
keys to
scroll.)

(3)

"Display Rotation" key

A print file cannot be rotated.
(5)

[Detail] key
This shows the detailed information screen.
☞ FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-27)

Change page keys
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
•
keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•
keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.

(6)

This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.

This shows information on the displayed image.
(2)

(5)

(6)

Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
"4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.

• For a print file, only an image of the first page of the
file is shown; the displayed page cannot be
changed.
• When the scan data of a long original is displayed,
the edge of the image may be cut off.

A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.

6-45

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE
JOB STATUS SCREEN
Files stored using File and Quick File appear as keys in the job status complete screen.
This is convenient when you need to quickly print the saved data of a copy job or quickly send a saved fax to another
destination.

1
Print Job
Job Queue

2

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

JOB STATUS

Scan to

Fax Job

Sets / Progress

Internet Fax
Status

Spool

1

Computer01

002/001

Printing

2

0312345678

002/000

Waiting

3

0312345678

002/000

Waiting

4

Copy

002/000

Waiting

Touch the job status selector key so that
[Complete] is highlighted.

Job Queue
1

Complete

1

Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete

Print Job
Jobs Completed

Scan to
Set Time

Fax Job
Sets

Internet Fax
Status

Computer02

11:00 04/04 001/001

OK

Computer03

10:33 04/04 010/010

OK

Computer04

10:31 04/04 013/013

OK

file-01

10:30 04/04 010/010

OK

Copy

10:13 04/04 001/001

OK

Copy

10:03 04/04 001/001

OK

Computer05

10:01 04/04 003/003

OK

Copy

10:00 04/04 010/010

OK

Spool

Select the desired file in the completed
jobs.

Job Queue
1

Complete

1

(1) Touch the key of the desired file.
(2) Touch the [Call] key.
The job settings screen appears.
Select and perform the desired operation.
☞ JOB SETTINGS SCREEN (page 6-30)
☞ PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 6-31)
☞ SENDING A STORED FILE (page 6-37)
☞ PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 6-39)
☞ MOVING A STORED FILE (page 6-41)
☞ DELETING A STORED FILE (page 6-43)
☞ CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE (page
6-44)

Detail

(1)

Call

(2)

3

• To view information on a file, select the file and then touch the [Detail] key.
• If user authentication is enabled, and the [Call] key is touched when no users are logged in, the user authentication
screen will appear to let you log in.
• When "Display only the Files of Logged-in Users" is enabled under System Settings (Administrator): Authority
Group List (Document Filing), it is not possible to reuse a file if its user name does not match the user name of the
logged-in user.

6-46

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE
When there are many stored files, it may take time to find a file. The search function of document filing mode can be
used to find a file quickly.
This section explains how to search for a file or folder on the machine's hard drive.
Searching is possible even when you only know part of the file name or folder name. A folder can also be specified as a
search range.
Example: Only part of a file name is known: "Meeting"

[Hard drive]
Regular meeting Text 1
For
meetings

For individuals Quick File

Main

For meetings

When you search
using "Meeting"...

(1)
COPY

IMAGE SEND

Meeting
graphs

All folders and files that
include "Meeting" will be
listed.

Meeting graphs

Report

Regular
meeting

[Search results]

Open the file search screen.

(2)

(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.

DOCUMENT
FILING

(2) Touch the [Search] key.
File Retrieve

Scan to HDD

HDD Status

Ex Data Access

Folder Select

1

Search

Main Folder

Quick File Folder
1

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

User 6

User 7

User 8
User 10

User 9
All Folders

2

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRST

UVWXYZ

6-47

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Cancel

Search

Touch the [User Name] key or the [File
or Folder Name] key.

Start Search

If you know the user name, touch the [User Name] key and go
to "Using the user name to search" in step 3.
If you know the file name, touch the [File or Folder Name] key
and go to "Using the file name or folder name to search" in step
3.
When "Display only the Files of Logged-in Users" is enabled
under System Settings (Administrator): Authority Group List
(Document Filing), the user name of the currently logged-in
user is selected and other user names cannot be selected.

User Name
File or Folder Name

2

Password

(B)(D)

(C)

Using the user name to search

(A)
Cancel

User Name
6

12

18
Name 2

Name 1

Default User
Direct Entry

ABC
User

3

OK

1

Name 3

Name 4

Name 5

Name 6

Name 7

Name 8

Name 9

Name 10

Name 11

Name 12

2

All

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

There are four ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
The user name can be selected from the factory stored
users.
(C) Touch the
key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----] appears in
the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
Searching is possible even if you only enter the first several
letters of the user name.
After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.
After the user name is selected, the [Password] key can be
touched. To search for files of the selected user name that
have a certain password, touch the [Password] key and enter
the password.
(It is not possible to search using a password only.)

Using the file name or folder name to
search
Enter the file name or folder name in the text entry screen that
appears and touch the [OK] key.

6-48

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Search

User Name

Cancel

Start Search

Touch the [Start Search] key.
The search results will appear in a screen similar to the
following screen. A list of the files that match your search
criteria will appear. Select the desired file from the list.
The job settings screen will appear.

Name 1

File or Folder Name

file-01

Password
Cancel

Search
File or Folder Name
file-01

User Name
Name 1

Search Again
Date
04/04/2010
1
1

4
To return to the base screen of document filing mode,
touch the [Cancel] key.
To return to the file search screen, touch the [Search
Again] key.
• When you search using [File or Folder Name], custom folders that match the search characters will also appear in
the list. When a folder key is touched, a list of the files in the folder appears. Touch the desired file in the list.
• You can also use the Web pages to search for a file. Click [Document Operations], [Document Filing], and then
[Search] in the Web page menu.

6-49

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

Searching within a folder
You can specify a folder to restrict the search range to that folder. To search within a specified folder, follow the steps
below.

(2)
COPY

File Retrieve

(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.

DOCUMENT
FILING

IMAGE SEND

Scan to HDD

Open the folder that you wish to search.

(1)

HDD Status

Search

Folder Select

1

(2) Touch the key of the folder that you wish to
search.

Ex Data Access

Main Folder

If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
entry screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.

Quick File Folder
1

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

User 6

User 7

User 8
User 10

User 9
All Folders

2

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRST

UVWXYZ

Search

Main Folder
File Name

User Name

Back

Touch the [Search] key.

Date
1

2

file-01

Name 1

04/04/2010

file-02

Name 2

04/04/2010

file-03.tiff

Name 3

04/04/2010

file-04

Name 4

04/04/2010

file-05.tiff

Name 5

04/04/2010

Switch Display

Cancel

User Name
File or Folder Name

3

Multi-File Print

All Files

Search

Password
Search within Current Folder

2

Start Search

Touch the [User Name] key or the [File
or Folder Name] key.
If you know the user name, touch the [User Name] key and go
to "Using the user name to search" in step 4.
If you know the file name, touch the [File or Folder Name] key
and go to "Using the file name or folder name to search" in step
4.
When "Display only the Files of Logged-in Users" is enabled
under System Settings (Administrator): Authority Group List
(Document Filing), the user name of the currently logged-in
user is selected and other user names cannot be selected.

6-50

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

(B)(D)

(C)

Using the user name to search

(A)
Cancel

User Name
6

12

18
Name 2

Name 1

Default User
Direct Entry

ABC
User

4

OK

1

Name 3

Name 4

Name 5

Name 6

Name 7

Name 8

Name 9

Name 10

Name 11

Name 12

2

All

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

There are four ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
The user name can be selected from the factory stored
users.
(C) Touch the
key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [----] appears in
the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
Searching is possible even if you only enter the first several
letters of the user name.
After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.
After the user name is selected, the [Password] key can be
touched. To search for files of the selected user name that
have a certain password, touch the [Password] key and enter
the password.
(It is not possible to search using a password only.)

Using the file name or folder name to
search
Enter the file name in the text entry screen that appears and
touch the [OK] key.

6-51

Contents

DOCUMENT FILING

(1)

(2)
Cancel

Search

User Name

Start Search

Start searching.
(1) Touch the [Search within Current Folder]
checkbox so that it is selected
.
To search only files that are in the current folder, select
the [Search within Current Folder] checkbox
.
Use this method to search for a file in a confidential folder.

Name 1

File or Folder Name

file-01

Password
Search within Current Folder

(2) Touch the [Start Search] key.
The search results will appear in a screen similar to the
following screen. A list of the files that match your search
criteria will appear. Select the desired file from the list.
The job settings screen will appear.

5

Cancel

Search
File or Folder Name
file-01

User Name
Name 1

Search Again
Date
04/04/2010
1
1

To return to the base screen of document filing mode,
touch the [Cancel] key.
To return to the file search screen, touch the [Search
Again] key.

6-52

Contents

CHAPTER 7
SYSTEM SETTINGS
This chapter explains the system settings, which are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit the aims and
needs of your workplace. The current selections that have been made for the settings can be viewed or printed out.
To quickly check where a setting is located in the system settings menu, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS MENU" (page
7-117), "Accessing the System Settings (General)" (page 7-5), or "Accessing the System Settings (Administrator)" (page
7-29).
For the system settings for the fax function, see "System Settings for Fax (General) List" (page 7-102) and "System
Settings for Fax (Administrator) List" (page 7-108).

SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Accessing the System Settings (Administrator). . . 7-29
• When User Authentication is not Enabled . . . . 7-29
• When User Authentication is Enabled . . . . . . . 7-30

System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Common Operation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

System Settings (Administrator) List . . . . . . . . . 7-32

SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)

User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• User Authentication Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Page Limit Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Authority Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Favourite Operation Group List . . . . . . . . . . . .
• User Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessing the System Settings (General) . . . . . . 7-5
System Settings (General) List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Total Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Job Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Device Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
• Clock Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
• Keyboard Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Energy Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63

List Print (User) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Paper Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Paper Type Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Auto Tray Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Custom Size Registration (Bypass) . . . . . . . . .

7-13
7-13
7-15
7-15
7-16

Address Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Custom Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-17
7-17
7-21
7-22

Fax Data Receive/Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
• I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Printer Condition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Printer Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PCL Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PostScript Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-49
7-49
7-50
7-53
7-55
7-56
7-59
7-61
7-62

7-24
7-24
7-25
7-26

Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MFP Display Pattern Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Customize Key Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Home Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Preview Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Remote Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Soft Keyboard Template Setting. . . . . . . . . . . .

7-64
7-64
7-66
7-66
7-66
7-68
7-68
7-68

Device Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Original Size Detector Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Disabling of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Fusing Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-69
7-69
7-71
7-72
7-72

Copy Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
• Initial Status Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74

Document Filing Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
USB-Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
• Amend User Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

7-1

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
• Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
• Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
Image Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-79
7-79
7-83
7-85

Document Filing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Document Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Deletion of File Settings. . . . . . . . . .

7-89
7-89
7-91
7-91

List Print (Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
Enable/Disable Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
Change Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
Product Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99
Storing/Calling of System Settings . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Sharp OSA Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101

SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX
System Settings for Fax (General) List . . . . . . . 7-102
Address Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
• Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
• F-Code Memory Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105
Fax Data Receive/Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-107
• Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-107
System Settings for Fax (Administrator) List . . 7-108
Image Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-110
• Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-110
SYSTEM SETTINGS MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-117

7-2

SYSTEM SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETTINGS
System Settings
The system settings are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit the aims and needs of your workplace. The
system settings are also used to display or print out the current settings and status of the machine. The system settings
allow you to make the machine easier to use.
The system settings consist of settings that are used by general users, and settings that can only be configured by an
administrator of the machine. These two groups of settings are distinguished in this manual as follows.
System Settings (General)

System Settings (Administrator) *Login Required

System settings that can be configured by general users
(including the administrator). For example, the following
settings can be configured:
•
•
•
•
•
•

System settings that can be configured by the administrator.
To configure these settings, login as an administrator is
required. For example, the following settings can be
configured:

Date and time settings
Paper tray settings (paper size and paper type)
Storing destinations for the fax and scanner functions
Settings related to the printer function
Creating folders for document filing
Displaying the number of pages printed, scanned, and
faxed.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

For more information, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)"
(page 7-5).

Storing users of the machine
Energy save settings
Settings related to the operation panel
Settings for peripheral devices installed on the machine.
Settings related to the copy function
Network connection settings
Transmission/reception settings for faxes and scanned
images
• Advanced settings for the document filing function
For more information, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS
(ADMINISTRATOR)" (page 7-29).

Settings for general users
Settings for administrators

• Administrator password
To maintain security, the administrator of the machine should promptly change the password after the machine is
purchased. (For the factory default administrator password, see "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the
Start Guide.) To change the password, see "Change Administrator Password" (page 7-97).
*To ensure a high level of security, change the password at regular intervals.
• The above groupings of "General" and "Administrator" are used as a convenient means of clarifying the functions of the
settings. These groupings do not appear in the touch panel.
• For fax settings, see "SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 7-102).
• Web pages
The system settings can also be configured from the Web pages. To configure the system settings from the Web pages,
click [System Settings] in the Web page menu.
In addition to the system settings, network and security settings can also be configured in the Web pages. For information
on the settings, see Help in the Web pages.

7-3

Contents

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Common Operation Methods
This section explains special operation methods that are common to all system settings.
Be sure to read this section, as the information is omitted in the explanations of some of the individual settings.

Example: Address book screen
Add New

(1)

Sort Address

(5)

All

AAA AAA
Index Switch

(4)

Back

Address Book

System Settings
Address Control
Address Type:

BBB BBB

1

CCC CCC

DDD DDD

2

EEE EEE

FFF FFF

GGG GGG

HHH HHH

III III

JJJ JJJ

Cancel

OK

(9)
(10)

E-mail

(6)

ABC

Search Number:

(7)

Sorting Order
Search Number

(1-999)
Address Name (Required):

(11)

Initial (Optional):
Key Name:

(2)
(3)

(1)

Freq.

ABCD

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

QRSTU

VWXYZ

etc.

Custom Index:

(8)

(7)

"Sort"

(8)

Index keys

(9)

(Search number entry box)

(10) [OK] key

[Back] key

Touch this to store the current settings.

Returns you to the previous screen.
(5)

(11) Scroll bar

Select box

Use this to scroll the screen up and down.
Touch the bar and slide it up or down to move the screen.
You can also move the screen up and down with the
keys.

Touch
to display a list of the items that can be
selected. Touch an item in the list to select it.
(6)

[Cancel] key
This cancels a setting and returns you to the previous
screen.

To search for an address, touch
and enter a search
number.
When a user is searched for, the icon changes to
.
(4)

Checkbox
This switches between
and
each time you touch
it. To enable the corresponding setting, touch the
checkbox so that a checkmark appears
. To disable
the setting, clear the checkmark
.
Radio buttons (
) are also used to select settings in
this way. (However, radio buttons are used to select a
single item out of several.)

Touch an index key to display the corresponding
destinations. The index keys that appear vary depending
on the "Sort" setting.
(3)

Text box
Touch this box to open a text entry screen. When you
have finished entering text in the screen, the text will
appear in the text box.

Use this to select the method of displaying destinations
and the index type.
Example: In the "Address Book" screen, the display can
be switched between the following three methods:
• Alphabetical/User index
• Display by mode
• Ascending/Descending/Search Number order
(2)

User 1

Register this Address to be added to the [Frequent Use] index.

Text box (numerical)
Touch this box to enter a number. Numbers are entered
with the numeric keys.
If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
) to
clear the incorrect number.

7-4

Contents

SYSTEM SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETTINGS (GE